Authors:

David Tynan
Natalie Caruso
John Dowsey
Peter Flynn
Dean Lamson
Philip Swedosh
•

•
Introduction

There are two external examinations in the General Mathematics Course (formerly the Further Mathematics
Course), and both are one-and-a-half hours in duration. For each exam, a single bound reference (of notes)
and an approved calculator may be used. The first examination is a multiple-choice paper, while the second
examination is a one- and-a-half hour extended-answer paper.

Revision and preparation for the end-of-year examinations is essential. A selection of relevant material taken
from past papers is provided for you here along with new content. The authors have collated and compiled
this material in a way that they feel will be most useful for the new General Mathematics Course.

The examination material is presented by topics in this book. The topics are broken up in such a way in the
actual examinations. The four topics in the General Mathematics Course are: Data analysis, Recursion and
financial modelling, Matrices, and Networks and decision mathematics.

The multiple-choice questions will give you plenty of focus for improving examination technique. For each
multiple-choice question there are five alternatives, A to E. When answering multiple-choice questions, a
correct answer scores 1 mark and an incorrect answer scores 0. If two letters are marked for the one question,
no credit will be given. You are advised to answer all the multiple-choice questions in the examination.

There are some good techniques for answering multiple-choice questions. In some cases, a ‘process of
elimination’ is the best path to follow. In other cases, a separate solution followed by a search for the correct
answer is best. In others, a combination of both techniques is needed. Be assured that in each multiple-choice
question, the wrong alternatives have been very skilfully worked out, so guessing is not a viable strategy.

The second examination contains written-response questions. Answer these questions with care and neatness.
Use words as well as numbers and explain what you are doing. On the assumption that you may make an
error somewhere, seek the best marks for what you have done. Use units where appropriate and watch for
order of accuracy requirements! Spread your work out, number your questions and parts clearly and use your
best writing.

The answers given here are guideline answers only. They were written by the authors and in no way represent
‘official’ answers, which may be found on the VCAA website. Every attempt has been made to ensure their
accuracy.

VCAA Statistics

In this edition, VCAA statistics that are provided in the various Examiners’ Reports have been added where
available to give you extra information on question difficulty. The following explains how to interpret the
included statistics.

• Multiple-choice questions: the percentage of correct responses for each question is shown like this:
[VCAA 2021 FM (76%)]

• Written-response questions: the average (mean) mark for each part of a question is shown either:

◦ like this: [3 marks (1.9)] which indicates that the average for that part was 1.9 out of 3 marks;
 ◦ or like this: [2 + 1 = 3 marks (1.5, 0.3)] which indicates that the 2-mark part had an average of
1.5 and the 1-mark part had an average of 0.3.

General Mathematics formulas

Data analysis
ˉ
standardised score z= x−x
sx

lower and upper fence in a boxplot lower Q1 − 1.5 × IQR upper Q3 + 1.5 × IQR
s
least squares line of best fit y = a + bx, where b = r sxy and a = yˉ − bx
ˉ
residual value residual value = actual value – predicted value
actual figure
seasonal index seasonal index = deseasonalised figure

Recursion and financial modelling

first-order linear recurrence relation u0 = a, un+1 = Run + d

n
effective rate of interest for a compound interest loan or reff ective = [(1 + r
100n ) − 1] ×
investment 100%

Matrices

A=[ ],
a b a b
determinant of a 2 × 2 matrix det A = = ad − bc
c d c d
 d −b
inverse of a 2 × 2 matrix A−1 = 1
[ ], where det A 
=0
det A −c a
recurrence relation S0 = initial state, Sn+1 = T Sn + B
Leslie matrix recurrence relation S0 = initial state, Sn+1 = L Sn

Networks and decision mathematics

Euler’s formula v+f =e+2

Part A: Multiple-choice questions

Question 1/ 84

Use the following information to answer Questions 2 and 3.

The dot plot below displays the difference in travel time between the morning peak and the evening peak
travel times for the same journey on 25 days.
Question 2/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (85%)]

The percentage of days when there was five minutes difference in travel time between the morning peak and
the evening peak travel times is

A. 0%

B. 5%

C. 20%

D. 25%

E. 28%

Question 3/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (85%)]

The median difference in travel time is

A. 3.0 minutes.

B. 3.5 minutes.

C. 4.0 minutes.

D. 4.5 minutes.

E. 5.0 minutes.

Question 4/ 84

Use the following information to answer Questions 5–7.

The pulse rates of a population of Year 12 students are approximately normally distributed with a mean of 69
beats per minute and a standard deviation of 4 beats per minute.

Question 5/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (86%)]

A student selected at random from this population has a standardised pulse rate of z = −2.5. This student’s
actual pulse rate is

A. 59 beats per minute.

B. 63 beats per minute.

C. 65 beats per minute.

D. 73 beats per minute.

E. 79 beats per minute.

Question 6/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (68%)]

Another student selected at random from this population has a standardised pulse rate of z = −1. The
percentage of students in this population with a pulse rate greater than this student is closest to

A. 2.5%

B. 5%

C. 16%

D. 68%

E. 84%
Question 7/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (69%)]

A sample of 200 students was selected at random from this population.

The number of these students with a pulse rate of less than 61 beats per minute or greater than 73 beats per
minute is closest to

A. 19

B. 37

C. 64

D. 95

E. 190

Question 8/ 84

Use the following information to answer Questions 9–10.

The histogram below shows the distribution of the population size of 48 countries in 2018.
Question 9/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (92%)]

The number of these countries with a population size between 5 million and 20 million people is

A. 11

B. 17

C. 23

D. 34

E. 35

Question 10/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (86%)]

The shape of this histogram is best described as

A. positively skewed with no outliers.

B. positively skewed with outliers.

C. approximately symmetric.

D. negatively skewed with no outliers.

E. negatively skewed with outliers.

Question 11/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (71%)]

The histogram below shows the population size for these 48 countries plotted on a log10 scale.

Based on this histogram, the number of countries with a population size that is less than 100 000 people is

A. 1

B. 5

C. 7

D. 8

E. 48
Question 12/ 84

Use the following information to answer Questions 13 and 14.

The stem plot below shows the distribution of mathematics test scores for a class of 23 students.

Question 13/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (96%)]

For this class, the range of test scores is

A. 22

B. 44

C. 45

D. 49

E. 89
Question 14/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (87%)]

For this class, the interquartile range (IQR) of test scores is

A. 14.5

B. 17.5

C. 18

D. 24

E. 49

Question 15/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (79%)]

The time taken to travel between two regional cities is approximately normally distributed with a mean of 70
minutes and a standard deviation of 2 minutes.

The percentage of travel times that are between 66 minutes and 72 minutes is closest to

A. 2.5%

B. 34%

C. 68%

D. 81.5%

E. 95%

Question 16/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (72%)]

The volume of a cup of soup served by a machine is normally distributed with a mean of 240 mL and a
standard deviation of 5 mL. A fast-food store used this machine to serve 160 cups of soup. The number of
these cups of soup that are expected to contain less than 230 mL of soup is closest to

A. 3

B. 4

C. 8

D. 26

E. 156

Question 17/ 84

Use the following information to answer Questions 18–20.

The times between successive nerve impulses (time), in milliseconds, were recorded.

Table 1 shows the mean and the five-number summary calculated using 800 recorded data values.

Table 1

Time (milliseconds)
Mean 220
Minimum value 10

First quartile (Q1 ) 70

Median 150

Third quartile (Q3 ) 300

Maximum value 1380

Data: adapted from P Fatt and B Katz, ‘Spontaneous subthreshold activity at motor nerve endings’, The
Journal of Physiology, 117, 1952, pp. 109-128
Question 18/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (98%)]

The difference, in milliseconds, between the mean time and the median time is

A. 10

B. 70

C. 150

D. 220

E. 230

Question 19/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (73%)]

Of these 800 times, the number of times that are longer than 300 milliseconds is closest to

A. 20

B. 25

C. 75

D. 200

E. 400

Question 20/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (59%)]

The shape of the distribution of these 800 times is best described as

A. approximately symmetric.

B. positively skewed.

C. positively skewed with one or more outliers.

D. negatively skewed.

E. negatively skewed with one or more outliers.

Question 21/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (50%)]

The histogram below shows the distribution of the forearm circumference, in centimetres, of 252 men.
Assume that the forearm circumference values were all rounded to one decimal place.

The third quartile (Q3 ) for this distribution could be

A. 29.3

B. 29.8

C. 30.3

D. 30.8

E. 31.3
Question 22/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (78%)]

The histogram below shows the distribution of weight, in grams, for a sample of 20 animal species. The
histogram has been plotted on a log10 scale.

The percentage of these animal species with a weight of less than 10 000 g is

A. 17%

B. 70%

C. 75%

D. 80%

E. 85%

Question 23/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (72%)]

A percentage segmented bar chart would be an appropriate graphical tool to display the association between
month of the year (January, February, March, etc.) and the

A. monthly average rainfall (in millimetres).

B. monthly mean temperature (in degrees Celsius).

C. annual median wind speed (in kilometres per hour).

D. monthly average rainfall (below average, average, above average).

E. annual average temperature (in degrees Celsius).

Question 24/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (69%)]

Data relating to the following five variables was collected from insects that were caught overnight in a trap:

• colour

• name of species

• number of wings

• body length (in millimetres)

• body weight (in milligrams)

The number of these variables that are discrete numerical variables is

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 5
Question 25/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (78%)]

The wing length of a species of bird is approximately normally distributed with a mean of 61 mm and a
standard deviation of 2 mm. Using the 68–95–99.7% rule, for a random sample of 10 000 of these birds, the
number of these birds with a wing length of less than 57 mm is closest to

A. 50

B. 160

C. 230

D. 250

E. 500

Question 26/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (77%)]

The lifetime of a certain brand of light globe, in hours, is approximately normally distributed. It is known that
16% of the light globes have a lifetime of less than 655 hours and 50% of the light globes have a lifetime that
is greater than 670 hours.

The mean and the standard deviation of this normal distribution are closest to

A. mean = 655 hours standard deviation = 10 hours

B. mean = 655 hours standard deviation = 15 hours

C. mean = 670 hours standard deviation = 10 hours

D. mean = 670 hours standard deviation = 15 hours

E. mean = 670 hours standard deviation = 20 hours

Question 27/ 84
Use the following information to answer Questions 28 to 30.

The percentaged segmented bar chart below shows the age (under 55 years, 55 years and over) of visitors at a
travel convention, segmented by preferred travel destination (domestic, international).

Question 28/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (70%)]

The variables age (under 55 years, 55 years and over) and preferred travel destination (domestic,
international) are

A. both categorical variables.

B. both numerical variables.

C. a numerical variable and a categorical variable respectively.

D. a categorical variable and a numerical variable respectively.

E. a discrete variable and a continuous variable respectively.

Question 29/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (82%)]

The data displayed in the percentaged segmented bar chart supports the contention that there is an association
between preferred travel destination and age because

A. more visitors favour international travel.

B. 35% of visitors under 55 years favour international travel.

C. 45% of visitors 55 years and over favour domestic travel.

D. 65% of visitors under 55 years favour domestic travel while 45% of visitors 55 years and over favour
domestic travel.

E. the percentage of visitors who prefer domestic travel is greater than the percentage of visitors who prefer
international travel.

Question 30/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (50%)]

The results could also be summarised in a two-way frequency table.

Which one of the following frequency tables could match the percentaged segmented bar chart?

Age
Preferred travel destination Under 55 years 55 years and over
domestic 91 90
international 49 110
Total 140 200
Age
Preferred travel destination Under 55 years 55 years and over
domestic 65 35
international 45 55
 Age
Preferred travel destination Under 55 years 55 years and over
Total 110 90
Age
Preferred travel destination Under 55 years 55 years and over
domestic 35 55
international 65 45
Total 100 100
Age
Preferred travel destination Under 55 years 55 years and over
domestic 50 70
international 100 50
Total 150 120
Age
Preferred travel destination Under 55 years 55 years and over
domestic 71 39
international 29 61
Total 100 100

Question 31/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (60%)]

The boxplots below show the distribution of the length of fish caught in two different ponds, Pond A and
Pond B.
Based on the boxplots above, it can be said that

A. 50% of the fish caught in Pond A are the same length as the fish caught in Pond B.

B. 50% of the fish caught in Pond B are longer than all of the fish caught in Pond A.

C. 50% of the fish caught in Pond B are shorter than all of the fish caught in Pond A.

D. 75% of the fish caught in Pond A are shorter than all of the fish caught in Pond B.

E. 75% of the fish caught in Pond B are longer than all of the fish caught in Pond A.

Question 32/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (63%)]

The stem plot below shows the height, in centimetres, of 20 players in a junior football team.
A player with a height of 179 cm is considered an outlier because 179 cm is greater than

A. 162 cm

B. 169 cm

C. 172.5 cm

D. 173 cm

E. 175.5 cm

Question 33/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (51%)]

The relationship between resting pulse rate, in beats per minute, and age group (15–20 years, 21–30 years,
31–50 years, over 50 years) is best displayed using

A. a histogram.

B. a scatterplot.

C. parallel boxplots.

D. a time series plot.

E. a back-to-back stem plot.

Question 34/ 84

Use the following information to answer Questions 35 and 36.

800 participants auditioned for a stage musical. Each participant was required to complete a series of ability
tests for which they received an overall score.

The overall scores were approximately normally distributed with a mean score of 69.5 points and a standard
deviation of 6.5 points.
Question 35/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (54%)]

Only the participants who scored at least 76.0 points in the audition were considered successful. Using the
68–95–99.7% rule, how many of the participants were considered unsuccessful?

A. 127

B. 128

C. 272

D. 672

E. 673

Question 36/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (67%)]

To be offered a leading role in the stage musical, a participant must achieve a standardised score of at least
1.80.

Three participants’ names and their overall scores are given in the table below.

Participant Overall score

Amy 81.5
Brian 80.5
Cherie 82.0

Which one of the following statements is true?

A. Only Amy was offered a leading role.

B. Only Cherie was offered a leading role.

C. Only Brian was not offered a leading role.

D. Both Brian and Cherie were offered leading roles.

E. All three participants were offered leading roles.

Question 37/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (71%)]

The heights of females living in a small country town are normally distributed:

• 16% of the females are more than 160 cm tall.

• 2.5% of the females are less than 115 cm tall.

The mean and the standard deviation of this female population, in centimetres, are closest to

A. mean = 135 standard deviation = 15

B. mean = 135 standard deviation = 25

C. mean = 145 standard deviation = 15

D. mean = 145 standard deviation = 20

E. mean = 150 standard deviation = 10

Question 38/ 84

Use the following information to answer Questions 39–41.

The histogram below displays the distribution of skull width, in millimetres, for 46 female possums.
Data: adapted from DB Lindenmayer et al., ‘Morphological variation among populations of the mountain
brushtail possum, Trichosurus caninus Ogilby (Phalangeridae: Marsupialia)’, Australian Journal of Zoology,
43(5), 1995, p. 453

Question 39/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (36%)]

The shape of the distribution is best described as

A. negatively skewed.

B. approximately symmetric.

C. negatively skewed with a possible outlier.

D. positively skewed with a possible outlier.

E. approximately symmetric with a possible outlier.

Question 40/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (85%)]

The percentage of the 46 possums with a skull width of less than 55 mm is closest to

A. 12%

B. 26%

C. 39%

D. 61%

E. 74%

Question 41/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (55%)]

The third quartile (Q3 ) for this distribution, in millimetres, could be

A. 55.8

B. 56.2

C. 56.9

D. 57.7

E. 58.3

Question 42/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (74%)]

The age, in years, of a sample of 14 possums is displayed in the dot plot below
The mean and the standard deviation of age for this sample of possums are closest to

A. mean = 4.25 standard deviation = 2.6

B. mean = 4.8 standard deviation = 2.4

C. mean = 4.8 standard deviation = 2.5

D. mean = 4.9 standard deviation = 2.4

E. mean = 4.9 standard deviation = 2.5

Question 43/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (76%)]

The possum population of a large city park is 2498.

The body lengths of this species of possum are known to be approximately normally distributed with a mean
of 88 cm and a standard deviation of 4 cm.

Using the 68–95–99.7% rule, the number of possums in this park with a body length between 84 cm and 96
cm is closest to

A. 2036

B. 2043

C. 2047

D. 2105

E. 2156
Question 44/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (75%)]

The histogram below displays the distribution of spleen weight for a sample of 32 seals.

The histogram has a log10 scale.

Data: adapted from CL Stewardson et al., ‘Gross and microscopic visceral anatomy of the male Cape fur seal,
Arctocephalus pusillus pusillus (Pinnipedia: Otariidae), with reference to organ size and growth’, Journal of
Anatomy, 195, 1999, p. 240

The number of seals in this sample with a spleen weight of 1000 g or more is

A. 7

B. 8

C. 17

D. 25

E. 27
Question 45/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (71%)]

Data was collected to investigate the association between the following two variables:

• age (29 and under, 30–59, 60 and over)

• uses public transport (yes, no)

Which one of the following is appropriate to use in the statistical analysis of this association?

A. a scatterplot

B. parallel box plots

C. a least squares line

D. a segmented bar chart

E. the correlation coefficient r

Question 46/ 84

Use the following information to answer Questions 47–49.

The scatterplot below displays the resting pulse rate, in beats per minute, and the time spent exercising, in
hours per week, of 16 students. A least squares line has been fitted to the data.
Question 47/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (73%)]

Using this least squares line to model the association between resting pulse rate and time spent exercising, the
residual for the student who spent four hours per week exercising is closest to

A. −2.0 beats per minute.

B. −1.0 beats per minute.

C. −0.3 beats per minute.

D. 1.0 beats per minute.

E. 2.0 beats per minute.

Question 48/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (46%)]

The equation of this least squares line is closest to

A. resting pulse rate = 67.2 − 0.91 × time spent exercising

B. resting pulse rate = 67.2 − 1.10 × time spent exercising

C. resting pulse rate = 68.3 − 0.91 × time spent exercising

D. resting pulse rate = 68.3 − 1.10 × time spent exercising

E. resting pulse rate = 67.2 + 1.10 × time spent exercising

Question 49/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (45%)]

The coefficient of determination is 0.8339.

The correlation coefficient r is closest to

A. −0.913

B. −0.834

C. −0.695

D. 0.834

E. 0.913

Question 50/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (51%)]

In a study of the association between a person’s height, in centimetres, and body surface area, in square
metres, the following least squares line was obtained.

body surf ace area = −1.1 + 0.019 × height

Which one of the following is a conclusion that can be made from this least squares line?

A. An increase of 1 m2 in body surface area is associated with an increase of 0.019 cm in height.

B. An increase of 1 cm in height is associated with an increase of 0.019 m2 in body surface area.

C. The correlation coefficient is 0.019

D. A person’s body surface area, in square metres, can be determined by adding 1.1 cm to their height.

E. A person’s height, in centimetres, can be determined by subtracting 1.1 from their body surface area, in
square metres.

Question 51/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (58%)]

Freya uses the following data to generate the scatterplot below.

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

y 105 48 35 23 18 16 12 12 9 9

The scatterplot shows that the data is non-linear.

To linearise the data, Freya applies a reciprocal transformation to the variable y .

She then fits a least squares line to the transformed data.

With x as the explanatory variable, the equation of this least squares line is closest to
A. y1 = −0.0039 + 0.012x

B. y1 = −0.025 + 1.1x

C. y1 = 7.8 − 0.082x
1
D. y = 45.3 + 59.7 × x
1
E. y = 59.7 + 45.3 × x

Question 52/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (54%)]

A log10 (y) transformation was used to linearise a set of non-linear bivariate data.

A least squares line was then fitted to the transformed data.

The equation of this least squares line is

log10 (y) = 3.1 − 2.3x

This equation is used to predict the value of y when x = 1.1

The value of y is closest to

A. −0.24
B. 0.57

C. 0.91

D. 1.6

E. 3.7

Question 53/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (49%)]

The statistical analysis of a set of bivariate data involving variables x and y resulted in the information
displayed in the table below.

Mean ˉ = 27.8
x yˉ = 33.4
Standard deviation sx = 2.33 sy = 3.24
Equation of the least squares line y = −2.84 + 1.31x

Using this information, the value of the correlation coefficient r for this set of bivariate data is closest to

A. 0.88

B. 0.89

C. 0.92

D. 0.94

E. 0.97

Question 54/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (42%)]

A least squares line is fitted to a set of bivariate data.

Another least squares line is fitted with response and explanatory variables reversed.

Which one of the following statistics will not change in value?

A. the residual values

B. the predicted values

C. the correlation coefficient r

D. the slope of the least squares line

E. the intercept of the least squares line

Question 55/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (63%)]

Percy conducted a survey of people in his workplace. He constructed a two–way frequency table involving
two variables.

One of the variables was attitude towards shorter working days (for, against).

The other variable could have been

A. age (in years).

B. sex (male, female).

C. height (to the nearest centimetre).

D. income (to the nearest thousand dollars).

E. time spent travelling to work (in minutes).

Question 56/ 84
Use the following information to answer Questions 57 and 58.

A least squares line is used to model the relationship between the monthly average temperature and latitude
recorded at seven different weather stations. The equation of the least squares line is found to be

average temperature = 42.9842 − 0.877447 × latitude

Question 57/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (67%)]

When the numbers in this equation are correctly rounded to three significant figures, the equation will be

A. average temperature = 42.984 − 0.877 × latitude

B. average temperature = 42.984 − 0.878 × latitude

C. average temperature = 43.0 − 0.878 × latitude

D. average temperature = 42.9 − 0.878 × latitude

E. average temperature = 43.0 − 0.877 × latitude

Question 58/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (41%)]

The coefficient of determination was calculated to be 0.893743

The value of the correlation coefficient, rounded to three decimal places, is

A. −0.945

B. 0.898

C. 0.806
D. 0.898

E. 0.945

Question 59/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (37%)]

A study was conducted to investigate the effect of drinking coffee on sleep.

In this study, the amount of sleep, in hours, and the amount of coffee drunk, in cups, on a given day were
recorded for a group of adults.

The following summary statistics were generated.

Sleep (hours) Coffee (cups)

Mean 7.08 2.42
Standard deviation 1.12 1.56

Correlation coefficient (r) −0.770

On average, for each additional cup of coffee drunk, the amount of sleep

A. decreased by 0.55 hours.

B. decreased by 0.77 hours.

C. decreased by 1.1 hours.

D. increased by 1.1 hours.

E. increased by 2.3 hours.

Question 60/ 84
[VCAA 2019 FM (57%)]

The table below shows the values of two variables x and y .

The associated scatterplot is also shown.

The explanatory variable is x.

x y
1 7.6
3 3.4
5 12.1
7 23.4
9 43.6
11 51.8
13 95.4
15 108
16 145
17 172
18 168
The scatterplot is non-linear.

A squared transformation applied to the variable x can be used to linearise the scatterplot.

The equation of the least squares line fitted to the linearised data is closest to

A. y = −1.34 + 0.546x

B. y = −1.34 + 0.546x2

C. y = 3.93 − 0.00864x2

D. y = 34.6 − 10.5x

E. y = 34.6 − 10.5x2

Question 61/ 84

Use the following information to answer Questions 62–64.

The data in Table 2 was collected in a study of the association between the variables frequency of nightmares
(low, high) and snores (no, yes).

Table 2

Snores
Frequency of nightmares Total
No Yes
low 80 58 138
high 11 12 23
Total 91 70 161

Data: adapted from RA Hicks and J Bautista, ‘Snoring and nightmares’, Perceptual and Motor Skills, l
October 1993, <https://doi.org/10.2466/pms.1993.77.2.433>
Question 62/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (57%)]

The variables in this study, frequency of nightmares (low, high) and snores (no, yes), are

A. ordinal and nominal respectively.

B. nominal and ordinal respectively.

C. both numerical.

D. both ordinal.

E. both nominal.

Question 63/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (95%)]

The percentage of participants in the study who did not snore is closest to

A. 42.0%

B. 43.5%

C. 49.7%

D. 52.2%

E. 56.5%

Question 64/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (70%)]

Of those people in the study who did snore, the percentage who have a high frequency of nightmares is
closest to
A. 7.5%

B. 17.1%

C. 47.8%

D. 52.2%

E. 58.0%

Question 65/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (34%)]

A least squares line of the form y = a + bx is fitted to a scatterplot.

Which one of the following is always true?

A. As many of the data points in the scatterplot as possible will lie on the line.

B. The data points in the scatterplot will be divided so that there are as many data points above the line as
there are below the line.

C. The sum of the squares of the shortest distances from the line to each data point will be a minimum.

D. The sum of the squares of the horizontal distances from the line to each data point will be a minimum.

E. The sum of the squares of the vertical distances from the line to each data point will be a minimum.

Question 66/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (74%)]

In a study, the association between the number of tasks completed on a test and the time allowed for the test,
in hours, was found to be non-linear.

The data can be linearised using a log10 transformation applied to the variable number of tasks. The equation
of the least squares line for the transformed data is
 log10 (number of tasks) = 1.160 + 0.03617 × time
This equation predicts that the number of tasks completed when the time allowed for the test is three hours is
closest to

A. 13

B. 16

C. 19

D. 25

E. 26

Question 67/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (71%)]

Oscar walked for nine consecutive days. The time, in minutes, that Oscar spent walking on each day is shown
in the table below.

Day 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Time 46 40 45 34 36 38 39 40 33

A least squares line is fitted to the data.

The equation of this line predicts that on day 10 the time Oscar spends walking will be the same as the time
he spent walking on

A. day 3

B. day 4

C. day 6

D. day 8

E. day 9
Question 68/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (40%)]

The table below shows the weight, in kilograms, and the height, in centimetres, of 10 adults.

Weight (kg) Height (cm)

59 173
67 180
69 184
84 195
64 173
74 180
76 192
56 169
58 164
66 180

A least squares line is fitted to the data. The least squares line enables an adult’s weight to be predicted from
their height. The number of times that the predicted value of an adult’s weight is greater than the actual value
of their weight is

A. 3

B. 4

C. 5

D. 6

E. 7
Question 69/ 84

Use the following information to answer Questions 70 and 71.

The association between the weight of a seal’s spleen, spleen weight, in grams, and its age, in months, for a
sample of seals is non-linear.

This association can be linearised by applying a log10 transformation to the variable spleen weight.

Data: adapted from CL Stewardson et al., ‘Gross and microscopic visceral anatomy of the male Cape fur seal,
Arctocephalus pusillus pusillus (Pinnipedia: Otariidae), with reference to organ size and growth, Journal of
Anatomy, 195, 1999, p. 240

The equation of the least squares line for this scatterplot is

log10 (spleen weight) = 2.698 + 0.009434 × age

Question 70/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (68%)]

The equation of the least squares line predicts that, on average, for each one-month increase in the age of the
seals, the increase in the value of log10 (spleen weight) is

A. 0.009434
B. 0.01000

C. 1.020

D. 2.698

E. 5.213

Question 71/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (56%)]

Using the equation of the least squares line, the predicted spleen weight of a 30-month-old seal, in grams, is
closest to

A. 3

B. 511

C. 772

D. 957

E. 1192

Question 72/ 84

Use the following information to answer Questions 73–75.

Table 1 summarises the results of a study that compared the effectiveness of individual and group instruction
(instructional method) when training future basketball referees.

Table 1

Instructional method
Test grade Individual Group
A (85% or above) 10 18
 Instructional method
B (75–84%) 35 30
C (65–74%) 30 24
D (50–64%) 28 48
E (less than 50%) 12 6
Total 115 126

In this table, test grade is the response variable and instructional method is the explanatory variable.

Question 73/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (67%)]

The variables test grade (A, B, C, D, E) and instructional method (individual, group) are

A. a numerical and a categorical variable respectively.

B. both nominal variables.

C. a nominal and an ordinal variable respectively.

D. both ordinal variables.

E. an ordinal and a nominal variable respectively.

Question 74/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (56%)]

Of the students who received an A grade, the percentage who were instructed individually is closest to

A. 9%
B. 22%

C. 36%

D. 56%

E. 64%

Question 75/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (86%)]

To become a qualified referee, a grade of A or B on the test is required. Those who receive a C, a D or an E
will not qualify.

Using column percentages, a new two-way percentage frequency table is constructed from the data in Table
1.

In this new table, qualified to be a referee (yes, no) is the response variable and instructional method
(individual, group) is the explanatory variable.

Which one of the following tables correctly displays the data from Table 1?

Instructional method (%)

Qualified to be a referee Individual Group
yes (A or B grade) 35 38
no (C, D or E grade) 65 62
Instructional method (%)
Qualified to be a referee Individual Group
yes (A or B grade) 39 38
no (C, D or E grade) 61 62
Instructional method (%)
Qualified to be a referee Individual Group
yes (A or B grade) 39 43
no (C, D or E grade) 61 57
Instructional method (%)
Qualified to be a referee Individual Group
yes (A or B grade) 61 62
no (C, D or E grade) 39 38
Instructional method (%)
Qualified to be a referee Individual Group
yes (A or B grade) 65 57
no (C, D or E grade) 35 43

Question 76/ 84

Use the following information to answer Questions 77–79.

The scatterplot below displays the body length, in centimetres, of 17 crocodiles, plotted against their head
length, in centimetres. A least squares line has been fitted to the scatterplot. The explanatory variable is head
Data: adapted from Data and Story Library (DASL), ‘Crocodile_lengths’, <https://dasl.datadescription.com
/datafile/crocodile-lengths/>

Question 77/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (58%)]

The equation of the least squares line is closest to

A. head length = −40 + 7 × body length

B. body length = −40 + 7 × head length

C. head length = 168 + 7 × bodylength

D. body length = 168 − 40 × head length

E. body length = 7 + 168 × head length

Question 78/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (51%)]

The median head length of the 17 crocodiles, in centimetres, is closest to

A. 49

B. 51

C. 54

D. 300

E. 345

Question 79/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (48%)]

The correlation coefficient r is equal to 0.963.

The percentage of variation in body length that is not explained by the variation in head length is closest to

A. 0.9%

B. 3.7%

C. 7.3%

D. 92.7%

E. 96.3%
Question 80/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (80%)]

The table below shows the monthly profit, in dollars, of a new coffee shop for the first nine months of 2018.

Month Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept.
Profit ($) 2890 1978 2402 2456 4651 3456 2823 2678 2345

Using four-mean smoothing with centring, the smoothed profit for May is closest to

A. $2502

B. $3294

C. $3503

D. $3804

E. $4651

Question 81/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (51%)]

The quarterly sales figures for a large suburban garden centre, in millions of dollars, for 2016 and 2017 are
displayed in the table below.

Year Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 Quarter 4

2016 1.73 2.87 3.34 1.23
2017 1.03 2.45 2.05 0.78

Using these sales figures, the seasonal index for Quarter 3 is closest to

A. 1.28

B. 1.30
C. 1.38

D. 1.46

E. 1.48

Question 82/ 84

Use the following information to answer Questions 83 and 84.

The time, in minutes, that Liv ran each day was recorded for nine days.

These times are shown in the table below.

Day number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Time (minutes) 22 40 28 51 19 60 33 37 46

The time series plot below was generated from this data.
Question 83/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (45%)]

Both three-median smoothing and five-median smoothing are being considered for this data. Both of these
methods result in the same smoothed value on day number

A. 3

B. 4

C. 5

D. 6

E. 7

Question 84/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (69%)]

A least squares line is to be fitted to the time series plot shown on the previous page.

The equation of this least squares line, with day number as the explanatory variable, is closest to

A. day number = 23.8 + 2.29 × time

B. day number = 28.5 + 1.77 × time

C. time = 23.8 + 1.77 × day number

D. time = 23.8 + 2.29 × day number

E. time = 28.5 + 1.77 × day number

Question 85/ 84

Use the following information to answer Questions 86 and 87.

The time series plot below shows the monthly rainfall at a weather station, in millimetres, for each month in
2017.

Question 86/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (37%)]

The median monthly rainfall for 2017 was closest to

A. 53 mm

B. 82 mm

C. 96 mm

D. 103 mm

E. 111 mm
Question 87/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (74%)]

If seven-mean smoothing is used to smooth this time series plot, the number of smoothed data points would
be

A. 3

B. 5

C. 6

D. 8

E. 10

Question 88/ 84

Use the following information to answer Questions 89 and 90.

Table 3 below shows the long-term mean rainfall, in millimetres, recorded at a weather station, and the
associated long-term seasonal indices for each month of the year.

The long-term mean rainfall for December is missing.

Table 3

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun July Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Mean
51.9 52.3 52.8 66.6 87.1 69.4 73.0 79.9 82.6 82.4 81.1
rainfall(mm)
Seasonal index 0.728 0.734 0.741 0.934 1.222 0.973 1.024 1.121 1.159 1.156 1.138 1.012

Data: adapted from © Commonwealth of Australia 2020, Bureau of Meteorology, <www.bom.gov.au/>

Question 89/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (43%)]

To correct the rainfall in March for seasonality, the actual rainfall should be, to the nearest per cent

A. decreased by 26%

B. increased by 26%

C. decreased by 35%

D. increased by 35%

E. increased by 74%

Question 90/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (67%)]

The long-term mean rainfall for December is closest to

A. 64.7 mm

B. 65.1 mm

C. 71.3 mm

D. 76.4 mm

E. 82.0 mm

Question 91/ 84

Use the following information to answer Questions 92 and 93.

Table 4 below shows the monthly rainfall for 2019, in millimetres, recorded at a weather station, and the
associated long-term seasonal indices for each month of the year.
 Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sep. Oct. Nov. Dec.
Monthly
18.4 17.6 46.8 23.6 92.6 77.2 80.0 86.8 93.8 55.2 97.3 69.4
rainfall (mm)
Seasonal index 0.728 0.734 0.741 0.934 1.222 0.973 1.024 1.121 1.159 1.156 1.138 1.072

Data: adapted from © Commonwealth of Australia 2020, Bureau of Meteorology, <www.bom.gov.au/>

Question 92/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (88%)]

The deseasonalised rainfall for May 2019 is closest to

A. 71.3 mm

B. 75.8 mm

C. 86.1 mm

D. 88.1 mm

E. 113.0 mm

Question 93/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (73%)]

The six-mean smoothed monthly rainfall with centring for August 2019 is closest to

A. 67.8 mm

B. 75.9 mm

C. 81.3 mm
D. 83.4 mm

E. 86.4 mm

Question 94/ 84

Use the following information to answer Questions 95 and 96.

The time series plot below displays the number of airline passengers, in thousands, each month during the
period January to December 1960.

Question 95/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (45%)]

During 1960, the median number of monthly airline passengers was closest to
A. 461 000

B. 465 000

C. 471 000

D. 573 000

E. 621 000

Question 96/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (57%)]

During the period January to May 1960, the total number of airline passengers was 2 160 000. The five-mean
smoothed number of passengers for March 1960 is

A. 419 000

B. 424 000

C. 430 000

D. 432 000

E. 434 000

Question 97/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (34%)]

The time series plot below shows the quarterly sales, in thousands of dollars, of a small business for the years
2010 to 2020.
The time series plot is best described as having

A. seasonality only.

B. irregular fluctuations only.

C. seasonality with irregular fluctuations.

D. a decreasing trend with irregular fluctuations.

E. a decreasing trend with seasonality and irregular fluctuations.

Question 98/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (53%)]

The time series plot below shows the points scored by a basketball team over 40 games.
The nine-median smoothed points scored for game number 10 is closest to

A. 102

B. 108

C. 110

D. 112

E. 117

Question 99/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (48%)]

A garden centre sells garden soil.

The table below shows the daily quantity of garden soil sold, in cubic metres, over a one-week period.

Day Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun

Quantity (m3) 234 186 346 346

The quantity of garden soil sold on Wednesday, Thursday and Friday is not shown.

The five-mean smoothed quantity of garden soil sold on Thursday is 206 m3.
The three-mean smoothed quantity of garden soil sold on Thursday, in cubic metres, is

A. 143

B. 166

C. 206

D. 239

E. 403

Question 100/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (59%)]

The table below shows the number of visitors to an art gallery during the summer, autumn, winter and spring
quarters for the years 2017 to 2019.

The quarterly average is also shown for each of these years.

Season 2017 2018 2019

summer quarter 29 685 25 420 31 496
autumn quarter 27 462 23 320 29 874
winter quarter 25 564 21 097 27 453
spring quarter 26 065 22 897 28 149
Quarterly average 27 194.0 23 183.5 29 243.0

The seasonal index for summer is closest to

A. 1.077

B. 1.081

C. 1.088

D. 1.092

E. 1.096
Question 101/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (52%)]

The number of visitors to a regional animal park is seasonal.

Data is collected and deseasonalised before a least squares line is fitted.

The equation of the least squares line is

deseasonalised number of visitors = 2349 − 198.5 × month number

where month number 1 is January 2020.

The seasonal indices for the 12 months of 2020 are shown in the table below.

Month number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Seasonal index 1.10 1.25 1.15 0.95 0.85 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.95 1.10 1.15 1.10

The actual number of visitors predicted for February 2020 was closest to

A. 1562

B. 1697

C. 1952

D. 2245

E. 2440

Question 102/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (66%)]

The daily number of cups of coffee sold by a food truck over a three-week period is shown in the table below.
Week Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun
1 123 91 120 176 145 99 187
2 98 104 145 163 134 128 206
3 125 134 128 187 156 102 179

The six-mean smoothed number of cups of coffee, with centring, sold on Thursday in Week 2 is closest to

A. 127

B. 138

C. 147

D. 155

E. 163

Question 103/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (40%)]

The seasonal index for sales of sunscreen in summer is 1.25

To correct for seasonality, the actual sunscreen sales for summer should be

A. reduced by 20%

B. reduced by 25%

C. reduced by 80%

D. increased by 20%

E. increased by 25%
Question 1/ 126

Use the following information to answer Questions 2 and 3.

The value of an annuity investment, in dollars, after n years, Vn , can be modelled by the recurrence relation
shown below.

V0 = 46 000, Vn+1 = 1.0034 Vn + 500

Question 2/ 126

[VCAA 2018 FM (79%)]

What is the value of the regular payment added to the principal of this annuity investment?

A. $34.00

B. $156.40

C. $466.00

D. $500.00

E. $656.40

Question 3/ 126

[VCAA 2018 FM (61%)]

Between the second and third years, the increase in the value of this investment is closest to

A. $656

B. $658

C. $661

D. $1315
E. $1975

Question 4/ 126

[VCAA 2018 FM (54%)]

Daniel borrows $5000, which he intends to repay fully in a lump sum after one year.

The annual interest rate and compounding period for five different compound interest loans are given below:

• Loan I – 12.6% per annum, compounding weekly

• Loan II – 12.8% per annum, compounding weekly

• Loan III – 12.9% per annum, compounding weekly

• Loan IV – 12.7% per annum, compounding quarterly

• Loan V – 13.2% per annum, compounding quarterly

When fully repaid, the loan that will cost Daniel the least amount of money is

A. Loan I.

B. Loan II.

C. Loan III.

D. Loan IV.

E. Loan V.

Question 5/ 126

[VCAA 2018 FM (39%)]

The graph below shows the value, Vn , of an asset as it depreciates over a period of five months.
Which one of the following depreciation situations does this graph best represent?

A. flat rate depreciation with a decrease in depreciation rate after two months

B. flat rate depreciation with an increase in depreciation rate after two months

C. unit cost depreciation with a decrease in units used per month after two months

D. reducing balance depreciation with an increase in the rate of depreciation after two months

E. reducing balance depreciation with a decrease in the rate of depreciation after two months

Question 6/ 126

[VCAA 2018 FM (59%)]

Which one of the following recurrence relations could be used to model the value of a perpetuity investment,
Pn , after n months?

A. P0 = 120 000, Pn+1 = 1.0029 × Pn − 356

B. P0 = 180 000, Pn+1 = 1.0047 × Pn − 846

C. P0 = 210 000, Pn+1 = 1.0071 × Pn − 1534

D. P0 = 240 000, Pn+1 = 0.0047 × Pn − 2232

E. P0 = 250 000, Pn+1 = 0.0085 × Pn − 2125

Question 7/ 126

[VCAA 2018 FM (29%)]

Adam has a home loan with a present value of $175 260.56

The interest rate for Adam’s loan is 3.72% per annum, compounding monthly.

His monthly repayment is $3200.

The loan is to be fully repaid after five years.

Adam knows that the loan cannot be exactly repaid with 60 repayments of $3200.

To solve this problem, Adam will make 59 repayments of $3200. He will then adjust the value of the final
repayment so that the loan is fully repaid with the 60th repayment.

The value of the 60th repayment will be closest to

A. $368.12

B. $2831.88

C. $3200.56

D. $3557.09

E. $3568.12

Question 8/ 126

[VCAA 2018 FM (29%)]

Five lines of an amortisation table for a reducing balance loan with monthly repayments are shown below.

Repayment number Repayment Interest Principal reduction Balance of loan

25 $2200.00 $972.24 $1227.76 $230 256.78
26 $2200.00 $967.08 $1232.92 $229 023.86
 Repayment number Repayment Interest Principal reduction Balance of loan
27 $2200.00 $961.90 $1238.10 $227 785.76
28 $2200.00 $1002.26 $1197.74 $226 588.02
29 $2200.00 $996.99 $1203.01 $225 385.01

The interest rate for this loan changed immediately before repayment number 28.

This change in interest rate is best described as

A. an increase of 0.24% per annum.

B. a decrease of 0.024% per annum.

C. an increase of 0.024% per annum.

D. a decrease of 0.0024% per annum.

E. an increase of 0.00024% per annum.

Question 9/ 126

[VCAA 2018 FM (45%)]

Mariska plans to retire from work 10 years from now.

Her retirement goal is to have a balance of $600 000 in an annuity investment at that time.

The present value of this annuity investment is $265 298.48, on which she earns interest at the rate of 3.24%
per annum, compounding monthly.

To make this investment grow faster, Mariska will add a $1000 payment at the end of every month.

Two years from now, she expects the interest rate of this investment to fall to 3.20% per annum,
compounding monthly. It is expected to remain at this rate until Mariska retires.

When the interest rate drops, she must increase her monthly payment if she is to reach her retirement goal.

The value of this new monthly payment will be closest to

A. $1234

B. $1250
C. $1649

D. $1839

E. $1854

Question 10/ 126

[VCAA 2019 FM (68%)]

Consider the recurrence relation shown below.

A0 = 3, An+1 = 2An + 4

The value of A3 in the sequence generated by this recurrence relation is given by

A. 2 × 3 + 4

B. 2 × 4 + 4

C. 2 × 10 + 4

D. 2 × 24 + 4

E. 2 × 52 + 4

Question 11/ 126

[VCAA 2019 FM (66%)]

The value of a compound interest investment, in dollars, after n years, Vn , can be modelled by the recurrence
relation shown below.

V0 = 100 000, Vn+1 = 1.01 Vn

The interest rate, per annum, for this investment is
A. 0.01%

B. 0.101%

C. 1%

D. 1.01%

E. 101%

Question 12/ 126

[VCAA 2019 FM (76%)]

Geoff purchased a computer for $4500. He will depreciate the value of his computer by a flat rate of 10% of
the purchase price per annum.

A recurrence relation that Geoff can use to determine the value of the computer after n years, Vn , is

A. V0 = 4500, Vn+1 = Vn − 450

B. V0 = 4500, Vn+1 = Vn + 450

C. V0 = 4500, Vn+1 = 0.9Vn

D. V0 = 4500, Vn+1 = 1.1 Vn

E. V0 = 4500, Vn+1 = 0.1 (Vn − 450)

Question 13/ 126

[VCAA 2019 FM (58%)]

Consider the following amortisation table for a reducing balance loan.

Payment number Payment Interest Principal reduction Balance

 Payment number Payment Interest Principal reduction Balance
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 300 000.00
1 1050.00 900.00 150.00 299 850.00
2 1050.00 899.55 150.45 299 699.55
3 1050.00 899.10 150.90 299 548.65

The annual interest rate for this loan is 3.6%. Interest is calculated immediately before each payment. For this
loan, the repayments are made

A. weekly.

B. fortnightly.

C. monthly.

D. quarterly.

E. yearly.

Question 14/ 126

[VCAA 2019 FM (54%)]

The graph below shows the value, in dollars, of a compound interest investment after n compounding
periods, Vn , for a period of four compounding periods.
The coordinates of the point where n = 2 are (2, b). The value of b is
A. 660.00

B. 670.00

C. 672.80

D. 678.40

E. 685.60

Question 15/ 126

[VCAA 2019 FM (53%)]

A machine is purchased for $30 000.

It produces 24 000 items each year.

The value of the machine is depreciated using a unit cost method of depreciation.

After three years, the value of the machine is $18 480.

A rule for the value of the machine after n units are produced, Vn , is

A. Vn = 0.872n

B. Vn = 24 000n − 3840

C. Vn = 30 000 − 24 000n
D. Vn = 30 000 − 0.872n

E. Vn = 30 000 − 0.16n

Question 16/ 126

[VCAA 2019 FM (38%)]

Joseph borrowed $50 000 to buy a new car.

Interest on this loan is charged at the rate of 7.5% per annum, compounding monthly.

Joseph will fully repay this loan with 60 monthly repayments over five years.

Immediately after the 59th repayment is made, Joseph still owes $995.49

The value of his final repayment, to the nearest cent, will be

A. $995.49

B. $998.36

C. $1001.71

D. $1001.90

E. $1070.15

Question 17/ 126

[VCAA 2019 FM (51%)]

Millie invested $20 000 in an account at her bank with interest compounding monthly.

After one year, the balance of Millie’s account was $20 732.

The difference between the rate of interest per annum used by her bank and the effective annual rate of
interest for Millie’s investment is closest to
A. 0.04%

B. 0.06%

C. 0.08%

D. 0.10%

E. 0.12%

Question 18/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (85%)]

The following recurrence relation can generate a sequence of numbers.

T0 = 10, Tn+1 = Tn + 3
The number 13 appears in this sequence as

A. T1

B. T2

C. T3

D. T10

E. T13

Question 19/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (55%)]

An asset is purchased for $2480.

The value of this asset after n time periods, Vn , can be determined using the rule
 Vn = 2480 + 45n.

A recurrence relation that also models the value of this asset after n time periods is

A. V0 = 2480, Vn+1 = Vn + 45n

B. Vn = 2480, Vn+l = Vn + 45n

C. V0 = 2480, Vn+1 = Vn + 45

D. V1 = 2480, vn+1 = Vn + 45

E. Vn = 2480, Vn+l = Vn + 45

Question 20/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (80%)]

Consider the following four recurrence relations representing the value of an asset after n years, Vn .

• V0 = 20000, Vn+1 = Vn + 2500

• V0 = 20000, Vn+1 = Vn − 2500

• V0 = 20000, Vn+1 = 0.875Vn

• V0 = 20000, Vn+1 = 1.125Vn − 2500

How many of these recurrence relations indicate that the value of an asset is depreciating?

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4
Question 21/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (80%)]

Manu invests $3000 in an account that pays interest compounding monthly.

The balance of his investment after n months, Bn , can be determined using the recurrence relation

B0 = 3000, Bn+1 = 1.0048 × Bn

The total interest earned by Manu’s investment after the first five months is closest to

A. $57.60

B. $58.02

C. $72.00

D. $72.69

E. $87.44

Question 22/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (79%)]

The graph below represents the value of an annuity investment, An , in dollars, after n time periods.
A recurrence relation that could match this graphical representation is

A. A0 = 200 000, An+1 = 1.015An − 2500

B. A0 = 200 000, An+1 = 1.025An − 5000

C. A0 = 200 000, An+1 = 1.03An − 5500

D. A0 = 200 000, An+1 = 1.04An − 6000

E. A0 = 200 000, An+1 = 1.05An − 8000

Question 23/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (20%)]

Ray deposited $5000 in an investment account earning interest at the rate of 3% per annum, compounding
quarterly.

A rule for the balance, Rn , in dollars, after n years is given by

A. Rn = 5000 × 0.03n

B. Rn = 5000 × 1.03n

C. Rn = 5000 × 0.034n

D. Rn = 5000 × 1.0075n

E. Rn = 5000 × 1.00754n

Question 24/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (77%)]

Gen invests $10 000 at an interest rate of 5.5% per annum, compounding annually.
After how many years will her investment first be more than double its original value?

A. 12

B. 13

C. 14

D. 15

E. 16

Question 25/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (58%)]

The nominal interest rate for a loan is 8% per annum.

When rounded to two decimal places, the effective interest rate for this loan is not

A. 8.33% per annum when interest is charged daily.

B. 8.32% per annum when interest is charged weekly.

C. 8.31% per annum when interest is charged fortnightly.

D. 8.30% per annum when interest is charged monthly.

E. 8.24% per annum when interest is charged quarterly.

Question 26/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (54%)]

The value of a van purchased for $45 000 is depreciated by k % per annum using the reducing balance
method.

After three years of this depreciation, it is then depreciated in the fourth year under the unit cost method at
the rate of 15 cents per kilometre.
The value of the van after it travels 30 000 km in this fourth year is $26 166.24

The value of k is

A. 9

B. 12

C. 14

D. 16

E. 18

Question 27/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (41%)]

Twenty years ago, Hector invested a sum of money in an account earning interest at the rate of 3.2% per
annum, compounding monthly.

After 10 years, he made a one-off extra payment of $10 000 to the account.

For the next 10 years, the account earned interest at the rate of 2.8% per annum, compounding monthly.

The balance of his account today is $686 904.09

The sum of money Hector originally invested is closest to

A. $355 000

B. $370 000

C. $377 000

D. $384 000

E. $385 000

Question 28/ 126

[VCAA 2021 FM (83%)]

The following recurrence relation can generate a sequence of numbers.

L0 = 37, Ln+1 = Ln + C

The value of L2 is 25.

The value of C is

A. −6

B. −4

C. 4

D. 6

E. 37

Question 29/ 126

Use the following information to answer Questions 30 and 31.

Deepa invests $500 000 in an annuity that provides an annual payment of $44 970.55. Interest is
calculated annually.

The first five lines of the amortisation table are shown below.

Payment number Payment ($) Interest ($) Principal reduction ($) Balance ($)
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 500 000.00
1 44 970.55 20 000.00 24 970.55 475 029.45
2 44 970.55 19 001.18 25 969.37 449 060.08
3 44 970.55 17 962.40 422 051.93
4 44 970.55 16 882.08 28 088.47 393 963.46
Question 30/ 126

[VCAA 2021 FM (93%)]

The principal reduction associated with payment number 3 is

A. $17 962.40

B. $25 969.37

C. $27 008.15

D. $28 088.47

E. $44 970.55

Question 31/ 126

[VCAA 2021 FM (44%)]

The number of years, in total, for which Deepa will receive the regular payment of $44 970.55 is closest to

A. 12

B. 15

C. 16

D. 18

E. 20

Question 32/ 126

[VCAA 2021 FM (44%)]

Sammy purchased a boat for $72 000.

The value of the boat is depreciated each year by 10% using the reducing balance method.

In the third year, the boat will depreciate in value by 10% of

A. $47 239.20

B. $52 488.00

C. $58 320.00

D. $64 800.00

E. $72 000.00

Question 33/ 126

[VCAA 2021 FM (40%)]

Enrico invests $3000 in an account that pays interest compounding monthly.

After four years, the balance of the account is $3728.92

The effective annual interest rate for this investment, rounded to two decimal places, is

A. 5.45%

B. 5.52%

C. 5.56%

D. 5.59%

E. 5.60%

Question 34/ 126

[VCAA 2021 FM (56%)]

Joanna deposited $12 000 in an investment account earning interest at the rate of 2.8% per annum,
compounding monthly.
She would like this account to reach a balance of $25 000 after five years.

To achieve this balance, she will make an extra payment into the account each month, immediately after the
interest is calculated.

The minimum value of this payment is closest to

A. $113.85

B. $174.11

C. $580.16

D. $603.22

E. $615.47

Question 35/ 126

[VCAA 2021 FM (31%)]

Bimal has a reducing balance loan.

The balance, in dollars, of the loan from month to month, Bn , is modelled by the recurrence relation below.

B0 = 450 000, Bn+1 = RBn − 2633

Given that the loan will be fully repaid in 20 years, the value of R is closest to

A. 1.003

B. 1.0036

C. 1.03

D. 1.036

E. 1.36
Question 36/ 126

[VCAA 2021 FM (33%)]

Bob borrowed $400 000 to buy an apartment.

The interest rate for this loan was 3.14% per annum, compounding monthly.

A scheduled monthly repayment that allowed Bob to fully repay the loan in 20 years was determined.

Bob decided, however, to make interest-only repayments for the first two years.

After these two years the interest rate changed. Bob was still able to pay off the loan in the 20 years by
repaying the scheduled amount each month.

The interest rate, per annum, for the final 18 years of the loan was closest to

A. 1.85%

B. 2.21%

C. 2.79%

D. 3.14%

E. 4.07%

Question 37/ 126

[VCAA 2022 FM (44%)]

A sequence of numbers is generated by the recurrence relation shown below.

R0 = 2, Rn+1 = 2 − Rn

The value of R2 is

A. −4

B. −2

C. 0

D. 2

E. 4
Question 38/ 126

Use the following information to answer Questions 39 and 40.

The balance of a loan, Vn , in dollars, after n months is modelled by the recurrence relation.

V0 = 400000, Vn+1 = 1.003Vn − 2024

Question 39/ 126

[VCAA 2022 FM (78%)]

The balance of the loan first falls below $398 000 after how many months?

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 5

Question 40/ 126

[VCAA 2022 FM (47%)]

With a small change to the final payment, the loan is expected to be repaid in full in

A. 25 years.
B. 26 years.

C. 28 years.

D. 29 years.

E. 30 years.

Question 41/ 126

[VCAA 2022 FM (65%)]

Nidhi owns equipment that is used for 10 hours per day for all 365 days of the year.

The value of the equipment is depreciated by Nidhi using the unit cost method.

The value of the equipment, En , in dollars, after n years can be modelled by the recurrence relation

E0 = 100 000, En+1 = En − 5475

The value of the equipment is depreciated by

A. $1.50 per hour.

B. $10 per hour.

C. $15 per hour.

D. $1.50 per day.

E. $10 per day.

Question 42/ 126

[VCAA 2022 FM (33%)]

Consider the following four statements regarding nominal and effective interest rates as they apply to
compound interest investments and loans:
• An effective interest rate is the same as a nominal interest rate if interest compounds annually.

• Effective interest rates increase as the number of compounding periods per year increases.

• A nominal rate of 12% per annum is equivalent to a nominal rate of 1% per month.

• An effective interest rate can be lower than a nominal interest rate.

How many of these four statements are true?

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4

Question 43/ 126

[VCAA 2022 FM (58%)]

Tim deposited $6000 into an investment account earning compound interest calculated monthly.

A rule for the balance, Tn , in dollars, after n years is given by Tn = 6000 × 1.00312n .

Let Rn be a new recurrence relation that models the balance of Tim’s account after n months.

This recurrence relation is

A. R0 = 6000, Rn+1 = Rn + 18

B. R0 = 6000, Rn+1 = Rn + 36

C. R0 = 6000, Rn+1 = 1.003Rn

D. R0 = 6000, Rn+1 = 1.0036Rn

E. R0 = 6000, Rn+1 = 1.0036Rn

Question 44/ 126

[VCAA 2022 FM (49%)]

Li invests $4000 for five years at 3.88% per annum, compounding annually.

Joseph invests a sum of money for five years, which earns simple interest paid annually.

Let Jn be the value, in dollars, of Joseph’s investment after n years.

The two investments will finish at the same value, rounded to the nearest cent, if

Joseph’s investment is modelled by which one of the following recurrence relations?

A. J0 = 2000, Jn+1 = Jn + 467.72

B. J0 = 2500, Jn+1 = Jn + 367.72

C. J0 = 3000, Jn+1 = Jn + 317.72

D. J0 = 3500, Jn+1 = Jn + 267.72

E. J0 = 4000, Jn+1 = Jn + 467.72

Question 45/ 126

[VCAA 2022 FM (32%)]

On 1 January 2020, Dion invested $10 500 into an investment account paying compound interest of 0.52%
quarterly.

At the end of each quarter, after the interest was credited, Dion added an additional amount of money.

Let Dn represent the additional amount, in dollars, added at the end of quarter n.

This additional amount per quarter is modelled by the recurrence relation

D1 = C, Dn+1 = Dn

The balance of Dion’s investment account on 1 January 2022 was $12 700.95. The value of C is
A. $71.69

B. $215.55

C. $260.22

D. $270.15

E. $275.12

Question 1/ 164

[VCAA 2018 FM (78%)]

Which one of the following matrices has a determinant of zero?

0 1
A. [ ]
1 0

1 0
B. [ ]
0 1

1 2
C. [ ]
−3 6

3 6
D. [ ]
2 4

4 0
E. [ ]
0 −2

Question 2/ 164

[VCAA 2018 FM (68%)]

 4
The matrix product [4 2 0] × 12 is equal to
8
A. [144]

16
B. 24
0

1
C. 4 × [1 2 0] × 12
8

2
D. 2 × [2 1 0] × 6
4

2
E. 4 × [2 1 0] × 6
4

Question 3/ 164

[VCAA 2018 FM (78%)]

Five people, India (I ), Jackson (J ), Krishna (K ), Leanne (L) and Mustafa (M ), competed in a table tennis
tournament. Each competitor played every other competitor once only.

Each match resulted in a winner and a loser.

The matrix below shows the tournament results.

A ‘1’ in the matrix shows that the competitor named in that row defeated the competitor named in that
column.

For example, the ‘1’ in the fourth row shows that Leanne defeated Jackson.

A ‘0’ in the matrix shows that the competitor named in that row lost to the competitor named in that column.

There is an error in the matrix. The winner of one of the matches has been incorrectly recorded as a ‘0’.

This match was between

A. India and Mustafa.

B. India and Krishna.

C. Krishna and Leanne.

D. Leanne and Mustafa.

E. Jackson and Mustafa.

Question 4/ 164

[VCAA 2018 FM (69%)]

Matrix P is a 4 × 4 permutation matrix. Matrix W is another matrix such that the matrix product P ×W
is defined. This matrix product results in the entire first and third rows of matrix W being swapped. The
permutation matrix P is

0 0 0 1
0 1 0 0
A.
0 0 1 0
0 0 0 1
 0 0 1 0
0 1 0 0
B.
1 0 0 0
0 0 0 1

1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
C.
1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
D.
0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0
E.
1 0 0 0
0 0 0 1

Question 5/ 164

[VCAA 2018 FM (81%)]

A transition matrix, V , is shown below.

The transition diagram below has been constructed from the transition matrix V .

The labelling in the transition diagram is not yet complete.

The proportion for one of the transitions is labelled x.

The value of x is

A. 0.2

B. 0.5

C. 0.6

D. 0.7

E. 0.8

Question 6/ 164

[VCAA 2018 FM (28%)]

A study of the antelope population in a wildlife park has shown that antelope regularly move between three
locations, east (E ), north (N ) and west (W ).

Let An be the state matrix that shows the population of antelope in each location n months after the study
began.

The expected population of antelope in each location can be determined by the matrix recurrence rule
 An+1 = T An − D
where

this month
E N W
0.4 0.2 0.2 E
T = 0.3 0.6 0.3 N next month
0.3 0.2 0.5 W
and

50 E
D = 50 N
50 W

The state matrix, A3 , below shows the population of antelope three months after the study began.

1616 E
A3 = 2800 N
2134 W

The number of antelope in the west (W ) location two months after the study began, as found in the state
matrix A2 , is closest to

A. 2060

B. 2130

C. 2200

D. 2240

E. 2270

Question 7/ 164

[VCAA 2018 FM (46%)]

A public library organised 500 of its members into five categories according to the number of books each
member borrows each month.
These categories are

J = no books borrowed per month

K = one book borrowed per month
L = two books borrowed per month
M = three books borrowed per month
N = four or more books borrowed per month

The transition matrix, T , below shows how the number of books borrowed per month by the members is
expected to change from month to month.

this month
J K L M N
0.1 0.2 0.2 0 0 J
0.5 0.2 0.3 0.1 0 K
T = 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.1 0.2 L next month
0.1 0.2 0.1 0.6 0.3 M
0 0.1 0 0.2 0.5 N
In the long term, which category is expected to have approximately 96 members each month?

A. J

B. K

C. L

D. M

E. N

Question 8/ 164

[VCAA 2019 FM (87%)]

Consider the following four matrix expressions.

 8 4 8 4 0
[ ]+[ ] [ ]+[ ]
12 2 12 0 2
8 0 4 8 0 4 0
[ ]+[ ] [ ]+[ ]
12 0 2 12 0 0 2
How many of these four matrix expressions are defined?

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4

Question 9/ 164

[VCAA 2019 FM (68%)]

There are two rides called The Big Dipper and The Terror Train at a carnival.

The cost, in dollars, for a child to ride on each ride is shown in the table below.

Ride Cost ($)

The Big Dipper 7
The Terror Train 8

Six children ride once only on The Big Dipper and once only on The Terror Train.

The total cost of the rides, in dollars, for these six children can be determined by which one of the following
calculations?

A. [6] × [7 8]
7
B. [6] × [ ]
8

C. [6 6] × [7 8]
 7
D. [6 6] × [ ]
8

6
E. [ ] × [7 8]
6

Question 10/ 164

[VCAA 2019 FM (59%)]

3 2 1
Consider the matrix P , where P =[ ]
5 4 3

The element in row i and column j of matrix P is pij .

The elements in matrix P are determined by the rule

A. pij =4−j

B. pij = 2i + 1

C. pij =i+j+1

D. pij = i + 2j

E. pij = 2i − j + 2

Question 11/ 164

[VCAA 2019 FM (56%)]

Stella completed a multiple-choice test that had 10 questions.

Each question had five possible answers, A, B, C, D and E .

For question number one, Stella chose the answer E .

Stella choose each of the nine remaining answers, in order, by following the transition matrix, T , below.

this question
A B C D E
0 0 1 0 0 A
0 0 0 1 0 B
T = 0 0 0 0 1 C next question
1 0 0 0 0 D
0 1 0 0 0 E
What answer did Stella choose for question number six?

A. A

B. B

C. P

D. D

E. E

Question 12/ 164

[VCAA 2019 FM (39%)]

A water park is open from 9 am until 5 pm. There are three activities, the pool (P ), the slide (S ) and the
water jets (W ), at the water park.

Children have been found to change their activity at the water park each half hour, as shown in the transition
matrix, T , below.

this half month

P S W
0.80 0.20 0.40 P
T = 0.05 0.60 0.10 S next half month
0.15 0.20 0.50 W
A group of children has come to the water park for the whole day.

The percentage of these children who are expected to be at the slide (S ) at closing time is closest to

A. 14%

B. 20%

C. 24%

D. 25%

E. 62%

Question 13/ 164

[VCAA 2019 FM (54%)]

The communication matrix below shows the direct paths by which messages can be sent between two people
in a group of six people, U to Z .

receiver
U V W X Y Z
U 0 1 1 0 1 1
V 1 0 1 0 1 0
W 1 1 0 1 0 1
sender
X 0 1 0 0 1 1
Y 0 0 1 1 0 1
Z 1 1 0 1 1 0
A ‘1’ in the matrix shows that the person named in that row can send a message directly to the person named
in that column. For example, the ‘1’ in row 4, column 2 shows that X can send a message directly to V .

In how many ways can Y get a message to W by sending it directly to one other person?

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3
E. 4

Question 14/ 164

[VCAA 2019 FM (15%)]

An airline parks all of its planes at Sydney airport or Melbourne airport overnight.

The transition diagram below shows the change in the location of the planes from night to night.

There are always m planes parked at Melbourne airport.

There are always s planes parked at Sydney airport.

Of the planes parked at Melbourne airport on Tuesday night, 12 had been parked at Sydney airport on
Monday night.

How many planes does the airline have?

A. 25

B. 37

C. 62

D. 65

E. 85
Question 15/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (83%)]

1 0 0
The matrix 0 1 1 is an example of
1 0 1
A. a binary matrix.

B. an identity matrix.

C. a triangular matrix.

D. a symmetric matrix.

E. a permutation matrix.

Question 16/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (79%)]

1 2
0 3 2 0 3 1
Matrix A = and matrix B = [ ].
1 0 4 5 2 0
4 5

Matrix Q = A × B.

The element in row i and column j of matrix Q is qij .

Element q41 is determined by the calculation

A. 0 × 0 + 3 × 5

B. 1 × 1 × 2 × 0

C. 1 × 2 + 2 × 4

D. 4 × 1 + 5 × 0

E. 4 × 2 + 5 × 4
Question 17/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (64%)]

Matrices P and W are defined below.

0 0 1 0 0 A
0 0 0 0 1 S
P = 0 1 0 0 0 W = T
0 0 0 1 0 O
1 0 0 0 0 R

A
S
If P n × W T , the value of n could be
O
R
A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 5

Question 18/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (90%)]

Ina particular supermarket, the three top-selling magazines are Angel (A), Bella (B) and Crystal (C).

The transition diagram below shows the way shoppers at this supermarket change their magazine choice from
week to week.
A transition matrix that provides the same information as the transition diagram is

this week
A B C
A. 0.55 0.70 0.35 A
0.70 0.60 0.40 B next week
0.35 0.40 0.40 C

this week
A B C
B. 0.55 0.60 0.25 A
0.45 0.15 0.35 B next week
0 0.25 0.40 C

this week
A B C
C. 0.55 0.25 0.35 A
0.45 0.60 0.25 B next week
0 0.15 0.40 C

this week
A B C
D. 0.55 0.25 0.35 A
0.45 0.60 0.25 B next week
0.35 0.15 0.40 C
 this week
A B C
E. 0.55 0.25 0 A
0.45 0.60 0.25 B next week
0 0.15 0.40 C

Question 19/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (86%)]

The diagram below shows the direct communication links that exist between Sam (S ), Tai (T ), Umi (U ) and
Vera (V ). For example, the arrow from Umi to Vera indicates that Umi can communicate directly with Vera.

A communication matrix can be used to convey the same information. In this matrix:

• a ‘1’ indicates that a direct communication link exists between a sender and a receiver

• a ‘0’ indicates that a direct communication link does not exist between a sender and a receiver.

The communication matrix could be

receiver
S T U V
S 0 1 0 1
A.
T 0 0 0 1
sender
U 0 1 0 1
V 1 0 1 0
 receiver
S T U V
S 0 1 0 1
B.
T 1 0 0 1
sender
U 0 1 0 1
V 1 1 1 0

receiver
S T U V
S 0 1 0 1
C.
T 0 0 0 1
sender
U 0 1 0 0
V 1 1 1 0

receiver
S T U V
S 0 1 0 1
D.
T 0 0 0 1
sender
U 0 1 0 1
V 1 1 1 0

receiver
S T U V
S 0 1 0 2
E.
T 0 0 0 2
sender
U 0 1 0 2
V 2 2 2 0

Question 20/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (73%)]

The element in row i and column j of matrix M is mij .

M is a 3 × 3 matrix. It is constructed using the rule mij = 3i + 2j .

M is
 5 7 9
A. 7 9 11
11 13 15

5 7 9
B. 8 10 12
11 13 15

5 7 10
C. 8 10 13
11 13 16

5 8 11
D. 7 10 13
9 12 15

5 8 11
E. 8 11 14
11 14 17

Question 21/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (38%)]

A small shopping centre has two coffee shops: Fatima’s (F ) and Giorgio’s (G).

The percentage of coffee-buyers at each shop changes from day to day, as shown in the transition matrix T .

today
F G
tomorrow
0.85 0.35 F
T =[ ]
0.15 0.65 G
On a particular Monday, 40% of coffee-buyers bought their coffees at Fatima’s.

The matrix recursion relation Sn+1 = T Sn is used to model this situation.

The percentage of coffee-buyers who are expected to buy their coffee at Giorgio’s on Friday of the same
week is closest to
A. 31%

B. 32%

C. 34%

D. 45%

E. 68%

Question 22/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (57%)]

The table below shows information about three matrices: A, B and C .

Matrix Order

A 2×4
B 2×3
C 3×4

The transpose of matrix A, for example, is written as AT .

What is the order of the product C T × (AT × B)T ?

A. 2 × 3

B. 3 × 4

C. 4 × 2

D. 4 × 3

E. 4 × 4
Question 23/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (41%)]

Consider the matrix recurrence relation below.

30 j 0.3 l
S0 = 20 , Sn+1 = T Sn where T = 0.2 m 0.3
40 0.4 0.2 n

Matrix T is a regular transition matrix.

42
Given the information above and that S1 = 28 , which one of the following is true?
20

A. m >l

B. j + l = 0.7

C. j =n

D. j >m

E. l =m+n

Question 24/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (63%)]

Five competitors, Andy (A), Brie (B ), Cleo (C ), Della (D ) and Eddie (E ), participate in a darts
tournament.

Each competitor plays each of the other competitors once only, and each match results in a winner and a
loser.

The matrix below shows the results of this darts tournament.

There are still two matches that need to be played.

 loser
A B C D E
A 0 … 0 1 0
B … 0 1 0 1
winner C 1 0 0 … 1
D 0 1 … 0 0
E 1 0 0 1 0
A ‘1’ in the matrix shows that the competitor named in that row defeated the competitor named in that
column.

For example, the ‘1’ in row 2, column 3 shows that Brie defeated Cleo.

A ‘...’ in the matrix shows that the competitor named in that row has not yet played the competitor named in
that column.

The winner of this darts tournament is the competitor with the highest sum of their one-step and two-step
dominances.

Which player, by winning their remaining match, will ensure that they are ranked first by the sum of their
one-step and two-step dominances?

A. Andy

B. Brie

C. Cleo

D. Della

E. Eddie

Question 25/ 164

[VCAA 2021 FM (82%)]

3 2
If matrix M = 8 9 , then its transpose, M T , is
13 7

2 3
A. 9 8
7 13
 2 9 7
B. [ ]
3 8 13

7 9 2
C. [ ]
13 8 3

3 8 13
D. [ ]
2 9 7

13 8 3
E. [ ]
7 9 2

Question 26/ 164

[VCAA 2021 FM (73%)]

Every Friday, the same number of workers from a large office building regularly purchase their lunch from
one of two locations: the deli, D , or the cafe, C .

It has been found that:

• of the workers who purchase lunch from the deli on one Friday, 65% will return to purchase from the deli
on the next Friday

• of the workers who purchase lunch from the cafe on one Friday, 55% will return to purchase from the cafe
on the next Friday.

A transition matrix that can be used to describe this situation is

this F riday
D C
A.
0.55 0.35 D
[ ] next F riday
0.45 0.65 C

this F riday
D C
B.
0.65 0.45 D
[ ] next F riday
0.45 0.55 C
 this F riday
D C
C.
0.65 0.55 D
[ ] next F riday
0.45 0.55 C

this F riday
D C
D.
0.65 0.45 D
[ ] next F riday
0.35 0.55 C

this F riday
D C
E.
0.65 0.55 D
[ ] next F riday
0.35 0.45 C

Question 27/ 164

[VCAA 2021 FM (73%)]

Ramon and Norma are names that contain the same letters but in a different order.

R N
A O
The permutation matrix that can change M into R is
O M
N A

0 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0 0
A. 0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 0

0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 0
B. 0 0 1 0 0
1 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0
 1 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 0
C. 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 0
D. 0 1 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 0
E. 1 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0

Question 28/ 164

[VCAA 2021 FM (45%)]

A is a 7 × 7 matrix.

B is a 10 × 7 matrix.
Which one of the following matrix expressions is defined?

A. AB − 2B

B. A(BA)−1

C. AB 2

D. A2 − BA

E. A(B T )
Question 29/ 164

[VCAA 2021 FM (66%)]

A fitness centre offers four different exercise classes: aerobics (A), boxfit (B ), cardio (C ) and dance (D ).

A customer’s choice of fitness class is expected to change from week to week according to the transition
matrix P , shown below.

this week
A B C D
0.65 0 0.20 0.10 A
0 0.65 0.10 0.30 B
P = next week
0.20 0.10 0.70 0 C
0.15 0.25 0 0.60 D
An equivalent transition diagram has been constructed below, but the labelling is not complete.

The proportion for one of the transitions is labelled w .

The value of w is

A. 10%

B. 15%

C. 20%

D. 25%
E. 30%

Question 30/ 164

[VCAA 2021 FM (40%)]

The matrix Sn+1 is determined from the matrix Sn using the recurrence relation

Sn+1 = T × Sn − C , where

0.6 0.1 0.3 21 24.0

T = 0.3 0.8 0.2 , S0 = 51 , S1 = 54.3
0.1 0.1 0.5 31 20.7

and C is a column matrix.

Matrix S2 is equal to

23.04
A. 55.78
16.18

25.34
B. 56.28
17.38

26.04
C. 54.78
18.18

28.34
D. 55.28
19.38

29.04
E. 53.78
20.18
Question 31/ 164

[VCAA 2021 FM (29%)]

A new colony of endangered marsupials is established on a remote island. For one week, the marsupials can
feed from only one of three feeding stations: A, B or C . On Monday, 50% of the marsupials were observed
feeding at station A and 50% were observed feeding at station B . No marsupials were observed feeding at
station C .

The marsupials are expected to change their feeding stations each day this week according to the transition
matrix T .

this day
A B C
0.4 0.1 0.2 A
T = 0.2 0.5 0.2 B next day
0.4 0.4 0.6 C

Let Sn represent the state matrix showing the percentage of marsupials observed feeding at each feeding
station n days after Monday of this week.

The matrix recurrence rule Sn+1 = T Sn is used to model this situation.

From Tuesday to Wednesday, the percentage of marsupials who are not expected to change their feeding
location is

A. 44.5%

B. 45%

C. 50%

D. 51.5%

E. 52%

Question 32/ 164

Use the following information to answer Questions 33 and 34.

A bike rental business rents road bikes (R) and mountain bikes (M ) in three sizes: child (C ), junior (J)
and adult (A). Matrix B shows the daily rental cost, in dollars, for each type of bike. The element in row i
and column j in matrix B is by .

R M
80 95 C
B = 110 120 J
120 135 A

Question 33/ 164

[VCAA 2022 FM (83%)]

The daily cost of renting an adult mountain bike is shown in element A.

A. b12

B. b21

C. b23

D. b31

E. b32

Question 34/ 164

[VCAA 2022 FM (68%)]

On Sundays, the business increases the daily rental price for each type of bike by 10%. To determine the
rental cost for each type of bike on a Sunday, which one of the following matrix calculations needs to be
completed?

A. 0.01B
B. 0.1B

C. 1.01B

D. 1.1B

E. 11B

Question 35/ 164

[VCAA 2022 FM (71%)]

Each day, members of a swim centre can choose to attend a morning session (M ), an afternoon session (A)
or no session (N ). The transition diagram right shows the transition from day to day. The transition diagram
is incomplete.

Which one of the following transition matrices represents this transition diagram?

this day
M A N
A. 0.2 0.1 0.1 M
0.3 0.5 0.3 A next day
0.5 0.4 0.6 N
 this day
M A N
B. 0.3 0.1 0.6 M
0.5 0.4 0.3 A next day
0.2 0.5 0.1 N

this day
M A N
C. 0.3 0.1 0.6 M
0.2 0.4 0.3 A next day
0.5 0.5 0.1 N

this day
M A N
D. 0.3 0.5 0.2 M
0.1 0.4 0.7 A next day
0.6 0.1 0.1 N

this day
M A N
E. 0.3 0 0.6 M
0.2 0.4 0 A next day
0 0.5 0.1 N

Question 36/ 164

[VCAA 2022 FM (87%)]

The communication matrix below shows the communication links between five people: Steph (S ), Tran (7),
Ursula (U ), Vinh (V ) and Wanda (W ).

receiver
S T U V W
S 0 1 1 0 1
T 0 0 0 1 1
sender U 0 1 0 1 0
V 0 0 1 0 0
W 1 0 0 1 0
In this matrix:

• the ‘1’ in row S , column T indicates that Steph can communicate directly with Tran

• the ‘0’ in row V , column W indicates that Vinh cannot communicate directly with Wanda.

Ursula needs to communicate with Steph.

The sequence of communication links that will successfully allow Ursula to communicate with Steph is

A. U -T -S

B. U -W -S

C. U -T -W -S

D. U −V −T −S

E. U −W −T −S

Question 37/ 164

[VCAA 2022 FM (71%)]

Matrix E is a 2 × 2 matrix. Matrix F is a 2 × 3 matrix. Matrix G is a 3 × 2 matrix.

Matrix H is a 3 × 3 matrix.

Which one of the following matrix products could have an inverse?

A. EF

B. F H

C. GE

D. GF

E. HG
Question 38/ 164

[VCAA 2022 FM (42%)]

Matrix K is a permutation matrix.

0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0
K= 0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0 0

Matrix M is a column matrix that is multiplied once by matrix K to obtain matrix P .

When matrix M is multiplied by matrix K , the element m31 moves to element

A. p11

B. p21

C. p31

D. p41

E. p5l

Question 39/ 164

[VCAA 2022 FM (31%)]

Two types of computers – laptops (L) and desktops (D) – can be serviced by Henry (H), Irvine (I) or
Jean (J). Matrix N shows the time, in minutes, it takes each person to service a laptop and a desktop.

L D
18 8 H
N = 10 17 I
12 9 J
Matrix Q shows the number of laptops and desktops in four different departments: marketing (M ),
advertising (A), publishing (P ) and editing (E).

L D
6 8 M
4 7 A
Q=
5 5 P
10 12 E
A calculation that determines the total time that it would take each of Henry, Irvine or Jean, working alone, to
service all the laptops and desktops in all four departments is

A. [1 1 1 1] × (Q × N T )

1
1
B. (Q × N T ) ×
1
1

C. (N × QT ) × Q

1 0 0
D. 0 1 0 × N × QT
0 0 1

1
E. [1 1 1 1] × Q × N × 1 T

Question 1/ 206

[VCAA 2018 FM (92%)]

Consider the graph with five isolated vertices shown below.

To form a tree, the minimum number of edges that must be added to the graph is

A. 1

B. 4

C. 5

D. 6

E. 10

Question 2/ 206

[VCAA 2018 FM (68%)]

Niko drives from his home to university. The network below shows the distances, in kilometres, along a
series of streets connecting Niko’s home to the university. The vertices A, B, C, D and E represent the
intersection of these streets.

The shortest path for Niko from his home to the university could be found using

A. a minimum cut.

B. Prim’s algorithm.
C. Dijkstra’s algorithm.

D. critical path analysis.

E. the Hungarian algorithm.

Question 3/ 206

[VCAA 2018 FM (76%)]

A planar graph has five faces. This graph could have

A. eight vertices and eight edges.

B. six vertices and eight edges.

C. eight vertices and five edges.

D. eight vertices and six edges.

E. five vertices and eight edges.

Question 4/ 206

[VCAA 2018 FM (88%)]

Consider the graph right. Which one of the following is not a path for this graph?
A. PRQTS

B. PQRTS

C. PRTSQ

D. PTQSR

E. PTRQS

Question 5/ 206

[VCAA 2018 FM (43%)]

The directed network below shows the sequence of 11 activities that are needed to complete a project. The
time, in weeks, that it takes to complete each activity is also shown.

How many of these activities could be delayed without affecting the minimum completion time of the
project?
A. 3

B. 4

C. 5

D. 6

E. 7

Question 6/ 206

[VCAA 2018 FM (41%)]

Which one of the following graphs is not a planar graph?

A.

B.

C.
D.

E.

Question 7/ 206

[VCAA 2018 FM (49%)]

A project requires nine activities (A–I ) to be completed. The duration, in hours, and the immediate
predecessor(s) of each activity are shown in the table below.

Activity Duration (hours) Immediate predecessor(s)

A 4 –

B 3 A
C 7 A
D 2 A
E 5 B
F 2 C
G 4 E, F
 Activity Duration (hours) Immediate predecessor(s)

H 5 D
I 3 G, H

The minimum completion time for this project, in hours, is

A. 14

B. 19

C. 20

D. 24

E. 35

Question 8/ 206

[VCAA 2018 FM (24%)]

Annie, Buddhi, Chuck and Dorothy work in a factory.

Today each worker will complete one of four tasks, 1, 2, 3 and 4.

The usual completion times for Annie, Chuck and Dorothy are shown in the table below.

Task 1 Task 2 Task 3 Task 4

Annie 7 3 8 2

Buddhi k k 3 k
Chuck 5 6 9 2
Dorothy 4 8 5 3

Buddhi takes 3 minutes for Task 3. He takes k minutes for each other task.

Today the factory supervisor allocates the tasks as follows:

• Task 1 to Dorothy

• Task 2 to Annie

• Task 3 to Buddh

• Task 4 to Chuck

This allocation will achieve the minimum total completion time if the value of k is at least

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4

Question 9/ 206

[VCAA 2019 FM (85%)]

In the graph shown to the right, the sum of the degrees of the vertices is

A. 5

B. 6

C. 10

D. 11

E. 12
Question 10/ 206

[VCAA 2019 FM (64%)]

Consider the graph below.

The minimum number of extra edges that are required so that an Eulerian circuit is possible in this graph is

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4

Question 11/ 206

[VCAA 2019 FM (85%)]

The flow of water through a series of pipes is shown in the network below.

The numbers on the edges show the maximum flow through each pipe in litres per minute.
The capacity of Cut Q, in litres per minute, is

A. 11

B. 13

C. 14

D. 16

E. 17

Question 12/ 206

[VCAA 2019 FM (71%)]

Two graphs, labelled Graph 1 and Graph 2, are shown below.

Which one of the following statements is not true?

A. Graph 1 and Graph 2 are isomorphic.

B. Graph 1 has five edges and Graph 2 has six edges.

C. Both Graph 1 and Graph 2 are connected graphs.

D. Both Graph 1 and Graph 2 have three faces each.

E. Neither Graph 1 nor Graph 2 are complete graphs.

Question 13/ 206

[VCAA 2019 FM (75%)]

The following diagram shows the distances, in metres, along a series of cables connecting a main server to
seven points, A to G, in a computer network.

The minimum length of cable, in metres, required to ensure that each of the seven points is connected to the
main server directly or via another point is

A. 175

B. 203

C. 208

D. 221

E. 236
Question 14/ 206

[VCAA 2019 FM (39%)]

The map below shows all the road connections between five towns, P , Q, R, S and T .

The road connections could be represented by the adjacency matrix

P Q R S T
P 1 3 0 2 2
Q 3 0 1 1 1
A.
R 0 1 0 1 0
S 2 1 1 0 2
T 2 1 0 2 0

P Q R S T
P 1 2 0 2 2
Q 2 0 1 1 1
B.
R 0 1 0 1 0
S 2 1 1 0 2
T 2 1 0 2 0
 P Q R S T
P 0 3 0 2 2
Q 3 0 1 1 1
C.
R 0 1 0 1 0
S 2 1 1 0 2
T 2 1 0 2 0

P Q R S T
P 0 2 0 2 2
Q 2 0 1 1 1
D.
R 0 1 0 1 0
S 2 1 1 0 2
T 2 1 0 2 0

P Q R S T
P 1 2 0 2 2
Q 2 0 1 1 1
E.
R 0 1 0 1 0
S 2 1 1 1 1
T 2 1 0 1 0

Question 15/ 206

[VCAA 2019 FM (42%)]

A project involves nine activities, A to I . The immediate predecessor(s) of each activity is shown in the table
below.

Activity Immediate predecessor(s)

A –

B A
C A
D B
E B, C
 Activity Immediate predecessor(s)

F D
G D
H E, F
I G, H

A directed network for this project will require a dummy activity. The dummy activity will be drawn from the
end of

A. activity B to the start of activity C .

B. activity B to the start of activity E .

C. activity D to the start of activity E .

D. activity E to the start of activity H .

E. activity E to the start of activity F .

Question 16/ 206

[VCAA 2019 FM (31%)]

The directed network below shows the sequence of activities, A to S , that is required to complete a
manufacturing process. The time taken to complete each activity, in hours, is also shown.
The number of activities that have a float time of 10 hours is

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4

Question 17/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (89%)]

A connected planar graph has seven vertices and nine edges.

The number of faces that this graph will have is

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 5

Question 18/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (93%)]

Consider the graph below.

Which one of the following is not a Hamiltonian cycle for this graph?

A. ABCDFEGA

B. BAGEF DCB

C. CDFEGABC

D. DCBAGFED

E. EGABCDFE

Question 19/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (81%)]

Which one of the following is not a spanning tree for the network right?
A.

B.

C.

D.

E.
Question 20/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (39%)]

The directed graph below represents a series of one-way streets.

The vertices represent the intersections of these streets.

The number of vertices that can be reached from S is

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 5

Question 21/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (56%)]

The network below shows the distances, in metres, between camp sites at a camping ground that has
electricity. The vertices A to I represent the camp sites.
The minimum length of cable required to connect all the camp sites is 53 m.

The value of x, in metres, is at least

A. 5

B. 6

C. 8

D. 9

E. 11

Question 22/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (61%)]

The activity network below shows the sequence of activities required to complete a project.

The number next to each activity in the network is the time it takes to complete that activity, in days.
The minimum completion time for this project, in days, is

A. 18

B. 19

C. 20

D. 21

E. 22

Question 23/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (11%)]

Four friends go to an ice-cream shop.

Akiro chooses chocolate and strawberry ice cream.

Doris chooses chocolate and vanilla ice cream.

Gohar chooses vanilla ice cream.

Imani chooses vanilla and lemon ice cream.

This information could be presented as a graph.

Consider the following four statements:

• The graph would be connected.

• The graph would be bipartite.

• The graph would be planar.

• The graph would be a tree.

How many of these four statements are true?

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4

Question 24/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (75%)]

The adjacency matrix right shows the number of pathway connections between four landmarks: J, K, L
and M .

J K L M
J 1 3 0 2
K 3 0 1 2
L 0 1 0 2
M 2 2 2 0
A network of pathways that could be represented by the adjacency matrix is

A.
B.

C.

D.

E.

Question 25/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (60%)]

The flow of liquid through a series of pipelines, in litres per minute, is shown in the directed network below.

Five cuts labelled A to E are shown on the network.

The number of these cuts with a capacity equal to the maximum flow of liquid from the source to the sink, in
litres per minute, is

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 5

Question 26/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (24%)]

The directed network below shows the sequence of activities, A to I , that is required to complete an office
renovation.

The time taken to complete each activity, in weeks, is also shown.

The project manager would like to complete the office renovation in less time.

The project manager asks all the workers assigned to activity H to also work on activity F .

This will reduce the completion time of activity F to three weeks.

The workers assigned to activity H cannot work on both activity H and activity F at the same time. No
other activity times will be changed.

This change to the network will result in a change to the completion time of the office renovation. Which one
of the following is correct?

A. The completion time will be reduced by one week if activity F is completed before activity H is started.

B. The completion time will be reduced by three weeks if activity F is completed before activity H is
started.

C. The completion time will be reduced by one week if activity H is completed before activity F is started.

D. The completion time will be reduced by three week if activity H is completed before activity F is started.

E. The completion time will be increased by three weeks if activity H is completed before activity F is
started.

Question 27/ 206

[VCAA 2021 FM (91%)]

Consider the graph below.

The number of vertices with a degree of 3 is

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 5

Question 28/ 206

[VCAA 2021 FM (95%)]

Five friends ate fruit for morning tea.

The bipartite graph below shows which types of fruit each friend ate.

Which one of the following statements is not true?

A. Only Lee ate pear.

B. Eric and Kai each ate apple.

C. Van ate only strawberry.

D. Quinn and Kai each ate banana.

E. Orange was the most eaten type of fruit.

Question 29/ 206

[VCAA 2021 FM (34%)]

Consider the graph below.

The number of faces is

A. 2

B. 3

C. 4

D. 5

E. 6
Question 30/ 206

Consider the directed network below.

The number of vertices that cannot be reached from X is

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 5

Question 31/ 206

[VCAA 2021 FM (17%)]

Consider the following five statements about the graph above:

• The graph is planar.

• The graph contains a cycle.

• The graph contains a bridge.

• The graph contains an Eulerian trail.

• The graph contains a Hamiltonian path.

How many of these statements are true?

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 5

Question 32/ 206

[VCAA 2021 FM (46%)]

The directed graph below shows the sequence of activities required to complete a project. The time taken to
complete each activity, in hours, is also shown.
The minimum completion time for this project is 18 hours.

The time taken to complete activity E is labelled x.

The maximum value of x is

A. 2

B. 3

C. 4

D. 5

E. 6

Question 33/ 206

[VCAA 2021 FM (33%)]

The network below shows the pathways between five buildings: J , K , L, M and N .
An adjacency matrix for this network is formed. The number of zeros in this matrix is

A. 8

B. 9

C. 10

D. 11

E. 12

Question 34/ 206

[VCAA 2021 FM (48%)]

A network of roads connecting towns in an alpine region is shown below.

The distances between neighbouring towns, represented by the vertices, are given in kilometres.
The region receives a large snowfall, leaving all roads between the towns closed to traffic. To ensure each
town is accessible by car from every other town, some roads will be cleared.

The minimum total length of road, in kilometres, that needs to be cleared is

A. 361 if x = 50 and y = 55

B. 361 if x = 50 and y = 60

C. 366 if x = 55 and y = 55

D. 366 if x = 55 and y = 60

E. 371 if x = 55 and y = 65

Question 35/ 206

[VCAA 2022 FM (80%)]

The network below shows the distances, in kilometres, along a series of roads. The vertices
A, B, C, D, E, F , G and H represent the intersections of these roads.
Prim’s algorithm can be used to find the

A. critical path.

B. shortest path.

C. minimum cut.

D. minimum allocation.

E. minimum spanning tree.

Question 36/ 206

[VCAA 2022 FM (49%)]

The map below shows seven countries within Central America.

A network diagram was drawn with seven vertices to represent each of the countries on the map of Central
America. Edges were drawn to represent a border shared between two countries. The number of edges that
this network has is

A. 5

B. 6

C. 7

D. 8

E. 9

Question 37/ 206

[VCAA 2022 FM (39%)]

An athletics club needs to select one team of four athletes. The team is required to have one long jump, one
high jump, one shot put and one javelin competitor. The following table shows the best distances, in metres,
for each athlete for each event.

Long jump High jump Shot put

Athlete Javelin (m)
(m) (m) (m)
Eve 4.8 1.7 13.1 40.9
 Long jump High jump Shot put
Athlete Javelin (m)
(m) (m) (m)
Harsha 4.8 1.6 13.9 39.5
Shona 5.1 1.8 14.4 41.2
Taylor 4.8 1.7 12.8 39.8

The athletics club will allocate each athlete to one event in order to maximise the total distance that the team
jumps and throws. Which allocation of athlete to event must occur in order to maximise the total distance?

long jump high jump shot put javelin

Shona Harsha Eve Taylor
long jump high jump shot put javelin
Shona Taylor Harsha Eve
long jump high jump shot put javelin
Eve Harsha Taylor Shona
long jump high jump shot put javelin
Harsha Taylor Shona Eve
long jump high jump shot put javelin
Harsha Taylor Eve Shona

Question 38/ 206

[VCAA 2022 FM (21%)]

Consider the graph right.

The number of edges that need to be removed for this graph to be planar is

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4

Question 39/ 206

[VCAA 2022 FM (54%)]

A connected graph consists of five vertices and four edges.

Which one of the following statements is not true?

A. The graph could be a tree.

B. The graph could be planar.

C. The graph could be bipartite.

D. The graph could contain a path.

E. The graph could contain a cycle.

Question 40/ 206

[VCAA 2022 FM (48%)]

A landscaping project has 12 activities. The network below gives the time, in hours, that it takes to complete
each activity.

The earliest start time, in hours, for activity G is

A. 10

B. 11

C. 12

D. 13

E. 14

Question 41/ 206

Use the following information to answer Questions 42 and 43.

A project involves 11 activities, A to K . The table below shows the earliest start time and duration, in days,
for each activity. The immediate predecessor(s) of each activity is also shown.

Activity Earliest start time Duration Immediate predecessor(s)

A 0 6 –
 Activity Earliest start time Duration Immediate predecessor(s)

B 0 7 –

C 6 10 A
D 6 7 A
E 7 8 B
F 15 2 D, E
G 15 2 E
H 17 3 G
I 20 6 C, F , H
J 17 5 G
K 26 2 I, J

Question 42/ 206

[VCAA 2022 FM (49%)]

A directed network for this project will require a dummy activity.

The dummy activity will be drawn from the end of

A. activity A to the start of activity D .

B. activity E to the start of activity F .

C. activity F to the start of activity I .

D. activity G to the start of activity H .

E. activity I to the start of activity J .

Question 43/ 206

[VCAA 2022 FM (34%)]

When this project is completed in the minimum time, the sum of all the float times, in days, will be

A. 0

B. 16

C. 18

D. 20

E. 28

Part B: Written-response questions

Question 1/ 231

[VCAA 2018 FM]

Table 1

Increase in travel time

City Congestion level Size
(minutes per day)
Belfast high small 52
Edinburgh high small 43
London high large 40
Manchester high large 44
Brighton and Hove high small 35
Bournemouth high small 36
Sheffield medium small 36
 Increase in travel time
City Congestion level Size
(minutes per day)
Hull medium small 40
Bristol medium small 39
Newcastle-Sunderland medium large 34
Leicester medium small 36
Liverpool medium large 29
Swansea low small 30
Glasgow low large 34
Cardiff low small 31
Nottingham low small 31
Birmingham-Wolverhampton low large 29
Leeds-Bradford low large 31
Portsmouth low small 27
Southampton low small 30
Reading low small 31
Coventry low small 30
Stoke-on-Trent low small 29

Data: TomTom International BV, <www.tomtom.com/en_gb/trafficindex>

The data in Table 1 relates to the impact of traffic congestion in 2016 on travel times in 23 cities in the United
Kingdom (UK).

The four variables in this data set are:

• city – name of city

• congestion level – traffic congestion level (high, medium, low)

• size – size of city (large, small)

• increase in travel time – increase in travel time due to traffic congestion (minutes per day).

a. How many variables in this data set are categorical variables?

[1 mark (0.7)]
b. How many variables in this data set are ordinal variables?

[1 mark (0.7)]

c. Name the large UK cities with a medium level of traffic congestion.

[1 mark (0.8)]

d. Use the data in Table 1 to complete the following two-way frequency table, Table 2.

[2 marks (1.9)]

Table 2

City size
Congestion level Small Large
high 4
medium
low
Total 16

e. What percentage of the small cities have a high level of traffic congestion?

[1 mark (0.8)]

Traffic congestion can lead to an increase in travel times in cities. The dot plot and boxplot below both show
the increase in travel time due to traffic congestion, in minutes per day, for the 23 UK cities.

f. Describe the shape of the distribution of the increase in travel time for the 23 cities.
[1 mark (0.9)]

g. The data value 52 is below the upper fence and is not an outlier.

Determine the value of the upper fence.

[1 mark (0.8)]

Question 2/ 231

[VCAA 2018 FM]

The congestion level in a city can also be recorded as the percentage increase in travel time due to traffic
congestion in peak periods (compared to non-peak periods).

This is called the percentage congestion level.

The percentage congestion levels for the morning and evening peak periods for 19 large cities are plotted on
the scatterplot below.

a. Determine the median percentage congestion level for the morning peak period and the evening peak
period.
Write your answers in the appropriate boxes provided below.

Median percentage congestion level for morning peak period

Median percentage congestion level for evening peak period

[2 marks (1.1)]

A least squares line is to be fitted to the data with the aim of predicting evening congestion level from
morning congestion level.

The equation of this line is

evening congestion level = 8.48 + 0.922 × morning congestion level.

b. Name the response variable in this equation.

[1 mark (0.9)]

c. Use the equation of the least squares line to predict the evening congestion level when the morning
congestion level is 60%.

[1 mark (0.8)]

d. Determine the residual value when the equation of the least squares line is used to predict the evening
congestion level when the morning congestion level is 47%.

Round your answer to one decimal place.

[2 marks (1.1)]

e. The value of the correlation coefficient r is 0.92

What percentage of the variation in the evening congestion level can be explained by the variation in the
morning congestion level?

Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

[1 mark (0.6)]
Question 3/ 231

[VCAA 2018 FM]

Table 3 shows the yearly average traffic congestion levels in two cities, Melbourne and Sydney, during the
period 2008 to 2016. Also shown is a time series plot of the same data.

The time series plot for Melbourne is incomplete.

Table 3

Congestion level (%)

Year 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016
Melbourne 25 26 26 27 28 28 28 29 33
Sydney 28 30 32 33 34 34 35 36 39

Data: TomTom International BV, <www.tomtom.com/en_gb/traflicindex>

a. Use the data in Table 3 to complete the time series plot above for Melbourne.

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. A least squares line is used to model the trend in the time series plot for Sydney. The equation is

congestion level = −2280 + 1.15 × year

i. Draw this least squares line on the time series plot above.

[1 mark (0.5)]

ii. Use the equation of the least squares line to determine the average rate of increase in percentage
congestion level for the period 2008 to 2016 in Sydney.

Write your answer in the box provided below.

[1 mark (0.4)]

iii. Use the least squares line to predict when the percentage congestion level in Sydney will be 43%.

[1 mark (0.8)]

The yearly average traffic congestion level data for Melbourne is repeated in Table 4 below.

Table 4

Congestion level (%)

Year 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016
Melbourne 25 26 26 27 28 28 28 29 33

c. When a least squares line is used to model the trend in the data for Melbourne, the intercept of this line is
approximately −1514.75556

Round this value to four significant figures.

[1 mark (0.7)]

d. Use the data in Table 4 to determine the equation of the least squares line that can be used to model the
trend in the data for Melbourne. The variable year is the explanatory variable.

Write the values of the intercept and the slope of this least squares line in the appropriate boxes provided
below. Round both values to four significant figures.

[2 marks (1.4)]

e. Since 2008, the equations of the least squares lines for Sydney and Melbourne have predicted that future
traffic congestion levels in Sydney will always exceed future traffic congestion levels in Melbourne.

Explain why, quoting the values of appropriate statistics.

[2 marks (0.4)]
Question 4/ 231

[VCAA 2019 FM]

Table 5

Table 5 shows the day number and the minimum temperature, in degrees Celsius, for 15 consecutive days in
May 2017.

Table 5

Day number Minimum temperature (°C)

1 12.7
2 11.8
3 10.7
4 9.0
5 6.0
6 7.0
7 4.1
8 4.8
9 9.2
10 6.7
11 7.5
12 8.0
13 8.6
14 9.8
15 7.7

Data: Australian Government, Bureau of Meteorology, <www.bom.gov.au>

a. Which of the two variables in this data set is an ordinal variable?

[1 mark (0.9)]

The incomplete ordered stem plot below has been constructed using the data values for days 1 to 10.

b. Complete the stem plot above by adding the data values for days 11 to 15.

[1 mark (0.9)]

c. The ordered stem plot below shows the maximum temperature, in degrees Celsius, for the same 15 days.

Data: Australian Government, Bureau of Meteorology, <www.bom.gov.au>

Use this stem plot to determine

i. the value of the first quartile (Q1)

[1 mark (0.8)]

ii. the percentage of days with a maximum temperature higher than 15.3°C.

[1 mark (0.9)]

Question 5/ 231

[VCAA 2019 FM]

The parallel boxplots below show the maximum daily temperature and minimum daily temperature, in
degrees Celsius, for 30 days in November 2017.

Data: Australian Government, Bureau of Meteorology, <www.bom.gov.au>

a. Use the information in the boxplots to complete the following sentences.

For November 2017

i. the interquartile range for the minimum daily temperature was °C [1 mark (0.9)]

ii. the median value for maximum daily temperature was °C higher than the median value for
minimum daily temperature. [1 mark (0.9)]

iii. the number of days on which the maximum daily temperature was less than the median value for minimum
daily temperature was . [1 mark (0.8)]

b. The temperature difference between the minimum daily temperature and the maximum daily temperature in
November 2017 at this location is approximately normally distributed with a mean of 9.4°C and a standard
deviation of 3.2°C.

Determine the number of days in November 2017 for which this temperature difference is expected to be
greater than 9.4°C.

[1 mark (0.6)]

Question 6/ 231

[VCAA 2019 FM]

The five-number summary for the distribution of minimum daily temperature for the months of February,
May and July in 2017 is shown in Table 6.

The associated boxplots are shown below the table.

Table 6. Five-number summary for minimum daily temperature

Month Minimum Q1 Median Q3 Maximum

February 5.9 9.5 10.9 13.9 22.2
May 3.3 6.0 7.5 9.8 12.7
July 1.6 3.7 5.0 5.9 7.7
Data: Australian Government, Bureau of Meteorology, <www.bom.gov.au>

Explain why the information given above supports the contention that minimum daily temperature is
associated with the month. Refer to the values of an appropriate statistic in your response.

[2 marks (1.0)]

Question 7/ 231

[VCAA 2019 FM]

The relative humidity (%) at 9 am and 3 pm on 14 days in November 2017 is shown in Table 7 below.

Table 7

Relative humidity (%)

9 am 3 pm
100 87
99 75
95 67
63 57
81 57
Relative humidity (%)
9 am 3 pm
94 74
96 71
81 62
73 53
53 54
57 36
77 39
51 30
41 32

Data: Australian Government, Bureau of Meteorology, <www.bom.gov.au>

A least squares line is to be fitted to the data with the aim of predicting the relative humidity at 3 pm
(humidity 3 pm) from the relative humidity at 9 am (humidity 9 am).

a. Name the explanatory variable.

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. Determine the values of the intercept and the slope of this least squares line.

Round both values to three significant figures and write them in the appropriate boxes provided.

[1 mark (0.6)]

c. Determine the value of the correlation coefficient for this data set.

Round your answer to three decimal places.

[1 mark (0.8)]

Question 8/ 231
[VCAA 2019 FM]

The scatterplot below shows the atmospheric pressure, in hectopascals (hPa), at 3 pm (pressure 3 pm) plotted
against the atmospheric pressure, in hectopascals, at 9 am (pressure 9 am) for 23 days in November 2017 at a
particular weather station.

Data: Australian Government, Bureau of Meteorology. <www.bom.gov.au>

A least squares line has been fitted to the scatterplot as shown.

The equation of this line is

pressure 3 pm = 111.4 + 0.8894 × pressure 9 am

a. Interpret the slope of this least squares line in terms of the atmospheric pressure at this weather station at 9
am and at 3 pm.

[1 mark (0.5)]

b. Use the equation of the least squares line to predict the atmospheric pressure at 3 pm when the atmospheric
pressure at 9 am is 1025 hPa.

Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

[1 mark (0.9)]

c. Is the prediction made in part b. an example of extrapolation or interpolation?

[1 mark (0.9)]

d. Determine the residual when the atmospheric pressure at 9 am is 1013 hPa.

Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

[1 mark (0.4)]

e. The mean and the standard deviation of pressure 9 am and pressure 3 pm for these 23 days are shown in
Table 8 below.

Table 8

Pressure 9 am Pressure 3 pm
Mean 1019.7 1018.3
Standard deviation 4.5477 4.1884

i. Use the equation of the least squares line and the information in Table 8 to show that the correlation
coefficient for this data, rounded to three decimal places, is r = 0.966

[1 mark (0.4)]

ii. What percentage of the variation in pressure 3 pm is explained by the variation in pressure 9 am? Round
your answer to one decimal place.

[1 mark (0.5)]

f. The residual plot associated with the least squares line is shown below.

i. The residual plot above can be used to test one of the assumptions about the nature of the association
between the atmospheric pressure at 3 pm and the atmospheric pressure at 9 am. What is this assumption?

[1 mark (0.4)]

ii. The residual plot above does not support this assumption. Explain why.
[1 mark (0.4)]

Question 9/ 231

[VCAA 2019 FM]

The total rainfall, in millimetres, for each of the four seasons in 2015 and 2016 is shown in Table 9 below.

Table 9

Total rainfall (mm)

Year Summer Autumn Winter Spring
2015 142 156 222 120
2016 135 153 216 96

a. The seasonal index for winter is shown in Table 10 below.

Use the values in Table 9 to find the seasonal indices for summer, autumn and spring.

Write your answers in Table 10, rounded to two decimal places.

Table 10

Summer Autumn Winter Spring

Seasonal index 1.41

[2 marks (0.9)]

b. The total rainfall for each of the four seasons in 2017 is shown in Table 11 below. Table 11

Table 11

Total rainfall (mm)

Year Summer Autumn Winter Spring
2017 141 156 262 120
Use the appropriate seasonal index from Table 10 to deseasonalise the total rainfall for winter in 2017. Round
your answer to the nearest whole number.

[1 mark (0.6)]

Question 10/ 231

[VCAA 2020 FM]

Body mass index (BMI), in kilograms per square metre, was recorded for a sample of 32 men and displayed in
the ordered stem plot below.

a. Describe the shape of the distribution.

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. Determine the median BM I for this group of men.

[1 mark (0.7)]
c. People with a BMI of 25 or over are considered to be overweight.

What percentage of these men would be considered to be overweight?

[1 mark (0.8)]

Question 11/ 231

[VCAA 2020 FM]

The neck size, in centimetres, of 250 men was recorded and displayed in the dot plot below.

a. Write down the modal neck size, in centimetres, for these 250 men.

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. Assume that this sample of 250 men has been drawn at random from a population of men whose neck size
is normally distributed with a mean of 38 cm and a standard deviation of 2.3 cm.

i. How many of these 250 men are expected to have a neck size that is more than three standard deviations
above or below the mean?
Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

[1 mark (0.4)]

ii. How many of these 250 men actually have a neck size that is more than three standard deviations above or
below the mean?

[1 mark (0.4)]

c. The five-number summary for this sample of neck sizes, in centimetres, is given below.

Minimum First quartile (Q1 ) Median Third quartile (Q3 ) Maximum

31 36 38 39 44

Use the five-number summary to construct a boxplot, showing any outliers if appropriate, on the grid below.

[2 marks (1.1)]

Question 12/ 231

[VCAA 2020 FM]

In a study of the association between BM I and neck size, 250 men were grouped by neck size (below
average, average and above average) and their BM I recorded.
Five-number summaries describing the distribution of BM I for each group are displayed in the table below
along with the group size.

The associated boxplots are shown below the table.

BM I (kg/m2)
Neck size Group size Min. Q1 Median Q3 Max.

below average 50 18.l 20.6 21.6 23.2 26.8

average 124 19.8 23.4 24.6 26.0 33.9
above average 76 23.l 26.25 28.1 29.95 39.1

a. What percentage of these 250 men are classified as having a below average neck size?

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. What is the interquartile range (IQR) of BM I for the men with an average neck size?

[1 mark (0.9)]

c. People with a BM I of 30 or more are classified as being obese.

Using this criterion, how many of these 250 men would be classified as obese? Assume that the BM I
values were all rounded to one decimal place.
[1 mark (0.2)]

d. Do the boxplots support the contention that BM I is associated with neck size? Refer to the values of an
appropriate statistic in your response.

[2 marks (1.0)]

Question 13/ 231

[VCAA 2020 FM]

The age, in years, body density, in kilograms per litre, and weight, in kilograms, of a sample of 12 men aged
23 to 25 years are shown in the table below.

Age Body density Weight

(years) (kg/litre) (kg)

23 1.07 70.1
23 1.07 90.4
23 1.08 73.2
23 1.08 85.0
24 1.03 84.3
24 1.05 95.6
24 1.07 71.7
24 1.06 95.0
25 1.07 80.2
25 1.09 87.4
25 1.02 94.9
25 l.09 65.3

a. For these 12 men, determine

i. their median age, in years

[1 mark (1.0)]

ii. the mean of their body density, in kilograms per litre.

[1 mark (0.8)]

b. A least squares line is to be fitted to the data with the aim of predicting body density from weight.

i. Name the explanatory variable for this least squares line.

[1 mark (0.8)]

ii. Determine the slope of this least squares line.

Round your answer to three significant figures.

[1 mark (0.3)]

c. What percentage of the variation in body density can be explained by the variation in weight? Round your
answer to the nearest percentage.

[1 mark (0.5)]

Question 14/ 231

[VCAA 2020 FM]

The scatterplot below shows body density, in kilograms per litre, plotted against waist measurement, in
centimetres, for 250 men.
When a least squares line is fitted to the scatterplot, the equation of this line is

body density = 1.195 − 0.001512 × waist measurement

a. Draw the graph of this least squares line on the scatterplot above.

[1 mark (0.4)]

b. Use the equation of this least squares line to predict the body density of a man whose waist measurement is
65 cm. Round your answer to two decimal places.

[1 mark (0.7)]

c. When using the equation of this least squares line to make the prediction in part b., are you extrapolating
or interpolating?

[1 mark (0.4)]

d. Interpret the slope of this least squares line in terms of a man’s body density and waist measurement.

[1 mark (0.4)]

e. In this study, the body density of the man with a waist measurement of 122 cm was 0.995 kg/litre.

Show that, when this least squares line is fitted to the scatterplot, the residual, rounded to two decimal places,
is −0.02.

[1 mark (0.5)]

f. The coefficient of determination for this data is 0.6783 Write down the value of the correlation coefficient
r. Round your answer to three decimal places.
[1 mark (0.3)]

g. The residual plot associated with fitting a least squares line to this data is shown below.
Does this residual plot support the assumption of linearity that was made when fitting this line to this data?
Briefly explain your answer.

[1 mark (0.6)]

Question 15/ 231

[VCAA 2020 FM]

The table below shows the mean age, in years, and the mean height, in centimetres, of 648 women from
seven different age groups.

Age group
Twenties Thirties Forties Fifties Sixties Seventies Eighties
Mean age (years) 26.3 35.2 45.2 55.3 65.1 74.8 83.1
Mean height (cm) 167.1 164.9 164.8 163.4 161.2 158.4 156.7

Data: J Sorkin et al., ‘Longitudinal change in height of men and women: Implications for interpretation of the
body mass index’, American Journal of Epidemiology, vol. 150, no. 9, 1999, p. 971
a. What was the difference, in centimetres, between the mean height of the women in their twenties and the
mean height of the women in their eighties?

[1 mark (0.9)]

A scatterplot displaying this data shows an association between the mean height and the mean age of these
women. In an initial analysis of the data, a line is fitted to the data by eye, as shown.

b. Describe this association in terms of strength and direction.

[1 mark (0.5)]

c. The line on the scatterplot passes through the points (20, 168) and (85, 157).

Using these two points, determine the equation of this line.

Write the values of the intercept and the slope in the appropriate boxes below.

Round your answers to three significant figures.

[1 mark (0.2)]

d. In a further analysis of the data, a least squares line was fitted.

The associated residual plot that was generated is shown below.

The residual plot indicates that the association between the mean height and the mean age of women is non-
linear.

The data presented in the table at the start of this question is repeated below.

It can be linearised by applying an appropriate transformation to the variable mean age.

Mean age (years) 26.3 35.2 45.2 55.3 65.1 74.8 83.1
Mean height (cm) 167.1 164.9 164.8 163.4 161.2 158.4 156.7

Apply an appropriate transformation to the variable mean age to linearise the data.

Fit a least squares line to the transformed data and write its equation below.

Round the values of the intercept and the slope to four significant figures.

[2 marks (0.6)]

Question 16/ 231

[VCAA 2021 FM]

In the sport of heptathlon, athletes compete in seven events. These events are the 100 m hurdles, high jump,
shot-put, javelin, 200 m run, 800 m run and long jump.

Fifteen female athletes competed to qualify for the heptathlon at the Olympic Games.

Their results for three of the heptathlon events – high jump, shot-put and javelin – are shown in Table 12.

Table 12
Athlete number High jump (metres) Shot-put (metres) Javelin (metres)
1 1.76 15.34 41.22
2 1.79 16.96 42.41
3 1.83 13.87 46.53
4 1.82 14.23 40.62
5 1.87 13.78 45.64
6 1.73 14.50 42.33
7 1.68 15.08 40.88
8 1.82 13.13 39.22
9 1.83 14.22 42.51
10 1.87 13.62 42.75
11 1.87 12.01 38.12
12 1.80 12.88 42.65
13 1.83 12.68 45.68
14 1.87 12.45 41.32
15 1.78 11.31 42.88

a. Write down the number of numerical variables in Table 12.

[1 mark (0.5)]

b. Complete Table 13 below by calculating the mean height jumped for the high jump, in metres, by the 15
athletes. Write your answer in the space provided in the table.

[1 mark (0.9)]

Table 13

Statistic High jump (metres) Shot-put (metres)

mean 13.74
standard deviation 0.06 1.43

c. In shot-put, athletes throw a heavy spherical ball (a shot) as far as they can.

Athlete number six, Jamilia, threw the shot 14.50 m.

Calculate Jamilia’s standardised score (z ).

Round your answer to one decimal place.

[1 mark (0.8)]

d. In the qualifying competition, the heights jumped in the high jump are expected to be approximately
normally distributed.

Chara’s jump in this competition would give her a standardised score of z = −1.0
Use the 68–95–99.7% rule to calculate the percentage of athletes who would be expected to jump higher than
Chara in the qualifying competition.

[1 mark (0.6)]

e. The boxplot below was constructed to show the distribution of high jump heights for all 15 athletes in the
qualifying competition.

Explain why the boxplot has no whisker at its upper end.

[1 mark 0.5)]

f. For the javelin qualifying competition (refer to Table 12), another boxplot is used to display the distribution
of athletes’ results.

An athlete whose result is displayed as an outlier at the upper end of the plot is considered to be a potential
medal winner in the event.

What is the minimum distance that an athlete needs to throw the javelin to be considered a potential medal
winner?

[2 marks (0.6)]
Question 17/ 231

[VCAA 2021 FM]

The two running events in the heptathlon are the 200 m run and the 800 m run. The times taken by the
athletes in these two events, time200 and time800, are linearly related.

When a least squares line is fitted to the data, the equation of this line is found to be

time800 = 0.03931 + 5.2756 × time200

a. Round the values for the intercept and the slope to three significant figures. Write your answers in the
boxes provided.

[1 mark (0.5)]

b. The mean and the standard deviation for each variable, time200 and time800, are shown in the table below.

Statistic Time200 (seconds) Time800 (seconds)

Mean 24.6492 136.054
standard deviation 0.96956 8.2910

The equation of the least squares line is

time800 = 0.03931 + 5.2756 × time200

Use this information to calculate the coefficient of determination as a percentage. Round your answer to the
nearest percentage.

[2 marks (0.6)]

Question 18/ 231

[VCAA 2021 FM]

The time series plot on the next page shows the winning time, in seconds, for the women’s 100 m freestyle
swim plotted against year, for each year that the Olympic Games were held during the period 1956 to 2016.
A least squares line has been fitted to the plot to model the decreasing trend in the winning time over this
period.

The equation of the least squares line is

winning time = 357.1 − 0.1515 × year

The coefficient of determination is 0.8794

a. Name the explanatory variable in this time series plot.

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. Determine the value of the correlation coefficient (r ).

Round your answer to three decimal places.

[1 mark (0.2)]

c. Write down the average decrease in winning time, in seconds per year, during the

period 1956 to 2016.

[1 mark (0.3)]

d. The predicted winning time for the women’s 100 m freestyle in 2000 was 54.10 seconds.

The actual winning time for the women’s 100 m freestyle in 2000 was 53.83 seconds.

Determine the residual value in seconds.

[1 mark (0.7)]

e. The following equation can be used to predict the winning time for the women’s 100 m freestyle in the
future.

winning time = 357.1 − 0.1515 × year

i. Show that the predicted winning time for the women’s 100 m freestyle in 2032 is 49.252 seconds.

[1 mark (0.9)]

ii. What assumption is being made when this equation is used to predict the winning time for the women’s
100 m freestyle in 2032?

[1 mark (0.2)]

Question 19/ 231

[VCAA 2021 FM]

The time series plot below shows that the winning time for both men and women in the 100 m freestyle swim
in the Olympic Games has been decreasing during the period 1912 to 2016.

Least squares lines are used to model the trend for both men and women.

The least squares line for the men’s winning time has been drawn on the time series plot above.

The equation of the least squares line for men is

 winning time men = 356.9 − 0.1544 × year
The equation of the least squares line for women is

winning time women = 538.9 − 0.2430 × year

a. Draw the least squares line for winning time women on the time series plot above.

[1 mark (0.5)]

b. The difference between the women’s predicted winning time and the men’s predicted winning time can be
calculated using the formula

diff erence = winning time women − winning time men

Use the equations of the least squares lines above and the formula above to calculate the difference predicted
for the 2024 Olympic Games.

Round your answer to one decimal place.

[2 marks (1.5)]

c. The Olympic Games are held every four years. The next Olympic Games will be held in 2024, then 2028,
2032 and so on.

In which Olympic year do the two least squares lines predict that the winning time for women will first be
faster than the winning time for men in the 100 m freestyle?

[2 marks (0.9)]

Question 20/ 231

[VCAA 2021 FM]

A method for predicting future time differences in the 100 m freestyle swim is to use the formula

diff erence = winning time women − winning time men

The resulting data and time series plot are shown below. The plot is clearly non-linear.
Year Difference (seconds)
1912 18.8
1920 12.2
1924 13.4
1928 12.4
1932 8.6
1936 8.3
1948 9.0
1952 9.4
1956 6.6
1960 6.0
1964 6.1
1968 7.8
1972 7.4
1976 5.7
1980 4.4
1984 6.1
1988 6.3
1992 5.6
1996 5.8
2000 5.5
2004 5.7
2008 5.9
 Year Difference (seconds)
2012 5.5
2016 5.1

Note: No Olympic Games were held in 1916, 1940 and 1944.

a. Apply a reciprocal transformation to the variable difference to linearise the data. Fit a least squares line to
the transformed data and write its equation below.

Round the values of the intercept and the slope to four significant figures.

[2 marks (0.5)]

b. Use the equation from part a. to predict, in seconds, the difference between the women’s and men’s
winning times in the year 2032.

Round your answer to one decimal place.

[1 mark (0.2)]

Question 21/ 231

[VCAA 2022 FM]

The back-to-back stem plot below displays the distribution of daily maximum wind speed, in kilometres per
hour, recorded at a weather station in April and November 2021.
a. For April 2021, determine

i. the median wind speed, in kilometres per hour

[1 mark (0.9)]

ii. the percentage of days for which the wind speed was less than 25 km/h.

[1 mark (0.8)]

b. The five-number summary for wind speed in November 2021 is given below.

Minimum First quartile (Q1 ) Median Third quartile (Q3 ) Maximum

15 22 28 35 70

The wind speeds for November are to be used to construct a boxplot.

Show that the wind speeds of 59 km/h and 70 km/h would appear as outliers in this boxplot.

[2 marks (1.5)]

c. On the grid below, use the data from the stem plot on page 134 to construct a histogram that displays the
distribution of wind speed for November 2021. Use class intervals of widths of five, starting at 15 km/h.
[2 marks (1.3)]

Question 22/ 231

[VCAA 2022 FM]

The boxplots below show the distribution of relative humidity (%) at 9 am and 3 pm at a weather station for
the 30 days of November 2021.

a. i. Determine whether the relative humidity in November is more variable at 9 am or 3 pm.

[1 mark (0.6)]

ii. Write down the percentage of days in November for which the relative humidity at 3 pm was less than
80%.

[1 mark (0.7)]

iii. Complete the five-number summaries for the distributions of relative humidity at 9 am and 3 pm by
writing the missing values in the table below.

[1 mark (0.9)]

Time Minimum First quartile (Q1 ) Median Third quartile Q3 ) Maximum

9 am 65 75
3 pm 27 51 63

b. Do the boxplots support the contention that there is an association between relative humidity and time of
day? Refer to the values of an appropriate statistic in your answer.

[2 marks (1.1)]

Question 23/ 231

[VCAA 2022 FM]

The table below displays data for seven weather-related variables for the first eight days of December 2021.

Minimum Maximum Maximum Direction of

Day Rainfall Temperature 9
temperature temperature wind speed maximum
number (mm) am (°C)
(°C) (°C) (km/h) wind speed
1 19.4 28.3 0 35 ENE 22.9
2 17.6 29.7 1.0 35 WSW 24.2
3 7.6 16.5 11.6 26 WSW 12.7
4 7.5 15.9 0 30 WSW 10.9
5 5.7 19.0 0.2 24 ESE 10.4
6 9.9 23.8 0 39 NE 17.8
 Minimum Maximum Maximum Direction of
Day Rainfall Temperature 9
temperature temperature wind speed maximum
number (mm) am (°C)
(°C) (°C) (km/h) wind speed
7 11.0 11.9 0 22 SSW 11.7
8 6.5 14.2 0 28 ESE 9.5

Data: Commonwealth of Australia 2022, Bureau of Meteorology, www.bom.gov.au

a. Write down

i. the number of numerical variables in the table.

[1 mark (0.6)]

ii. the median rainfall, in millimetres, for the eight-day period.

[1 mark (0.7)]

b. A least squares line is used to model the association between daily maximum temperature and daily
minimum temperature.

With unrounded values for the intercept and slope, the equation of the least squares line is

maximum temperature = 9.235946 … + 1.002493 … × minimum temperature

Round the intercept and slope to four significant figures. Write your answers in the boxes provided.

[1 mark (0.6)]

c. Calculate the coefficient of determination for the association between the daily maximum temperature and
the daily minimum temperature. Write down its value as a percentage, rounded to one decimal place.

[1 mark (0.5)]

Question 24/ 231

[VCAA 2022 FM]

The scatterplot below shows the relative humidity (%) at 9 am plotted against the temperature (°C) at 9 am
for the 30 days of November 2021.

A least squares line has been fitted to the scatterplot.

The equation of the least squares line is

relative humidity = 120.1 − 3.417 × temperature

The coefficient of determination is 0.6073.

a. The equation of the least squares line can be used to predict relative humidity at 9 am from the temperature
at 9 am.

Name the explanatory variable.

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. Describe the association between relative humidity and temperature in terms of strength and direction.

[1 mark (0.3)]

c. Interpret the slope of the least squares line in terms of the variables relative humidity and temperature.

[1 mark (0.5)]

d. On the day when the temperature at 9 am was 16.3 °C, the relative humidity was 45.0%.

The following least squares line can be used to predict the relative humidity at 9 am on this day.

relative humidity = 120.1 − 3.417 × temperature

Calculate the residual value. Round your answer to one decimal place.
[2 marks (1.3)]

Question 25/ 231

[VCAA 2022 FM]

The time series plot below shows the monthly rainfall, in millimetres, recorded at a weather station over 36-
month period.

a. The time series plot contains irregular fluctuations.

Give two other descriptions of the pattern in this time series plot.

[1 mark (0.4)]

b. Write down the value of the five-median smoothed rainfall for month 20.

[1 mark (0.6)]

c. The data for months 1 to 12 of the time series plot is shown in the table below.

Month Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Month number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Rainfall (mm) 109.0 147.2 129.6 179.6 206.2 155.2 127.6 83.8 61.8 134.6 122.8 113.6
i. Calculate the nine-mean smoothed rainfall for month 7. Round your answer to one decimal place.

[1 mark (0.6)]

ii. What would be the number of points in the smoothed plot if nine-mean smoothing is applied for the full
36-month period?

[1 mark (0.4)]

Question 1/ 249

[VCAA 2018 FM]

Julie deposits some money into a savings account that will pay compound interest every month. The balance
of Julie’s account, in dollars, after n months, Vn , can be modelled by the recurrence relation shown below.

V0 = 12000, Vn+1 = 1.0062 Vn

a. How many dollars does Julie initially invest?

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. Recursion can be used to calculate the balance of the account after one month.

i. Write down a calculation to show that the balance in the account after one month, V1 , is $12 074.40

[1 mark (0.9)]

ii. After how many months will the balance of Julie’s account first exceed $12 300?

[1 mark (0.8)]

c. A rule of the form Vn = a × bn can be used to determine the balance of Julie’s account after n months.

i. Complete this rule for Julie’s investment after n months by writing the appropriate numbers in the boxes
provided below.

[1 mark (0.8)]
ii. What would be the value of n if Julie wanted to determine the value of her investment after three years?

[1 mark (0.7)]

Question 2/ 249

[VCAA 2018 FM]

After three years, Julie withdraws $14 000 from her account to purchase a car for her business. For tax
purposes, she plans to depreciate the value of her car using the reducing balance method. The value of Julie’s
car, in dollars, after n years, Cn , can be modelled by the recurrence relation shown below.

C0 = 14 000, Cn+1 = R × Cn

a. For each of the first three years of reducing balance depreciation, the value of R is 0.85. What is the
annual rate of depreciation in the value of the car during these three years?

[1 mark (0.6)]

b. For the next five years of reducing balance depreciation, the annual rate of depreciation in the value of the
car is changed to 8.6%.

What is the value of the car eight years after it was purchased?

Round your answer to the nearest cent.

[2 marks (0.8)]

Question 3/ 249

[VCAA 2018 FM]

Julie has retired from work and has received a superannuation payment of $492 800.

She has two options for investing her money.

Option 1
Julie could invest the $492 800 in a perpetuity. She would then receive $887.04 each fortnight for the rest
of her life.

a. At what annual percentage rate is interest earned by this perpetuity?

[1 mark (0.4)]

Option 2

Julie could invest the $492 800 in an annuity, instead of a perpetuity.

The annuity earns interest at the rate of 4.32% per annum, compounding monthly.

The balance of Julie’s annuity at the end of the first year of investment would be $480 242.25

b. i. What monthly payment, in dollars, would Julie receive?

[1 mark (0.5)]

ii. How much interest would Julie’s annuity earn in the second year of investment? Round your answer to the
nearest cent.

[2 marks (0.3)]

Question 4/ 249

[VCAA 2019 FM]

Phil is a builder who has purchased a large set of tools.

The value of Phil’s tools is depreciated using the reducing balance method.

The value of the tools, in dollars, after n years, Vn , can be modelled by the recurrence relation shown below.

V0 =60 000, Vn+1 =0.9Vn

a. Use recursion to show that the value of the tools after two years, V2 , is $48 600.

[1 mark (0.8)]

b. What is the annual percentage rate of depreciation used by Phil?

[1 mark (0.7)]

c. Phil plans to replace these tools when their value first falls below $20 000.
After how many years will Phil replace these tools?

[1 mark (0.8)]

d. Phil has another option for depreciation. He depreciates the value of the tools by a flat rate of 8% of the
purchase price per annum.

Let Vn be the value of the tools after n years, in dollars.

Write down a recurrence relation, in terms of V0 , Vn+1 and Vn , that could be used to model the value of the
tools using this flat rate depreciation.

[1 mark (0.5)]

Question 5/ 249

[VCAA 2019 FM]

Phil invests $200 000 in an annuity from which he receives a regular monthly payment.

The balance of the annuity, in dollars, after n months, An , can be modelled by the recurrence relation

A0 = 200 000, An+1 = 1.0035An − 3700

a. What monthly payment does Phil receive?

[1 mark (0.7)]

b. Show that the annual percentage compound interest rate for this annuity is 4.2%.

[1 mark (0.3)]

At some point in the future, the annuity will have a balance that is lower than the monthly payment amount.

c. What is the balance of the annuity when it first falls below the monthly payment amount?

Round your answer to the nearest cent.

[1 mark (0.4)]

d. If the payment received each month by Phil had been a different amount, the investment would act as a
simple perpetuity.

What monthly payment could Phil have received from this perpetuity?

[1 mark (0.4)]
Question 6/ 249

[VCAA 2019 FM]

Phil would like to purchase a block of land.

He will borrow $350 000 to make this purchase.

Interest on this loan will be charged at the rate of 4.9% per annum, compounding fortnightly.

After three years of equal fortnightly repayments, the balance of Phil’s loan will be $262 332.33

a. What is the value of each fortnightly repayment Phil will make?

Round your answer to the nearest cent.

[1 mark (0.3)]

b. What is the total interest Phil will have paid after three years?

Round your answer to the nearest cent.

[1 mark (0.2)]

c. Over the next four years of his loan, Phil will make monthly repayments of $3517.28 and will be charged
interest at the rate of 4.8% per annum, compounding monthly.

Let Bn be the balance of the loan n months after these changes apply.

Write down a recurrence relation, in terms of B0 , Bn+1 and Bn , that could be used to model the balance of
the loan over these four years.

[2 marks (0.7)]

Question 7/ 249

[VCAA 2020 FM]

Samuel owns a printing machine.

The printing machine is depreciated in value by Samuel using flat rate depreciation.

The value of the machine, in dollars, after n years, Vn , can be modelled by the recurrence relation

V0 = 120 000, Vn+1 = Vn − 15 000

a. By what amount, in dollars, does the value of the machine decrease each year?

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. Showing recursive calculations, determine the value of the machine, in dollars, after two years.

[1 mark (0.7)]

c. What annual flat rate percentage of depreciation is used by Samuel?

[1 mark (0.7)]

d. The value of the machine, in dollars, after n years, Vn , could also be determined using a rule of the form
Vn = a + bn.

Write down this rule for Vn .

[1 mark (0.4)]

Question 8/ 249

[VCAA 2020 FM]

Samuel has a reducing balance loan.

The first five lines of the amortisation table for Samuel’s loan are shown below.

Payment number Payment ($) Interest ($) Principal reduction ($) Balance ($)
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 320 000.00
1 1600.00 960.00 640.00 319 360.00
2 1600.00 958.08 641.92 318 718.08
3 1600.00 956.15 318 074.23
4 1600.00
Interest is calculated monthly and Samuel makes monthly payments of $1600.

Interest is charged on this loan at the rate of 3.6% per annum.

a. Using the values in the amortisation table

i. calculate the principal reduction associated with payment number 3.

[1 mark (0.8)

ii. calculate the balance of the loan after payment number 4 is made.

[1 mark (0.4)]

b. Let Sn be the balance of Samuel’s loan after n months.

Write down a recurrence relation, in terms of S0 , Sn+1 and Sn , that could be used to model the month-to-
month balance of the loan.

[1 mark (0.3)]

Question 9/ 249

[VCAA 2020 FM]

Samuel opens a savings account.

Let Bn be the balance of this savings account, in dollars, n months after it was opened.

The month-to-month value of Bn can be determined using the recurrence relation shown below.

B0 = 5000, Bn+1 = 1.003Bn

a. Write down the value of B4 , the balance of the savings account after four months. Round your answer to
the nearest cent.

[1 mark (0.6)]

b. Calculate the monthly interest rate percentage for Samuel’s savings account.

[1 mark (0.4)]
c. After one year, the balance of Samuel’s savings account, to the nearest dollar, is $5183.

If Samuel had deposited an additional $50 at the end of each month immediately after the interest was added,
how much extra money would be in the savings account after one year? Round your answer to the nearest
dollar.

[1 mark (0.3)]

Question 10/ 249

[VCAA 2020 FM]

Samuel now invests $500 000 in an annuity from which he receives a regular monthly payment.

The balance of the annuity, in dollars, after n months, An , can be modelled by a recurrence relation of the
form

A0 = 500 000, An+1 = kAn − 2000

a. Calculate the balance of this annuity after two months if k = 1.0024

[1 mark (0.6)]

b. Calculate the annual compound interest rate percentage for this annuity if k = 1.0024
[1 mark (0.5)]

c. For what value of k would this investment act as a simple perpetuity?

[1 mark (0.4)]

Question 11/ 249

[VCAA 2020 FM]

Later, Samuel took out a new reducing balance loan.

The interest rate for this loan was 4.1% per annum, compounding monthly.
The balance of the loan after four years of monthly repayments was $329 587.25

The balance of the loan after seven years of monthly repayments was $280 875.15

Samuel will continue to make the same monthly repayment.

To ensure the loan is fully repaid, to the nearest cent, the required final repayment will be lower.

In the first seven years, Samuel made 84 monthly repayments.

From this point on, how many more monthly repayments will Samuel make to fully repay the loan?

[2 marks (0.4)]

Question 12/ 249

[VCAA 2021 FM]

Sienna invests $420 000 in a perpetuity from which she will receive a regular monthly payment of $1890.

The perpetuity earns interest at the rate of 5.4% per annum.

a. Determine the total amount, in dollars, that Sienna will receive after one year of monthly payments.

[1 mark (0.6)]

b. Write down the value of the perpetuity after Sienna has received one year of monthly payments.

[1 mark (0.5)]

c. Let Sn be the value of Sienna’s perpetuity after n months.

Complete the recurrence relation, in terms of S0 , Sn+1 and Sn , that would model the value of this
perpetuity over time. Write your answers in the boxes provided.

[1 mark (0.4)]
Question 13/ 249

[VCAA 2021 FM]

Sienna owns a coffee shop. A coffee machine, purchased for $12 000, is depreciated in value using the unit
cost method.

The rate of depreciation is $0.05 per cup of coffee made.

The recurrence relation that models the year-to-year value, in dollars, of the coffee machine is

M0 = 12 000, Mn+1 = Mn − 1440

a. Calculate the number of cups of coffee that the machine produces per year.

[1 mark (0.6)]

b. The recurrence relation above could also represent the value of the coffee machine depreciating at a flat
rate.

What annual flat rate percentage of depreciation is represented?

[1 mark (0.5)]

c. Complete the rule below that gives the value of the coffee machine, Mn , in dollars, after n cups have been
produced. Write your answers in the boxes provided.

[1 mark (0.2)]

Question 14/ 249

[VCAA 2021 FM]

For renovations to the coffee shop, Sienna took out a reducing balance loan of $570 000 with interest
calculated fortnightly.

The balance of the loan, in dollars, after n fortnights, Sn , can be modelled by the recurrence relation

S0 = 570 000, Sn+1 = 1.001 Sn − 1193

a. Calculate the balance of this loan after the first fortnightly repayment is made.

[1 mark (0.7)]

b. Show that the compound interest rate for this loan is 2.6% per annum.

[1 mark (0.3)]

c. For the loan to be fully repaid, to the nearest cent, Sienna’s final repayment will be a larger amount.
Determine this final repayment amount.

Round your answer to the nearest cent.

[1 mark (0.2)]

Question 15/ 249

[VCAA 2021 FM]

Sienna invests $152 431 into an annuity from which she will receive a regular monthly payment of $900
for 25 years. The interest rate for this annuity is 5.1% per annum, compounding monthly.

a. Let Vn be the balance of the annuity after n monthly payments. A recurrence relation written in terms of
V0 , Vn+1 and Vn can model the value of this annuity from month to month.
Showing recursive calculations, determine the value of the annuity after two months. Round your answer to
the nearest cent.

[2 marks (0.7)]

b. After two years, the interest rate for this annuity will fall to 4.6%. To ensure that she will still receive the
same number of $900 monthly payments, Sienna will add an extra one-off amount into the annuity at this
time. Determine the value of this extra amount that Sienna will add. Round your answer to the nearest cent.

[1 mark (0.1)]

Question 16/ 249

[VCAA 2022 FM]

Pina owns workplace equipment, which she depreciates in value using flat rate depreciation. The value of the
equipment, in dollars, after n years, Vn , can be determined using the rule

Vn = 200 000 − 12 500n

a. Determine V1 , the value of the equipment after one year.

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. After how many years will the equipment first have a value of zero?

[1 mark (1.0)]

c. The value of the equipment, in dollars, after n years, Vn , can also be modelled by a recurrence relation.
Write this recurrence relation in terms of V0 , Vn+1 and Vn .

[1 mark (0.6)]

d. Using Pina’s depreciation model, the value of the equipment decreases by a fixed percentage of its original
value each year.

Alternatively, the value of the equipment could have been depreciated by a fixed percentage of its current
value each year.

What name is given to this type of depreciation?

[1 mark (0.5)]

Question 17/ 249

[VCAA 2022 FM]

Pina invests $540 000 in an annuity paying 3% interest per annum, compounding monthly. Her annuity will
provide a monthly payment of $5214.28 for 10 years.

Four lines of the amortisation tale for Pina’s annuity are shown below.

The information for payment number 3 is missing.

Payment number Payment ($) Interest ($) Principal reduction ($) Balance ($)
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 540000.00
 Payment number Payment ($) Interest ($) Principal reduction ($) Balance ($)
1 5214.28 1350.00 3864.28 536135.72
2 5214.28 1340.34 3873.94 532261.78
3

a. What is the value of payment number 3?

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. Calculate the interest associated with payment number 3. Round your answer to the nearest cent.

[1 mark (0.5)]

c. Let Pn be the balance, in dollars, of Pina’s annuity after n months.

I Write a recurrence relation, in terms of P0 , Pn+1 and Pn , that can model this balance from month to
month.

[1 mark (0.4)]

d. If Pina had invested the original $540 000 annuity as a simple perpetuity, what monthly payment would
she have drawn?

[1 mark (0.5)]

Question 18/ 249

[VCAA 2022 FM]

To purchase additional workplace equipment, Pina took out a reducing balance loan of $580 000 with interest
calculated monthly.

The balance of the loan, in dollars, after n months, Ln , can be modelled by the recurrence relation

L0 = 580 000, Ln+1 = 1.002Ln − 3045.26

a. Showing recursive calculations, determine the balance of the loan after two months. Round your answer to
the nearest cent.

[1 mark (0.5)]
b. Determine the annual compound interest rate for this loan.

[1 mark (0.5)]

c. The final repayment that is required to fully pay off the loan is smaller than all other repayments by an
amount less than one dollar. Determine this small amount in dollars, rounded to the nearest cent.

[1 mark (0.3)]

d. The original recurrence relation

L0 = 580 000, Ln+1 = 1.002Ln − 3045.26

models the loan being fully repaid in a certain number of years.

Using a different multiplication factor (other than 1.002) the loan would be fully repaid one year sooner.

Determine this multiplication factor. Round your answer to four decimal places.

[1 mark (0.2)]

Question 1/ 267

[VCAA 2018 FM]

A toll road is divided into three sections, E , F and G. The cost, in dollars, to drive one journey on each
section is shown in matrix C right.

3.58 E
C = 2.22 F
2.87 G

a. What is the cost of one journey on section G?

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. Write down the order of matrix C .

[1 mark (1.0)]

c. One day Kim travels once on section E and twice on section G. His total toll cost for this day can be
found by the matrix product M × C . Write down the matrix M .
[1 mark (0.7)]
Question 2/ 267

[VCAA 2018 FM]

The Westhorn Council must prepare roads for expected population changes in each of three locations: main
town (M ), villages (V ) and rural areas (R).

The population of each of these locations in 2018 is shown in matrix P2018 right.

2100 M
P 2018 = 1800 V
1700 R
The expected annual change in population in each location is shown in the table below.

Location main town villages rural areas

Annual change increase by 4% decrease by 1 % decrease by 2%

a. Write down matrix P2019 , which shows the expected population in each location in 2019.

[1 mark (0.6)]

b. The expected population in each of the three locations in 2019 can be determined from the matrix product
P2019 = F × P2018 where F is a diagonal matrix. Write down matrix F .
[1 mark (0.4)]

Question 3/ 267

[VCAA 2018 FM]

The Hiroads company has a contract to maintain and improve 2700 km of highway.
Each year sections of highway must be graded (G), resurfaced (R) or sealed (S ).

The remaining highway will need no maintenance (N ) that year.

Let Sn be the state matrix that shows the highway maintenance schedule for the nth year after 2018.

The maintenance schedule for 2018 is shown in matrix S0 below.

700 G
400 R
S0 =
200 S
1400 N

The type of maintenance in sections of highway varies from year to year, as shown in the transition matrix, T
, below.

this year
G R S N
0.2 0.1 0.0 0.2 G
0.1 0.1 0.0 0.2 R
T = next year
0.2 0.1 0.2 0.1 S
0.5 0.7 0.8 0.5 N

a. Of the length of highway that was graded (G) in 2018, how many kilometres are expected to be resurfaced
(R) the following year?

[1 mark (0.5)]

b. Show that the length of highway that is to be graded (G) in 2019 is 460 km by writing the appropriate
numbers in the boxes below.

[1 mark (0.8)]

The state matrix describing the highway maintenance schedule for the nth year after 2018 is given by

Sn+1 = T Sn

c. Complete the state matrix, S1 , below for the highway maintenance schedule for 2019 (one year after
2018).
[1 mark (0.8)]

d. In 2020, 1536 km of highway is expected to require no maintenance (N ).

Of these kilometres, what percentage is expected to have had no maintenance (N ) in 2019? Round your
answer to one decimal place.

[1 mark (0.2)]

e. In the long term, what percentage of highway each year is expected to have no maintenance (N )? Round
your answer to one decimal place.

[1 mark (0.4)]

Question 4/ 267

[VCAA 2018 FM]

Beginning in the year 2021, a new company will take over maintenance of the same 2700 km highway with a
new contract. Let Mn be the state matrix that shows the highway maintenance schedule of this company for
the nth year after 2020.

The maintenance schedule for 2020 is shown in matrix M0 below.

For these 2700 km of highway, the matrix recurrence relation shown below can be used to determine the
number of kilometres of this highway that will require each type of maintenance from year to year.
a. Write down the value of k in matrix B .

[1 mark (0.4)]

b. How many kilometres of highway are expected to be graded (G) in the year 2022?

[1 mark (0.3)]

Question 5/ 267

[VCAA 2019 FM]

The car park at a theme park has three areas, A, B and C . The number of empty (E ) and full (F ) parking
spaces in each of the three areas at 1 pm on Friday are shown in matrix Q below.

E F
70 50 A
Q = 30 20 B area
40 40 C

a. What is the order of matrix Q?

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. Write down a calculation to show that 110 parking spaces are full at 1 pm.

Drivers must pay a parking fee for each hour of parking. Matrix P , below, shows the hourly fee, in dollars,
for a car parked in each of the three areas.

area
A B C
P = [1.30 3.50 1.80]
[1 mark (0.8)]

c. The total parking fee, in dollars, collected from these 110 parked cars if they were parked for one hour is
calculated as follows.

P × L = [207.00] where matrix L is a 3 × 1 matrix.

Write down matrix L.

[1 mark (0.7)]

The number of whole hours that each of the 110 cars had been parked was recorded at l pm. Matrix R, below,
shows the number of cars parked for one, two, three or four hours in each of the areas A, B and C .

area
A B C
3 1 1 1
6 10 3 2
P = hours
22 7 10 3
19 2 26 4

d. Matrix RT is the transpose of matrix R. Find the matrix RT below.

[1 mark (0.8)]

e. Explain what the element in row 3, column 2 of matrix RT represents.

[1 mark (0.6)]

Question 6/ 267

[VCAA 2019 FM]

The theme park has four locations, Air World (A), Food World (F ), Ground World (G) and Water World (
W ).
The number of visitors at each of the four locations is counted every hour.

By 10 am on Saturday the park had reached its capacity of 2000 visitors and could take no more visitors.

The park stayed at capacity until the end of the day.

The state matrix, S0 , below, shows the number of visitors at each location at 10 am on Saturday.

600 A
600 F
S0 =
400 G
400 W

a. What percentage of the park’s visitors were at Water World (W ) at 10 am on Saturday?

[1 mark (0.9)]

Let Sn be the state matrix that shows the number of visitors expected at each location n hours after 10 am on
Saturday.

The number of visitors expected at each location n hours after 10 am on Saturday can be determined by the
matrix recurrence relation below.

b. Complete the state matrix, S1 , below to show the number of visitors expected at each location at 11 am on
Saturday.

[1 mark (0.9)]

c. Of the 300 visitors expected at Ground World (G) at 11 am, what percentage was at either Air World (A)
or Food World (F ) at 10 am?

[1 mark (0.3)]

d. The proportion of visitors moving from one location to another each hour on Sunday is different from
Saturday.

Matrix V , below, shows the proportion of visitors moving from one location to another each hour after 10 am
on Sunday.

this hour
A F G W
0.3 0.4 0.6 0.3 A
0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 F
V = next hours
0.1 0.2 0.2 0.1 G
0.5 0.2 0.1 0.4 W

Matrix V is similar to matrix T but has the first two rows of matrix T interchanged.

The matrix product that will generate matrix V from matrix T is V = M × T where matrix M is a
binary matrix.
Write down matrix M .

[1 mark (0.2)]

Question 7/ 267

[VCAA 2019 FM]

On Sunday, matrix V is used when calculating the expected number of visitors at each location every hour
after 10 am. It is assumed that the park will be at its capacity of 2000 visitors for all of Sunday.

Let L0 be the state matrix that shows the number of visitors at each location at 10 am on Sunday.

The number of visitors expected at each location at 11 am on Sunday can be determined by the matrix
product

a. Safety restrictions require that all four locations have a maximum of 600 visitors.

Which location is expected to have more than 600 visitors at 11 am on Sunday?

[1 mark (0.8)]

b. Whenever more than 600 visitors are expected to be at a location on Sunday, the first 600 visitors can stay
at that location and all others will be moved directly to Ground World (G).

State matrix Rn contains the number of visitors at each location n hours after 10 am on Sunday, after the
safety restrictions have been enforced.

Matrix R1 can be determined from the matrix recurrence relation

 500 A
600 F
R0 = , R1 = V × R0 + B 1
500 G
400 W

where matrix B1 shows the required movement of visitors at 11 am.

i. Determine the matrix B1 .

[1 mark (0.3)]

ii. State matrix R2 can be determined from the new matrix rule

R2 = V R1 + B2

where matrix B2 shows the required movement of visitors at 12 noon.

Determine the state matrix R2 .

[1 mark (0.1)]

Question 8/ 267

[VCAA 2020 FM]

The three major shopping centres in a large city, Eastmall (E ), Grandmall (G) and Westmall (W ), are
owned by the same company.

The total number of shoppers at each of the centres at 1.00 pm on a typical day is shown in matrix V .

E G W
V = [2300 2700 2200]

a. Write down the order of matrix V .

[1 mark (1.0)]

Each of these centres has three major shopping areas: food (F ), clothing (C ) and merchandise (M ).

The proportion of shoppers in each of these three areas at 1.00 pm on a typical day is the same at all three
centres and is given in matrix P below.
 0.48 F
P = 0.27 C
0.25 M
b. Grandmall’s management would like to see 700 shoppers in its merchandise area at 1.00 pm.

If this were to happen, how many shoppers, in total, would be at Grandmall at this time?

[1 mark (0.5)]

c. The matrix Q = P × V is shown below. Two of the elements of this matrix are missing.

i. Complete matrix Q above by filling in the missing elements.

(Answer on matrix Q above.)

[1 mark (0.9)]

ii. The element in row i and column j of matrix Q is qij .

What does the element q23 represent?

[1 mark (0.7)]

The average daily amount spent, in dollars. by each shopper in each of the three areas at Grandmall in 2019 is
shown in matrix A2019 below.

21.30 F
A2019 = 34.00 C
14.70 M
On one particular day, 135 shoppers spent the average daily amount on food, 143 shoppers spent the average
daily amount on clothing and 131 shoppers spent the average daily amount on merchandise.

d. Write a matrix calculation, using matrix A2019 , showing that the total amount spent by all these shoppers
is $9663.20.

[1 mark (0.6)]

e. In 2020, the average daily amount spent by each shopper was expected to change by the percentage shown
in the table below.

Area food clothing merchandise

Expected change increase by 5% decrease by 15% decrease by 1 %

The average daily amount, in dollars, expected to be spent in each area in 2020 can be determined by forming
the matrix product

A2020 = K × A2019

Write down matrix K .

[1 mark (0.2)]

Question 9/ 267

[VCAA 2020 FM]

An offer to buy the Westmall shopping centre was made by a competitor.

One market research project suggested that if the Westmall shopping centre were sold, each of the three
centres (Westmall, Grandmall and Eastmall) would continue to have regular shoppers but would attract and
lose shoppers on a weekly basis.

Let Sn be the state matrix that shows the expected number of shoppers at each of the three centres n weeks
after Westmall is sold.

A matrix recurrence relation that generates values of Sn is

a. Calculate the state matrix, S1 , to show the expected number of shoppers at each of the three centres one
week after Westmall is sold.
[1 mark (0.8)]

Using values from the recurrence relation on page 160, the graph below shows the expected number of
shoppers at Westmall, Grandmall and Eastmall for each of the 10 weeks after Westmall is sold.

b. What is the difference in the expected weekly number of shoppers at Westmall from the time Westmall is
sold to 10 weeks after Westmall is sold?

Give your answer correct to the nearest thousand.

[1 mark (0.6)]

c. Grandmall is expected to achieve its maximum number of shoppers sometime between the fourth and the
tenth week after Westmall is sold.

Write down the week number in which this is expected to occur.

[1 mark (0.3)]

d. In the long term, what is the expected weekly number of shoppers at Westmall? Round your answer to the
nearest whole number.

[1 mark (0.4)]
Question 10/ 267

[VCAA 2020 FM]

A second market research project also suggested that if the Westmall shopping centre were sold, each of the
three centres (Westmall, Grandmall and Eastmall) would continue to have regular shoppers but would attract
and lose shoppers on a weekly basis. Let Rn be the state matrix that shows the expected number of shoppers
at each of the three centres n weeks after Westmall is sold.

A matrix recurrence relation that generates values of Rn is Rn+1 = T Rn + B , where

The matrix R2 is the state matrix that shows the expected number of shoppers at each of the three centres in
the second week after Westmall is sold.

239 060 W
R2 = 250 840 G
192 900 E
a. Determine the expected number of shoppers at Westmall in the third week after it is sold.

[1 mark (0.5)]

b. Determine the expected number of shoppers at Westmall in the first week after it is sold.

[1 mark (0.2)]

Question 11/ 267

[VCAA 2021 FM]

Elena imports three brands of olive oil: Carmani (C ), Linelli (L) and Ghana (O ).

The number of 1 litre bottles of these oils sold in January 2021 is shown in matrix J below.
 2800 C
J = 1700 L
2400 O

a. What is the order of matrix J ?

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. Elena expected that in February 2021 the sales of all three brands of olive oil would increase by 5%. She
multiplied matrix J by a scalar value, k , to determine the expected volume of sales for February. Write down
the value of the scalar k .

[1 mark (0.5)]

Question 12/ 267

[VCAA 2021 FM]

The main computer system in Elena’s office has broken down.

The five staff members, Alex (A), Brie (B ), Chai (C ), Dex (D ) and Elena (E ), are having problems
sending information to each other.

Matrix M below shows the available communication links between the staff members.

In this matrix:

• the ‘1’ in row A, column B indicates that Alex can send information to Brie

• the ‘0’ in row D , column C indicates that Dex cannot information to Chai.

a. Which two staff members can send information directly to each other?
[1 mark (0.9)]

b. Elena needs to send documents to Chai.

What is the sequence of communication links that will successfully get the information from Elena to Chai?

[1 mark (0.9)]

c. Matrix M 2 below is the square of matrix M and shows the number of two-step communication links
between each pair of staff members.

Only one pair of individuals has two different two-step communication links. List each two-step
communication link for this pair.

[1 mark (0.2)]

Question 13/ 267

[VCAA 2021 FM]

A market research study of shoppers showed that the buying preferences for the three olive oils, Carmani (C
), Linelli (L) and Ohana (O ), change from month to month according to the transition matrix T below.

The initial state matrix S0 below shows the number of shoppers who bought each brand of olive oil in July
2021.
 3200 C
S 0 = 2000 L
2800 O

Let Sn represent the state matrix describing the number of shoppers buying each brand n months after July
2021.

a. How many of these 8000 shoppers bought a different brand of olive oil in August 2021 from the brand
bought in July 2021?

[1 mark (0.3)]

b. Using the rule Sn+1 = T × Sn , complete the matrix S1 below.

[1 mark (0.8)]

c. Consider the shoppers who were expected to buy Carmani olive oil in August 2021. What percentage of
these shoppers also bought Carmani olive oil in July 2021? Round your answer to the nearest percentage.

[1 mark (0.2)]

d. Write a calculation that shows that Ohana olive oil is the brand bought by 50% of these shoppers in the
long run.

[1 mark (0.2]

e. Further research suggests more shoppers will buy olive oil in the coming months. A rule to model this
situation is Rn+1 = T × Rn + B , where Rn represents the state matrix describing the number of
shoppers n months after July 2021.

k represents the extra number of shoppers expected to buy Ohana olive oil each month.
 3333
If R2 = 2025 what is the value of k ?
3642
[1 mark (0.2)]

Question 14/ 267

[VCAA 2021 FM]

Five staff members in Elena’s office played a round-robin video game tournament, where each employee
played each of the other employees once. In each game there was a winner and a loser.

A table of their one-step and two-step dominances was prepared to summarise the results.

Staff member One-step dominance Two-step dominance

Ike (I ) 3 5

Joelene (J ) 3 4

Katie (K ) 1 1

Leslie (L) 1 2

Mikki (M ) 2 4

Consider the results matrix shown below.

A ‘1’ in this matrix shows that the player named in that row defeated the player named in that column.

A ‘0’ in this matrix shows that the player named in that row lost to the player named in that column.

Use all of the information provided to complete the results matrix.

[2 marks (0.4)]

Question 15/ 267

The following table represents a study of a particular population of marsupials, which has been divided into
four age groups. The table gives the birth rate, survival rate and the initial population for each age group.

Age group (years) Birth rate Survival rate Number of females (in 2022)
0 0 0.90 520
1 0.55 0.85 2130
2 0.50 0.50 960
3 0.45 0 70

a. Construct a Leslie matrix for the marsupial population.

b. Use the Leslie matrix to predict the marsupial population in 2030.

c. Estimate the long-term annual growth rate of the population, expressing your answer as a percentage
correct to 1 decimal place.
Question 16/ 267

[VCAA 2022 FM]

Matrix C shows the nightly cost, in dollars, of three types of family accommodation at a ski resort: hostel (
H ), motel (M ) and apartment (A).

H M A
C = [80 140 270]
The Dwyer family is planning to stay at the ski resort for five nights.

a. Complete the matrix equation below to show the cost of staying at each type of accommodation for five
nights.

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. The family has decided to stay at the motel for two nights and in an apartment for three nights.

Write down the column matrix A for which the product matrix CA gives the total accommodation cost for
the five nights.

[1 mark (0.6)]

Question 17/ 267

[VCAA 2022 FM]

Students from a nearby school spend one school term skiing at the resort. One year, the school term begins on
16 July and ends on 22 September. The resort has three different types of ski runs, each of which is classified
as beginner (B ), intermediate (I) or advanced (A). Each day, the students use one of the three types of ski
runs.

Matrix T below contains the proportion of students who are expected to change their choice of ski run from
day to day.
Let Sn be the matrix that shows the number of students who choose each type of ski run n days after 16 July.

Matrix S0 below shows the number of skiers who chose each type of ski run on 16 July.

210 B
S 0 = 190 I
80 A
a. How many skiers are expected to choose the same ski run on 17 July?

[1 mark (0.6)]

b. Consider the skiers who are expected to choose the advanced ski run on 17 July.

What percentage of these skiers also chose the advanced ski run on 16 July?

Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

[1 mark (0.3)]

c. What is the maximum number of students expected to ski the intermediate ski run on any one day? Round
your answer to the nearest whole number.

[1 mark (0.2)]

Question 18/ 267

[VCAA 2022 FM]

At the end of the school term, the students vote for who they want to captain the ski team for the next ski
season. Three students – Ali, Lee and Max – have been nominated for captain.

Seven days before the end of the school term, the students were asked who they planned to vote for.

The following table shows each candidate and the number of students who plan to vote for each candidate at
the start of the seven days.
Candidate Number of people who plan to vote for the candidate
Ali 160
Lee 140
Max 180

Each day all students are asked who they plan to vote for.

It is expected that students may change the candidate they plan to vote for each day over the seven days as
follows. Some percentages are missing.

• 40% of students who plan to vote for Ali one day will plan to vote for Ali the next day.

• 30% of students who plan to vote for Ali one day will plan to vote for Lee the next day.

• 50% of students who plan to vote for Lee one day will plan to vote for Lee the next day.

• 30% of students who plan to vote for Lee one day will plan to vote for Max the next day.

• 50% of students who plan to vote for Max one day will plan to vote for Max the next day.

• 20% of students who plan to vote for Max one day will plan to vote for Lee the next day.

a. How many students plan to vote for Ali after one day?

[1 mark (0.3)]

b. Max decides to withdraw his nomination after one day.

Matrix T below shows the proportion of students who change their preferred candidate from one day to the
next for the remaining six days after Max withdraws his nomination.

At the end of the seven days, who is expected to become captain of the ski team and how many votes will this
person receive?

Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

[2 marks (0.8)]
Question 1/ 286

[VCAA 2018 FM]

The graph below shows the possible number of postal deliveries each day between the Central Mail Depot
and the Zenith Post Office.

The unmarked vertices represent other depots in the region.

The weighting of each edge represents the maximum number of deliveries that can be made each day.

a. Cut A, shown on the graph, has a capacity of 10.

Two other cuts are labelled as Cut B and Cut C.

i. Write down the capacity of Cut B.

[1 mark (0.9)]

ii. Write down the capacity of Cut C.

[1 mark (0.8)]

b. Determine the maximum number of deliveries that can be made each day from the Central Mail Depot to
the Zenith Post Office.

[1 mark (0.3)]
Question 2/ 286

[VCAA 2018 FM]

In one area of the town of Zenith, a postal worker delivers mail to 10 houses labelled as vertices A to J on
the graph below.

a. Which one of the vertices on the graph has degree 4?

[1 mark (1.0)]

For this graph, an Eulerian trail does not currently exist.

b. For an Eulerian trail to exist, what is the minimum number of extra edges that the graph would require?

[1 mark (0.6)]

c. The postal worker has delivered the mail at F and will continue her deliveries by following a Hamiltonian
path from F . Draw in a possible Hamiltonian path for the postal worker on the diagram below.
[1 mark (0.6)]

Question 3/ 286

[VCAA 2018 FM]

At the Zenith Post Office all computer systems are to be upgraded.

This project involves 10 activities, A to J .

The directed network below shows these activities and their completion times, in hours.

a. Determine the earliest starting time, in hours, for activity I .

[1 mark (0.7)]

b. The minimum completion time for the project is 15 hours. Write down the critical path.

[1 mark (0.8)]

c. Two of the activities have a float time of two hours. Write down these two activities.

[1 mark (0.5)]

d. For the next upgrade, the same project will be repeated but one extra activity will be added.

This activity has a duration of one hour, an earliest starting time of five hours and a latest starting time of 12
hours.

Complete the following sentence by filling in the boxes provided.

[1 mark (0.3)]

The extra activity could be represented on the network above by a directed edge from the end of activity

to the start of activity

Question 4/ 286

[VCAA 2018 FM]

Parcel deliveries are made between five nearby towns, P to T .

The roads connecting these five towns are shown on the graph below. The distances, in kilometres, are also
shown.

A road inspector will leave from town P to check all the roads and return to town P when the inspection is
complete. He will travel the minimum distance possible.

a. How many roads will the inspector have to travel on more than once?

[1 mark (0.3)]

b. Determine the minimum distance, in kilometres, that the inspector will travel.

[1 mark (0.2)]
Question 5/ 286

[VCAA 2019 FM]

Fencedale High School has six buildings. The network below shows these buildings represented by vertices.
The edges of the network represent the paths between the buildings.

a. Which building in the school can be reached directly from all other buildings?

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. A school tour is to start and finish at the office, visiting each building only once.

i. What is the mathematical term for this route?

[1 mark (0.7)]

ii. Draw in a possible route for this school tour on the diagram below.

[1 mark (1.0)]
Question 6/ 286

[VCAA 2019 FM]

Fencedale High School offers students a choice of four sports, football, tennis, athletics and basketball.

The bipartite graph below illustrates the sports that each student can play.

Each student will be allocated to only one sport.

a. Complete the table below by allocating the appropriate sport to each student.

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. The school medley relay team consists of four students, Anita, Imani, Jordan and Lola.

Student Sport
Blake
Charli
Student Sport
Huan
Marco

b. The school medley relay team consists of four students, Anita, Imani, Jordan and Lola.

The medley relay race is a combination of four different sprinting distances: 100 m, 200 m, 300 m and 400
m, run in that order.

The following table shows the best time, in seconds, for each student for each sprinting distance.

Best time for each sprinting distance (seconds)

Student 100 m 200 m 300 m 400 m
Anita 13.3 29.6 61.8 87.1
Imani 14.5 29.6 63.5 88.9
Jordan 13.3 29.3 63.6 89.1
Lola 15.2 29.2 61.6 87.9

The school will allocate each student to one sprinting distance in order to minimise the total time taken to
complete the race. To which distance should each student be allocated?

Write your answers in the table below.

[2 marks (1.3)]

Student Sprinting distance (m)

Anita
lmani
Jordan
Lola

Question 7/ 286
[VCAA 2019 FM]

Fencedale High School is planning to renovate its gymnasium.

This project involves 12 activities, A to L.

The directed network below shows these activities and their completion times, in weeks.

The minimum completion time for the project is 35 weeks.

a. How many activities are on the critical path?

[1 mark (0.6)]

b. Determine the latest start time of activity E .

[1 mark (0.5)]

c. Which activity has the longest float time?

[1 mark (0.5)]

It is possible to reduce the completion time for activities C , D , G, H and K by employing more workers.

d. The completion time for each of these five activities can be reduced by a maximum of two weeks.

What is the minimum time, in weeks, that the renovation project could take?

[1 mark (0.3)]

e. The reduction in completion time for each of these five activities will incur an additional cost to the school.

The table below shows the five activities that can have their completion times reduced and the associated
weekly cost, in dollars.

Activity Weekly cost ($)

C 3000

D 2000

G 2500

H 1000
Activity Weekly cost ($)

K 4000

The completion time for each of these five activities can be reduced by a maximum of two weeks.

Fencedale High School requires the overall completion time for the renovation project to be reduced by four
weeks at minimum cost.

Complete the table below, showing the reductions in individual activity completion times that would achieve
this.

Activity Reduction in completion time (0, 1 or 2 weeks)

C
D
G
H
K

[2 marks (0.2)]

Question 8/ 286

[VCAA 2020 FM]

The Sunny Coast Cricket Club has five new players join its team: Alex, Bo, Cameron, Dale and Emerson.

The graph below shows the players who have played cricket together before joining the team.

For example, the edge between Alex and Bo shows that they have previously played cricket together.
a. How many of these players had Emerson played cricket with before joining the team?

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. Who had played cricket with both Alex and Bo before joining the team?

[1 mark (0.6)]

c. During the season, another new player, Finn, joined the team. Finn had not played cricket with any of these
players before. Represent this information on the graph above. (Answer on the graph above.)

[1 mark (0.9)]

Question 9/ 286

[VCAA 2020 FM]

A cricket team has 11 players who are each assigned to a batting position.

Three of the new players, Alex, Bo and Cameron, can bat in position 1, 2 or 3.

The table below shows the average scores, in runs, for each player for the batting positions 1, 2 and 3.

Batting position
1 2 3
Alex 22 24 24
Player
Bo 25 25 21
 Batting position
1 2 3
Cameron 24 25 19

Each player will be assigned to one batting position.

To which position should each player be assigned to maximise the team’s score? Write your answer in the
table below.

Player Batting position

Alex
Bo
Cameron

[1 mark (0.6)]

Question 10/ 286

[VCAA 2020 FM]

A local fitness park has 10 exercise stations: M to V .

The edges on the graph below represent the tracks between the exercise stations.

The number on each edge represents the length, in kilometres, of each track.
The Sunny Coast cricket coach designs three different training programs, all starting at exercise station S .

Training program number Training details

1 The team must run to exercise station O .

2 The team must run along all tracks just once.

3 The team must visit each exercise station and return to exercise station S .

a. What is the shortest distance, in kilometres, covered in training program 1?

[1 mark (0.6)]

b. i. What mathematical term is used to describe training program 2?

[1 mark (0.7)]

ii. At which exercise station would training program 2 finish?

[1 mark (0.6)]

c. To complete training program 3 in the minimum distance, one track will need to be repeated. Complete the
following sentence by filling in the boxes provided.

This track is between exercise station and exercise station

[1 mark (0.2)]
Question 11/ 286

[VCAA 2020 FM]

Training program 1 has the cricket team starting from exercise station S and running to exercise station O .

For safety reasons, the cricket coach has placed a restriction on the maximum number of people who can use
the tracks in the fitness park.

The directed graph below shows the capacity of the tracks, in number of people per minute.

a. How many different routes from S to O are possible?

[1 mark (0.3)]

When considering the possible flow of people through this network, many different cuts can be made.

b. Determine the capacity of Cut 1, shown above.

[1 mark (0.7)]

c. What is the maximum flow from S to O , in number of people per minute?

[1 mark (0.3)]
Question 12/ 286

[VCAA 2020 FM]

The Sunny Coast cricket clubroom is undergoing a major works project. This project involves nine activities:
A to I . The table below shows the earliest start time (EST) and duration, in months, for each activity. The
immediate predecessor(s) is also shown. The duration for activity C is missing.

Activity EST Duration Immediate predecessor(s)

A 0 2 –

B 0 5 –

C 5 A, B
D 7 7 C
E 7 9 C
F 5 3 B
G 14 4 D
H 8 9 F
I 18 2 E, G, H

The information in the table above can be used to complete a directed network.

This network will require a dummy activity.

a. Complete the following sentence by filling in the boxes provided.

[1 mark (0.3)]

This dummy activity could be drawn as a directed edge from the end of activity to the start of

activity

b. What is the duration, in months, of activity C ?

[1 mark (0.5)]

c. Name the four activities that have a float time.

[1 mark (0.2)]
d. The project is to be crashed by reducing the completion time of one activity only. What is the minimum
time, in months, that the project can be completed in?

[l mark (0.1)]

Question 13/ 286

[VCAA 2021 FM]

Maggie’s house has five rooms, A, B , C , D and E , and eight doors.

The floor plan of these rooms and doors is shown below. The outside area, F , is shown shaded on the floor
plan.

The floor plan is represented by the graph below.

On this graph, vertices represent the rooms and the outside area. Edges represent direct access to the rooms
through the doors.

One edge is missing from the graph.

a. On the graph above, draw the missing edge.

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. What is the degree of vertex E ?

[1 mark (0.9)]

c. Maggie hires a cleaner to clean the house.

It is possible for the cleaner to enter the house from the outside area, F , and walk through each room only
once, cleaning each room as he goes and finishing in the outside area, F .

i. Complete the following to show one possible route that the cleaner could take.

[1 mark (0.9)]

ii. What is the mathematical term for such a journey?

[1 mark (0.6)]

Question 14/ 286

[VCAA 2021 FM]

George lives in Town G and Maggie lives in Town M .

The diagram below shows the network of main roads between Town G and Town M .

The vertices G, H , I , J , K , L, M , N and O represent towns.

The edges represent the main roads. The numbers on the edges indicate the distances, in kilometres, between
adjacent towns.

a. What is the shortest distance, in kilometres, between Town G and Town M ?

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. George plans to travel to Maggie’s house. He will pass through all the towns shown above.

George plans to take the shortest route possible.

Which town will George pass through twice?

[1 mark (0.7)]

Question 15/ 286

[VCAA 2021 FM]

The network diagram below shows the local road network of Town M .

The numbers on the edges indicate the maximum number of vehicles per hour that can travel along each road
in this network.

The arrows represent the permitted direction of travel.

The vertices A, B , C , D , E and F represent the intersections of the roads.

a. Determine the maximum number of vehicles that can travel from the entrance to the exit per hour.

[1 mark (0.3)]

b. The local council plans to increase the number of vehicles per hour that can travel from the entrance to the
exit by increasing the capacity of only one road.

i. Complete the following sentence by filling in the boxes provided. The road that should have its capacity
increased is the road from vertex to vertex .

[1 mark (0.4)]

ii. What should be the minimum capacity of this road to maximise the flow of vehicles from the entrance to
the exit?

[1 mark (0.1)]

Question 16/ 286

[VCAA 2021 FM]

Roadworks planned by the local council require 13 activities to be completed. The network below shows
these 13 activities and their completion times in weeks.
a. What is the earliest start time, in weeks, of activity K ?

[1 mark (0.5)]

b. How many of these activities have zero float time?

[1 mark (0.2)]

c. It is possible to reduce the completion time for activities A, E , F , L and K .

The reduction in completion time for each of these five activities will incur an additional cost.

The table below shows the five activities that can have their completion time reduced and the associated
weekly cost, in dollars.

Activity Weekly cost ($)

A 140 000

E 100 000

F 100 000

L 120 000

K 80 000

The completion time for each of these five activities can be reduced by a maximum of two weeks.

The overall completion time for the roadworks can be reduced to 16 weeks.

What is the minimum cost, in dollars, of this change in completion time?

[1 mark (0.1)]
Question 17/ 286

[VCAA 2022 FM]

Joe owns a holiday park with seven cabins.

The diagram below shows a network of roads in the holiday park.

Joe’s office is labelled as a vertex on the network. The other vertices −A, B , C , D , E , F and G –
represent the cabins.

In the morning, Joe leaves his office and visits each cabin once only before returning to the office.

a. Write down a route that Joe could follow.

[1 mark (0.8)]

b. Later in the day, Joe will leave his office and travel along each road once only to check the road
conditions.

i. Which vertex will Joe finish on?

[1 mark (0.8)]

ii. What is the mathematical term for this route?

[1 mark (0.7)]
Question 18/ 286

[VCAA 2022 FM]

Joe plans to add a new cabin to the holiday park.

This project requires 10 activities to be completed.

The network below shows these 10 activities and their completion times in weeks.

a. How many of these activities have two immediate predecessors?

[1 mark (0.5)]

b. What is the minimum completion time, in weeks, for this project?

[1 mark (0.6)]

c. It is possible to reduce the completion time of two activities.

One activity can have its completion time decreased by two weeks and another activity can have its
completion time decreased by one week.

These two changes result in the minimum completion time being reduced by three weeks.

Complete the table below, showing the two activities that could have their completion times reduced and the
reduction in individual activity completion time that would achieve the three-week reduction.

Reduction in completion time

Activity
(1 week or 2 weeks)

d. The holiday park has had some changes to its roads to accommodate the new cabin.

The adjacency matrix below shows road connections between the office and each cabin. The new cabin, H ,
is included in the matrix.
On the diagram below, add the new cabin, H , and any additional roads to the network.

[2 marks (1.8)]

Question 19/ 286

[VCAA 2022 FM]

A series of pipelines is installed to allow for the flow of stormwater from the holiday park. The capacity of
these pipes, in litres per minute, is shown in the directed network below.
When considering the possible flow of stormwater through this network, many different cuts can be made.

a. Determine the capacity of Cut 1, shown above.

[1 mark (0.6)]

b. What is the maximum flow of stormwater, in litres per minute, from the source to the sink?

[1 mark (0.4)]

Joe would like to increase the maximum flow through this network.

The maximum flow through this network may be increased either by reversing the direction of flow through
one pipe or by increasing the capacity of one pipe.

c. The direction of flow is reversed through one pipe.

Complete the following sentence by filling in the boxes provided.

The pipe that should have its flow reversed to cause the largest increase in flow from source to sink is the
pipe that runs from vertex to vertex .

[1 mark (0.5)]

d. The capacity of one pipe is increased.

Complete the following sentences by filling in the boxes provided.

The pipe that should have its capacity increased to cause the largest increase in flow from source to sink is
the pipe that runs from vertex to vertex .

Its new capacity, in litres per minute, should be at least .

[1 mark (0.02)]
2023 VCAA Examination 1

Question 1/ 16

Use the following information to answer Questions 2 and 3

The dot plot below shows the times, in seconds, of 40 runners in the qualifying heats of their 800 m club
championship.

Question 2/ 16

The median time, in seconds, of these runners is

A. 135.5

B. 136

C. 136.5

D. 137

E. 137.5
Question 3/ 16

The shape of this distribution is best described as

A. positively skewed with one or more possible outliers.

B. positively skewed with no outliers.

C. approximately symmetric with one or more possible outliers.

D. approximately symmetric with no outliers.

E. negatively skewed with one or more possible outliers.

Question 4/ 16

Gemma’s favourite online word puzzle allows her 12 attempts to guess a mystery word.

Her number of attempts for the last five days is displayed in the table below.

Day Number of attempts

1 8
2 11
3 5
4 6
5 9

On day six, how many attempts can she make so that the mean number of attempts for these six days is
exactly eight?

A. 5

B. 6

C. 7
D. 8

E. 9

Question 5/ 16

The time spent by visitors in a museum is approximately normally distributed with a mean of 82 minutes and
a standard deviation of 11 minutes.

2380 visitors are expected to visit the museum today.

Using the 68–95–99.7% rule, the number of these visitors who are expected to spend between 60 and 104
minutes in the museum is

A. 1128

B. 1618

C. 2256

D. 2261

E. 2373

Question 6/ 16

The heights of a group of Year 8 students have a mean of 163.56 cm and a standard deviation of 8.14 cm.
One student’s height has a standardised z -score of −0.85.

This student’s height, in centimetres, is closest to

A. 155.4

B. 156.6

C. 162.7

D. 170.5

E. 171.7
Question 7/ 16

The histogram below displays the distribution of prices, in dollars, of the cars for sale in a used-car yard. The
histogram has a logarithm (base 10) scale.

Six of the cars in the yard have the following prices:

• $2450

• $3175

• $4999

• $8925

• $10250

• $105 600

How many of the six car prices listed above are in the modal class interval?

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 6
Question 8/ 16

Use the following information to answer Questions 9 and 10.

A teacher analysed the class marks of 15 students who sat two tests.

The test 1 mark and test 2 mark, all whole number values, are shown in the scatterplot below.

A least squares line has been fitted to the scatterplot.

Question 9/ 16

The equation of the least squares line is closest to

A. test 2 mark = −6.83 + 1.55 × test 1 mark

B. test 2 mark = 15.05 + 0.645 × test 1 mark

C. test 2 mark = −6.78 + 0.645 × test 1 mark

D. test 2 mark = 1.36 + 1.55 × test 1 mark

E. test 2 mark = 6.83 + 1.55 × test 1 mark

Question 10/ 16

The least squares line shows the predicted test 2 mark for each student based on their test 1 mark.

The number of students whose actual test 2 mark was within two marks of that predicted by the line is

A. 3

B. 4

C. 5

D. 6

E. 7

Question 11/ 16

A least squares line can be used to model the birth rate (children per 1000 population) in a country from the
average daily food energy intake (megajoules) in that country.

When a least squares line is fitted to data from a selection of countries it is found that:

• for a country with an average daily food energy intake of 8.53 megajoules, the birth rate will be 32.2
children per 1000 population

• for a country with an average daily food energy intake of 14.9 megajoules, the birth rate will be 9.9
children per 1000 population.

The slope of this least squares line is closest to

A. −4.7

B. −3.5

C. −0.29

D. 2.7

E. 25

Question 12/ 16

A study of Year 10 students shows that there is a negative association between the scores of topic tests and
the time spent on social media. The coefficient of determination is 0.72

From this information it can be concluded that

A. a decreased time spent on social media is associated with an increased topic test score.

B. less time spent on social media causes an increase in topic test performance.

C. an increased time spent on social media is associated with an increased topic test score.

D. too much time spent on social media causes a reduction in topic test performance.

E. a decreased time spent on social media is associated with a decreased topic test score.

Question 13/ 16

Use the following information to answer Questions 14 and 15.

The table below shows the height, in metres, and the age, in years, for 11 plantation trees. A scatterplot
displaying this data is also shown.

height
age (years)
(m)
10 9.5
8 8.0
13 9.7
9 9.1
11 9.4
14 9.8
6 6.0
4 3.5
12 9.6
7 7.8
5 4.0

Question 14/ 16

A reciprocal transformation applied to the variable age can be used to linearise the scatterplot.
 1
With age as the explanatory variable, the equation of the least squares line fitted to the linearised data is
closest to
1
A. height = −13.04 + 40.22 × age

1
B. height = −10.74 + 8.30 × age

1
C. height = 2.14 + 0.63 × age

1
D. height = 13.04 − 40.22 × age

1
E. height = 16.56 − 22.47 × age

Question 15/ 16

The scatterplot can also be linearised using a logarithm (base 10) transformation applied to the variable age.

The equation of the least squares line is

height = −3.8 + 12.6 × log10 (age)

Using this equation, the age, in years, of a tree with a height of 8.52 m is closest to

A. 7.9

B. 8.9

C. 9.1

D. 9.5

E. 9.9

Question 16/ 16

Use the following information to answer Questions 17 and 18.

The following graph shows a selection of winning times, in seconds, for the women’s 800 m track event from
various athletic events worldwide. The graph shows one winning time for each calendar year from 2000 to
2022.

Question 17/ 16

The time series is smoothed using seven-median smoothing.

The smoothed value for the winning time in 2006, in seconds, is closest to

A. 116.0

B. 116.4

C. 116.8

D. 117.2

E. 117.6
Question 18/ 16

The median winning time, in seconds, for all the calendar years from 2000 to 2022 is closest to

A. 116.8

B. 117.2

C. 117.6

D. 118.0

E. 118.3

Question 19/ 16

The number of visitors to a public library each day for 10 consecutive days was recorded.

These results are shown in the table below.

Day number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Number of visitors 337 317 313 335 322 335 322 338 302 349

The eight-mean smoothed number of visitors with centring for day number 6 is

A. 323

B. 324

C. 325

D. 326

E. 327
Question 20/ 16

The number of visitors each month to a zoo is seasonal.

To correct the number of visitors in January for seasonality, the actual number of visitors, to the nearest
percent, is increased by 35%.

The seasonal index for that month is closest to

A. 0.61

B. 0.65

C. 0.69

D. 0.74

E. 0.771

Question 1/ 32

A sequence of numbers is generated by the recurrence relation shown below.

T 0 = 5, T n+1 = −T n

The value of T2 is

A. −10

B. −5

C. 0

D. 5

E. 10
Question 2/ 32

Use the following information to answer Questions 3 and 4.

Gus purchases a coffee machine for $15 000 and depreciates its value using the unit cost method. The rate
of depreciation is $0.04 per cup of coffee made.

A recurrence relation that models the year-to-year value Gn , in dollars, of the machine is

G0 = 15000, Gn+1 = Gn − 1314

Question 3/ 32

A rule for Gn , the value of the machine after n years is

A. Gn = 15 000 − 0.04n

B. Gn = 15 000 + 0.04n

C. Gn = 15 000 − 1314n

D. Gn = 1314 − 0.04n

E. Gn = 1314 + 0.04n

Question 4/ 32

The number of cups made by the machine per year is

A. 1314

B. 13686

C. 15 000

D. 31536
E. 32850

Question 5/ 32

If Audrey uses flat rate depreciation, the depreciation rate, per annum is

A. 10%

B. 15%

C. 20%

D. 25%

E. 33%

Question 6/ 32

If Audrey uses reducing balance depreciation, the depreciation rate, per annum is closest to

A. 10%

B. 15%

C. 20%

D. 25%

E. 33%

Question 7/ 32

Timmy took out a reducing balance loan of $500 000, with interest calculated monthly.
The balance of the loan, in dollars, after n months, Tn , can be modelled by the recurrence relation

T 0 = 500 000, T n+1 = 1.00325T n − 2611.65

A final repayment that will fully repay the loan to the nearest cent is

A. $2605.65

B. $2609.18

C. $2611.65

D. $2614.12

E. $2615.81

Question 8/ 32

Tavi took out a loan of $20 000, with interest compounding quarterly. She makes quarterly repayments of
$653.65.
The graph below represents the balance in dollars of Tavi’s loan at the end of each quarter of the first year of
the loan.

The effective interest rate for the first year of Tavi’s loan is closest to
A. 3.62%

B. 3.65%

C. 3.66%

D. 3.67%

E. 3.68%

Question 9/ 32

The following recurrence relation models the value, Pn , of a perpetuity after n time periods.

P 0 = a, P n+1 = RP n − d

The value of R can be found by calculating

A. a + d

B. a+d
a

C. a+d
d

D. 1 + a+d
a

E. 1 + a+d
d

Question 10/ 32

The daily maximum temperature at a regional town for two weeks is displayed in the table below.

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday

Week 1 20 °C 17 °C 23 °C 20 °C 18 °C 19 °C 30 °C
Week 2 29 °C 27 °C 28 °C 21 °C 20 °C 20 °C 22 °C
This information can also be represented by matrix M , shown below.

20 17 23 20 18 19 30
M =[ ]
29 27 28 21 20 20 22

Element m21 indicates that

A. the temperature was 29 °C on Monday in week 2.

B. the temperature was 17 °C on Tuesday in week 1.

C. the lowest temperature for these two weeks was 17 °C.

D. the highest temperature for these two weeks was 29 °C.

E. week 2 had a higher average maximum temperature than week 1.

Question 11/ 32

Matrix P is a permutation matrix and matrix Q is a column matrix.

1 0 0 0 0 t
0 0 1 0 0 e
P = 0 0 0 1 0 Q= a
0 1 0 0 0 m
0 0 0 0 1 s

When Q is multiplied by P , which three letters change position?

A. t, e, a

B. e, a, m

C. a, m, s

D. m, s, t

E. e, a, s
Question 12/ 32

The following transition matrix, T , models the movement of a species of bird around three different
locations, M , N and O from one day to the next.

Which one of the following statements best represents what will occur in the long term?

A. No birds will remain at location M.

B. No birds will remain at location N.

C. All of the birds will end up at location M.

D. All of the birds will end up at location O.

E. An equal number of birds will be at all three locations.

Question 13/ 32

Four table tennis teams played in a round-robin tournament.

Each team played each other team once and there were no draws.

The overall ranking of each team at the end of the tournament, based on number of wins, is shown in the
table below.

First Unicorns (U )

Second Vampires (F )
 Third Scorpions (S )

Fourth Titans (T )

A dominance matrix can display the results of each game, where a ‘1 ‘in the matrix shows that the team
named in that row defeated the team named in that column.

The dominance matrix for this tournament could be

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.
Question 14/ 32

Matrix K is a 3 × 2 matrix.
2
The elements of K are determined by the rule k ij = (i − j) .

Matrix K is

0 1 −2
A. [ ]
1 0 −1

0 1 4
B. [ ]
1 0 1

0 −1
C. 1 0
4 1

0 1
D. 1 0
2 1

0 1
E. 1 0
4 1

Question 15/ 32

How many of the following statements are true?

• All square matrices have an inverse.

• The inverse of a matrix could be the same as the transpose of that matrix.

• If the determinant of a matrix is equal to zero, then the inverse does not exist.

• It is possible to take the inverse of an identity matrix.

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4

Question 16/ 32

A species of bird has a life span of three years.

The females in this species do not reproduce in their first year but produce an average of four female
offspring in their second year, and three in their third year.

The Leslie matrix, L, below is used to model the female population distribution of this species of bird.

0 4 3
L = 0.2 0 0
0 0.4 0
The element in the second row, first column states that on average 20% of this population will

A. be female.

B. never reproduce.

C. survive into their second year.

D. produce offspring in their first year.

E. live for the entire lifespan of three years.

Question 17/ 32

For one particular week in a school year, students at Phyllis Island Primary School can spend their lunch
break at the playground (P ), basketball courts (B ), oval (O ) or the library (L).

Students stay at the same location for the entire lunch break.

The transition diagram below shows the proportion of students who change location from one day to the next.

The transition diagram is incomplete.

On the Monday, 150 students spent their lunch break at the playground, 50 students spent it at the basketball
courts, 220 students spent it at the oval, and 40 students spent it in the library.

Of the students expected to spend their lunch break on the oval on the Wednesday, the percentage of these
students who also spent their lunch break on the oval on Tuesday is closest to

A. 27%

B. 30%

C. 33%

D. 47%

E. 52%

Question 1/ 40
Consider the following graph.

How many of the following five statements are true?

• The graph is a tree.

• The graph is connected.

• The graph contains a path.

• The graph contains a cycle.

• The sum of the degrees of the vertices is eight.

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 5

Question 2/ 40

A bipartite graph is typically used to display which one of the following?

A. the allocation of tasks on a construction site

B. the path used to visit five different construction sites

C. the total distance travelled between two construction sites

D. the critical path of activities to be completed in a construction project

E. the minimum length of cable required to connect six construction sites

Question 3/ 40

Consider the weighted graph shown below.

The weight of the minimum spanning tree is

A. 30

B. 32

C. 40

D. 42

E. 52

Question 4/ 40

Four employees, Anthea, Bob, Cho and Dario, are each assigned a different duty by their manager.

The time taken for each employee to complete duties 1, 2, 3 and 4, in minutes, is shown in the table below.

Duty 1 Duty 2 Duty 3 Duty 4

 Duty 1 Duty 2 Duty 3 Duty 4
Anthea 8 7 7 8
Bob 10 8 10 9
Cho 8 9 7 10
Dario 7 7 8 9

The manager allocates the duties so as to minimise the total time taken to complete the four duties.

The minimum total time taken to complete the four duties, in minutes, is

A. 29

B. 30

C. 31

D. 32

E. 33

Question 5/ 40

The adjacency matrix below represents a planar graph with five vertices.

The number of faces on the planar graph is

A. 5

B. 7

C. 9
D. 15

E. 17

Question 6/ 40

A particular building project has ten activities that must be completed.

These activities and their immediate predecessor(s) are shown in the table below.

Activity Immediate predecessor(s)

A –

B –

C A
D A
E B
F D, E
G C, F
H F
I D, E
J H, I

A directed graph that could represent this project is

A.
B.

C.

D.

E.

Question 7/ 40

Use the following information to answer Questions 8 and 9.

The network below shows the one-way paths between the entrance, A, and the exit, H , of a children’s maze.
The vertices represent the intersections of the one-way paths.

The number on each edge is the maximum number of children who are allowed to travel along that path per
minute.
Question 8/ 40

Cuts on this network are used to consider the possible flow of children through the maze.

The capacity of the minimum cut would be

A. 20

B. 23

C. 24

D. 29

E. 30

Question 9/ 40

One path in the maze is to be changed.

Which one of these five changes would lead to the largest increase in flow from entrance to exit?

A. increasing the capacity of flow along the edge CE to 12

B. increasing the capacity of flow along the edge F H to 14

C. increasing the capacity of flow along the edge GH to 16

D. reversing the direction of flow along the edge CF

E. reversing the direction of flow along the edge GF

2022 VCAA Examination 2

Question 1/ 4

(9 marks)

Data was collected to investigate the use of electronic images to automate the sizing of oysters for sale.

The variables in this study were:

• ID: identity number of the oyster

• weight: weight of the oyster in grams (g)

• volume: volume of the oyster in cubic centimetres (cm3)

• image size: oyster size determined from its electronic image (in megapixels)
• size: oyster size when offered for sale: small, medium or large

The data collected for a sample of 15 oysters is displayed in Table 1.

Table 1

ID Weight (g) Volume (cm3) Image size (megapixels) Size

1 12.9 13.0 5.1 large

2 11.4 11.7 4.8 medium
3 17.4 17.4 6.5 large
4 6.8 7.2 2.9 small
5 9.6 10.1 3.7 medium
6 15.5 15.6 5.7 large
 ID Weight (g) Volume (cm3) Image size (megapixels) Size

7 9.7 9.9 4.0 small

8 7.0 7.5 2.7 small
9 12.6 12.7 5.5 medium
10 12.5 12.7 5.0 medium
11 10.1 10.5 3.9 medium
12 10.6 10.8 4.1 medium
13 13.0 13.1 5.3 large
14 8.1 8.5 3.5 small
15 14.1 14.2 5.3 large

Data: http://jse.amstat.org/jse_data_archive.htm

a. Write down the number of categorical variables in Table 1. 1 mark

b. Determine, in grams:

i. the mean weight of all the oysters in this sample 1 mark

ii. the median weight of the large oysters in this sample. 1 mark

c. When a least squares line is used to model the association between oyster weight and volume, the equation
is:

volume = 0.780 + 0.953 × weight

i. Name the response variable in this equation. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________
ii. Complete the following sentence by filling in the box provided.

This equation predicts that, on average, each 10 g increase in the weight of an oyster is associated

with a cm3 increase in its volume.

d. A least squares line can also be used to model the association between an oyster’s volume, in cm3, and its
electronic image size, in megapixels. In this model, image size is the explanatory variable.

Using data from Table 1, determine the equation of this least squares line. Use the template below to write
your answer. Round the values of the intercept and slope to four significant figures. 2 marks

e. The number of megapixels needed to construct an accurate electronic image of an oyster is approximately
normally distributed.

Measurements made on recently harvested oysters showed that:

• 97.5% of the electronic images contain less than 4.6 megapixels

• 84% of the electronic images contain more than 4.3 megapixels.

Use the 68–95–99.7% rule to determine, in megapixels, the mean and standard deviation of this normal
distribution. 2 marks

Question 2/ 4

(5 marks)

a. The following data shows the sizes of a sample of 20 oysters rated as small, medium or large.

small small large medium medium

 medium large small medium medium

small medium small small medium

medium medium medium small large

i. Use the data above to complete the following frequency table. 1 mark

Table 2

Frequency
Size Number Percentage (%)
small 35
medium 50
large 15
Total 100

ii. Use the percentages in Table 2 to construct a percentage segmented bar chart below. A key has been
provided. 1 mark

An oyster farmer has two farms, A and B.

She takes a random sample of oysters from each of the farms and has the oysters classified as small, medium
or large.
The number of oysters of each size is displayed in the two-way table below.

Table 3

Oyster size Farm A Farm B

small 42 114
medium 124 160
large 44 46
Total 210 320

b. i. Calculate the percentage of the total number of oysters graded as ‘large’ in this investigation. Round the
percentage to the nearest whole number. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

ii. The farmer believes that farm A has a greater capacity to grow larger oysters than farm B.

Does the information in Table 3 support the farmer’s belief? Explain your conclusion by comparing the
values of two appropriate percentages.

Round these percentages to the nearest whole number. 2 marks

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Question 3/ 4

(6 marks)

The scatterplot below plots the average monthly ice cream consumption, in litres/person, against average
monthy temperature, in °C. The data for the graph was recorded in the Northern Hemisphere.
When a least squares line is fitted to the scatterplot, the equation is found to be:

consumption = 0.1404 + 0.0024 × temperature

The coefficient of determination is 0.7212

a. Draw the least squares line on the scatterplot graph above. 1 mark

b. Determine the value of the correlation coefficient r .

Round your answer to three decimal places. 1 mark

c. Describe the association between average monthly ice cream consumption and average monthly
temperature in terms of strength, direction and form. 1 mark

strength
direction
form

d. Referring to the equation of the least squares line, interpret the value of the intercept in terms of the
variables consumption and temperature. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________
e. Use the equation of the least squares line to predict the average monthly ice cream consumption, in litres
per person, when the monthly average temperature is −6∘ C. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

f. Write down whether this prediction is an interpolation or an extrapolation. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Question 4/ 4

(4 marks)

The time series plot below shows the average monthly ice cream consumption recorded over three years,
from January 2010 to December 2012.

The data for the graph was recorded in the Northern Hemisphere.

In this graph, month number 1 is January 2010, month number 2 is February 2010 and so on.

a. Identify a feature of this plot that is consistent with this time series having a seasonal component. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

b. The long-term seasonal index for April is 1.05.

Determine the deseasonalised value for average monthly ice cream consumption in April 2010 (month 4).

Round your answer to two decimal places. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

c. Table 4 below shows the average monthly ice cream consumption for 2011.

Table 4

Consumption (litres/person)
Year Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
2011 0.156 0.150 0.158 0.180 0.200 0.210 0.183 0.172 0.162 0.145 0.134 0.154

Show that, when rounded to two decimal places, the seasonal index for July 2011 estimated from this data is
1.10. 2 marks

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Question 1/ 7

(3 marks)

Arthur borrowed $30 000 to buy a new motorcycle.

Interest on this loan is charged at the rate of 6.4% per annum, compounding quarterly.

Arthur will repay the loan in full with quarterly repayments over six years.

a. How many repayments, in total, will Arthur make? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

The balance of the loan, in dollars, after n quarters, An , can be modelled by the recurrence relation

A0 = 30000, An+l = 1.016An − 1515.18

b. Showing recursive calculations, determine the balance of the loan after two quarters.

Round your answer to the nearest cent. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

c. The final repayment required will differ slightly from all the earlier repayments of $1515.18

Determine the value of the final repayment.

Round your answer to the nearest cent. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Question 2/ 7

(4 marks)

Arthur invests $600 000 in an annuity that provides him with a monthly payment of $3973.00 Interest is
calculated monthly.

Three lines of the amortisation table for this annuity are shown below.

Payment number Payment ($) Interest ($) Principal reduction ($) Balance ($)
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 600 000.00
1 3973.00 2520.00 1453.00 598 547.00
2 3973.00 2513.90 1459.10 597 087.90

a. The interest rate for the annuity is 0.42% per month.

Determine the interest rate per annum. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

b. Using the values in the table, complete the next line of the amortisation table.

Write your answers in the spaces provided in the table below.

Round all values to the nearest cent. 1 mark

Payment number Payment ($) Interest ($) Principal reduction ($) Balance ($)
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 600 000.00
1 3973.00 2520.00 1453.00 598 547.00
2 3973.00 2513.90 1459.10 597 087.90
3

c. Let Vn be the balance of Arthur’s annuity, in dollars, after n months.

Write a recurrence relation in terms of V0 , Vn+1 and Vn that can model the value of the annuity from month
to month. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

d. The amortisation tables on page 11 show that the balance of the annuity reduces each month.

If the balance of an annuity remained constant from month to month, what name would be given to this type
of annuity? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Question 3/ 7

(5 marks)

Arthur takes out a new loan of $60 000 to pay for an overseas holiday.
Interest on this loan compounds weekly.

The balance of the loan, in dollars, after n weeks, Vn , can be determined using a recurrence relation of the
form

V0 = 60 000, Vn+1 = 1.0015Vn − d

a. Show that the interest rate for this loan is 7.8% per annum. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

b. Determine the value of d in the recurrence relation if

i. Arthur makes interest-only repayments 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

ii. Arthur fully repays the loan in five years.

Round your answer to the nearest cent. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

c. Arthur decides that the value of d will be 300 for the first year of repayments.

If Arthur fully repays the loan with exactly three more years of repayments, what new value of d will apply
for these three years?

Round your answer to the nearest cent. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

d. For what value of d does the recurrence relation generate a geometric sequence? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________
Question 1/ 11

(3 marks)

A circus sells three different types of tickets: family (F ), adult (A) and child (C ).

The cost of admission, in dollars, for each ticket type is presented in matrix N below.

36 F
N = 15 A
8 C

The element in row i and column j of matrix N is nij .

a. Which element shows the cost for one child ticket? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

b. A family ticket will allow admission for two adults and two children.

Complete the matrix equation below to show that purchasing a family ticket could give families a saving of
$10. 1 mark

c. On the opening night, the circus sold 204 family tickets, 162 adult tickets and 176 child tickets. The
owners of the circus want a 3 × 1 product matrix that displays the revenue for each ticket type: family, adult
and child.

This product matrix can be achieved by completing the following matrix multiplication.

7344
K × N = 2430
1408

Write down matrix K in the space below. 1 mark

K=

Question 2/ 11

(4 marks)
The circus is held at five different locations, E, F , G, H and I .

The table below shows the total revenue for the ticket sales, rounded to the nearest hundred dollars, for the
last 20 performances held at each of the five locations.

Location E F G H I
Ticket sales $960 000 $990 500 $940 100 $920 800 $901 300

The ticket sales information is presented in matrix R below.

R = [960 000 990 500 940 100 920 800 901 300]
a. Complete the matrix equation below that calculates the average ticket sales per performance at each of the
five locations. 1 mark

The circus would like to increase its total revenue from the ticket sales from all five locations.

The circus will use the following matrix calculation to target the next 20 performances.

1
1
[t] × R × 1
1
1

b. Determine the value of t if the circus would like to increase its revenue from ticket sales by 25%. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

The circus moves from one location to the next each month. It rotates through each of the five locations,
before starting the cycle again.

The following matrix displays the movement between the five locations.
 this month
E F G H I
0 0 0 1 0 E
0 0 1 0 0 F
1 0 0 0 0 G next month
0 0 0 0 1 H
0 1 0 0 0 I

c. The circus started in town I .

What is the order in which the circus will visit the five towns? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

The circus plans to add a sixth location, J .

The only change to the cycle is that the circus will be held at location J after location E and before location
G.
d. Complete the three columns in the following matrix, showing the new movement between the six
locations, E, F , G, H, I and J . 1 mark

Question 3/ 11

(3 marks)
Within the circus, there are different types of employees: directors (D ), managers (M ), performers (P ) and
sales staff (S ). Customers (C ) attend the circus.

Communication between the five groups depends on whether they are customers or employees, and on what
type of employee they are.

Matrix G below shows the communication links between the five groups.

In this matrix:

• The ‘1’ in row D , column M indicates that the directors can communicate directly with the managers.

• The ‘0’ in row P , column D indicates that the performers cannot communicate directly with the directors.

a. A customer wants to make a complaint to a director.

What is the shortest communication sequence that will successfully get this complaint to a director? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

b. Matrix H below shows the number of two-step communication links between each group. Sixteen
elements in this matrix are missing.
i. Complete matrix H above by filling in the missing elements. 1 mark

ii. What information do elements g2l and h21 provide about the communication between the circus
employees? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Question 4/ 11

(2 marks)

The circus requires 180 workers to put on each show.

From one show to the next, workers can either continue working (W ) or they can leave the circus (L).

Once workers leave the circus, they do not return.

It is known that 95% of the workers continue working at the circus.

This situation can be modelled by the matrix recurrence relation

180
S0 = [ ], S n+1 = T S n + B
0

a. Write down matrix T , the transition matrix, for this recurrence relation. 1 mark

b. Write down matrix B for this recurrence relation to ensure that the circus always has 180 workers. 1 mark
Question 1/ 14

(4 marks)

A country has five states, A, B, C, D and E .

A graph can be drawn with vertices to represent each of the states.

Edges represent a border shared between two states.

a. What is the sum of the degrees of the vertices of the graph above? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

b. Euler’s formula, v + f = e + 2, holds for this graph.

i. Complete the formula by writing the appropriate numbers in the boxes provided below. 1 mark

ii. Complete the sentence by writing the appropriate word in the box provided below. 1 mark
Euler’s formula holds for this graph because the graph is connected and .

c. The diagram below shows the position of state A on a map of this country.

The four other states are indicated on the diagram as 1, 2, 3 and 4.

Use the information in the graph on page 20 to complete the table below. Match the state (B, C, D and E )
with the corresponding state number (1, 2, 3 and 4) given in the map above. 1 mark

State State number

B
C
D
E

Question 2/ 14

(3 marks)

The state A has nine landmarks, G, H, I, J, K, L, M , N and O .

The edges on the graph represent the roads between the landmarks.
The numbers on each edge represent the length, in kilometres, along each road.

Three friends, Eden, Reynold and Shyla, meet at landmark G.

a. Eden would like to visit landmark M .

What is the minimum distance Eden could travel from G to M ? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

b. Reynold would like to visit all the landmarks and return to G.

Write down a route that Reynold could follow to minimise the total distance travelled. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

c. Shyla would like to travel along all the roads.

To complete this journey in the minimum distance, she will travel along two roads twice.

Shyla will leave from landmark G but end at a different landmark.

Complete the following by filling in the boxes provided.

The two roads that will be travelled along twice are the roads between:

• vertex and vertex

• vertex and vertex

Question 3/ 14

(5 marks)

One of the landmarks in state A requires a renovation project.

This project involves 12 activities, A to L. The directed network below shows these activities and their
completion times, in days.

The table below shows the 12 activities that need to be completed for the renovation project.

It also shows the earliest start time (EST), the duration, and the immediate predecessors for the activities.

The immediate predecessor(s) for activity I and the EST for activity J are missing.

Activity EST Duration Immediate predecessor(s)

A 0 6 –

B 0 4 –

C 6 7 A
D 4 5 B
E 4 10 B
F 13 4 C
 Activity EST Duration Immediate predecessor(s)

G 9 3 D
H 9 7 D
I 13 6

J 6 E, H
K 19 4 F,I
L 23 1 J, K

a. Write down the immediate predecessor(s) for activity I . 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

b. What is the earliest start time, in days, for activity J ? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

c. How many activities have a float time of zero? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

The managers of the project are able to reduce the time, in days, of six activities.

These reductions will result in an increase in the cost of completing the activity.

The maximum decrease in time of any of activity is two days.

Activity A B F H I K
Daily cost ($) 1500 2000 2500 1000 1500 3000

d. If activities A and B have their completion time reduced by two days each, the overall completion time of
the project will be reduced.

What will be the maximum reduction time, in days? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

e. The managers of the project have a maximum budget of $15 000 to reduce the time for several activities to
produce the maximum reduction in the project’s overall completion time.
Complete the table below, showing the reductions in individual activity completion times that would achieve
the earliest completion time within the $15000 budget.

Activity Reduction in completion time (0,1 or 2 days)

A
B
F
H
I
K
Solutions
Part A: Multiple-choice questions

Question 2/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (85%)]

The percentage of days when there was five minutes difference in travel time between the morning peak and
the evening peak travel times is

A. 0%

B. 5%

C. 20%

D. 25%

E. 28%

Solution
There are five dots in the column associated with 5 minutes difference in travel times. As a percentage, this
is:

5
× 100% = 20%
25

Question 3/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (85%)]

The median difference in travel time is

A. 3.0 minutes.

B. 3.5 minutes.

C. 4.0 minutes.

D. 4.5 minutes.

E. 5.0 minutes.

Solution

As there are 25 values, the median will be the 13th value, which is 3 minutes.

Question 5/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (86%)]

A student selected at random from this population has a standardised pulse rate of z = −2.5. This student’s
actual pulse rate is

A. 59 beats per minute.

B. 63 beats per minute.

C. 65 beats per minute.

D. 73 beats per minute.

E. 79 beats per minute.

Solution

Using the z -score rule:

ˉ
∗20r, l, lz = x−x
sx
−2.5 = x−69
4
x − 69 = −10
x = 59 beats per minute.

Question 6/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (68%)]

Another student selected at random from this population has a standardised pulse rate of z = −1. The
percentage of students in this population with a pulse rate greater than this student is closest to

A. 2.5%

B. 5%

C. 16%

D. 68%

E. 84%
Solution

Using the 68-95-99.7% approximation, the percentage of students with a pulse rate greater than z = −1 is:
34% + 50% = 84%.

Question 7/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (69%)]

A sample of 200 students was selected at random from this population.

The number of these students with a pulse rate of less than 61 beats per minute or greater than 73 beats per
minute is closest to

A. 19

B. 37

C. 64

D. 95

E. 190

Solution

Using the 68-95-99.7% approximation, the percentage of students with pulse rate between 61 and 73 beats
per minute is: 100% − (13.5% + 34% + 34%) = 18.5%. So, the number of students in the sample
of 200 students with pulse rate between 61 and 73 beats per minute is: 18.5% × 200 = 37 students.

Question 9/ 84
[VCAA 2019 FM (92%)]

The number of these countries with a population size between 5 million and 20 million people is

A. 11

B. 17

C. 23

D. 34

E. 35

Solution

There are 3 columns of the histogram that relate to the number of countries with a population size of between
5 million and 20 million people. These 3 columns have a combined frequency of 11 + 4 + 2 = 17.

Question 10/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (86%)]

The shape of this histogram is best described as

A. positively skewed with no outliers.

B. positively skewed with outliers.

C. approximately symmetric.

D. negatively skewed with no outliers.

E. negatively skewed with outliers.

Solution
Most of the higher frequencies are at the lower end of the histogram, with a small number of countries with
much higher populations. The shape of the distribution appears to be positively skewed. There also appears to
be a single outlier with a population between 140 and 145 million.

Question 11/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (71%)]

The histogram below shows the population size for these 48 countries plotted on a log10 scale.

Based on this histogram, the number of countries with a population size that is less than 100 000 people is

A. 1

B. 5

C. 7

D. 8

E. 48

Solution
If population size = 100 000, then:

log10 (population size) =

= log10 (100 000)
=5

There are 2 columns of the histogram that refer to countries with a log10 (population size) of less than 5.
These 3 columns have a combined frequency of 1 + 7 = 8.

Question 13/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (96%)]

For this class, the range of test scores is

A. 22

B. 44

C. 45

D. 49

E. 89

Solution

In this class of students, the maximum value of test scores is 89, and the minimum value is 40. The range is
89 − 40 = 49.

Question 14/ 84
[VCAA 2019 FM (87%)]

For this class, the interquartile range (IQR) of test scores is

A. 14.5

B. 17.5

C. 18

D. 24

E. 49

Solution

The median value of the 23 test scores is the 12th score, which is 68. This splits the scores into two groups of
11 scores (separated by the median). The middle value (Q1) of the lower group is the 6th score, which is 57.
The middle value (Q3) of the upper group is the 18th score, which is 75. The value of the IQR is: IQR =
Q3 − Q1 = 75 − 57 = 18.

Question 15/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (79%)]

The time taken to travel between two regional cities is approximately normally distributed with a mean of 70
minutes and a standard deviation of 2 minutes.

The percentage of travel times that are between 66 minutes and 72 minutes is closest to

A. 2.5%

B. 34%

C. 68%

D. 81.5%

E. 95%
Solution

If travel = 66 minutes,
66 − 70
z= = −2 (2 × sx below the mean).
2
If travel = 72 minutes,
72 − 70
z= = 1 (1 × sx above the mean).
2
Using the 68-95-99.7% approximation, the total percentage of travel times between 66 and 72 minutes will
be: (13.5% + 34%) + (34%) = 81.5%.

Question 16/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (72%)]

The volume of a cup of soup served by a machine is normally distributed with a mean of 240 mL and a
standard deviation of 5 mL. A fast-food store used this machine to serve 160 cups of soup. The number of
these cups of soup that are expected to contain less than 230 mL of soup is closest to

A. 3

B. 4

C. 8

D. 26

E. 156

Solution

If volume of cup = 230 mL,

 230 − 240
z= = −2 (2 × sx below the mean).
5
Using the 68-95-99.7% approximation, the total percentage of cups with a volume less than 230 mL is 2.5%.
The number of cups with a volume less than 230 mL is 2.5% of 160 cups = 4 cups.

Question 18/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (98%)]

The difference, in milliseconds, between the mean time and the median time is

A. 10

B. 70

C. 150

D. 220

E. 230

Solution

Reading from the table, the difference between the mean time and median time is 220 − 150 = 70
milliseconds.

Question 19/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (73%)]

Of these 800 times, the number of times that are longer than 300 milliseconds is closest to

A. 20
B. 25

C. 75

D. 200

E. 400

Solution

The value of Q3 is 300 milliseconds, so 25% of the 800 values will be longer than this value. So 25% ×
800 = 200.

Question 20/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (59%)]

The shape of the distribution of these 800 times is best described as

A. approximately symmetric.

B. positively skewed.

C. positively skewed with one or more outliers.

D. negatively skewed.

E. negatively skewed with one or more outliers.

Solution

Since the mean is significantly greater than the median, and the values are more spread out between the
median and Q3 and Q3 and the maximum, the shape of the distribution is positively skewed, with one or
more outliers. You can confirm this with the Q3 + 1.5 × IQR rule:
∗20r, l, lQ3 + 1.5 × IQR = 300 + 1.5(300 − 70)
= 645
The maximum value is 1380, well above 645.

Question 21/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (50%)]

The histogram below shows the distribution of the forearm circumference, in centimetres, of 252 men.
Assume that the forearm circumference values were all rounded to one decimal place.

The third quartile (Q3 ) for this distribution could be

A. 29.3

B. 29.8

C. 30.3

D. 30.8

E. 31.3
Solution

There are 252 values, so the quartile values can be calculated using:

252 3
= 63. Hence the Q3 value will be 4 approximately the × 252 = 189th value.
4 4
This value can be estimated by tallying the cumulative frequencies from the columns of the histogram, and
locating the column corresponding to the location of the 189th value. This process locates the 189th value in
the column corresponding to a forearm circumference of 30− < 30.5 cm. Of the available options, the Q3
value could only be 30.3 cm.

Question 22/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (78%)]

The histogram below shows the distribution of weight, in grams, for a sample of 20 animal species. The
histogram has been plotted on a log10 scale.

The percentage of these animal species with a weight of less than 10 000 g is

A. 17%

B. 70%

C. 75%

D. 80%
E. 85%

Solution

A weight of 10 000 g corresponds to log10 (10000) = 4. Tallying the frequencies for values where
log10 (weight) < 4 gives 3 + 2 + 12 = 17 values. Therefore the percentage of the animal species
17
with a weight less than 10 000 g is × 100% = 85%.
20

Question 23/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (72%)]

A percentage segmented bar chart would be an appropriate graphical tool to display the association between
month of the year (January, February, March, etc.) and the

A. monthly average rainfall (in millimetres).

B. monthly mean temperature (in degrees Celsius).

C. annual median wind speed (in kilometres per hour).

D. monthly average rainfall (below average, average, above average).

E. annual average temperature (in degrees Celsius).

Solution

Percentaged segmented bar charts are appropriate for displaying the relationship between two categorical
variables. Of the available options, only monthly average rainfall (below average, average, above average) is
a categorical variable.
Question 24/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (69%)]

Data relating to the following five variables was collected from insects that were caught overnight in a trap:

• colour

• name of species

• number of wings

• body length (in millimetres)

• body weight (in milligrams)

The number of these variables that are discrete numerical variables is

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 5

Solution

The types of the variables listed are as follows:

• colour (nominal categorical)

• name of species (nominal categorical)

• number of wings (discrete numerical)

• body length (continuous numerical)

• body weight (continuous numerical)

Only one of these is discrete numerical.

Question 25/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (78%)]

The wing length of a species of bird is approximately normally distributed with a mean of 61 mm and a
standard deviation of 2 mm. Using the 68–95–99.7% rule, for a random sample of 10 000 of these birds, the
number of these birds with a wing length of less than 57 mm is closest to

A. 50

B. 160

C. 230

D. 250

E. 500

Solution

A wing length of 57 mm is two standard deviations below the mean, and so, using the 68–95–99.7% rule,
2.5% of the values will be below this value. Hence: 2.5% × 10 000 = 250 birds.

Question 26/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (77%)]

The lifetime of a certain brand of light globe, in hours, is approximately normally distributed. It is known that
16% of the light globes have a lifetime of less than 655 hours and 50% of the light globes have a lifetime that
is greater than 670 hours.

The mean and the standard deviation of this normal distribution are closest to

A. mean = 655 hours standard deviation = 10 hours

B. mean = 655 hours standard deviation = 15 hours

C. mean = 670 hours standard deviation = 10 hours

D. mean = 670 hours standard deviation = 15 hours

E. mean = 670 hours standard deviation = 20 hours

Solution

If 50% of the light globes have a lifetime greater than 670 hours, the mean lifetime is 670 hours. If 16% of
the light globes have a lifetime less than 655 hours, then 655 hours is a value that is one standard deviation
below the mean (using the 68–95–99.7% rule). So the standard deviation is 670 − 655 = 15 hours.

Question 28/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (70%)]

The variables age (under 55 years, 55 years and over) and preferred travel destination (domestic,
international) are

A. both categorical variables.

B. both numerical variables.

C. a numerical variable and a categorical variable respectively.

D. a categorical variable and a numerical variable respectively.

E. a discrete variable and a continuous variable respectively.

Solution

The variable age is ordinal categorical and preferred travel destination is a nominal categorical variable. Note
also that a percentaged segmented bar chart is an appropriate graph type for comparing two categorical
variables.
Question 29/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (82%)]

The data displayed in the percentaged segmented bar chart supports the contention that there is an association
between preferred travel destination and age because

A. more visitors favour international travel.

B. 35% of visitors under 55 years favour international travel.

C. 45% of visitors 55 years and over favour domestic travel.

D. 65% of visitors under 55 years favour domestic travel while 45% of visitors 55 years and over favour
domestic travel.

E. the percentage of visitors who prefer domestic travel is greater than the percentage of visitors who prefer
international travel.

Solution

A statement supporting the contention that there is an association between preferred travel destination and
age needs to provide some statistical evidence (eg percentage frequencies) from the chart that compare the
values from one of the categorical variables (e.g. age is 55 and over) for a value of the second categorical
variable (e.g. preferred travel destination is domestic travel). It is not sufficient to highlight a single value of
one of the variables (as in options B and C). The statements in options A and E are not valid or supported by
the data displayed in the graph.

Question 30/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (50%)]

The results could also be summarised in a two-way frequency table.

Which one of the following frequency tables could match the percentaged segmented bar chart?

Age
Preferred travel destination Under 55 years 55 years and over
domestic 91 90
international 49 110
Total 140 200
Age
Preferred travel destination Under 55 years 55 years and over
domestic 65 35
international 45 55
Total 110 90
Age
Preferred travel destination Under 55 years 55 years and over
domestic 35 55
international 65 45
Total 100 100
Age
Preferred travel destination Under 55 years 55 years and over
domestic 50 70
international 100 50
Total 150 120
Age
Preferred travel destination Under 55 years 55 years and over
domestic 71 39
international 29 61
Total 100 100

Solution
A correct two-way frequency table must reflect the percentages in the percentaged segmented bar chart,
which are:

• Domestic/Under 55 years: 65%

• International/Under 55 years: 35%

• Domestic/55 years and over: 45%

• International/55 years and over: 55%

Testing each option in turn, only option A has all percentages correct, as shown below.

• Domestic/Under 55 years: 91/140 = 65%

• International/Under 55 years: 49/140 = 35%

• Domestic/55 years and over: 90/200 = 45%

• International/55 years and over: 110/200 = 55%

Question 31/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (60%)]

The boxplots below show the distribution of the length of fish caught in two different ponds, Pond A and
Pond B.
Based on the boxplots above, it can be said that

A. 50% of the fish caught in Pond A are the same length as the fish caught in Pond B.

B. 50% of the fish caught in Pond B are longer than all of the fish caught in Pond A.

C. 50% of the fish caught in Pond B are shorter than all of the fish caught in Pond A.

D. 75% of the fish caught in Pond A are shorter than all of the fish caught in Pond B.

E. 75% of the fish caught in Pond B are longer than all of the fish caught in Pond A.

Solution

Option B is correct as the median length of the fish caught in Pond B is greater than the maximum length of
the fish caught in Pond A. All the other statements are not correct.

Question 32/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (63%)]

The stem plot below shows the height, in centimetres, of 20 players in a junior football team.

A player with a height of 179 cm is considered an outlier because 179 cm is greater than

A. 162 cm

B. 169 cm
C. 172.5 cm

D. 173 cm

E. 175.5 cm

Solution

Reading from the ordered stem plot, the median value is the mean of the 10th and 11th values (Median =
151.5 cm). The Q1 value is the mean of the 5th and 6th value (Q1 = 148 cm), and the Q3 value is the
mean of the 15th and 16th values (Q3 = 159 cm).

A player with a height of 179 cm would be considered an outlier as it is larger than Q3 + 1.5 × IQR (as
shown below).

Q3 + 1.5 × IQR
= 159 + 1.5 × (159 − 148)
= 175.5

Question 33/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (51%)]

The relationship between resting pulse rate, in beats per minute, and age group (15–20 years, 21–30 years,
31–50 years, over 50 years) is best displayed using

A. a histogram.

B. a scatterplot.

C. parallel boxplots.

D. a time series plot.

E. a back-to-back stem plot.

Solution

Parallel boxplots are best to display the relationship between resting pulse rate (a numerical variable) and age
group (a categorical variable). A back-to-back stem plot is also suitable to display the relationship between a
numerical and a categorical variable, but only in cases where the categorical variable is restricted to two
possible values (e.g. gender). Scatter lots and time series plots are useful for displaying the relationship
between two numerical variables, and a histogram is for displaying a single numerical variable.

Question 35/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (54%)]

Only the participants who scored at least 76.0 points in the audition were considered successful. Using the
68–95–99.7% rule, how many of the participants were considered unsuccessful?

A. 127

B. 128

C. 272

D. 672

E. 673

Solution

A score of 76.0 is one standard deviation above the mean. Using the 68–95–99.7% rule, 50% + 34% =
84% of participants would be expected to score less than 76.0 points. The number of participants considered
unsuccessful can be calculated as: 84% of 800 = 672 participants.
Question 36/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (67%)]

To be offered a leading role in the stage musical, a participant must achieve a standardised score of at least
1.80.

Three participants’ names and their overall scores are given in the table below.

Participant Overall score

Amy 81.5
Brian 80.5
Cherie 82.0

Which one of the following statements is true?

A. Only Amy was offered a leading role.

B. Only Cherie was offered a leading role.

C. Only Brian was not offered a leading role.

D. Both Brian and Cherie were offered leading roles.

E. All three participants were offered leading roles.

Solution

Each of the standardised scores can be calculated as follows.

81.5 − 69.5
Amy: z = ≈ 1.846
6.5

80.5 − 69.5
Brian: z = ≈ 1.692
6.5
 82.0 − 69.5
Cherie: z = ≈ 1.923
6.5
Only Brian’s standardised score is less that 1.80.

Question 37/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (71%)]

The heights of females living in a small country town are normally distributed:

• 16% of the females are more than 160 cm tall.

• 2.5% of the females are less than 115 cm tall.

The mean and the standard deviation of this female population, in centimetres, are closest to

A. mean = 135 standard deviation = 15

B. mean = 135 standard deviation = 25

C. mean = 145 standard deviation = 15

D. mean = 145 standard deviation = 20

E. mean = 150 standard deviation = 10

Solution

Using the 68–95–99.7% rule, if 16% of the females are more than 160 cm tall, a height of 160 cm is a height
that is one standard deviation above the mean (z = 1). Using the same rule, if 2.5% of the females are less
than 115 cm tall, a height of 115 cm is a height that is two standard deviations below the mean (z = −2).
This means that a height of 160 cm is 3 standard deviations taller than a height of 115 cm. So the standard
deviation is

160 − 115
standard deviation =
3
45
=
3
= 15 cm
If a height if 160 cm is one standard deviation above the mean, then mean = 160 − 15 = 145 cm.

Question 39/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (36%)]

The shape of the distribution is best described as

A. negatively skewed.

B. approximately symmetric.

C. negatively skewed with a possible outlier.

D. positively skewed with a possible outlier.

E. approximately symmetric with a possible outlier.

Solution

The data values are more spread out towards the lower (left) end of the histogram, so the shape is slightly
negatively skewed. There is a possible outlier between 67 and 68 centimetres.

Question 40/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (85%)]

The percentage of the 46 possums with a skull width of less than 55 mm is closest to

A. 12%

B. 26%

C. 39%
D. 61%

E. 74%

Solution

From the histogram, there is a total of 1 + 1 + 2 + 1 + 2 + 5 = 12 possums with a skull width of less
than 55 mm.

This represents a percentage of 12

46 × 100% ≈ 26%

Question 41/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (55%)]

The third quartile (Q3 ) for this distribution, in millimetres, could be

A. 55.8

B. 56.2

C. 56.9

D. 57.7

E. 58.3

Solution

There are 46 values, which can be split into two groups of 23. To find the Q3 value, find the median of the
upper 23 values, which will be 12th value in that half of the data. This value will occur in the column
representing 57 to 58 mm. Only option D gives a value in this range.
Question 42/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (74%)]

The age, in years, of a sample of 14 possums is displayed in the dot plot below

The mean and the standard deviation of age for this sample of possums are closest to

A. mean = 4.25 standard deviation = 2.6

B. mean = 4.8 standard deviation = 2.4

C. mean = 4.8 standard deviation = 2.5

D. mean = 4.9 standard deviation = 2.4

E. mean = 4.9 standard deviation = 2.5

Solution

The mean and standard deviation for this sample can be found by entering the values into a CAS and
calculating the summary statistics.
Question 43/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (76%)]

The possum population of a large city park is 2498.

The body lengths of this species of possum are known to be approximately normally distributed with a mean
of 88 cm and a standard deviation of 4 cm.

Using the 68–95–99.7% rule, the number of possums in this park with a body length between 84 cm and 96
cm is closest to

A. 2036

B. 2043

C. 2047

D. 2105

E. 2156

Solution

A body length of 84 cm has a standardised score of:

84−88 −4
z= 4 = 4 = −1.
A body length of 96 cm has a standardised score of:
96−88 8
z= 4 = 4 = 2.
So a body length between 84 and 96 mm is one that is between one standard deviation below and two
standard deviations above the mean body length. Using the 68–95–99.7% rule, this is to account for 34% +
34% + 13.5% = 81.5% of the body lengths for this species of possum.

81.5% × 2498 ≈ 2036 possums.

Question 44/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (75%)]

The histogram below displays the distribution of spleen weight for a sample of 32 seals.

The histogram has a log10 scale.

Data: adapted from CL Stewardson et al., ‘Gross and microscopic visceral anatomy of the male Cape fur seal,
Arctocephalus pusillus pusillus (Pinnipedia: Otariidae), with reference to organ size and growth’, Journal of
Anatomy, 195, 1999, p. 240

The number of seals in this sample with a spleen weight of 1000 g or more is

A. 7

B. 8

C. 17

D. 25

E. 27

Solution

A spleen weight of 1000 g is equivalent to a log10 (spleen

weight) of 3, since log10 (1000) = 3. From
the histogram, there are 8 + 9 + 7 + 1 = 25 seals with a log10 (spleen weight) of greater than 3.
Question 45/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (71%)]

Data was collected to investigate the association between the following two variables:

• age (29 and under, 30–59, 60 and over)

• uses public transport (yes, no)

Which one of the following is appropriate to use in the statistical analysis of this association?

A. a scatterplot

B. parallel box plots

C. a least squares line

D. a segmented bar chart

E. the correlation coefficient r

Solution

Both age and uses public transport are categorical variables, so the segmented bar chart is the only
appropriate analysis tool to use of those listed.

Question 47/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (73%)]

Using this least squares line to model the association between resting pulse rate and time spent exercising, the
residual for the student who spent four hours per week exercising is closest to
A. −2.0 beats per minute.

B. −1.0 beats per minute.

C. −0.3 beats per minute.

D. 1.0 beats per minute.

E. 2.0 beats per minute.

Solution

Observe the position of the data point and the regression line height on the graph where time spent exercising
is 4 hours per week. The data point has a resting pulse rate of 63 beats per minute (ydata ), while the
regression line height is at 64 beats per minute (ypredicted ). Calculating the residual:

Residual = ydata − ypredicted

= 63 − 64 = −1

Question 48/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (46%)]

The equation of this least squares line is closest to

A. resting pulse rate = 67.2 − 0.91 × time spent exercising

B. resting pulse rate = 67.2 − 1.10 × time spent exercising

C. resting pulse rate = 68.3 − 0.91 × time spent exercising

D. resting pulse rate = 68.3 − 1.10 × time spent exercising

E. resting pulse rate = 67.2 + 1.10 × time spent exercising

Solution

Using the points (x1 , y1 ) = (1, 67.2) and (x2 , y2 ) = (11, 56.2) on a regression line with equation
y = a + bx:
y 2 −y 1 56.2−67.2
b= x2 −x1 = 11−1 = −1.1

a = y1 − bx1 = 67.2 − (−1.1)(1) = 68.3.

Question 49/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (45%)]

The coefficient of determination is 0.8339.

The correlation coefficient r is closest to

A. −0.913

B. −0.834

C. −0.695

D. 0.834

E. 0.913

Solution

If r 2 = 0.8339, then:

r2 = 0.8339

r= 0.8339

r ≈ ±0.9132
Since the association between the two variables is negative, r ≈ −0.9132.

Question 50/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (51%)]

In a study of the association between a person’s height, in centimetres, and body surface area, in square
metres, the following least squares line was obtained.

body surf ace area = −1.1 + 0.019 × height

Which one of the following is a conclusion that can be made from this least squares line?

A. An increase of 1 m2 in body surface area is associated with an increase of 0.019 cm in height.

B. An increase of 1 cm in height is associated with an increase of 0.019 m2 in body surface area.

C. The correlation coefficient is 0.019

D. A person’s body surface area, in square metres, can be determined by adding 1.1 cm to their height.

E. A person’s height, in centimetres, can be determined by subtracting 1.1 from their body surface area, in
square metres.

Solution

Option B is a correct interpretation of the gradient of the regression line. Option A has the variables in the
wrong way. Option C incorrectly interprets the gradient as the correlation coefficient. Options D and E can be
ignored as they incorrectly assert that predicted values can be ‘determined’.

Question 51/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (58%)]

Freya uses the following data to generate the scatterplot below.

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

y 105 48 35 23 18 16 12 12 9 9

The scatterplot shows that the data is non-linear.

To linearise the data, Freya applies a reciprocal transformation to the variable y .

She then fits a least squares line to the transformed data.

With x as the explanatory variable, the equation of this least squares line is closest to

A. y1 = −0.0039 + 0.012x

B. y1 = −0.025 + 1.1x

C. y1 = 7.8 − 0.082x
1
D. y = 45.3 + 59.7 × x
1
E. y = 59.7 + 45.3 × x

Solution
To find the appropriate regression equation, enter the data for x and y into your calculator, then create a new
variable which contains the reciprocals of the y values. Then find the linear regression rule for y1 vs. x. This
yields the equation: y1 = −0.0039 + 0.012x

Question 52/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (54%)]

A log10 (y) transformation was used to linearise a set of non-linear bivariate data.

A least squares line was then fitted to the transformed data.

The equation of this least squares line is

log10 (y) = 3.1 − 2.3x

This equation is used to predict the value of y when x = 1.1

The value of y is closest to

A. −0.24

B. 0.57

C. 0.91

D. 1.6

E. 3.7

Solution

Substituting the value x = 1.1 into the regression equation gives:

log10 (y) = 3.1 − 2.3(1.1)
log10 (y) = 0.57
y = 100.57
y ≈ 3.7

Question 53/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (49%)]

The statistical analysis of a set of bivariate data involving variables x and y resulted in the information
displayed in the table below.

Mean ˉ = 27.8
x yˉ = 33.4
Standard deviation sx = 2.33 sy = 3.24
Equation of the least squares line y = −2.84 + 1.31x

Using this information, the value of the correlation coefficient r for this set of bivariate data is closest to

A. 0.88

B. 0.89

C. 0.92

D. 0.94

E. 0.97

Solution

For a linear regression with rule y = a + bx:

 s
b = r sxy
1.31 = r × 3.24
2.33
2.33
r = 1.31 × 3.24 ≈ 0.94

Question 54/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (42%)]

A least squares line is fitted to a set of bivariate data.

Another least squares line is fitted with response and explanatory variables reversed.

Which one of the following statistics will not change in value?

A. the residual values

B. the predicted values

C. the correlation coefficient r

D. the slope of the least squares line

E. the intercept of the least squares line

Solution

The correlation coefficient is a measure of the linearity of the relationship between two variables, and is not
affected by switching the response and explanatory variables. All the other options relate to regression line
calculations which would be affected by such a switch.

Question 55/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (63%)]

Percy conducted a survey of people in his workplace. He constructed a two–way frequency table involving
two variables.

One of the variables was attitude towards shorter working days (for, against).

The other variable could have been

A. age (in years).

B. sex (male, female).

C. height (to the nearest centimetre).

D. income (to the nearest thousand dollars).

E. time spent travelling to work (in minutes).

Solution

A two-way table is appropriate for displaying data from two categorical variables. The variable sex (male,
female) is the only possible answer, since the variables listed in Options A, C, D, and E are numerical
variables. Option B is correct.

Question 57/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (67%)]

When the numbers in this equation are correctly rounded to three significant figures, the equation will be

A. average temperature = 42.984 − 0.877 × latitude

B. average temperature = 42.984 − 0.878 × latitude

C. average temperature = 43.0 − 0.878 × latitude

D. average temperature = 42.9 − 0.878 × latitude

E. average temperature = 43.0 − 0.877 × latitude

Solution

In Options A and B, the y -intercept value is expressed correct to five significant figures, so these options are
incorrect. In option C the gradient value has been rounded incorrectly (0.878 instead of 0.877). In option D,
both the y -intercept and gradient values have been rounded incorrectly. Only option E is correctly expressed.

Question 58/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (41%)]

The coefficient of determination was calculated to be 0.893743

The value of the correlation coefficient, rounded to three decimal places, is

A. −0.945

B. 0.898

C. 0.806

D. 0.898

E. 0.945

Solution

If r 2 = 0.893743, then:

r = ± 0.893743

r ≈ ±0.94538

Since the association between the two variables is negative, r ≈ −0.945.

Question 59/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (37%)]

A study was conducted to investigate the effect of drinking coffee on sleep.

In this study, the amount of sleep, in hours, and the amount of coffee drunk, in cups, on a given day were
recorded for a group of adults.

The following summary statistics were generated.

Sleep (hours) Coffee (cups)

Mean 7.08 2.42
Standard deviation 1.12 1.56

Correlation coefficient (r) −0.770

On average, for each additional cup of coffee drunk, the amount of sleep

A. decreased by 0.55 hours.

B. decreased by 0.77 hours.

C. decreased by 1.1 hours.

D. increased by 1.1 hours.

E. increased by 2.3 hours.

Solution

For a linear regression with rule y = a + bx:

s
b = r sxy
1.12
b = −0.770 × 1.56
b ≈ −0.55
So on average, for each additional cup of coffee drunk, the amount of sleep decreased by approximately 0.55
hours.

Question 60/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (57%)]

The table below shows the values of two variables x and y .

The associated scatterplot is also shown.

The explanatory variable is x.

x y
1 7.6
3 3.4
5 12.1
7 23.4
 9 43.6
11 51.8
13 95.4
15 108
16 145
17 172
18 168

The scatterplot is non-linear.

A squared transformation applied to the variable x can be used to linearise the scatterplot.

The equation of the least squares line fitted to the linearised data is closest to

A. y = −1.34 + 0.546x

B. y = −1.34 + 0.546x2

C. y = 3.93 − 0.00864x2

D. y = 34.6 − 10.5x

E. y = 34.6 − 10.5x2

Solution

Enter the values of x and y into your calculator, then create a new variable which represents the squares of
the values of the x variable. Then calculate the least squares regression line for y vs x2 .

This gives the approximate equation y = −1.34 + 0.546x.

Since the explanatory variable was x2 not x, the correct equation is y = −1.34 + 0.546x2 .
Question 62/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (57%)]

The variables in this study, frequency of nightmares (low, high) and snores (no, yes), are

A. ordinal and nominal respectively.

B. nominal and ordinal respectively.

C. both numerical.

D. both ordinal.

E. both nominal.

Solution

The values of the categorical variable frequency of nightmares have a clear order, so this variable is ordinal.
The values of the categorical variable snore do not have a clear order, so this variable is nominal.

Question 63/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (95%)]

The percentage of participants in the study who did not snore is closest to

A. 42.0%

B. 43.5%

C. 49.7%

D. 52.2%

E. 56.5%
Solution

There are 91 out of a total of 161 participants who did not snore, so the percentage of participants who did
91
not snore is 161 × 100% = 56.5%.

Question 64/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (70%)]

Of those people in the study who did snore, the percentage who have a high frequency of nightmares is
closest to

A. 7.5%

B. 17.1%

C. 47.8%

D. 52.2%

E. 58.0%

Solution

Of the 70 participants who did snore, 12 of these had a high frequency of nightmares. So the percentage of
snoring participants who also had a high frequency of nightmares is 12
70 × 100% = 17.1%

Question 65/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (34%)]

A least squares line of the form y = a + bx is fitted to a scatterplot.
Which one of the following is always true?

A. As many of the data points in the scatterplot as possible will lie on the line.

B. The data points in the scatterplot will be divided so that there are as many data points above the line as
there are below the line.

C. The sum of the squares of the shortest distances from the line to each data point will be a minimum.

D. The sum of the squares of the horizontal distances from the line to each data point will be a minimum.

E. The sum of the squares of the vertical distances from the line to each data point will be a minimum.

Solution

By definition, the least squares line is always the line which minimises the sum of the squares of the vertical
distances between the line and the data points.

Question 66/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (74%)]

In a study, the association between the number of tasks completed on a test and the time allowed for the test,
in hours, was found to be non-linear.

The data can be linearised using a log10 transformation applied to the variable number of tasks. The equation
of the least squares line for the transformed data is

log10 (number of tasks) = 1.160 + 0.03617 × time

This equation predicts that the number of tasks completed when the time allowed for the test is three hours is
closest to

A. 13

B. 16

C. 19
D. 25

E. 26

Solution

If time = 3 hours, the equation predicts that:

log10 (no. of tasks) = 1.160 + 0.03617 × 3
= 1.26851

So the number of tasks will be: 101.26851 ≈ 18.56 ≈ 19 tasks.

Question 67/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (71%)]

Oscar walked for nine consecutive days. The time, in minutes, that Oscar spent walking on each day is shown
in the table below.

Day 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Time 46 40 45 34 36 38 39 40 33

A least squares line is fitted to the data.

The equation of this line predicts that on day 10 the time Oscar spends walking will be the same as the time
he spent walking on

A. day 3

B. day 4

C. day 6

D. day 8

E. day 9
Solution

Using the calculator regression features, the least-squares regression line has the equation T ime = 44 −
Day .

If Day = 10, the predicted time is

T ime = 44 − (10) = 34 minutes. This is the same time that he spent walking on day 4.

Question 68/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (40%)]

The table below shows the weight, in kilograms, and the height, in centimetres, of 10 adults.

Weight (kg) Height (cm)

59 173
67 180
69 184
84 195
64 173
74 180
76 192
56 169
58 164
66 180

A least squares line is fitted to the data. The least squares line enables an adult’s weight to be predicted from
their height. The number of times that the predicted value of an adult’s weight is greater than the actual value
of their weight is

A. 3

B. 4

C. 5

D. 6

E. 7

Solution

Using the calculator regression features, with height as the explanatory variable and weight as the response
variable, the least-squares regression line has the equation as shown below.

Observing the location of the predicted line in relation to the plotted points, the predicted value is greater than
the actual value for 6 of the 10 points.

Question 70/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (68%)]

The equation of the least squares line predicts that, on average, for each one-month increase in the age of the
seals, the increase in the value of log10 (spleen weight) is
A. 0.009434

B. 0.01000

C. 1.020

D. 2.698

E. 5.213

Solution

The slope of the least squares line is given as b = 0.009434, meaning that we expect on average that for
each one-month increase in age (the explanatory variable), the value of response variable
log10 (spleen weight) will increase by 0.009434.

Question 71/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (56%)]

Using the equation of the least squares line, the predicted spleen weight of a 30-month-old seal, in grams, is
closest to

A. 3

B. 511

C. 772

D. 957

E. 1192

Solution
Substituting age = 30 into the given regression equation gives

log10 (spleen weight) = 2.698 + 0.009434 × (30)

≈ 2.981

So the predicted value of spleen weight is 102.981 ≈ 957.2 grams. This result can also be obtained by
solving the above equation on a CAS calculator.

Question 73/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (67%)]

The variables test grade (A, B, C, D, E) and instructional method (individual, group) are

A. a numerical and a categorical variable respectively.

B. both nominal variables.

C. a nominal and an ordinal variable respectively.

D. both ordinal variables.

E. an ordinal and a nominal variable respectively.

Solution

Test grade is an ordered set of categories, and so is an ordinal variable. Instructional method is a set of named
categories, and so is a nominal variable.

Question 74/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (56%)]

Of the students who received an A grade, the percentage who were instructed individually is closest to

A. 9%

B. 22%

C. 36%

D. 56%

E. 64%

Solution

A total of 10 + 18 = 28 students received an A grade, while a total of 10 students who achieved an A

grade were instructed individually. As a percentage, this is
10
28 × 100% ≈ 36%.

Question 75/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (86%)]

To become a qualified referee, a grade of A or B on the test is required. Those who receive a C, a D or an E
will not qualify.

Using column percentages, a new two-way percentage frequency table is constructed from the data in Table
1.

In this new table, qualified to be a referee (yes, no) is the response variable and instructional method
(individual, group) is the explanatory variable.

Which one of the following tables correctly displays the data from Table 1?

Instructional method (%)

Qualified to be a referee Individual Group
yes (A or B grade) 35 38
no (C, D or E grade) 65 62
 Instructional method (%)
Qualified to be a referee Individual Group
yes (A or B grade) 39 38
no (C, D or E grade) 61 62
Instructional method (%)
Qualified to be a referee Individual Group
yes (A or B grade) 39 43
no (C, D or E grade) 61 57
Instructional method (%)
Qualified to be a referee Individual Group
yes (A or B grade) 61 62
no (C, D or E grade) 39 38
Instructional method (%)
Qualified to be a referee Individual Group
yes (A or B grade) 65 57
no (C, D or E grade) 35 43

Solution

The number of students receiving individual instruction who qualified to be a referee is 10 + 35 = 45

students.
45
( 115 × 100% ≈ 39%)

The number of students receiving individual instruction who did not qualify to be a referee is 30 + 28 +
12 = 70 students.
70
( 115 × 100% ≈ 61%).

The number of students receiving group instruction who qualified to be a referee is 18 + 30 = 48 students.
48
( 126 × 100% ≈ 38%)

The number of students receiving group instruction who did not qualify to be a referee is 24 + 48 + 6 =
78 students.
 78
( 126 × 100% ≈ 62%)

Question 77/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (58%)]

The equation of the least squares line is closest to

A. head length = −40 + 7 × body length

B. body length = −40 + 7 × head length

C. head length = 168 + 7 × bodylength

D. body length = 168 − 40 × head length

E. body length = 7 + 168 × head length

Solution

Select two points on the line, for example (42, 250) and (80, 510). Then to find the gradient of the line y =
a + bx,
510−250
b= 80−42 ≈ 6.842

To find the y -intercept, use one of the selected points, say (80, 510).

a = y − bx
≈ 510 − (6.842)(80)
≈ −37.368

The equation of the line is approximately body length = −40 + 7 × head length.
Question 78/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (51%)]

The median head length of the 17 crocodiles, in centimetres, is closest to

A. 49

B. 51

C. 54

D. 300

E. 345

Solution

There are 17 values for head length, so the median value will be 9th largest value (since 8 + 1 + 8 = 17).
To find this value on the scatter plot, place a ruler on the vertical axis, then slide it right, counting to the 9th
value for head length, which is 51 cm.

Question 79/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (48%)]

The correlation coefficient r is equal to 0.963.

The percentage of variation in body length that is not explained by the variation in head length is closest to

A. 0.9%

B. 3.7%

C. 7.3%

D. 92.7%
E. 96.3%

Solution

The value of r = 0.963, so

r2 = (0.963)2 ≈ 0.927369. This means that approximately 92.7% of the variation in body length can be
explained by variation in head length. So 100% − 92.7% = 7.3% of the variation in body length is not
explained by variation in head length.

Question 80/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (80%)]

The table below shows the monthly profit, in dollars, of a new coffee shop for the first nine months of 2018.

Month Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept.
Profit ($) 2890 1978 2402 2456 4651 3456 2823 2678 2345

Using four-mean smoothing with centring, the smoothed profit for May is closest to

A. $2502

B. $3294

C. $3503

D. $3804

E. $4651

Solution
The four-mean smoothed value for March to June is:
2402+2456+4651+3456
4 = 3241.25
The four-mean smoothed value for April to July is:
2456+4651+3456+2823
4 = 3346.5
After centring for May, the smoothed profit is:
3241.25+3346.5
2 = 3293.88
So, the smoothed profit is approximately $3294.

Question 81/ 84

[VCAA 2018 FM (51%)]

The quarterly sales figures for a large suburban garden centre, in millions of dollars, for 2016 and 2017 are
displayed in the table below.

Year Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 Quarter 4

2016 1.73 2.87 3.34 1.23
2017 1.03 2.45 2.05 0.78

Using these sales figures, the seasonal index for Quarter 3 is closest to

A. 1.28

B. 1.30

C. 1.38

D. 1.46

E. 1.48
Solution

For 2016, the average quarterly sales are: 1.73+2.87+3.34+1.23

4 = 2.2925
3.34
So, the seasonal index for 2016 Quarter 3 is 2.2925 ≈ 1.46.

For 2017, the average quarterly sales are: 1.03+2.45+2.05+0.78

4 = 1.5775
2.05
So, the seasonal index for 2017 Quarter 3 is 1.5775 ≈ 1.30.

Averaging the two seasonal indices for Quarter 3 over 2016-2017 gives: 1.46+1.30
2 = 1.38

Question 83/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (45%)]

Both three-median smoothing and five-median smoothing are being considered for this data. Both of these
methods result in the same smoothed value on day number

A. 3

B. 4

C. 5

D. 6

E. 7

Solution

Inspecting the graph, the three-median and five-median graphs have the same median value only on day 7.
That is, the median value for days 5-9 and the median value for days 6-8 is 37 minutes in each case.
Question 84/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (69%)]

A least squares line is to be fitted to the time series plot shown on the previous page.

The equation of this least squares line, with day number as the explanatory variable, is closest to

A. day number = 23.8 + 2.29 × time

B. day number = 28.5 + 1.77 × time

C. time = 23.8 + 1.77 × day number

D. time = 23.8 + 2.29 × day number

E. time = 28.5 + 1.77 × day number

Solution

Options A and B can be eliminated as they use time as the explanatory variable. It is difficult to easily
distinguish between the remaining three options, as they all seem reasonable. Enter the values of day number
(x) and time (y ) into your calculator, then calculate the least squares regression line for time vs day number.
This gives the approximate equation time = 28.5 + 1.77 × day number.
Option E is correct.

Question 86/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (37%)]

The median monthly rainfall for 2017 was closest to

A. 53 mm
B. 82 mm

C. 96 mm

D. 103 mm

E. 111 mm

Solution

From the time series plot, read the 12 values of monthly rainfall from the lowest value to the highest value.
The median value will be the mean of the 6th value (95 mm) and 7th value (110 mm).

So the median value can be calculated:

95+110
M edian = 2 mm
= 102.5 mm
≈ 103 mm

Question 87/ 84

[VCAA 2019 FM (74%)]

If seven-mean smoothing is used to smooth this time series plot, the number of smoothed data points would
be

A. 3

B. 5

C. 6

D. 8

E. 10

Solution
For seven-mean smoothing, smoothed data points can be found using:

1st to 7th values

2nd to 8th values

3rd to 9th values

4th to 10th values

5th to 11th values

6th to 12th values

The total number of seven-mean smoothed points is 6.

Question 89/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (43%)]

To correct the rainfall in March for seasonality, the actual rainfall should be, to the nearest per cent

A. decreased by 26%

B. increased by 26%

C. decreased by 35%

D. increased by 35%

E. increased by 74%

Solution

The seasonal index (I ), for March is 0.741, so the deseasonalised value (D ) can be calculated from the
actual value (A) by using the formula:
D = A
I = 0.741
A
1
= 0.741 × A
= 1.34953 … × A
The seasonality can be corrected by increasing the actual value by approximately 35%.

Question 90/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (67%)]

The long-term mean rainfall for December is closest to

A. 64.7 mm

B. 65.1 mm

C. 71.3 mm

D. 76.4 mm

E. 82.0 mm

Solution

Selecting the data for January, it is possible to find the average monthly ‘long-term mean’ rainfall as follows:
51.9
lll M onthly Average = 0.728
51.9
M onthly Average = 0.728
≈ 71.29

The sum of all the values for Mean rainfall will be approximately 12 × 71.29 = 855.5.
The sum of the listed values for January to November is

51.9 + 52.3 + ... + 81.1 = 779.1.

So the long-term mean rainfall for December will be 855.5 − 779.1 = 76.4.
Question 92/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (88%)]

The deseasonalised rainfall for May 2019 is closest to

A. 71.3 mm

B. 75.8 mm

C. 86.1 mm

D. 88.1 mm

E. 113.0 mm

Solution

The seasonal index (I ), for May is 1.222, so the deseasonalised value (D ) can be calculated from the actual
value (A) of 92.6 by using the formula:

D = A
I
92.6
= 1.222
≈ 75.8 mm

Question 93/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (73%)]

The six-mean smoothed monthly rainfall with centring for August 2019 is closest to

A. 67.8 mm

B. 75.9 mm
C. 81.3 mm

D. 83.4 mm

E. 86.4 mm

Solution

The six-mean smoothed value from May to October is: 92.6+77.2+…+55.2

6 ≈ 80.9333

The six-mean smoothed value from June to November is: 77.2+80.0…+97.3

6 ≈ 81.717

Corrected by centering around August, these two values can be averaged to give: 80.9333+81.7167
2 ≈
81.3 mm

Question 95/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (45%)]

During 1960, the median number of monthly airline passengers was closest to

A. 461 000

B. 465 000

C. 471 000

D. 573 000

E. 621 000

Solution

The median of the twelve monthly values can be read from the time series plot by averaging the 6th and 7th
values (reading from the lowest value upwards). Since the 6th and 7th value are both approximately 460 000,
the median number of monthly passengers is closest to 461 000.

Question 96/ 84

[VCAA 2020 FM (57%)]

During the period January to May 1960, the total number of airline passengers was 2 160 000. The five-mean
smoothed number of passengers for March 1960 is

A. 419 000

B. 424 000

C. 430 000

D. 432 000

E. 434 000

Solution

The total number of passengers for the first five months is 2 160 000, so the five-mean smoothed value for
March is: 2 1605 000 = 432 000

Question 97/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (34%)]

The time series plot below shows the quarterly sales, in thousands of dollars, of a small business for the years
2010 to 2020.
The time series plot is best described as having

A. seasonality only.

B. irregular fluctuations only.

C. seasonality with irregular fluctuations.

D. a decreasing trend with irregular fluctuations.

E. a decreasing trend with seasonality and irregular fluctuations.

Solution

Although at a glance it may appear that the time series plot displays seasonality, the minimum and maximum
quarterly values do not have any clear repeating pattern over the 10-year period. There does appear to be a
decreasing trend, and they are irregular fluctuations in the plot.

Question 98/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (53%)]

The time series plot below shows the points scored by a basketball team over 40 games.
The nine-median smoothed points scored for game number 10 is closest to

A. 102

B. 108

C. 110

D. 112

E. 117

Solution

For a nine-median smoothed value centred on game 10, consider the points scored in game 10, and the four
games before and after game 10 (it helps to circle this set of values on the plot. The smoothed value will be
the middle value, in this case the 5th highest points scored of these nine values, which is 110 points.

Question 99/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (48%)]

A garden centre sells garden soil.

The table below shows the daily quantity of garden soil sold, in cubic metres, over a one-week period.

Day Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun

Quantity (m3) 234 186 346 346

The quantity of garden soil sold on Wednesday, Thursday and Friday is not shown.

The five-mean smoothed quantity of garden soil sold on Thursday is 206 m3.

The three-mean smoothed quantity of garden soil sold on Thursday, in cubic metres, is

A. 143

B. 166

C. 206

D. 239

E. 403

Solution

Let the daily quantity of garden soil sold on Wednesday Thursday and Friday be represented as a, b, and c.

The five-mean smoothed value centred on Thursday is calculated as follows.

186+a+b+c+346
5 = 206 m3
186 + a + b + c + 346 = 1030 m3
a+b+c = 1030 − (186 + 346)
a+b+c = 498 m3
The three-mean smoothed value centred on Thursday is calculated as follows.
(498)
a+b+c
3 = 3 m3
= 166 m3
Question 100/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (59%)]

The table below shows the number of visitors to an art gallery during the summer, autumn, winter and spring
quarters for the years 2017 to 2019.

The quarterly average is also shown for each of these years.

Season 2017 2018 2019

summer quarter 29 685 25 420 31 496
autumn quarter 27 462 23 320 29 874
winter quarter 25 564 21 097 27 453
spring quarter 26 065 22 897 28 149
Quarterly average 27 194.0 23 183.5 29 243.0

The seasonal index for summer is closest to

A. 1.077

B. 1.081

C. 1.088

D. 1.092

E. 1.096

Solution

The seasonal index for each of the summer quarters can be calculated by dividing the number of visitors in
that quarter by the quarterly average number of visitors.

For 2017:
29 685
S.I. (Summer 2017) = 27 194.0 ≈ 1.0916
25 420
S.I. (Summer 2018) = 23 183.5 ≈ 1.0965
31 496
S.I. (Summer 2019) = 29 243.0 ≈ 1.0770
The average seasonal index for summer is the mean of these three values, which is approximately 1.088.

Question 101/ 84

[VCAA 2021 FM (52%)]

The number of visitors to a regional animal park is seasonal.

Data is collected and deseasonalised before a least squares line is fitted.

The equation of the least squares line is

deseasonalised number of visitors = 2349 − 198.5 × month number

where month number 1 is January 2020.

The seasonal indices for the 12 months of 2020 are shown in the table below.

Month number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Seasonal index 1.10 1.25 1.15 0.95 0.85 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.95 1.10 1.15 1.10

The actual number of visitors predicted for February 2020 was closest to

A. 1562

B. 1697

C. 1952

D. 2245

E. 2440

Solution

Using the given regression equation, the deseasonalised number of visitors for February 2020 is 2349 −
198.5(2) = 1952. The find the actual number of visitors for February 2020, this value must be multiplied
by the seasonal index for February 2020, so 1952 × 1.25 = 2440.

Question 102/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (66%)]

The daily number of cups of coffee sold by a food truck over a three-week period is shown in the table below.

Week Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun

1 123 91 120 176 145 99 187
2 98 104 145 163 134 128 206
3 125 134 128 187 156 102 179

The six-mean smoothed number of cups of coffee, with centring, sold on Thursday in Week 2 is closest to

A. 127

B. 138

C. 147

D. 155

E. 163

Solution

The centred six-mean smoothed value for Thursday in Week 2 can be calculated as follows:

Find the mean daily sales for Monday to Saturday (Week 2).
98+104+…+128
6 ≈ 128.67
Find the mean daily sales for Tuesday to Sunday (Week 2).
104+145+…+206
6 ≈ 146.67
The centred value for Thursday of Week 2 is the mean of these two values
128.67+146.67
2 ≈ 138

Question 103/ 84

[VCAA 2022 FM (40%)]

The seasonal index for sales of sunscreen in summer is 1.25

To correct for seasonality, the actual sunscreen sales for summer should be

A. reduced by 20%

B. reduced by 25%

C. reduced by 80%

D. increased by 20%

E. increased by 25%

Solution

Let D be the de-seasonalised value, A be the actual value, and S be the seasonal index.

D = AS
D = 1.25
A
= A
( 54 )
5 4
D =A÷ 4 =A× 5

So the de-seasonalised sales value is 4/5 (or 80%) of the actual sales value. This represents a reduction of
20%.
Question 2/ 126

[VCAA 2018 FM (79%)]

What is the value of the regular payment added to the principal of this annuity investment?

A. $34.00

B. $156.40

C. $466.00

D. $500.00

E. $656.40

Solution

From the recurrence relation, $500 is added to the investment balance after each year.

Question 3/ 126

[VCAA 2018 FM (61%)]

Between the second and third years, the increase in the value of this investment is closest to

A. $656

B. $658

C. $661

D. $1315

E. $1975

Solution
The value of the annuity investment can be calculated using the recursion feature of your calculator as
follows:

V0 = 46000

V1 = 1.0034 × 46000 + 500 = $46656.40

V2 = 1.0034 × 46656.40 + 500 = $47315.03

V3 = 1.0034 × 47315.03 + 500 = $47975.90

So, the increase in the value of the annuity investment between the second and third years can be calculated
as:

V3 − V2 = $47 975.90 − $47 315.03

= $660.87
≈ $661

Question 4/ 126

[VCAA 2018 FM (54%)]

Daniel borrows $5000, which he intends to repay fully in a lump sum after one year.

The annual interest rate and compounding period for five different compound interest loans are given below:

• Loan I – 12.6% per annum, compounding weekly

• Loan II – 12.8% per annum, compounding weekly

• Loan III – 12.9% per annum, compounding weekly

• Loan IV – 12.7% per annum, compounding quarterly

• Loan V – 13.2% per annum, compounding quarterly

When fully repaid, the loan that will cost Daniel the least amount of money is

A. Loan I.

B. Loan II.

C. Loan III.
D. Loan IV.

E. Loan V.

Solution

Using the inbuilt function for converting seminal rates to effective interest rates, the effective interest rates
can be compared as follows:

Loan I: eff(12.6, 52) ≈ 13.41

Loan II: eff(12.8, 52) ≈ 13.64

Loan III: eff(12.9, 52) ≈ 13.75

Loan IV: eff(12.7, 4) ≈ 13.32

Loan V: eff(13.2, 4) ≈ 13.87

So, Loan IV will cost Daniel the least amount of money. An alternative solution is to observe that Loans II
and III must be more expensive than Loan I and Loan V must be more expensive than Loan IV, so you only
need to check Loans I and IV; you can either do this with the eff method, or you can calculate how much he
pays for each.

Question 5/ 126

[VCAA 2018 FM (39%)]

The graph below shows the value, Vn , of an asset as it depreciates over a period of five months.
Which one of the following depreciation situations does this graph best represent?

A. flat rate depreciation with a decrease in depreciation rate after two months

B. flat rate depreciation with an increase in depreciation rate after two months

C. unit cost depreciation with a decrease in units used per month after two months

D. reducing balance depreciation with an increase in the rate of depreciation after two months

E. reducing balance depreciation with a decrease in the rate of depreciation after two months

Solution

A straight line can be drawn through the points associated with the first 2 months, and a steeper straight line
can be drawn through the points associated with months 2 to 5. So, a linear depreciation model is to be
chosen. This eliminates options D and E. Both options A and C indicate that the rate of depreciation will
decrease after two months. Only option B represents a linear depreciation rate that becomes steeper after 2
months.

Question 6/ 126

[VCAA 2018 FM (59%)]

Which one of the following recurrence relations could be used to model the value of a perpetuity investment,
Pn , after n months?

A. P0 = 120 000, Pn+1 = 1.0029 × Pn − 356

B. P0 = 180 000, Pn+1 = 1.0047 × Pn − 846

C. P0 = 210 000, Pn+1 = 1.0071 × Pn − 1534

D. P0 = 240 000, Pn+1 = 0.0047 × Pn − 2232

E. P0 = 250 000, Pn+1 = 0.0085 × Pn − 2125

Solution

For a perpetuity, we require Pn+1 = Pn , and so the regular monthly payment must match the interest
earned in that month. Options D and E can be eliminated as the recurrence relation will give successive
values much less than the previous value. Checking the monthly interest earned for each of options A to C:

Option A: 0.0029 × 120 000 = $348

Option B: 0.0047 × 180 000 = $846

Option C: 0.0071 × 210 000 = $1491

So, option B is the correct recurrence relation.

Question 7/ 126

[VCAA 2018 FM (29%)]

Adam has a home loan with a present value of $175 260.56

The interest rate for Adam’s loan is 3.72% per annum, compounding monthly.

His monthly repayment is $3200.

The loan is to be fully repaid after five years.

Adam knows that the loan cannot be exactly repaid with 60 repayments of $3200.

To solve this problem, Adam will make 59 repayments of $3200. He will then adjust the value of the final
repayment so that the loan is fully repaid with the 60th repayment.
The value of the 60th repayment will be closest to

A. $368.12

B. $2831.88

C. $3200.56

D. $3557.09

E. $3568.12

Solution

The future value of this loan after 59 payments can be found via the TVM solver, entering the following
values:

N = 59
I = 3.72
P V = 175 260.56
PMT = −3200
F V =?
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives F V = −3557.0892.

So the amount owing after 59 payments is $3557.09.

The final payment of this loan can then be found via the TVM solver, entering the following values:
 N =1
I = 3.72
P V = 3557.0892
PMT =?
FV = 0
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives PMT = −3568.1161 ….

So, the final payment will be $3568.12.

Question 8/ 126

[VCAA 2018 FM (29%)]

Five lines of an amortisation table for a reducing balance loan with monthly repayments are shown below.

Repayment number Repayment Interest Principal reduction Balance of loan

25 $2200.00 $972.24 $1227.76 $230 256.78
26 $2200.00 $967.08 $1232.92 $229 023.86
27 $2200.00 $961.90 $1238.10 $227 785.76
28 $2200.00 $1002.26 $1197.74 $226 588.02
29 $2200.00 $996.99 $1203.01 $225 385.01

The interest rate for this loan changed immediately before repayment number 28.

This change in interest rate is best described as

A. an increase of 0.24% per annum.

B. a decrease of 0.024% per annum.

C. an increase of 0.024% per annum.

D. a decrease of 0.0024% per annum.

E. an increase of 0.00024% per annum.

Solution

Let In be the interest payable for the nth payment.

r
I27 = $961.90 = 12
100 × $229 023.86

Solving for r gives r = 5.04%

r
I28 = $1002.26 = 12
100 × $227 785.76

Solving for r gives r = 5.28%

So, the change in interest rate is: 5.28% − 5.04% = 0.24%.

Question 9/ 126

[VCAA 2018 FM (45%)]

Mariska plans to retire from work 10 years from now.

Her retirement goal is to have a balance of $600 000 in an annuity investment at that time.

The present value of this annuity investment is $265 298.48, on which she earns interest at the rate of 3.24%
per annum, compounding monthly.

To make this investment grow faster, Mariska will add a $1000 payment at the end of every month.

Two years from now, she expects the interest rate of this investment to fall to 3.20% per annum,
compounding monthly. It is expected to remain at this rate until Mariska retires.

When the interest rate drops, she must increase her monthly payment if she is to reach her retirement goal.

The value of this new monthly payment will be closest to

A. $1234
B. $1250

C. $1649

D. $1839

E. $1854

Solution

The future value of this annuity investment after 2 years can be found via the TVM solver, entering the
following values:

N = 24
I = 3.24
P V = −265 298.48
PMT = −1000
F V =?
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives F V = 307 794.49956 ….

So, the value of the annuity investment at the end of the first two years is $307 794.50.

The new monthly payment required to ensure that the balance is

$600 000 after 8 more years can be found via the TVM solver, entering the following values:
 N = 8 × 12
I = 3.2
P V = −307 794.49956 …
PMT =?
F V = 600 000
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives PMT = −1854.0543.

So the new monthly payment will be $1854 (to the nearest dollar).

Question 10/ 126

[VCAA 2019 FM (68%)]

Consider the recurrence relation shown below.

A0 = 3, An+1 = 2An + 4

The value of A3 in the sequence generated by this recurrence relation is given by

A. 2 × 3 + 4

B. 2 × 4 + 4

C. 2 × 10 + 4

D. 2 × 24 + 4

E. 2 × 52 + 4

Solution
The sequence values can be generated as follows:

A0 = 3

A1 = 2A0 + 4 = 2 × 3 + 4 = 10

A2 = 2A1 + 4 = 2 × 10 + 4 = 24

A3 = 2A2 + 4 = 2 × 24 + 4 = 52
Option D is correct.

Question 11/ 126

[VCAA 2019 FM (66%)]

The value of a compound interest investment, in dollars, after n years, Vn , can be modelled by the recurrence
relation shown below.

V0 = 100 000, Vn+1 = 1.01 Vn

The interest rate, per annum, for this investment is

A. 0.01%

B. 0.101%

C. 1%

D. 1.01%

E. 101%

Solution

From the recurrence relation given:

 R = 1 + 100
r

1.01 = 1 + 100
r
r
100 = 0.01
r = 1
The interest rate is 1% p.a.

Question 12/ 126

[VCAA 2019 FM (76%)]

Geoff purchased a computer for $4500. He will depreciate the value of his computer by a flat rate of 10% of
the purchase price per annum.

A recurrence relation that Geoff can use to determine the value of the computer after n years, Vn , is

A. V0 = 4500, Vn+1 = Vn − 450

B. V0 = 4500, Vn+1 = Vn + 450

C. V0 = 4500, Vn+1 = 0.9Vn

D. V0 = 4500, Vn+1 = 1.1 Vn

E. V0 = 4500, Vn+1 = 0.1 (Vn − 450)

Solution

V0 represents the purchase price, which is $4500. The amount that the computer depreciates by each year (
D) can be calculated as follows:
10
D = r
100 × V 0 = 100 × 4500
= 450

The correct recurrence relation is: V 0 = 4500, V n+1 = V n − 450.

Question 13/ 126

[VCAA 2019 FM (58%)]

Consider the following amortisation table for a reducing balance loan.

Payment number Payment Interest Principal reduction Balance

0 0.00 0.00 0.00 300 000.00
1 1050.00 900.00 150.00 299 850.00
2 1050.00 899.55 150.45 299 699.55
3 1050.00 899.10 150.90 299 548.65

The annual interest rate for this loan is 3.6%. Interest is calculated immediately before each payment. For this
loan, the repayments are made

A. weekly.

B. fortnightly.

C. monthly.

D. quarterly.

E. yearly.

Solution

= r/k
100 × V0 , where k is the
The amount of interest after the first time period is calculated as follows: I
number of compounding periods per year. From the table, V 0 = 300 000, r = 3.6% p.a. and I = $900
, and so the above equation can be solved for k .

3.6/k
900 = 100 × 300 000
900×100
3.6/k = 300 000
k = 12
The repayments are monthly.

Question 14/ 126

[VCAA 2019 FM (54%)]

The graph below shows the value, in dollars, of a compound interest investment after n compounding
periods, Vn , for a period of four compounding periods.

The coordinates of the point where n = 2 are (2, b). The value of b is
A. 660.00

B. 670.00

C. 672.80

D. 678.40

E. 685.60

Solution

For compound interest investments:

Vn+1 = RVn
R = VVn+1
n

Using V0 = 500 and V1 = 580, this means:

V1 580
R= V0 = 500 = 1.16

The value of b(V2 ) can be calculated:

V2 = RV 1 = 1.16 × 580
= 672.80

Therefore b = 672.80.

Question 15/ 126

[VCAA 2019 FM (53%)]

A machine is purchased for $30 000.

It produces 24 000 items each year.

The value of the machine is depreciated using a unit cost method of depreciation.

After three years, the value of the machine is $18 480.

A rule for the value of the machine after n units are produced, Vn , is

A. Vn = 0.872n

B. Vn = 24 000n − 3840

C. Vn = 30 000 − 24 000n

D. Vn = 30 000 − 0.872n

E. Vn = 30 000 − 0.16n
Solution

Over the three years, the machine has depreciated by:

$30 000 − $18 480 = $11 520

In that three year period, the machine has produced 24 000 × 3 = 72 000 items.
$11 520
Unit Cost = 72 000 = $0.16 per item

The direct rule for Vn , is:

Vn = V0 − Unit Cost × n
= 30 000 − 0.16n

Question 16/ 126

[VCAA 2019 FM (38%)]

Joseph borrowed $50 000 to buy a new car.

Interest on this loan is charged at the rate of 7.5% per annum, compounding monthly.

Joseph will fully repay this loan with 60 monthly repayments over five years.

Immediately after the 59th repayment is made, Joseph still owes $995.49

The value of his final repayment, to the nearest cent, will be

A. $995.49

B. $998.36

C. $1001.71

D. $1001.90

E. $1070.15
Solution

Since the amount owing after 59 payments has been given, we can find the amount of the last payment via
the TVM solver, entering the following values:

N =1
I = 7.5
P V = 995.49
PMT =?
FV = 0
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives PMT = −1001.7118 ….

The final payment will be $1001.71.

Question 17/ 126

[VCAA 2019 FM (51%)]

Millie invested $20 000 in an account at her bank with interest compounding monthly.

After one year, the balance of Millie’s account was $20 732.

The difference between the rate of interest per annum used by her bank and the effective annual rate of
interest for Millie’s investment is closest to

A. 0.04%

B. 0.06%

C. 0.08%

D. 0.10%
E. 0.12%

Solution

The effective annual rate can be found by:

V1 20 732
R= V0 = 20 000 = 1.0366

So the effective rate is 3.66% p.a.

Using the calculator function: nom(effective rate, periods per year) gives the equivalent nominal rate of
3.6%.

The difference between these rates is: 3.66% − 3.6% = 0.06%.

Question 18/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (85%)]

The following recurrence relation can generate a sequence of numbers.

T0 = 10, Tn+1 = Tn + 3
The number 13 appears in this sequence as

A. T1

B. T2

C. T3

D. T10

E. T13

Solution
The sequence values can be generated from the recurrence relation as follows:

T0 = 10

T1 = T0 + 3 = 10 + 3 = 13

Question 19/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (55%)]

An asset is purchased for $2480.

The value of this asset after n time periods, Vn , can be determined using the rule

Vn = 2480 + 45n.

A recurrence relation that also models the value of this asset after n time periods is

A. V0 = 2480, Vn+1 = Vn + 45n

B. Vn = 2480, Vn+l = Vn + 45n

C. V0 = 2480, Vn+1 = Vn + 45

D. V1 = 2480, vn+1 = Vn + 45

E. Vn = 2480, Vn+l = Vn + 45

Solution

The direct rule given indicates that:

V0 = 2480 + 45 × 0 = 2480

V1 = 2480 + 45 × 1 = 2525
V2 = 2480 + 45 × 2 = 2570

V3 = 2480 + 45 × 3 = 2615
So successive terms in the sequence differ by 45, with a starting value of 2480. Hence the recurrence relation
can be described as:

V0 = 2480, Vn+1 = Vn + 45

Question 20/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (80%)]

Consider the following four recurrence relations representing the value of an asset after n years, Vn .

• V0 = 20000, Vn+1 = Vn + 2500

• V0 = 20000, Vn+1 = Vn − 2500

• V0 = 20000, Vn+1 = 0.875Vn

• V0 = 20000, Vn+1 = 1.125Vn − 2500

How many of these recurrence relations indicate that the value of an asset is depreciating?

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4

Solution

Taking each recurrence relation in turn:

RR1: V0 = 20 000, Vn+1 = Vn + 2500

RR2: V0 = 20 000, Vn+1 = Vn − 2500

RR3: V0 = 20 000, Vn+1 = 0.87Vn

RR4: V0 = 20 000, Vn+1 = 1.125Vn − 2500

RR1 describes the value of an asset that is increasing in value by 2500 each year.

RR2 describes the value of an asset that is decreasing in value by 2500 each year.

RR3 describes the value of an asset that is decreasing in value each year, since successive values are 87.5%
of the value in the previous year.

RR4 describes the value of an asset that, each year, is first increased by 12.5%, and then 2500 is subtracted.

The value after the first year can be

V0 = 20 000
V1 = 1.125 × V 0 − 2500
calculated: = 1.125 × 20 000 − 2500,
= 22 500 − 2500
= 20 000

As V1 = V0 , RR4 does not describe a depreciating asset.

Only RR2 and RR3 indicate that the value of the asset is depreciating.

Question 21/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (80%)]

Manu invests $3000 in an account that pays interest compounding monthly.

The balance of his investment after n months, Bn , can be determined using the recurrence relation

B0 = 3000, Bn+1 = 1.0048 × Bn

The total interest earned by Manu’s investment after the first five months is closest to
A. $57.60

B. $58.02

C. $72.00

D. $72.69

E. $87.44

Solution

The corresponding direct rule for the recurrence relation given is

B0 = 3000, Bn = (1.0048)n × B0
so the balance of the investment after five months is

B5 = (1.0048)5 × 3000
= $3072.69
The total interest over these 5 months can be found by

B5 − B0 = $3072.69 − $3000 = $72.69

Question 22/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (79%)]

The graph below represents the value of an annuity investment, An , in dollars, after n time periods.
A recurrence relation that could match this graphical representation is

A. A0 = 200 000, An+1 = 1.015An − 2500

B. A0 = 200 000, An+1 = 1.025An − 5000

C. A0 = 200 000, An+1 = 1.03An − 5500

D. A0 = 200 000, An+1 = 1.04An − 6000

E. A0 = 200 000, An+1 = 1.05An − 8000

Solution

The graph indicates that the value of the annuity investment does not change over time. For this to happen,
the recurrence relation must be of the form

A1 = R × A0 − D = A0 , so that the increase in the value of the investment after multiplying by R is

cancelled by subtracting D .

Checking each option in turn:

Option A:

A1 = 1.015 × 200 000 − 2500

= 203 000 − 2500
= 200 500

= A0
Option B:
A1 = 1.025 × 200 000 − 5000
= 205 000 − 5000
= 200 000
= A0
So option B will maintain the value of the annuity investment over time.

The remaining options do not need to be checked, but are shown here for completeness:

Option C:

A1 = 1.03 × 200 000 − 5500

= 206 000 − 5500
= 200 500

= A0
Option D:

A1 = 1.04 × 200 000 − 6000

= 208 000 − 6000
= 202 000

= A0
Option E:

A1 = 1.05 × 200 000 − 8000

= 210 000 − 8000
= 202 000

= A0

Question 23/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (20%)]

Ray deposited $5000 in an investment account earning interest at the rate of 3% per annum, compounding
quarterly.

A rule for the balance, Rn , in dollars, after n years is given by

A. Rn = 5000 × 0.03n
B. Rn = 5000 × 1.03n

C. Rn = 5000 × 0.034n

D. Rn = 5000 × 1.0075n

E. Rn = 5000 × 1.00754n

Solution

kn
Using the compound interest formula, the value of the balance after n years is Rn = R0 × (1 + 100 )
r/k
,
where k is the number of compounding periods per year, and r is the annual rate of interest.

kn
Rn = R0 × ( 1 + 100 )
r/k

4n
= 5000 × (1 + 100 )
3/4

4n
= 5000 × (1.0075)

Question 24/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (77%)]

Gen invests $10 000 at an interest rate of 5.5% per annum, compounding annually.

After how many years will her investment first be more than double its original value?

A. 12

B. 13

C. 14

D. 15

E. 16
Solution

Using the compound interest formula, compounding annually, the value of the investment account after n
years is:
n
Vn = V0 × (1 + 100
r
)
5.5 n
= 10 000 × (1 + 100 )
= 10 000 × (1.055)n
To find when the investment will first be more than double the original value, solve the equation:
n
20 000 = 10 000 × (1.055)
n ≈ 12.9462
It will take 13 years for the investment to first be more than double its original value.

Question 25/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (58%)]

The nominal interest rate for a loan is 8% per annum.

When rounded to two decimal places, the effective interest rate for this loan is not

A. 8.33% per annum when interest is charged daily.

B. 8.32% per annum when interest is charged weekly.

C. 8.31% per annum when interest is charged fortnightly.

D. 8.30% per annum when interest is charged monthly.

E. 8.24% per annum when interest is charged quarterly.

Solution
The nominal rates (correct to 2 decimal places) equivalent to the stated effective interest rates can be found
via the calculator function nom(effective interest rate, periods per year) as follows:

Option A: nom(8.33, 365) = 8.00

Option B: nom(8.32, 52) = 8.00

Option C: nom(8.31, 26) = 7.99

Option D: nom(8.30, 12) = 8.00

Option E: nom(8.24, 4) = 8.00

Only option C is not equivalent to a nominal rate of 8%.

Question 26/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (54%)]

The value of a van purchased for $45 000 is depreciated by k % per annum using the reducing balance
method.

After three years of this depreciation, it is then depreciated in the fourth year under the unit cost method at
the rate of 15 cents per kilometre.

The value of the van after it travels 30 000 km in this fourth year is $26 166.24

The value of k is

A. 9

B. 12

C. 14

D. 16

E. 18

Solution
The value of k can be obtained by working backwards from the value of the van at the end of the 4th year.

The value of the van after three years (V3 ) can be found using the unit cost method as follows:

V4 = V 3 − $0.15 × 30 000 km
$26 166.24 = V 3 − $4500
V3 = $30 666.24

Using the reducing balance method, the value of the investment after n years is:

k n
V n = (1 − 100 ) × V 0 , and so:
3
V3 = (1 − 100
k
) ×V0
3
30 666.24 = (1 − 100
k
) × 45 000

Solving this equation on the calculator for k gives k = 12.

Question 27/ 126

[VCAA 2020 FM (41%)]

Twenty years ago, Hector invested a sum of money in an account earning interest at the rate of 3.2% per
annum, compounding monthly.

After 10 years, he made a one-off extra payment of $10 000 to the account.

For the next 10 years, the account earned interest at the rate of 2.8% per annum, compounding monthly.

The balance of his account today is $686 904.09

The sum of money Hector originally invested is closest to

A. $355 000

B. $370 000

C. $377 000

D. $384 000

E. $385 000
Solution

The amount of the original investment can be calculated by working backwards from the final balance (using
the finance solver):

Second 10 years:

N = 120
I = 2.8
P V =?
PMT = 0
F V = 686 904.09
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives P V = −519 320.2967 …, meaning that the balance of the investment was
$519 320.30.
This balance includes the one-off extra payment of $10 000, and so the balance at the end of the first 10 years
must have been:

$519 320.30 − $10 000 = $509 320.30

First 10 years:

N = 120
I = 3.2
P V =?
PMT = 0
F V = 509 320.30
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives P V = −369 999.996 …, meaning that the original investment was $370 000.

Question 28/ 126

[VCAA 2021 FM (83%)]

The following recurrence relation can generate a sequence of numbers.

L0 = 37, Ln+1 = Ln + C

The value of L2 is 25.

The value of C is

A. −6

B. −4

C. 4

D. 6

E. 37

Solution

The sequence values can be generated from the recurrence relation as follows:

L0 = 37
L1 = L0 + C = 37 + C
L2 = L1 + C = (37 + C) + C = 37 + 2C

Since L2 = 25, this means that

37 + 2C = 25
C = −6

Question 30/ 126

[VCAA 2021 FM (93%)]

The principal reduction associated with payment number 3 is

A. $17 962.40

B. $25 969.37

C. $27 008.15

D. $28 088.47

E. $44 970.55

Solution

The principal reduction associated with payment 3 can be calculated as:

princ. reduction = payment − interest

= $44 970.55 − $17 962.40
= $27 008.15

Question 31/ 126

[VCAA 2021 FM (44%)]

The number of years, in total, for which Deepa will receive the regular payment of $44 970.55 is closest to

A. 12

B. 15

C. 16

D. 18

E. 20
Solution

The annual interest rate can be calculated using the first payment.

Interest = 100 × Principal

r

20 000 = 100 × 500 000

r

r = 4%
The number of years for which Deepa will receive the full payment can be calculated (using the finance
solver):

N =?
I=4
P V = −500 000
PMT = 44 970.55
FV = 0
PpY = 1
CpY = 1

Solving gives N = 15.000 …, meaning that Deepa will receive the full payment for 15 years.

Question 32/ 126

[VCAA 2021 FM (44%)]

Sammy purchased a boat for $72 000.

The value of the boat is depreciated each year by 10% using the reducing balance method.

In the third year, the boat will depreciate in value by 10% of

A. $47 239.20

B. $52 488.00

C. $58 320.00

D. $64 800.00

E. $72 000.00
Solution

For this reducing balance case, the associated recurrence relation is:

Vn+1 = 0.9Vn V0 = 72000

Using the recursion feature of the calculator gives:

V 0 = 72 000
V 1 = 0.9 × V 0 = 0.9 × 72 000 = 64 800
V 2 = 0.9 × V 1 = 0.9 × 64 800 = 58 320
V 3 = 0.9 × V 2 = 0.9 × 58 320 = 52 488
So in the third year, the boat will depreciate by 10% of $58 320.

Question 33/ 126

[VCAA 2021 FM (40%)]

Enrico invests $3000 in an account that pays interest compounding monthly.

After four years, the balance of the account is $3728.92

The effective annual interest rate for this investment, rounded to two decimal places, is

A. 5.45%

B. 5.52%

C. 5.56%

D. 5.59%

E. 5.60%

Solution
The annual rate applied can be found using the rule

lllVn = Rn × V0
n
Vn = (1 + 100 )
r/k
× V0
4×12
3728.92 = (1 + 100 )
r/12
× 3000

= 5.44999 … The effective annual interest rate can be found using the
Solving this for r gives r
command eff(5.44999 … , 12) = 5.5882 ….

Alternative method

To grow an investment from $3000 to $3728.92 in 4 years, but compounding annually, the following
calculation can be used.
n
lllVn = (1 + 100
r
) × V0
r 4
3728.92 = (1 + 100 ) × 3000

Solving this for r gives r = 5.5882 ….

Question 34/ 126

[VCAA 2021 FM (56%)]

Joanna deposited $12 000 in an investment account earning interest at the rate of 2.8% per annum,
compounding monthly.

She would like this account to reach a balance of $25 000 after five years.

To achieve this balance, she will make an extra payment into the account each month, immediately after the
interest is calculated.

The minimum value of this payment is closest to

A. $113.85

B. $174.11

C. $580.16

D. $603.22
E. $615.47

Solution

Since extra payments are to be made into this investment, the finance solver is needed to obtain the answer,
using the following values.

N = 60
I = 2.8
P V = −12 000
PMT =?
F V = 25 000
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives PMT = −174.10604 …, meaning that the extra payment is closest to $174.11.

Question 35/ 126

[VCAA 2021 FM (31%)]

Bimal has a reducing balance loan.

The balance, in dollars, of the loan from month to month, Bn , is modelled by the recurrence relation below.

B0 = 450 000, Bn+1 = RBn − 2633

Given that the loan will be fully repaid in 20 years, the value of R is closest to

A. 1.003

B. 1.0036

C. 1.03

D. 1.036

E. 1.36
Solution

The finance solver can be used to find the required annual interest rate for the loan, using the following
values.

N = 20 × 12
I =?
P V = 450 000
PMT = −2633
FV = 0
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives I = 3.5999 …, meaning that the extra payment is approximately 3.6%.

The value of R can be found using the formula

R = 1 + r/k
100
= 1 + 3.6/12
100
= 1.003

Question 36/ 126

[VCAA 2021 FM (33%)]

Bob borrowed $400 000 to buy an apartment.

The interest rate for this loan was 3.14% per annum, compounding monthly.

A scheduled monthly repayment that allowed Bob to fully repay the loan in 20 years was determined.

Bob decided, however, to make interest-only repayments for the first two years.

After these two years the interest rate changed. Bob was still able to pay off the loan in the 20 years by
repaying the scheduled amount each month.

The interest rate, per annum, for the final 18 years of the loan was closest to
A. 1.85%

B. 2.21%

C. 2.79%

D. 3.14%

E. 4.07%

Solution

Firstly, consider the monthly payment Bob would need to make to fully repay the loan over 20 years. The
finance solver can be used to find the value of this payment as follows.

N = 20 × 12
I = 3.14
P V = 400 000
PMT =?
FV = 0
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives PMT = −2246.52831 …, meaning that the payment required is approximately
$2246.53.
If Bob decides to make interest-only repayments for the first two years, at the end of these two years, he will
still owes $400 000. To pay the loan off in the remaining 18 years using the original monthly payment of
$2246.53, the finance solver can be used as follows.
N = 18 × 12
I =?
P V = 400 000
PMT = −2246.53
FV = 0
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives I = 2.2116 …, meaning that the annual interest rate required is approximately 2.21%.
Question 37/ 126

[VCAA 2022 FM (44%)]

A sequence of numbers is generated by the recurrence relation shown below.

R0 = 2, Rn+1 = 2 − Rn

The value of R2 is

A. −4

B. −2

C. 0

D. 2

E. 4

Solution

Using the recurrence rule given:

R0 = 2
R1 = 2 − R 0 = 2 − 2 = 0
R2 = 2 − R 1 = 1 − 0 = 2

Question 39/ 126

[VCAA 2022 FM (78%)]

The balance of the loan first falls below $398 000 after how many months?

A. 1
B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 5

Solution

Using the given recurrence rule (rounding values to the nearest dollar):

V 0 = 400 000
V 1 = 1.003 × 400 000 − 2024 = 399 176
V 2 = 1.003 × 399 176 − 2024 = 398 350
V 3 = 1.003 × 398 350 − 2024 = 397 521
The value of the loan falls below $398 000 after the third month.

This answer can also be obtained as follows:

R = 1 + r/k
100
r/12
1.003 = 1 + 100

Solving this equation for r gives r = 3.6%

Now use the finance solver to find the number of months required

N =?
I = 3.6
P V = 400 000
PMT = −2024
F V = −398 000
Ppy/Cpy = 12

Solve for N gives N ≈ 2.422, so three months are needed.

Question 40/ 126

[VCAA 2022 FM (47%)]

With a small change to the final payment, the loan is expected to be repaid in full in

A. 25 years.

B. 26 years.

C. 28 years.

D. 29 years.

E. 30 years.

Solution

If not already found in the previous question, the annual interest rate can be found as follows.
r/k r/12
R=1+ 100 ⇔ 1.003 = 1 + 100

Solving this equation for r gives r = 3.6% The time required to fully repay the loan can be found using the
finance solver

N =?
I = 3.6
P V = 400 000
PMT = −2024
FV = 0
Ppy/Cpy = 12

Solve for N gives N ≈ 300, which is 25 years of monthly payments.

Question 41/ 126

[VCAA 2022 FM (65%)]

Nidhi owns equipment that is used for 10 hours per day for all 365 days of the year.

The value of the equipment is depreciated by Nidhi using the unit cost method.

The value of the equipment, En , in dollars, after n years can be modelled by the recurrence relation

E0 = 100 000, En+1 = En − 5475

The value of the equipment is depreciated by

A. $1.50 per hour.

B. $10 per hour.

C. $15 per hour.

D. $1.50 per day.

E. $10 per day.

Solution

From the recurrence relation, the equipment loses $5475 per year. Each year the equipment is used for 10
hours a day for 365 days = 3650 hours per year. The value of the equipment depreciates by
$5475
3650 hours = $150 per hour.

Question 42/ 126

[VCAA 2022 FM (33%)]

Consider the following four statements regarding nominal and effective interest rates as they apply to
compound interest investments and loans:

• An effective interest rate is the same as a nominal interest rate if interest compounds annually.

• Effective interest rates increase as the number of compounding periods per year increases.

• A nominal rate of 12% per annum is equivalent to a nominal rate of 1% per month.

• An effective interest rate can be lower than a nominal interest rate.

How many of these four statements are true?

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4

Solution

Analysing each of the four statements about effective and nominal rates in turn:

Statement 1 is correct, as the effective interest rate is equivalent to the nominal rate if there is only one
compounding period per year.

Statement 2 is correct, as compounding more often than annually increases the value of the effective interest
rate.

Statement 3 is correct as when converted to a monthly rate, the nominal rate can just be divided by 12.

Statement 4 is incorrect, as the lowest value for the effective rate will occur if there is only one compounding
period per year.

So only the first 3 statements are true.

Question 43/ 126

[VCAA 2022 FM (58%)]

Tim deposited $6000 into an investment account earning compound interest calculated monthly.

A rule for the balance, Tn , in dollars, after n years is given by Tn = 6000 × 1.00312n .

Let Rn be a new recurrence relation that models the balance of Tim’s account after n months.

This recurrence relation is

A. R0 = 6000, Rn+1 = Rn + 18

B. R0 = 6000, Rn+1 = Rn + 36

C. R0 = 6000, Rn+1 = 1.003Rn

D. R0 = 6000, Rn+1 = 1.0036Rn

E. R0 = 6000, Rn+1 = 1.0036Rn

Solution

The direct rule for the balance of the investment account after n years is:

kn
Tn = T0 × (1 + 100 )
r/k

For monthly compounding, this is:

12n
Tn = T0 × (1 + 100 )
r/12

Since we are given the direct rule for the balance after n years in this case, the monthly ‘multiplier’ is 1.003
and T0 = 6000.

So the recurrence relation for Rn (where n now represents n months!) is Rn+1 = 1.003 ×
Rn , R0 = 6000.

Question 44/ 126

[VCAA 2022 FM (49%)]

Li invests $4000 for five years at 3.88% per annum, compounding annually.

Joseph invests a sum of money for five years, which earns simple interest paid annually.

Let Jn be the value, in dollars, of Joseph’s investment after n years.

The two investments will finish at the same value, rounded to the nearest cent, if

Joseph’s investment is modelled by which one of the following recurrence relations?

A. J0 = 2000, Jn+1 = Jn + 467.72

B. J0 = 2500, Jn+1 = Jn + 367.72

C. J0 = 3000, Jn+1 = Jn + 317.72

D. J0 = 3500, Jn+1 = Jn + 267.72

E. J0 = 4000, Jn+1 = Jn + 467.72

Solution

The value of Li’s investment after five years (compounding annually) is:

Vn = Rn × V0
V5 = 1.03885 × 4000
= 4838.60

Joseph’s investment account balance is based on simple interest with the following direct rule (where D is
the annual interest):

Jn = J0 + n × D
Testing each option in turn:

Option A:

J5 = 2000 + 5 × 467.72 = $4338.60

Option B:

J5 = 2500 + 5 × 367.72 = $4338.60

Option C:

J5 = 3000 + 5 × 317.72 = $4588.60

Option D:

J5 = 3500 + 5 × 267.72 = $4838.60

Option E:

J5 = 4000 + 5 × 67.72 = $4338.60

So only the recurrence relation in option D will allow Joseph’s investment to finish at the same value as Li’s
at the end of 5 years.

Question 45/ 126

[VCAA 2022 FM (32%)]

On 1 January 2020, Dion invested $10 500 into an investment account paying compound interest of 0.52%
quarterly.

At the end of each quarter, after the interest was credited, Dion added an additional amount of money.

Let Dn represent the additional amount, in dollars, added at the end of quarter n.

This additional amount per quarter is modelled by the recurrence relation

D1 = C, Dn+1 = Dn

The balance of Dion’s investment account on 1 January 2022 was $12 700.95. The value of C is

A. $71.69

B. $215.55

C. $260.22

D. $270.15

E. $275.12

Solution

The recurrence relation given in this question refers to the regular additional payment C , which is to be
unchanged each quarter over the 8 time periods between 1 January 2020 and 1 January 2022. The value of C
can be obtained by using the finance solver as follows:
 N =2×4
I = 0.52 × 4
P V = −10 500
PMT =?
F V = 12 700.95
Ppy/Cpy = 4

Solving for PMT gives P mt ≈ −215.55.

So the value of C is approximately $215.55.

Question 1/ 164

[VCAA 2018 FM (78%)]

Which one of the following matrices has a determinant of zero?

0 1
A. [ ]
1 0

1 0
B. [ ]
0 1

1 2
C. [ ]
−3 6

3 6
D. [ ]
2 4

4 0
E. [ ]
0 −2

Solution

Only the matrix in option D has a determinant of zero.

det = 3 × 4 − (2 × 6) = 0.

Question 2/ 164

[VCAA 2018 FM (68%)]

4
The matrix product [4 2 0] × 12 is equal to
8
A. [144]

16
B. 24
0

1
C. 4 × [1 2 0] × 12
8

2
D. 2 × [2 1 0] × 6
4

2
E. 4 × [2 1 0] × 6
4

Solution

The matrix product gives the result [40], which is of order 1 × 1, so options A and B can be eliminated.
Evaluating options C to E in turn.

Option C:
 c1
4 × [lll1 2 0] 12
8
= 4 × [1 × 1 + 2 × 12 + 0 × 8]
= 4 × [25] = [100]
Option D:

2
2 × [lll2 1 0] 6
4
= 2 × [2 × 2 + 1 × 6 + 0 × 4]
= 2 × [10] = [20]
Option E:

2
4 × [lll2 1 0] 6
4
= 4 × [2 × 2 + 1 × 6 + 0 × 4]
= 4 × [10]
= [40]
So, option E is correct.

Alternative solution: Take out a factor of 2 from the row matrix: 2 × [2 1 0] (so this eliminates both
options C and D instantly) and check option E is correct by then taking out a factor of 2 from the column
matrix.

Question 3/ 164

[VCAA 2018 FM (78%)]

Five people, India (I ), Jackson (J ), Krishna (K ), Leanne (L) and Mustafa (M ), competed in a table tennis
tournament. Each competitor played every other competitor once only.

Each match resulted in a winner and a loser.

The matrix below shows the tournament results.

A ‘1’ in the matrix shows that the competitor named in that row defeated the competitor named in that
column.

For example, the ‘1’ in the fourth row shows that Leanne defeated Jackson.

A ‘0’ in the matrix shows that the competitor named in that row lost to the competitor named in that column.

There is an error in the matrix. The winner of one of the matches has been incorrectly recorded as a ‘0’.

This match was between

A. India and Mustafa.

B. India and Krishna.

C. Krishna and Leanne.

D. Leanne and Mustafa.

E. Jackson and Mustafa.

Solution

From the explanation given in the question, any ‘1’ in the matrix must be correct. These values can be used to
construct an incomplete directed graph as shown:
Note that there is no edge linking India (I ) and Mustafa (M ), so the entry in the matrix must have been
incorrectly recorded.

Alternative solution: scanning the matrix shows a zero in row 1 column 5 and also in row 5 column 1; this
would mean India lost to Mustafa and Mustafa lost to India, which is impossible; so one of these entries is
incorrect.

Question 4/ 164

[VCAA 2018 FM (69%)]

Matrix P is a 4 × 4 permutation matrix. Matrix W is another matrix such that the matrix product P ×W
is defined. This matrix product results in the entire first and third rows of matrix W being swapped. The
permutation matrix P is

0 0 0 1
0 1 0 0
A.
0 0 1 0
0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0
0 1 0 0
B.
1 0 0 0
0 0 0 1

1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
C.
1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
D.
0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0
E.
1 0 0 0
0 0 0 1

Solution

W is a 4 × n matrix. As an example, let W be a 4 × 1 matrix with:

a
b
W =
c
d

Thus, the matrix P × W exists and will have order 4 × 1.

Option A:

llll0 0 0 1 a d
0 1 0 0 b b
=
0 0 1 0 c c
0 0 0 1 d d

Option B:

llll0 0 1 0 a c
0 1 0 0 b b
=
1 0 0 0 c a
0 0 0 1 d d
Options C, D, and E can be eliminated as they result in the first-row value being unchanged. So, option B is
correct. Alternatively, option B displays the only permutation matrix, since by definition it must contain a
single 1 in each row and column.

Question 5/ 164

[VCAA 2018 FM (81%)]

A transition matrix, V , is shown below.

The transition diagram below has been constructed from the transition matrix V .

The labelling in the transition diagram is not yet complete.

The proportion for one of the transitions is labelled x.

The value of x is

A. 0.2

B. 0.5

C. 0.6

D. 0.7

E. 0.8

Solution

The value of x can be found by identifying the labels for each vertex in the transition diagram.

Top left vertex: Must be M , as it is the only vertex whose transition proportions include 0.1 and 0.4.

Top right vertex: Must be F , as 0.4 transition from M to F each month. Bottom left vertex: Since 0.2
transition from this vertex to M each month, and 0.1 transition from M to this vertex each month, only
vertex T is possible. Bottom right vertex: By elimination, this must be vertex L.

So, x represents the proportion that remains at L each month, or 0.6.

Question 6/ 164

[VCAA 2018 FM (28%)]

A study of the antelope population in a wildlife park has shown that antelope regularly move between three
locations, east (E ), north (N ) and west (W ).

Let An be the state matrix that shows the population of antelope in each location n months after the study
began.

The expected population of antelope in each location can be determined by the matrix recurrence rule
 An+1 = T An − D
where

this month
E N W
0.4 0.2 0.2 E
T = 0.3 0.6 0.3 N next month
0.3 0.2 0.5 W
and

50 E
D = 50 N
50 W

The state matrix, A3 , below shows the population of antelope three months after the study began.

1616 E
A3 = 2800 N
2134 W

The number of antelope in the west (W ) location two months after the study began, as found in the state
matrix A2 , is closest to

A. 2060

B. 2130

C. 2200

D. 2240

E. 2270

Solution

According to the matrix recurrence rule:

 A3 = T A2 − D
A3 + D = T A2
−1 −1
T (A3 + D) = T (T A2 )
T −1 (A3 + D) = A2
−1
A2 = T (A3 + D)
So, using the above result
−1
0.4 0.2 0.2
A2 = 0.3 0.6 0.3 × (A3 + D)
0.3 0.2 0.5
−1
0.4 0.2 0.2 1666
= 0.3 0.6 0.3 × 2850
0.3 0.2 0.5 2184
1630
= 2800
2270

Question 7/ 164

[VCAA 2018 FM (46%)]

A public library organised 500 of its members into five categories according to the number of books each
member borrows each month.

These categories are

J = no books borrowed per month

K = one book borrowed per month
L = two books borrowed per month
M = three books borrowed per month
N = four or more books borrowed per month

The transition matrix, T , below shows how the number of books borrowed per month by the members is
expected to change from month to month.
 this month
J K L M N
0.1 0.2 0.2 0 0 J
0.5 0.2 0.3 0.1 0 K
T = 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.1 0.2 L next month
0.1 0.2 0.1 0.6 0.3 M
0 0.1 0 0.2 0.5 N
In the long term, which category is expected to have approximately 96 members each month?

A. J

B. K

C. L

D. M

E. N

Solution

In the long term, the proportions for each category will converge to particular values, independent of the
starting values of each proportion. Let the initial state be:

100 J
100 K
S 0 = 100 L
100 M
100 N
The steady state values will be approximately:

S 100 = T 100 × S 0
49 J
96 K
≈ 124 L
151 M
80 N
So, Option B is correct.
Question 8/ 164

[VCAA 2019 FM (87%)]

Consider the following four matrix expressions.

8 4 8 4 0
[ ]+[ ] [ ]+[ ]
12 2 12 0 2
8 0 4 8 0 4 0
[ ]+[ ] [ ]+[ ]
12 0 2 12 0 0 2
How many of these four matrix expressions are defined?

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4

Solution

Addition of matrices is possible if the order of the matrices being added is the same. This is true for only two
of the expressions shown.

Question 9/ 164

[VCAA 2019 FM (68%)]

There are two rides called The Big Dipper and The Terror Train at a carnival.
The cost, in dollars, for a child to ride on each ride is shown in the table below.

Ride Cost ($)

The Big Dipper 7
The Terror Train 8

Six children ride once only on The Big Dipper and once only on The Terror Train.

The total cost of the rides, in dollars, for these six children can be determined by which one of the following
calculations?

A. [6] × [7 8]
7
B. [6] × [ ]
8

C. [6 6] × [7 8]

7
D. [6 6] × [ ]
8

6
E. [ ] × [7 8]
6

Solution

Consider each option in turn to see which will give the correct product matrix.

Option A will create a 1 × 2 matrix which gives the cost of The Big Dipper and Terror Train rides separately
(not as a single total). The product matrices in

Options B and C are not possible, since the number of columns in the first matrix does not match the number
of rows in the second matrix.

Option E creates a 2 × 2 matrix, which is not the required product matrix.

Option D creates a 1 × 1 product matrix which indicates the total cost of the rides.
Question 10/ 164

[VCAA 2019 FM (59%)]

3 2 1
Consider the matrix P , where P =[ ]
5 4 3

The element in row i and column j of matrix P is pij .

The elements in matrix P are determined by the rule

A. pij =4−j

B. pij = 2i + 1

C. pij =i+j+1

D. pij = i + 2j

E. pij = 2i − j + 2

Solution

All the rules will produce the correct value for p11 = 3.

For p12 = 3:

Option A : p12 =4−j =4−2=2

Option B : p12 = 2i + 1 = 2 + 1 = 3

Option C : p12 =i+j+1=1+2+1=4

Option D : p12 = i + 2j = 1 + 4 = 5

Option E : p12 = 2i − j + 2 = 2 − 2 + 2 = 2
Only options A and E give the required value. Further testing shows that:
For p22 = 4:

Option A : p22 =4−j =4−2=2

Option E : p22 = 2i − j + 2 = 4 − 2 + 2 = 4

Only option E has correct rule, which works for all values in P .

Question 11/ 164

[VCAA 2019 FM (56%)]

Stella completed a multiple-choice test that had 10 questions.

Each question had five possible answers, A, B, C, D and E .

For question number one, Stella chose the answer E .

Stella choose each of the nine remaining answers, in order, by following the transition matrix, T , below.

this question
A B C D E
0 0 1 0 0 A
0 0 0 1 0 B
T = 0 0 0 0 1 C next question
1 0 0 0 0 D
0 1 0 0 0 E
What answer did Stella choose for question number six?

A. A

B. B

C. P

D. D

E. E
Solution

According to the transition matrix, Stella chooses the following answers:

Question 1: She chooses E .

Question 2: Since she chose E for the previous question, she now chooses C .

Question 3: Since she chose C for the previous question, she now chooses A.

Question 4: Since she chose A for the previous question, she now chooses D .

Question 5: Since she chose D for the previous question, she now chooses B .

Question 6: Since she chose B for the previous question, she now chooses E .

Question 12/ 164

[VCAA 2019 FM (39%)]

A water park is open from 9 am until 5 pm. There are three activities, the pool (P ), the slide (S ) and the
water jets (W ), at the water park.

Children have been found to change their activity at the water park each half hour, as shown in the transition
matrix, T , below.

this half month

P S W
0.80 0.20 0.40 P
T = 0.05 0.60 0.10 S next half month
0.15 0.20 0.50 W
A group of children has come to the water park for the whole day.

The percentage of these children who are expected to be at the slide (S ) at closing time is closest to

A. 14%
B. 20%

C. 24%

D. 25%

E. 62%

Solution

From 9 am to 5 pm, there is time for:

8 hours
0.5 hours per activity = 16 activities.

At closing time, children will be completing their 16th activity, or will have had made 15 changes of activity
(although some will ‘change’ to same activity).

If we assume that the children were initially distributed equally across the 3 activities (a third at each
activity), then we can calculate:

S 16 = T 15 × S 0
15
0.80 0.20 0.40 1/3
= 0.05 0.60 0.10 × 1/3
0.15 0.20 0.50 1/3
0.621 P
= 0.138 S
0.241 W
So in this scenario, we would expect approximately 14% of children to be at the Slide at closing time. Note
that the values in S16 are very similar for any other starting proportions in S0 .

Question 13/ 164

[VCAA 2019 FM (54%)]

The communication matrix below shows the direct paths by which messages can be sent between two people
in a group of six people, U to Z .

receiver
U V W X Y Z
U 0 1 1 0 1 1
V 1 0 1 0 1 0
W 1 1 0 1 0 1
sender
X 0 1 0 0 1 1
Y 0 0 1 1 0 1
Z 1 1 0 1 1 0
A ‘1’ in the matrix shows that the person named in that row can send a message directly to the person named
in that column. For example, the ‘1’ in row 4, column 2 shows that X can send a message directly to V .

In how many ways can Y get a message to W by sending it directly to one other person?

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4

Solution

According to the communication matrix:

Y → W (directly)

Y → X , but X 
→W

Y → Z , but Z 
→W

From the above, it is not possible for Y to send a message to W by sending it directly to one other person.
Question 14/ 164

[VCAA 2019 FM (15%)]

An airline parks all of its planes at Sydney airport or Melbourne airport overnight.

The transition diagram below shows the change in the location of the planes from night to night.

There are always m planes parked at Melbourne airport.

There are always s planes parked at Sydney airport.

Of the planes parked at Melbourne airport on Tuesday night, 12 had been parked at Sydney airport on
Monday night.

How many planes does the airline have?

A. 25

B. 37

C. 62

D. 65

E. 85

Solution

If the parking arrangement has been operating for a long time (assume steady state), we expect that:
From this, we get the equations:

0.8m + 0.48s = m … (1)

0.2m + 0.52s = s … (2)

Also, since 12 of the planes parked at Melbourne on Tuesday were parked in Sydney the previous night,
using the transition diagram:

0.48 × s = 12 … (3)

Solving equation (1) and (3) for m and s gives the values m = 60 and s = 25, so the airline has 60 +
25 = 85 planes.

Question 15/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (83%)]

1 0 0
The matrix 0 1 1 is an example of
1 0 1
A. a binary matrix.

B. an identity matrix.

C. a triangular matrix.

D. a symmetric matrix.

E. a permutation matrix.

Solution
Option A: A binary matrix is composed solely of 0s and 1s, so the matrix given is a binary matrix.

(For completeness, here is a description of the remaining options.

Option B: An identity matrix has 1s in the main diagonal and zeros elsewhere, so this is not an identity
matrix.

Option C: A triangular matrix has only 0s above/below the main diagonal, so this is not a triangular matrix.

Option D: A symmetric matrix is symmetric with respect to the main diagonal, so this is not a symmetric
matrix.

Option E: In a permutation matrix, there is only a single 1 in each row and column, so this is not a
permutation matrix.)

Question 16/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (79%)]

1 2
0 3 2 0 3 1
Matrix A = and matrix B = [ ].
1 0 4 5 2 0
4 5

Matrix Q = A × B.

The element in row i and column j of matrix Q is qij .

Element q41 is determined by the calculation

A. 0 × 0 + 3 × 5

B. 1 × 1 × 2 × 0

C. 1 × 2 + 2 × 4

D. 4 × 1 + 5 × 0

E. 4 × 2 + 5 × 4
Solution

The element q41 in the product matrix Q is obtained by multiplying the 4th row of matrix A by the 1st
column of matrix B .

This gives the product 4 × 2 + 5 × 4.

Question 17/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (64%)]

Matrices P and W are defined below.

0 0 1 0 0 A
0 0 0 0 1 S
P = 0 1 0 0 0 W = T
0 0 0 1 0 O
1 0 0 0 0 R

A
S
If P × W T , the value of n could be
n

O
R
A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 5

Solution
To find the n value that will make P n × W give the same matrix W , this means P n × W = W . This
can only be true if P n is an identity matrix. By trial and error for n values between 2 and 5 inclusive, it can
be found n = 4 will give an identity matrix. That is,
4
0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 = 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Question 18/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (90%)]

Ina particular supermarket, the three top-selling magazines are Angel (A), Bella (B) and Crystal (C).

The transition diagram below shows the way shoppers at this supermarket change their magazine choice from
week to week.

A transition matrix that provides the same information as the transition diagram is
 this week
A B C
A. 0.55 0.70 0.35 A
0.70 0.60 0.40 B next week
0.35 0.40 0.40 C

this week
A B C
B. 0.55 0.60 0.25 A
0.45 0.15 0.35 B next week
0 0.25 0.40 C

this week
A B C
C. 0.55 0.25 0.35 A
0.45 0.60 0.25 B next week
0 0.15 0.40 C

this week
A B C
D. 0.55 0.25 0.35 A
0.45 0.60 0.25 B next week
0.35 0.15 0.40 C

this week
A B C
E. 0.55 0.25 0 A
0.45 0.60 0.25 B next week
0 0.15 0.40 C

Solution

According to the transition diagram, the main diagonal values are 0.55, 0.60 and 0.40. This eliminates options
B and E.

According to the transition diagram, 45% change from A to B each week, so the first element of row 2 is
0.45. This eliminates option A.

According to the transition diagram, 0% change from A to C each week, so the first element of row 3 is 0.
This eliminates option D.
Only option C is correct.

Question 19/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (86%)]

The diagram below shows the direct communication links that exist between Sam (S ), Tai (T ), Umi (U ) and
Vera (V ). For example, the arrow from Umi to Vera indicates that Umi can communicate directly with Vera.

A communication matrix can be used to convey the same information. In this matrix:

• a ‘1’ indicates that a direct communication link exists between a sender and a receiver

• a ‘0’ indicates that a direct communication link does not exist between a sender and a receiver.

The communication matrix could be

receiver
S T U V
S 0 1 0 1
A.
T 0 0 0 1
sender
U 0 1 0 1
V 1 0 1 0
 receiver
S T U V
S 0 1 0 1
B.
T 1 0 0 1
sender
U 0 1 0 1
V 1 1 1 0

receiver
S T U V
S 0 1 0 1
C.
T 0 0 0 1
sender
U 0 1 0 0
V 1 1 1 0

receiver
S T U V
S 0 1 0 1
D.
T 0 0 0 1
sender
U 0 1 0 1
V 1 1 1 0

receiver
S T U V
S 0 1 0 2
E.
T 0 0 0 2
sender
U 0 1 0 2
V 2 2 2 0

Solution

Consider the diagram and whether the sender can/cannot communicate directly with each other person.

Sam: In the communication matrix there should only be 1s in column T and V . This eliminates option E.

Tai: In the communication matrix there should only be 1 in column V . This eliminates option B.

Umi: In the communication matrix there should only be 1s in column T and V . This eliminates option C.

Vera: In the communication matrix there should only be 1s in column S , T and U . This eliminates option A.
Only option D is correct.

Question 20/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (73%)]

The element in row i and column j of matrix M is mij .

M is a 3 × 3 matrix. It is constructed using the rule mij = 3i + 2j .

M is

5 7 9
A. 7 9 11
11 13 15

5 7 9
B. 8 10 12
11 13 15

5 7 10
C. 8 10 13
11 13 16

5 8 11
D. 7 10 13
9 12 15

5 8 11
E. 8 11 14
11 14 17

Solution

Matrix M can be represented as:

 m11 m12 m13
M = m21 m22 m23
m31 m32 m33

Using the rule mij = 3i + 2j gives:

3(1) + 2(1) 3(1) + 2(2) 3(1) + 2(3)

M = 3(2) + 2(1) 3(2) + 2(2) 3(2) + 2(3)
3(3) + 2(1) 3(3) + 2(2) 3(3) + 2(3)
5 7 9
= 8 10 12
11 13 15

Question 21/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (38%)]

A small shopping centre has two coffee shops: Fatima’s (F ) and Giorgio’s (G).

The percentage of coffee-buyers at each shop changes from day to day, as shown in the transition matrix T .

today
F G
tomorrow
0.85 0.35 F
T =[ ]
0.15 0.65 G
On a particular Monday, 40% of coffee-buyers bought their coffees at Fatima’s.

The matrix recursion relation Sn+1 = T Sn is used to model this situation.

The percentage of coffee-buyers who are expected to buy their coffee at Giorgio’s on Friday of the same
week is closest to

A. 31%

B. 32%
C. 34%

D. 45%

E. 68%

Solution

There are four transitions between Monday and Friday, so a calculator can be applied recursively to find S5
from S1 using Sn+1 = T Sn .
Alternatively, the direct rule could be used as follows:

S5 = T 4S1
4
0.85 0.35 0.4
= [ ] [ ]
0.15 0.65 0.6
0.68125 F
= [ ]
0.31875 G
On Friday, it is expected that approximately 32% of coffee-buyers will buy their coffee at Giorgio’s.

Question 22/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (57%)]

The table below shows information about three matrices: A, B and C .

Matrix Order

A 2×4
B 2×3
C 3×4
The transpose of matrix A, for example, is written as AT .

What is the order of the product C T × (AT × B)T ?

A. 2 × 3

B. 3 × 4

C. 4 × 2

D. 4 × 3

E. 4 × 4

Solution

T
Considering the orders of the matrices in the calculation of C T × (AT × B ) :
T
C T × (AT × B )

→ (3 × 4)T × ((2 × 4)T × (2 × 3))T

→ (4 × 3) × ((4 × 2) × (2 × 3))T
→ (4 × 3) × (4 × 3)T
→ (4 × 3) × (3 × 4)
→ (4 × 4)
T
So C T × (AT × B ) is a 4 by 4 matrix.

Question 23/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (41%)]

Consider the matrix recurrence relation below.

 30 j 0.3 l
S0 = 20 , Sn+1 = T Sn where T = 0.2 m 0.3
40 0.4 0.2 n

Matrix T is a regular transition matrix.

42
Given the information above and that S1 = 28 , which one of the following is true?
20

A. m >l

B. j + l = 0.7

C. j =n

D. j >m

E. l =m+n

Solution

If T is a regular transition matrix, then the sum of each column is 1. This means that:

j + 0.2 + 0.4 = 1 ⇔ j = 0.4

0.3 + m + 0.2 = 1 ⇔ m = 0.5

l + 0.3 + n = 1 ⇔ l = 0.7 − n
Replacing value in the transition matrix:

0.4 0.3 0.7 − n

T = 0.2 0.5 0.3
0.4 0.2 n
Using the recurrence relation:
 S1 = T × S0
42 0.4 0.3 0.7 − n 30
28 = 0.2 0.5 0.3 20
20 0.4 0.2 n 40
42 46 − 40n
28 = 28
20 40n + 16
From above:

42 = 46 − 40n
40n = 4
n = 0.1

Since l = 0.7 − n, l = 0.7 − n = 0.6. In summary, we have the following values for the pronumerals:

j = 0.4
m = 0.5
n = 0.1
l = 0.6
We can now use these values to eliminate options A, B, C, and D.

Option E is correct.

Question 24/ 164

[VCAA 2020 FM (63%)]

Five competitors, Andy (A), Brie (B ), Cleo (C ), Della (D ) and Eddie (E ), participate in a darts
tournament.

Each competitor plays each of the other competitors once only, and each match results in a winner and a
loser.

The matrix below shows the results of this darts tournament.

There are still two matches that need to be played.

 loser
A B C D E
A 0 … 0 1 0
B … 0 1 0 1
winner C 1 0 0 … 1
D 0 1 … 0 0
E 1 0 0 1 0
A ‘1’ in the matrix shows that the competitor named in that row defeated the competitor named in that
column.

For example, the ‘1’ in row 2, column 3 shows that Brie defeated Cleo.

A ‘...’ in the matrix shows that the competitor named in that row has not yet played the competitor named in
that column.

The winner of this darts tournament is the competitor with the highest sum of their one-step and two-step
dominances.

Which player, by winning their remaining match, will ensure that they are ranked first by the sum of their
one-step and two-step dominances?

A. Andy

B. Brie

C. Cleo

D. Della

E. Eddie

Solution

The results of all of Eddie’s matches are known, and as he had only 2 wins, you can eliminate him as being
able to be ranked first. The other possibilities can be listed in turn, substituting 1s and 0s as required and then
calculating the sum of the first and second order dominance matrices.

If A wins and C wins:

So if A wins and C wins, C is ranked first. Completing similar calculations:

If A wins and D wins, players ranked equally.

If B wins and C wins, B is ranked first. If B wins and D wins, B is ranked first. In summary, if B wins,
B is ranked first. Note that C is ranked first only if B loses the last match.

Question 25/ 164

[VCAA 2021 FM (82%)]

3 2
If matrix M = 8 9 , then its transpose, M T , is
13 7

2 3
A. 9 8
7 13
 2 9 7
B. [ ]
3 8 13

7 9 2
C. [ ]
13 8 3

3 8 13
D. [ ]
2 9 7

13 8 3
E. [ ]
7 9 2

Solution

The transpose matrix M T will have order 2 × 3, so option A can be eliminated. Also, elements in the
transposed matrix will have elements transposed such that M i,j = Mj,i
T

For example, M3,2 = 7, then M2,3

T
= 7. Applying this transpose property shows that only option D is
correct for all elements.

Question 26/ 164

[VCAA 2021 FM (73%)]

Every Friday, the same number of workers from a large office building regularly purchase their lunch from
one of two locations: the deli, D , or the cafe, C .

It has been found that:

• of the workers who purchase lunch from the deli on one Friday, 65% will return to purchase from the deli
on the next Friday

• of the workers who purchase lunch from the cafe on one Friday, 55% will return to purchase from the cafe
on the next Friday.

A transition matrix that can be used to describe this situation is

 this F riday
D C
A.
0.55 0.35 D
[ ] next F riday
0.45 0.65 C

this F riday
D C
B.
0.65 0.45 D
[ ] next F riday
0.45 0.55 C

this F riday
D C
C.
0.65 0.55 D
[ ] next F riday
0.45 0.55 C

this F riday
D C
D.
0.65 0.45 D
[ ] next F riday
0.35 0.55 C

this F riday
D C
E.
0.65 0.55 D
[ ] next F riday
0.35 0.45 C

Solution

From the transition behaviours described, the transition matrix values in the main diagonal should be as
follows.

D → D : 65% (0.65)

C → C : 55% (0.55)
As the number of workers remains the same, the sum of each column of the transition matrix must equal one.
Only option D is correct for these properties.
Question 27/ 164

[VCAA 2021 FM (73%)]

Ramon and Norma are names that contain the same letters but in a different order.

R N
A O
The permutation matrix that can change M into R is
O M
N A

0 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0 0
A. 0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 0

0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 0
B. 0 0 1 0 0
1 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 0
C. 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 0
D. 0 1 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 0
E. 1 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0
Solution

The permutation matrix must change the elements of the “RAMON” matrix to spell out “NORMA”, so the
following changes are necessary.

The letter “N” must move from the fifth row to the first row, so the first row of the permutation matrix must
only have a 1 in the fifth column.

The letter “O” must move from the fourth row to the second row, so the second row of the permutation
matrix must only have a 1 in the fourth column.

The letter “R” must move from the first row to the third row, so the third row of the permutation matrix must
only have a 1 in the first column.

The letter “M” must move from the third row to the fourth row, so the fourth row of the permutation matrix
must only have a 1 in the third column.

The letter “A” must move from the second row to the fifth row, so the fifth row of the permutation matrix
must only have a 1 in the second column.

So only option E is completely correct.

Question 28/ 164

[VCAA 2021 FM (45%)]

A is a 7 × 7 matrix.

B is a 10 × 7 matrix.
Which one of the following matrix expressions is defined?

A. AB − 2B

B. A(BA)−1

C. AB 2

D. A2 − BA
E. A(B T )

Solution

Option A: AB − 2B is not defined since AB is not defined (A has order 7 × 7 and B has order 10 × 7
)

Option B: A(BA)−1 is not defined since although BA is defined it has order 10 × 7 and so the inverse of
BA is not defined (Inverses are only possible for square matrices).

Option C: AB 2 is not defined since squaring is only possible for square matrices, and B is not a square
matrix.

Option D: A2 − BA is not defined since although A2 (with order 7 × 7) and BA (with order 10 × 7)
are defined, they cannot be subtracted as their orders are different.

Option E: The matrix B T has order 7 × 10 and so the product A(B T ) is defined and has order 7 × 10.

Question 29/ 164

[VCAA 2021 FM (66%)]

A fitness centre offers four different exercise classes: aerobics (A), boxfit (B ), cardio (C ) and dance (D ).

A customer’s choice of fitness class is expected to change from week to week according to the transition
matrix P , shown below.

this week
A B C D
0.65 0 0.20 0.10 A
0 0.65 0.10 0.30 B
P = next week
0.20 0.10 0.70 0 C
0.15 0.25 0 0.60 D
An equivalent transition diagram has been constructed below, but the labelling is not complete.
The proportion for one of the transitions is labelled w .

The value of w is

A. 10%

B. 15%

C. 20%

D. 25%

E. 30%

Solution

The challenge is to decide the correct placement of the labels A, B , C and D in the transition diagram.

Since “0.25” only occurs once in the transition matrix P , it is known that it refers to the 25% of customers
expected to change from B to D each week.

So we know that the bottom left vertex can be labelled B , and the bottom right vertex can be labelled as D .

We now know that top two vertices must be A and C . Unfortunately, the transition matrix shows that both
transitions A → C and C → A account for 20% of change.

→ D is 0% (so
Consider each of these two possibilities. If top right vertex is C , then from the matrix C
w = 0%) If top right vertex is A, then from the matrix A → D is 15% (so w = 15%) The only
available answer in options A to E is option B (for w = 15%).
Question 30/ 164

[VCAA 2021 FM (40%)]

The matrix Sn+1 is determined from the matrix Sn using the recurrence relation

Sn+1 = T × Sn − C , where

0.6 0.1 0.3 21 24.0

T = 0.3 0.8 0.2 , S0 = 51 , S1 = 54.3
0.1 0.1 0.5 31 20.7

and C is a column matrix.

Matrix S2 is equal to

23.04
A. 55.78
16.18

25.34
B. 56.28
17.38

26.04
C. 54.78
18.18

28.34
D. 55.28
19.38

29.04
E. 53.78
20.18
Solution

The recurrence relation Sn+1 = T × Sn − C can be rearranged to find C .

Sn+1 = T × Sn − C
C = T × Sn − Sn+1
Using the calculator to assist, this gives

c3
C = −1
2
Using the recurrence relation gives

S2 = T × S1 − C
0.6 0.1 0.3 24.0 3
= 0.3 0.8 0.2 54.3 − −1
0.1 0.1 0.5 20.7 2
23.04
= 55.78
16.18

Question 31/ 164

[VCAA 2021 FM (29%)]

A new colony of endangered marsupials is established on a remote island. For one week, the marsupials can
feed from only one of three feeding stations: A, B or C . On Monday, 50% of the marsupials were observed
feeding at station A and 50% were observed feeding at station B . No marsupials were observed feeding at
station C .

The marsupials are expected to change their feeding stations each day this week according to the transition
matrix T .
 this day
A B C
0.4 0.1 0.2 A
T = 0.2 0.5 0.2 B next day
0.4 0.4 0.6 C

Let Sn represent the state matrix showing the percentage of marsupials observed feeding at each feeding
station n days after Monday of this week.

The matrix recurrence rule Sn+1 = T Sn is used to model this situation.

From Tuesday to Wednesday, the percentage of marsupials who are not expected to change their feeding
location is

A. 44.5%

B. 45%

C. 50%

D. 51.5%

E. 52%

Solution

From the information provided, we know the proportions of marsupials present at each feeding station on
Monday and Tuesday.

0.5 A
Monday: S 0 = 0.5 B and on
0 C

0.25 A
Tuesday: S 1 = T × S 0 = 0.35 B
0.40 C
From the transition matrix:

40% of marsupials do not change from feeding station A.

50% of marsupials do not change from feeding station B .

60% of marsupials do not change from feeding station C .

From Tuesday to Wednesday, it is expected that 40% of the 25% of marsupials at feeding station A will not
change location.

From Tuesday to Wednesday, it is expected that 50% of the 35% of marsupials at feeding station B will not
change location.

From Tuesday to Wednesday, it is expected that 60% of the 40% of marsupials at feeding station C will not
change location.

Therefore, the total percentage of marsupials who are not expected to change their feeding location is: 40% of
25% + 50% of 35% + 60% of 40% = 51.5%.

Question 33/ 164

[VCAA 2022 FM (83%)]

The daily cost of renting an adult mountain bike is shown in element A.

A. b12

B. b21

C. b23

D. b31

E. b32

Solution
The daily cost of renting an adult mountain bike is in Row 3 (A), Column 2 (M ) which is element b32 .

Question 34/ 164

[VCAA 2022 FM (68%)]

On Sundays, the business increases the daily rental price for each type of bike by 10%. To determine the
rental cost for each type of bike on a Sunday, which one of the following matrix calculations needs to be
completed?

A. 0.01B

B. 0.1B

C. 1.01B

D. 1.1B

E. 11B

Solution

If the daily rental cost is increased by 10% for Sundays, the new cost will be 110% of the original cost. This
means that every element in matrix B needs to be multiplied by 110100 = 1.1.

The matrix calculation that gives this result is 1.1B .

Question 35/ 164

[VCAA 2022 FM (71%)]

Each day, members of a swim centre can choose to attend a morning session (M ), an afternoon session (A)
or no session (N ). The transition diagram right shows the transition from day to day. The transition diagram
is incomplete.

Which one of the following transition matrices represents this transition diagram?

this day
M A N
A. 0.2 0.1 0.1 M
0.3 0.5 0.3 A next day
0.5 0.4 0.6 N

this day
M A N
B. 0.3 0.1 0.6 M
0.5 0.4 0.3 A next day
0.2 0.5 0.1 N

this day
M A N
C. 0.3 0.1 0.6 M
0.2 0.4 0.3 A next day
0.5 0.5 0.1 N
 this day
M A N
D. 0.3 0.5 0.2 M
0.1 0.4 0.7 A next day
0.6 0.1 0.1 N

this day
M A N
E. 0.3 0 0.6 M
0.2 0.4 0 A next day
0 0.5 0.1 N

Solution

Firstly, consider the loops on the transition diagram.

M → M is 0.3.

A → A is 0.4

N → N is 0.1
This gives the leading diagonal of the transition matrix.

This eliminates option A.

Now consider the other transitions from M , A and N .

M → A is 0.2

A → N is 0.5
N → M is 0.6
This can be entered in the transition matrix as shown below.

Options C. and D. can now be eliminated.

In a transition matrix the column entries must sum to 1. This gives the final result as shown below.

Question 36/ 164

[VCAA 2022 FM (87%)]

The communication matrix below shows the communication links between five people: Steph (S ), Tran (7),
Ursula (U ), Vinh (V ) and Wanda (W ).
 receiver
S T U V W
S 0 1 1 0 1
T 0 0 0 1 1
sender U 0 1 0 1 0
V 0 0 1 0 0
W 1 0 0 1 0
In this matrix:

• the ‘1’ in row S , column T indicates that Steph can communicate directly with Tran

• the ‘0’ in row V , column W indicates that Vinh cannot communicate directly with Wanda.

Ursula needs to communicate with Steph.

The sequence of communication links that will successfully allow Ursula to communicate with Steph is

A. U -T -S

B. U -W -S

C. U -T -W -S

D. U −V −T −S

E. U −W −T −S

Solution

Check each option in turn until a correct sequence is found. Remember that the sending person is the row and
the receiving person is the column.

A. U -T -S
U can send to T but T cannot send to S .

B. U -W -S

U cannot send to W .

C. U -T -W -S
U can send to T , T can send to W and W can send to S so this sequence of communication links will
successfully allow Ursula to communicate with Steph.

Question 37/ 164

[VCAA 2022 FM (71%)]

Matrix E is a 2 × 2 matrix. Matrix F is a 2 × 3 matrix. Matrix G is a 3 × 2 matrix.

Matrix H is a 3 × 3 matrix.

Which one of the following matrix products could have an inverse?

A. EF

B. F H

C. GE

D. GF

E. HG

Solution

For a matrix to have an inverse it must be a square matrix. We need to establish which matrix product would
result in a square matrix.
The only matrix product that results in a square matrix if GF and therefore this matrix product could have
an inverse.

Question 38/ 164

[VCAA 2022 FM (42%)]

Matrix K is a permutation matrix.

0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0
K= 0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0 0

Matrix M is a column matrix that is multiplied once by matrix K to obtain matrix P .

When matrix M is multiplied by matrix K , the element m31 moves to element

A. p11

B. p21

C. p31

D. p41
E. p5l

Solution

Consider the sentence, Matrix M is a column matrix that is multiplied once by matrix K to obtain matrix P
. So, we have KM = P.

A
B
If we let M = C , the element m31 is C .
D
E

Multiply matrix M by K to give matrix P .

C is in row 1 and column 1 of matrix P so m31 moves to p11 .

Question 39/ 164

[VCAA 2022 FM (31%)]

Two types of computers – laptops (L) and desktops (D) – can be serviced by Henry (H), Irvine (I) or
Jean (J). Matrix N shows the time, in minutes, it takes each person to service a laptop and a desktop.
 L D
18 8 H
N = 10 17 I
12 9 J

Matrix Q shows the number of laptops and desktops in four different departments: marketing (M ),
advertising (A), publishing (P ) and editing (E).

L D
6 8 M
4 7 A
Q=
5 5 P
10 12 E
A calculation that determines the total time that it would take each of Henry, Irvine or Jean, working alone, to
service all the laptops and desktops in all four departments is

A. [1 1 1 1] × (Q × N T )

1
1
B. (Q × N T ) ×
1
1

C. (N × QT ) × Q

1 0 0
D. 0 1 0 × N × QT
0 0 1

1
E. [1 1 1 1] × Q × N × 1 T

Solution

In this situation it is probably easiest to work out what is required for the answer. Summing the columns of
matrix Q gives the information that there are 25 laptops and 32 desktops in total to service. Now use the
information in matrix N to determine how long it would take each person to service these many computers
working on their own.
Henry: 25 × 18 + 32 × 8 = 706 minutes

Irvine: 25 × 10 + 32 × 17 = 794 minutes

Jean: 25 × 12 + 32 × 9 = 588 minutes

We are looking for a matrix that gives this information so either a row matrix [706 794 588] or a column
matrix

706
794 .
588

[llll1 1 1 1] × (Q × N T ) = [lll706 794 588]

which is the result that is required.

Question 1/ 206

[VCAA 2018 FM (92%)]

Consider the graph with five isolated vertices shown below.

To form a tree, the minimum number of edges that must be added to the graph is

A. 1

B. 4

C. 5

D. 6
E. 10

Solution

For a tree with n vertices the number of edges is n − 1. For a tree with 5 vertices the number of edges is
5 − 1 = 4.

Question 2/ 206

[VCAA 2018 FM (68%)]

Niko drives from his home to university. The network below shows the distances, in kilometres, along a
series of streets connecting Niko’s home to the university. The vertices A, B, C, D and E represent the
intersection of these streets.

The shortest path for Niko from his home to the university could be found using

A. a minimum cut.

B. Prim’s algorithm.

C. Dijkstra’s algorithm.

D. critical path analysis.

E. the Hungarian algorithm.

Solution

Dijkstra’s algorithm can be used to find the shortest path between two vertices. In this case the shortest path
from Niko’s home to the university.

Question 3/ 206

[VCAA 2018 FM (76%)]

A planar graph has five faces. This graph could have

A. eight vertices and eight edges.

B. six vertices and eight edges.

C. eight vertices and five edges.

D. eight vertices and six edges.

E. five vertices and eight edges.

Solution

For a planar graph v − e + f = 2.

If a graph has 5 faces,

v−e+5 = 2
v−e = 2−5
v−e = −3
or e − v = 3
The graph must have 3 more edges than vertices.

A planar graph with five vertices and eight edges meets this requirement.
Question 4/ 206

[VCAA 2018 FM (88%)]

Consider the graph right. Which one of the following is not a path for this graph?

A. PRQTS

B. PQRTS

C. PRTSQ

D. PTQSR

E. PTRQS

Solution

PTQSR is not a path for the graph since there is no edge connecting the vertices S and R.
Question 5/ 206

[VCAA 2018 FM (43%)]

The directed network below shows the sequence of 11 activities that are needed to complete a project. The
time, in weeks, that it takes to complete each activity is also shown.

How many of these activities could be delayed without affecting the minimum completion time of the
project?

A. 3

B. 4

C. 5

D. 6

E. 7

Solution

The table in the next column shows the ESTs and LSTs for each activity. The activities that can be delayed
without affecting the minimum completion time are those which do not have the same earliest start time and
latest start time.

Activity EST LST

A 0 0

B 4 5
Activity EST LST

C 4 4

D 4 10

E 7 8

F 11 11

G 13 13

H 6 12

I 17 17

The activities where EST  LST are C, E, G and I .

=
There are 4 activities that could be delayed without affecting the minimum completion time of the project.

Question 6/ 206

[VCAA 2018 FM (41%)]

Which one of the following graphs is not a planar graph?

A.
B.

C.

D.

E.

Solution

A graph is planar if it can be drawn without any edges that cross.

It can be seen that the graph in option E is a planar graph without any redrawing. The graph in option A can
be redrawn so that no edges cross.
The graph in option B can be redrawn so that no edges cross.

The graph in option C can be redrawn so no edges cross.

It is not possible to redraw the graph in option D so that no edges cross. Alternatively, the graph in option D
is the complete graph on 5 vertices and this is known to be non-planar.

Question 7/ 206

[VCAA 2018 FM (49%)]

A project requires nine activities (A–I ) to be completed. The duration, in hours, and the immediate
predecessor(s) of each activity are shown in the table below.
Activity Duration (hours) Immediate predecessor(s)

A 4 –

B 3 A
C 7 A
D 2 A
E 5 B
F 2 C
G 4 E, F
H 5 D
I 3 G, H

The minimum completion time for this project, in hours, is

A. 14

B. 19

C. 20

D. 24

E. 35

Solution

Firstly, draw an activity network for the project.

The ESTs and LSTs for each activity are listed in the table below.

Activity EST LST

A 0 0

B 4 5

C 4 4

D 4 10

E 7 8

F 11 11

G 13 13

H 6 12

I 17 17

Once you’ve drawn the network, there are only three paths, listing them with their completion times:

ABEGI: time 4 + 3 + 5 + 4 + 3 = 19

ACEGI: time 4 + 7 + 2 + 4 + 3 = 20

ADHI: time 4 + 2 + 5 + 3 = 14

Hence ACEGI with time 20 hours.

Question 8/ 206

[VCAA 2018 FM (24%)]

Annie, Buddhi, Chuck and Dorothy work in a factory.

Today each worker will complete one of four tasks, 1, 2, 3 and 4.

The usual completion times for Annie, Chuck and Dorothy are shown in the table below.

Task 1 Task 2 Task 3 Task 4

Annie 7 3 8 2

Buddhi k k 3 k
Chuck 5 6 9 2
Dorothy 4 8 5 3

Buddhi takes 3 minutes for Task 3. He takes k minutes for each other task.

Today the factory supervisor allocates the tasks as follows:

• Task 1 to Dorothy

• Task 2 to Annie

• Task 3 to Buddh

• Task 4 to Chuck

This allocation will achieve the minimum total completion time if the value of k is at least

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4

Solution
The allocation given has a total completion time of 4 + 3 + 3 + 2 = 12 minutes.

Now k cannot be zero since Buddhi cannot complete an activity in zero time.

Try k = 1. Either use the Hungarian algorithm or use inspection as follows.

It seems reasonable to try an allocation with Chuck given Task 4, since this takes him just 2 minutes. Then
Buddhi must be given either Task 1 or Task 2 (if he is given Task 3, this ends up with the supervisor’s
solution independent of k ).

Try Task 1. Then Tasks 2 and 3 go to Annie and Dorothy and by inspection, the best way to do this is Annie
to Task 2 and Dorothy to Task 3. In this case, the total completion time is 1 + 3 + 5 + 2 = 11 minutes.

Try Task 2. Then any allocation to Annie and Dorothy gives a total completion time of 15 minutes so this can
be ignored. So, if k = 1, there is an allocation of 11 minutes and the supervisor’s allocation would not be
optimal.

It is also easy to check that if Chuck is given any other task, the minimum completion time is greater, so 11
minutes is the best that can be achieved with k = 1.

Then k = 2 or more, any allocation will have completion time of at least 12 minutes – if there was a shorter
completion time, say 11 minutes, that same allocation would then be 1 minute less for k = 1, i.e. 10
minutes, but by the above, the shortest completion time for k = 1 is 11 minutes.

Now as the supervisor’s allocation gives a completion time of 12 minutes, it follows that if k = 2 or more,
the supervisor’s allocation achieves the minimum total completion time. So, k is at least 2.

Question 9/ 206

[VCAA 2019 FM (85%)]

In the graph shown to the right, the sum of the degrees of the vertices is
A. 5

B. 6

C. 10

D. 11

E. 12

Solution

The vertices have degrees 2, 3, 2, 3 and 2.

The sum of the degrees is 3 × 2 + 2 × 3 = 12.

Question 10/ 206

[VCAA 2019 FM (64%)]

Consider the graph below.

The minimum number of extra edges that are required so that an Eulerian circuit is possible in this graph is

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4

Solution

For an Eulerian circuit to be possible then all of the vertices in the graph must have even degree.

Four vertices in this graph have odd degree.

The minimum number of edges that must be added is 2. An edge joining one pair of vertices with odd degree
and an edge joining the other pair of vertices with odd degree.
Question 11/ 206

[VCAA 2019 FM (85%)]

The flow of water through a series of pipes is shown in the network below.

The numbers on the edges show the maximum flow through each pipe in litres per minute.

The capacity of Cut Q, in litres per minute, is

A. 11

B. 13

C. 14

D. 16

E. 17

Solution

The capacity of Cut Q is 3 + 5 + 6 = 14.

The edge shown is not included in the calculation of the capacity of Cut Q because its direction across the cut
is from sink to source.

Question 12/ 206

[VCAA 2019 FM (71%)]

Two graphs, labelled Graph 1 and Graph 2, are shown below.

Which one of the following statements is not true?

A. Graph 1 and Graph 2 are isomorphic.

B. Graph 1 has five edges and Graph 2 has six edges.

C. Both Graph 1 and Graph 2 are connected graphs.

D. Both Graph 1 and Graph 2 have three faces each.

E. Neither Graph 1 nor Graph 2 are complete graphs.

Solution

For two graphs to be isomorphic they must be exactly the same. Graph 1 has 4 vertices and Graph 2 has 5
vertices so they cannot be isomorphic.

Question 13/ 206

[VCAA 2019 FM (75%)]

The following diagram shows the distances, in metres, along a series of cables connecting a main server to
seven points, A to G, in a computer network.

The minimum length of cable, in metres, required to ensure that each of the seven points is connected to the
main server directly or via another point is

A. 175

B. 203

C. 208

D. 221

E. 236
Solution

To find the minimum length of cable required it is necessary to find the minimum spanning tree.

The length of the minimum spanning tree is:

15 + 28 + 35 + 28 + 30 + 32 + 35 = 203
The minimum length of cable required is 203 metres.

Question 14/ 206

[VCAA 2019 FM (39%)]

The map below shows all the road connections between five towns, P , Q, R, S and T .
The road connections could be represented by the adjacency matrix

P Q R S T
P 1 3 0 2 2
Q 3 0 1 1 1
A.
R 0 1 0 1 0
S 2 1 1 0 2
T 2 1 0 2 0

P Q R S T
P 1 2 0 2 2
Q 2 0 1 1 1
B.
R 0 1 0 1 0
S 2 1 1 0 2
T 2 1 0 2 0

P Q R S T
P 0 3 0 2 2
Q 3 0 1 1 1
C.
R 0 1 0 1 0
S 2 1 1 0 2
T 2 1 0 2 0

P Q R S T
P 0 2 0 2 2
Q 2 0 1 1 1
D.
R 0 1 0 1 0
S 2 1 1 0 2
T 2 1 0 2 0

P Q R S T
P 1 2 0 2 2
Q 2 0 1 1 1
E.
R 0 1 0 1 0
S 2 1 1 1 1
T 2 1 0 1 0

Solution
To complete the adjacency matrix, firstly start at P .

There is one road loop connecting town P to itself.

This gives the following information for the adjacency matrix.

There are three possible routes from P to Q which do not involve passing through other towns.
The adjacency matrix becomes

At this point the matrices in options B, C, D and E can be eliminated as possibilities.

Question 15/ 206

[VCAA 2019 FM (42%)]

A project involves nine activities, A to I . The immediate predecessor(s) of each activity is shown in the table
below.

Activity Immediate predecessor(s)

A –

B A
C A
D B
E B, C
F D
G D
H E, F
I G, H

A directed network for this project will require a dummy activity. The dummy activity will be drawn from the
end of

A. activity B to the start of activity C .

B. activity B to the start of activity E .

C. activity D to the start of activity E .

D. activity E to the start of activity H .

E. activity E to the start of activity F .

Solution
Activities B and C both have A as an immediate predecessor and are both immediate predecessor to activity
E . This would mean that on a graph both activities B and C would start at the end of activity A and end at
the start of activity E . Activity B is an immediate predecessor to activity D and can be represented by a
directed edge from the end of activity A to the start of activity D . Activity C can be represented by a
directed edge from the end of activity A to the start of activity C . Therefore there must be a dummy edge
drawn from the end of activity B to the start of activity E .

Question 16/ 206

[VCAA 2019 FM (31%)]

The directed network below shows the sequence of activities, A to S , that is required to complete a
manufacturing process. The time taken to complete each activity, in hours, is also shown.

The number of activities that have a float time of 10 hours is

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4
Solution

The table below shows the ESTs and LSTs for each activity.

Activity EST LST

A 0 0

B 5 5

C 5 8

D 5 9

E 9 9

F 6 10

G 6 16

H 12 15

I 12 22

J 12 12

K 18 18

L 16 19

M 18 26

N 19 29

O 24 24

P 31 33

Q 31 31

R 39 41

S 42 42

There are three activities G, I and N that have a float time of 10 hours.
Question 17/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (89%)]

A connected planar graph has seven vertices and nine edges.

The number of faces that this graph will have is

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 5

Solution

rv + f − e = 2
7+f −9=2
f =4

Question 18/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (93%)]

Consider the graph below.

Which one of the following is not a Hamiltonian cycle for this graph?

A. ABCDFEGA

B. BAGEF DCB

C. CDFEGABC

D. DCBAGFED

E. EGABCDFE

Solution

A Hamiltonian cycle starts and ends at the same vertex and passes through every vertex exactly once.

There is no edge from E to D , so DCBAGFED is not a Hamiltonian cycle for this graph.
Question 19/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (81%)]

Which one of the following is not a spanning tree for the network right?

A.

B.

C.
D.

E.

Solution

In the given network, there is no edge connecting vertices 3 and 5.

The tree shown in the next column cannot be a spanning tree for this network, since it has an edge connecting
vertices 3 and 5.
Question 20/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (39%)]

The directed graph below represents a series of one-way streets.

The vertices represent the intersections of these streets.

The number of vertices that can be reached from S is

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 5

Solution

Check to see which vertices can be reached from S .

S→T

S→V
S→V →X

There are three vertices that can be reached from S .

Question 21/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (56%)]

The network below shows the distances, in metres, between camp sites at a camping ground that has
electricity. The vertices A to I represent the camp sites.

The minimum length of cable required to connect all the camp sites is 53 m.

The value of x, in metres, is at least

A. 5

B. 6

C. 8

D. 9

E. 11
Solution

The length of 53 metres must represent the sum of the lengths of all the edges in a minimal spanning tree of
this graph. Start by assuming that the edge labelled as x is included in the minimal spanning tree, which is
then shown below.

The sum of the edges of the minimal spanning tree is 53.

5+5+6+6+7+7+8+x = 53
44 + x = 53
x = 9

If x > 9 the edge of length 9 connecting G and I would be used in the minimum spanning tree so x is at
least 9 metres.

Question 22/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (61%)]

The activity network below shows the sequence of activities required to complete a project.

The number next to each activity in the network is the time it takes to complete that activity, in days.
The minimum completion time for this project, in days, is

A. 18

B. 19

C. 20

D. 21

E. 22

Solution

Determine the ESTs at each vertex to find the minimum completion time of this project.

This shows that the minimum completion time for the project is 22 days. (Alternatively, check each possible
path through the network and find its length. The longest path through the network is given by these
activities: B-E-I-J-M . It has length 7 + 4 + 3 + 3 + 5 = 22, so the minimum completion time for
this project is 22 days.)

Question 23/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (11%)]

Four friends go to an ice-cream shop.

Akiro chooses chocolate and strawberry ice cream.

Doris chooses chocolate and vanilla ice cream.

Gohar chooses vanilla ice cream.

Imani chooses vanilla and lemon ice cream.

This information could be presented as a graph.

Consider the following four statements:

• The graph would be connected.

• The graph would be bipartite.

• The graph would be planar.

• The graph would be a tree.

How many of these four statements are true?

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4

Solution
A graph that could be used to display this information is a bipartite graph as shown below.

A bipartite graph is neither connected nor a tree, but it is planar as it can be redrawn without any edges
crossing.

Only two of the four statements are true.

Question 24/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (75%)]

The adjacency matrix right shows the number of pathway connections between four landmarks: J, K, L
and M .

J K L M
J 1 3 0 2
K 3 0 1 2
L 0 1 0 2
M 2 2 2 0
A network of pathways that could be represented by the adjacency matrix is

A.

B.

C.

D.
E.

Solution

J K L M
J 1 3 0 2
K 3 0 1 2
L 0 1 0 2
M 2 2 2 0
From this adjacency matrix, there is/are:

One connection between J and itself.

Three connections between J and K.

Two connections between J and M .

One connection between K and L.

Two connections between K and M .

Two connections between L and M .

The only one of the graph networks that could be represented using this adjacency matrix is shown below.
Question 25/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (60%)]

The flow of liquid through a series of pipelines, in litres per minute, is shown in the directed network below.

Five cuts labelled A to E are shown on the network.

The number of these cuts with a capacity equal to the maximum flow of liquid from the source to the sink, in
litres per minute, is

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4
E. 5

Solution

Calculate the capacity of each cut, remembering to only count the capacity of an edge if it crosses the cut in
the direction from source to sink.

Cut Capacity

A 8 + 15 + 15 = 38
B 8 + 15 + 10 = 33
C 15 + 8 + 10 = 33
D 15 + 8 + 10 = 33
E 15 + 8 + 5 + 10 = 38

The minimum cut capacity gives the maximum flow of liquid from source to sink which, in this case, is 33
litres per minute. The number of cuts with this capacity is 3.

Question 26/ 206

[VCAA 2020 FM (24%)]

The directed network below shows the sequence of activities, A to I , that is required to complete an office
renovation.

The time taken to complete each activity, in weeks, is also shown.

The project manager would like to complete the office renovation in less time.

The project manager asks all the workers assigned to activity H to also work on activity F .

This will reduce the completion time of activity F to three weeks.

The workers assigned to activity H cannot work on both activity H and activity F at the same time. No
other activity times will be changed.

This change to the network will result in a change to the completion time of the office renovation. Which one
of the following is correct?

A. The completion time will be reduced by one week if activity F is completed before activity H is started.

B. The completion time will be reduced by three weeks if activity F is completed before activity H is
started.

C. The completion time will be reduced by one week if activity H is completed before activity F is started.

D. The completion time will be reduced by three week if activity H is completed before activity F is started.

E. The completion time will be increased by three weeks if activity H is completed before activity F is
started.

Solution

Find the ESTs for all activities in the network

Activity EST

A 0

B 2

C 2
 Activity EST

D 2

E 7

F 10

G 16

H 5

I 20

The completion time for the project is 20 + 5 = 25 weeks.

Consider what happens if you complete activity H first and then complete activity F . Activity H can start
after 5 weeks and takes 6 weeks so it is finished after 11 weeks. This means that activity F can start after 11
weeks instead of 10 weeks. Activity G can then start after 14 weeks instead of 16 weeks (since now activity
F only takes 3 weeks). Activity I can then start after 18 weeks. The completion time for the project is then
18 + 5 = 23 weeks, which is a reduction of 2 hours. This is not one of the given options.

Now consider what happens if you complete activity F first and then complete activity H . Activity F will
be completed after 13 weeks then Activity H can start. Activity H can start after 13 weeks. This delays the
starting time of Activity I until 19 weeks and the overall completion time for the project is then 19 + 5 =
24 weeks, which is a reduction of 1 hour. This corresponds to option A.

Question 27/ 206

[VCAA 2021 FM (91%)]

Consider the graph below.

The number of vertices with a degree of 3 is

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 5

Solution

The vertices with a degree 3 are circled.

There are 5 vertices with a degree 3.

Question 28/ 206

[VCAA 2021 FM (95%)]

Five friends ate fruit for morning tea.

The bipartite graph below shows which types of fruit each friend ate.

Which one of the following statements is not true?

A. Only Lee ate pear.

B. Eric and Kai each ate apple.

C. Van ate only strawberry.

D. Quinn and Kai each ate banana.

E. Orange was the most eaten type of fruit.

Solution

The statement that is not true is ‘Van ate only strawberry.’

In the bipartite graph there is an edge from Van to orange and an edge from Van to strawberry which indicates
that Van ate each of these fruits.

Question 29/ 206

[VCAA 2021 FM (34%)]

Consider the graph below.

The number of faces is

A. 2

B. 3

C. 4

D. 5

E. 6

Solution

The graph can be redrawn to show that it is a planar graph.

For a planar graph

rv + f − e = 2
4+f −6=2
f =4

Question 30/ 206

Consider the directed network below.

The number of vertices that cannot be reached from X is

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 5

Solution
Vertices W and Z can be reached directly from X .

Vertices Y , V and T can be reached from X via W .

Vertex U can be reached from X via W then T .

The only vertex that cannot be reached from X is S .

Question 31/ 206

[VCAA 2021 FM (17%)]

Consider the following five statements about the graph above:

• The graph is planar.

• The graph contains a cycle.

• The graph contains a bridge.

• The graph contains an Eulerian trail.

• The graph contains a Hamiltonian path.

How many of these statements are true?

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 5
Solution

The graph is planar as it is connected and can be drawn without any edges crossing. It contains three cycles
so it can be said to contain a cycle.

It contains an edge that keeps the graph connected, that being the edge to the vertex of degree 1. If this edge
were removed the graph would no longer be connected so it does contain a bridge. The graph does not
contain an Eulerian trail since it contains 4 vertices of odd degree. For an Eulerian trail to exist the graph
must have exactly two vertices of odd degree.

A Hamiltonian path does exist as it is possible to visit each vertex exactly once. The diagram below indicates
a Hamiltonian path and a cycle. The edge that is the bridge is included in the Hamiltonian path and is also
labelled.

Four of the statements are true.

Question 32/ 206

[VCAA 2021 FM (46%)]

The directed graph below shows the sequence of activities required to complete a project. The time taken to
complete each activity, in hours, is also shown.
The minimum completion time for this project is 18 hours.

The time taken to complete activity E is labelled x.

The maximum value of x is

A. 2

B. 3

C. 4

D. 5

E. 6

Solution

Activities A, D and H can be completed in a time of 11 hours before activity J can start and the project
completion time would then be 11 + 7 = 18 hours. Similarly, activities C , G and I can be completed in a
time of 11 hours before activity J can start and the project completion time would then be 11 + 7 = 18
hours.

Activities C , G, F and E can be completed in 8 + x hours. For the project completion time to be 18 hours
then 8 + x = 11 so x = 3.

Question 33/ 206

[VCAA 2021 FM (33%)]

The network below shows the pathways between five buildings: J , K , L, M and N .

An adjacency matrix for this network is formed. The number of zeros in this matrix is

A. 8

B. 9

C. 10

D. 11

E. 12

Solution

The network could be redrawn as shown below.

The corresponding adjacency matrix is

J K L M N
J 0 2 1 0 1
K 2 1 2 1 0
L 1 2 0 1 1
M 0 1 1 0 0
N 1 0 1 0 0
This adjacency matrix contains 10 zeros.

Question 34/ 206

[VCAA 2021 FM (48%)]

A network of roads connecting towns in an alpine region is shown below.

The distances between neighbouring towns, represented by the vertices, are given in kilometres.
The region receives a large snowfall, leaving all roads between the towns closed to traffic. To ensure each
town is accessible by car from every other town, some roads will be cleared.

The minimum total length of road, in kilometres, that needs to be cleared is

A. 361 if x = 50 and y = 55

B. 361 if x = 50 and y = 60

C. 366 if x = 55 and y = 55

D. 366 if x = 55 and y = 60

E. 371 if x = 55 and y = 65

Solution

A minimum spanning tree is required.

To complete this minimum spanning tree using the edges labelled x and y , x must be less than or equal to 55
and y must be less than or equal to 60.

This eliminates option E.

The length of this minimum spanning tree is

22 + 29 + 30 + 36 + 40 + 42 + 52 + x + y

= 251 + x + y

Check to find which option gives the correct length of the minimum spanning tree for the given values of x
and y .

For option A, 251 + 50 + 55 = 356 so option A is incorrect.

For option B, 251 + 50 + 60 = 361 so option B is correct.

Note that options C and D must be incorrect since each has a greater total length than 361.

Question 35/ 206

[VCAA 2022 FM (80%)]

The network below shows the distances, in kilometres, along a series of roads. The vertices
A, B, C, D, E, F , G and H represent the intersections of these roads.

Prim’s algorithm can be used to find the

A. critical path.

B. shortest path.

C. minimum cut.

D. minimum allocation.

E. minimum spanning tree.

Solution

Prim’s algorithm is used to find the minimum spanning tree for a network.

Question 36/ 206

[VCAA 2022 FM (49%)]

The map below shows seven countries within Central America.

A network diagram was drawn with seven vertices to represent each of the countries on the map of Central
America. Edges were drawn to represent a border shared between two countries. The number of edges that
this network has is

A. 5

B. 6

C. 7

D. 8

E. 9

Solution

A network diagram with seven vertices representing each of the countries on the map and edges representing
shared borders is shown below.

The number of edges in this network is 7.

Question 37/ 206

[VCAA 2022 FM (39%)]

An athletics club needs to select one team of four athletes. The team is required to have one long jump, one
high jump, one shot put and one javelin competitor. The following table shows the best distances, in metres,
for each athlete for each event.

Long jump High jump Shot put

Athlete Javelin (m)
(m) (m) (m)
Eve 4.8 1.7 13.1 40.9
Harsha 4.8 1.6 13.9 39.5
Shona 5.1 1.8 14.4 41.2
Taylor 4.8 1.7 12.8 39.8

The athletics club will allocate each athlete to one event in order to maximise the total distance that the team
jumps and throws. Which allocation of athlete to event must occur in order to maximise the total distance?

long jump high jump shot put javelin

Shona Harsha Eve Taylor
long jump high jump shot put javelin
Shona Taylor Harsha Eve
long jump high jump shot put javelin
Eve Harsha Taylor Shona
long jump high jump shot put javelin
Harsha Taylor Shona Eve
long jump high jump shot put javelin
Harsha Taylor Eve Shona

Solution

Long jump High jump Javelin

Shot put (m)
(m) (m) (m)
Harsha 4.8 1.7 13.1 40.9
Taylor 4.8 1.6 13.9 39.5
Eve 5.1 1.8 14.4 41.2
Shona 4.8 1.7 12.8 39.8
We want to allocate each athlete to one event to maximise the total distance that the team jumps or throws.

It is easiest just to check each option.

A.

long jump high jump shot put javelin

Shona Harsha Eve Taylor

distance = 5.1 + 1.6 + 13.1 + 39.8 = 59.6m

B.

long jump high jump shot put javelin

Shona Taylor Harsha Eve

distance = 5.1 + 1.7 + 13.9 + 40.9 = 61.6m

C.

long jump high jump shot put javelin

Eve Harsha Taylor Shona

distance = 4.8 + 1.6 + 12.8 + 41.2 = 60.4m

D.

long jump high jump shot put javelin

Harsha Taylor Shona Eve

distance = 4.8 + 1.7 + 14.4 + 40.9 = 61.8m

E.

long jump high jump shot put javelin

Harsha Taylor Eve Shona

distance = 4.8 + 1.7 + 13.1 + 41.2 = 60.8m

The maximum total distance is 61.8m from the allocation in D.

Question 38/ 206

[VCAA 2022 FM (21%)]

Consider the graph right.

The number of edges that need to be removed for this graph to be planar is

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4

Solution
A graph is planar if it is connected and can be drawn without any edges crossing. In this case the graph can
be redrawn without any of the edges crossing. Note that you can move a vertex provided it does not lose
connections to any vertices that it was originally connected to.

The graph above can be redrawn as

This shows that the graph is planar, so no edges need to be removed.

Question 39/ 206

[VCAA 2022 FM (54%)]

A connected graph consists of five vertices and four edges.

Which one of the following statements is not true?

A. The graph could be a tree.

B. The graph could be planar.

C. The graph could be bipartite.

D. The graph could contain a path.

E. The graph could contain a cycle.

Solution

A connected graph consists of five vertices and four edges.

The graph could be a tree, planar or contain a path as shown below.

The graph could be bipartite.

It is not possible for the graph to contain a cycle and be connected.

Question 40/ 206

[VCAA 2022 FM (48%)]

A landscaping project has 12 activities. The network below gives the time, in hours, that it takes to complete
each activity.

The earliest start time, in hours, for activity G is

A. 10

B. 11

C. 12

D. 13

E. 14
Solution

Consider the predecessors of activity G.

A-D: These activities take 6 + 5 = 11 hours to complete.

B : This activity takes 10 hours to complete.

C -E : These activities take 5 + 7 = 12 hours to complete.

The earliest start time for activity G is 12 hours.

Question 42/ 206

[VCAA 2022 FM (49%)]

A directed network for this project will require a dummy activity.

The dummy activity will be drawn from the end of

A. activity A to the start of activity D .

B. activity E to the start of activity F .

C. activity F to the start of activity I .

D. activity G to the start of activity H .

E. activity I to the start of activity J .

Solution

The information in the table can be represented in a network diagram.

Activity E is an immediate predecessor to both activities F and G and therefore a dummy edge is required
from the end of activity E to the start of activity F .

Question 43/ 206

[VCAA 2022 FM (34%)]

When this project is completed in the minimum time, the sum of all the float times, in days, will be

A. 0

B. 16

C. 18

D. 20

E. 28

Solution

The ESTs, LSTs and float times of each activity are given in the table below.

Activity EST LST Float time

A 0 4 4

B 0 0 0

C 6 10 4
Activity EST LST Float time

D 6 11 5

E 7 7 0

F 15 18 3

G 15 15 0

H 17 17 0

I 20 20 0

J 17 21 4

K 26 26 0

The sum of the float times is 4 + 4 + 5 + 3 + 4 = 20 days.

Part B: Written-response questions

Question 1/ 231

[VCAA 2018 FM]

Table 1

Increase in travel time

City Congestion level Size
(minutes per day)
Belfast high small 52
Edinburgh high small 43
London high large 40
Manchester high large 44
 Increase in travel time
City Congestion level Size
(minutes per day)
Brighton and Hove high small 35
Bournemouth high small 36
Sheffield medium small 36
Hull medium small 40
Bristol medium small 39
Newcastle-Sunderland medium large 34
Leicester medium small 36
Liverpool medium large 29
Swansea low small 30
Glasgow low large 34
Cardiff low small 31
Nottingham low small 31
Birmingham-Wolverhampton low large 29
Leeds-Bradford low large 31
Portsmouth low small 27
Southampton low small 30
Reading low small 31
Coventry low small 30
Stoke-on-Trent low small 29

Data: TomTom International BV, <www.tomtom.com/en_gb/trafficindex>

The data in Table 1 relates to the impact of traffic congestion in 2016 on travel times in 23 cities in the United
Kingdom (UK).

The four variables in this data set are:

• city – name of city

• congestion level – traffic congestion level (high, medium, low)

• size – size of city (large, small)

• increase in travel time – increase in travel time due to traffic congestion (minutes per day).

a. How many variables in this data set are categorical variables?

[1 mark (0.7)]

b. How many variables in this data set are ordinal variables?

[1 mark (0.7)]

c. Name the large UK cities with a medium level of traffic congestion.

[1 mark (0.8)]

d. Use the data in Table 1 to complete the following two-way frequency table, Table 2.

[2 marks (1.9)]

Table 2

City size
Congestion level Small Large
high 4
medium
low
Total 16

e. What percentage of the small cities have a high level of traffic congestion?

[1 mark (0.8)]

Traffic congestion can lead to an increase in travel times in cities. The dot plot and boxplot below both show
the increase in travel time due to traffic congestion, in minutes per day, for the 23 UK cities.
f. Describe the shape of the distribution of the increase in travel time for the 23 cities.

[1 mark (0.9)]

g. The data value 52 is below the upper fence and is not an outlier.

Determine the value of the upper fence.

[1 mark (0.8)]

Solution

a. There are 3 categorical variables – city, congestion level, and size.

b. There are 2 ordinal categorical variables – congestion level and size. Both of these categorical variables
have categories that are ordered.

c. From Table 1, the two cities whose size is classified as large with a medium congestion level are
Newcastle-Sutherland and Liverpool.

d. The missing values can be tallied from Table 1 and the completed two-way table is displayed below.

City size
Congestion level Small Large
high 4 2
medium 4 2
low 8 3
Total 16 7
e. From the table above, there are 4 small cities which have a high level of traffic congestion. As a
percentage of small cities, this is:
4
16 × 100% = 25%
f. Both the dot plot and box plot highlight that the data values are more spread out for the upper values, and
so the shape of the distribution would be described as positively skewed.

g. The value of the upper fence can be calculated as follows (using values of Q1 and Q3 read from the box
plot):

Upper fence = Q3 + 1.5 × IQR

= 39 + 1.5 × (39 − 30)
= 52.5
This confirms that the data value 52 would not be considered an outlier.

Question 2/ 231

[VCAA 2018 FM]

The congestion level in a city can also be recorded as the percentage increase in travel time due to traffic
congestion in peak periods (compared to non-peak periods).

This is called the percentage congestion level.

The percentage congestion levels for the morning and evening peak periods for 19 large cities are plotted on
the scatterplot below.
a. Determine the median percentage congestion level for the morning peak period and the evening peak
period.

Write your answers in the appropriate boxes provided below.

Median percentage congestion level for morning peak period

Median percentage congestion level for evening peak period

[2 marks (1.1)]

A least squares line is to be fitted to the data with the aim of predicting evening congestion level from
morning congestion level.

The equation of this line is

evening congestion level = 8.48 + 0.922 × morning congestion level.

b. Name the response variable in this equation.

[1 mark (0.9)]

c. Use the equation of the least squares line to predict the evening congestion level when the morning
congestion level is 60%.

[1 mark (0.8)]
d. Determine the residual value when the equation of the least squares line is used to predict the evening
congestion level when the morning congestion level is 47%.

Round your answer to one decimal place.

[2 marks (1.1)]

e. The value of the correlation coefficient r is 0.92

What percentage of the variation in the evening congestion level can be explained by the variation in the
morning congestion level?

Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

[1 mark (0.6)]

Solution

a. As there are 19 points, the median value of morning congestion level can be found by counting the points
on the scatter plot from left to right until the 9th point is located. This value is 52%. In a similar manner, the
median value of evening congestion level can be found by counting the points on the scatter plot from bottom
to top until the 9th point is located. This value is 56%.

b. The response variable is evening congestion level.

c. The predicted value of evening congestion level can be found using the given linear regression rule as
follows:

evening cong. level = 8.48 + 0.922 × (60)

≈ 63.8%
d. The point associated with a morning congestion level of 47% is (47, 50). So, data point has an evening
congestion level of 50% (ydata ). The value of evening congestion level for a morning congestion level of
47% is:

evening cong. level = 8.48 + 0.922 × (47)

≈ 51.8%

Residual = ydata − ypredicted

≈ 50% − 51.8%
≈ −1.8%

e. The coefficient of determination is: r 2 = (0.92)2 = 0.8464. So to the nearest whole number,
approximately 85% of the variation in evening congestion level can be explained by variation in the morning
congestion level.
Question 3/ 231

[VCAA 2018 FM]

Table 3 shows the yearly average traffic congestion levels in two cities, Melbourne and Sydney, during the
period 2008 to 2016. Also shown is a time series plot of the same data.

The time series plot for Melbourne is incomplete.

Table 3

Congestion level (%)

Year 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016
Melbourne 25 26 26 27 28 28 28 29 33
Sydney 28 30 32 33 34 34 35 36 39

Data: TomTom International BV, <www.tomtom.com/en_gb/traflicindex>

a. Use the data in Table 3 to complete the time series plot above for Melbourne.

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. A least squares line is used to model the trend in the time series plot for Sydney. The equation is
 congestion level = −2280 + 1.15 × year
i. Draw this least squares line on the time series plot above.

[1 mark (0.5)]

ii. Use the equation of the least squares line to determine the average rate of increase in percentage
congestion level for the period 2008 to 2016 in Sydney.

Write your answer in the box provided below.

[1 mark (0.4)]

iii. Use the least squares line to predict when the percentage congestion level in Sydney will be 43%.

[1 mark (0.8)]

The yearly average traffic congestion level data for Melbourne is repeated in Table 4 below.

Table 4

Congestion level (%)

Year 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016
Melbourne 25 26 26 27 28 28 28 29 33

c. When a least squares line is used to model the trend in the data for Melbourne, the intercept of this line is
approximately −1514.75556

Round this value to four significant figures.

[1 mark (0.7)]

d. Use the data in Table 4 to determine the equation of the least squares line that can be used to model the
trend in the data for Melbourne. The variable year is the explanatory variable.

Write the values of the intercept and the slope of this least squares line in the appropriate boxes provided
below. Round both values to four significant figures.

[2 marks (1.4)]
e. Since 2008, the equations of the least squares lines for Sydney and Melbourne have predicted that future
traffic congestion levels in Sydney will always exceed future traffic congestion levels in Melbourne.

Explain why, quoting the values of appropriate statistics.

[2 marks (0.4)]

Solution

a. The completed graph is as follows

b. i. To locate the regression line accurately, substitute two values of year into the regression equation to
locate two points on the axes.

For 2008:

cong. level = −2280 + 1.15 × 2008 = 29.2

For 2016:

cong. level = −2280 + 1.15 × 2016 = 38.4

So the two points plotted are (2008, 29.2) and (2016, 38.4).
 ii. The average rate of increase in percentage congestion level can be read from the gradient of the
regression equation, and is 1.15% per year.

b. iii. The following equation can be used to determine in which year it is predicted that the congestion level
will be 43%:

cong. level = −2280 + 1.15 × year

43 = −2280 + 1.15 × year
43 + 2280 = 1.15 × year
2323 = 1.15 × year
2323
year = 1.15
year = 2020

c. Rounded to four significant figures, the number −1514.75556 is −1515.

d. Using the linear regression features on a calculator with year as the explanatory variable and congestion
level (Melbourne) as the response variable, yields the following regression rule.

cong. level = −1515 + 0.7667 × year

e. In 2008, predicted congestion in Sydney (approximately 29.2%) is already higher than that predicted for
Melbourne (approximately 24.5%). Since the gradient for the regression equation for Sydney (1.15) is higher
than for Melbourne (0.7667), the predicted future values for Sydney will always exceed those of Melbourne
(based on regression equation analysis).

Question 4/ 231

[VCAA 2019 FM]

Table 5

Table 5 shows the day number and the minimum temperature, in degrees Celsius, for 15 consecutive days in
May 2017.
Table 5

Day number Minimum temperature (°C)

1 12.7
2 11.8
3 10.7
4 9.0
5 6.0
6 7.0
7 4.1
8 4.8
9 9.2
10 6.7
11 7.5
12 8.0
13 8.6
14 9.8
15 7.7

Data: Australian Government, Bureau of Meteorology, <www.bom.gov.au>

a. Which of the two variables in this data set is an ordinal variable?

[1 mark (0.9)]

The incomplete ordered stem plot below has been constructed using the data values for days 1 to 10.
b. Complete the stem plot above by adding the data values for days 11 to 15.

[1 mark (0.9)]

c. The ordered stem plot below shows the maximum temperature, in degrees Celsius, for the same 15 days.

Data: Australian Government, Bureau of Meteorology, <www.bom.gov.au>

Use this stem plot to determine

i. the value of the first quartile (Q1)

[1 mark (0.8)]

ii. the percentage of days with a maximum temperature higher than 15.3°C.

[1 mark (0.9)]
Solution

a. Day number is an ordinal variable. This variable contains numbers, but it does not make sense to perform
any numerical statistics on this variable (for example, to calculate a mean value for Day number). However,
the numbers do represent an order, and so the categories are ordinal, not just nominal.

b. Missing values added below.

c. i. From the stem plot for maximum temperature (n = 15), the median value is = the 8th value, which is
13.7 degrees. This = splits the data into two equal halves of 7 = data values each half. So Q1 is the middle =
value (4th value) of the lower half, which = is 12.2 degrees.

ii. Reading from the same stem plot, there = are 3 days with a maximum temperature greater than 15.3
degrees Celsius.
3
%Days = 15 × 100% = 20%

Question 5/ 231

[VCAA 2019 FM]

The parallel boxplots below show the maximum daily temperature and minimum daily temperature, in
degrees Celsius, for 30 days in November 2017.

Data: Australian Government, Bureau of Meteorology, <www.bom.gov.au>

a. Use the information in the boxplots to complete the following sentences.

For November 2017

i. the interquartile range for the minimum daily temperature was °C [1 mark (0.9)]

ii. the median value for maximum daily temperature was °C higher than the median value for
minimum daily temperature. [1 mark (0.9)]

iii. the number of days on which the maximum daily temperature was less than the median value for minimum
daily temperature was . [1 mark (0.8)]

b. The temperature difference between the minimum daily temperature and the maximum daily temperature in
November 2017 at this location is approximately normally distributed with a mean of 9.4°C and a standard
deviation of 3.2°C.

Determine the number of days in November 2017 for which this temperature difference is expected to be
greater than 9.4°C.

[1 mark (0.6)]

Solution
a. i. Reading from the lower box plot, the interquartile range for minimum daily temperature is:

rclIQR = Q3 − Q1
= 17 − 12
= 5∘ C
ii. The median for maximum daily temperature is 25 degrees Celsius. The median for minimum daily
temperature is 15 degrees Celsius. So the median value for maximum daily temperature is 25 − 15 = 10
degrees Celsius higher than the median value for minimum daily temperature.

iii. There is only 1 value from maximum daily temperature which is lower than the median value for
minimum daily temperature. This value is the outlier for maximum daily temperature located at 14 degrees
Celsius.

b. As the mean value of temperature difference is 9.4 degrees Celsius, we expect 50% of the days in
November to have temperature difference greater that 9.4 degrees Celsius. Therefore, we expect this on 15
days in this month (November has 30 days).

Question 6/ 231

[VCAA 2019 FM]

The five-number summary for the distribution of minimum daily temperature for the months of February,
May and July in 2017 is shown in Table 6.

The associated boxplots are shown below the table.

Table 6. Five-number summary for minimum daily temperature

Month Minimum Q1 Median Q3 Maximum

February 5.9 9.5 10.9 13.9 22.2
May 3.3 6.0 7.5 9.8 12.7
July 1.6 3.7 5.0 5.9 7.7
Data: Australian Government, Bureau of Meteorology, <www.bom.gov.au>

Explain why the information given above supports the contention that minimum daily temperature is
associated with the month. Refer to the values of an appropriate statistic in your response.

[2 marks (1.0)]

Solution

The variables minimum daily temperature and month appear to be associated as the median value of minimum
daily temperature decreases as the month increases. (Feb: Median = 10.9 degrees Celsius; May: Median = 7.5
degrees Celsius; July: Median = 5.0 degrees Celsius).

Question 7/ 231

[VCAA 2019 FM]

The relative humidity (%) at 9 am and 3 pm on 14 days in November 2017 is shown in Table 7 below.

Table 7
Relative humidity (%)
9 am 3 pm
100 87
99 75
95 67
63 57
81 57
94 74
96 71
81 62
73 53
53 54
57 36
77 39
51 30
41 32

Data: Australian Government, Bureau of Meteorology, <www.bom.gov.au>

A least squares line is to be fitted to the data with the aim of predicting the relative humidity at 3 pm
(humidity 3 pm) from the relative humidity at 9 am (humidity 9 am).

a. Name the explanatory variable.

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. Determine the values of the intercept and the slope of this least squares line.

Round both values to three significant figures and write them in the appropriate boxes provided.

[1 mark (0.6)]

c. Determine the value of the correlation coefficient for this data set.

Round your answer to three decimal places.

[1 mark (0.8)]
Solution

a. As values of humidity 9 am are being used to predict the values of humidity 3 pm, the explanatory
variable is humidity 9 am.

b. Using the calculator regression features, the least squares line, correct to three significant figures is:

humidity 3 pm = −1.26 + 0.765 × humidity 9 am

c. Using the calculator regression features, the value of the correlation coefficient, correct to three decimal
places, is r = 0.871.

Question 8/ 231

[VCAA 2019 FM]

The scatterplot below shows the atmospheric pressure, in hectopascals (hPa), at 3 pm (pressure 3 pm) plotted
against the atmospheric pressure, in hectopascals, at 9 am (pressure 9 am) for 23 days in November 2017 at a
particular weather station.
Data: Australian Government, Bureau of Meteorology. <www.bom.gov.au>

A least squares line has been fitted to the scatterplot as shown.

The equation of this line is

pressure 3 pm = 111.4 + 0.8894 × pressure 9 am

a. Interpret the slope of this least squares line in terms of the atmospheric pressure at this weather station at 9
am and at 3 pm.

[1 mark (0.5)]

b. Use the equation of the least squares line to predict the atmospheric pressure at 3 pm when the atmospheric
pressure at 9 am is 1025 hPa.

Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

[1 mark (0.9)]

c. Is the prediction made in part b. an example of extrapolation or interpolation?

[1 mark (0.9)]

d. Determine the residual when the atmospheric pressure at 9 am is 1013 hPa.

Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

[1 mark (0.4)]

e. The mean and the standard deviation of pressure 9 am and pressure 3 pm for these 23 days are shown in
Table 8 below.

Table 8

Pressure 9 am Pressure 3 pm
Mean 1019.7 1018.3
Standard deviation 4.5477 4.1884

i. Use the equation of the least squares line and the information in Table 8 to show that the correlation
coefficient for this data, rounded to three decimal places, is r = 0.966

[1 mark (0.4)]

ii. What percentage of the variation in pressure 3 pm is explained by the variation in pressure 9 am? Round
your answer to one decimal place.

[1 mark (0.5)]
f. The residual plot associated with the least squares line is shown below.

i. The residual plot above can be used to test one of the assumptions about the nature of the association
between the atmospheric pressure at 3 pm and the atmospheric pressure at 9 am. What is this assumption?

[1 mark (0.4)]

ii. The residual plot above does not support this assumption. Explain why.

[1 mark (0.4)]

Solution

a. For an increase of 1 hPa in pressure 9 am, we expect that on average pressure 3 pm will increase by
0.8894 hPa.

b. The predicted value of pressure 3 pm for an atmospheric pressure of 1025 hPa at 9 am is calculated from
the regression equation as follows:

pressure 3 pm = 111.4 + 0.8894 × (1025)

= 1023.04
≈ 1023 hPa
c. Since the value of 1025 falls within the range of values already collected, this prediction is an example of
interpolation.

d. From the graph, there is a data point at (1013, 1015). The predicted value of pressure 3 pm for a value of
pressure 9 am of 1013 is given by:
pressure 3 pm = 111.4 + 0.8894 × (1013)
≈ 1012.36 hPa
So the residual for this value is:

resid = ydata − ypred

≈ 1015 − 1012.36
≈ 2.64
So the residual is approximately 3 hPa.

e. i For a linear regression with rule y = a + bx:

s
b = r sxy

For a regression equation pressure 3 pm = 111.4 + 0.8894 × pressure 9 am and the table
values of sy and sx

0.8894 = r × 4.1884
4.5477
r = 0.8894 × 4.5477
4.1884
r ≈ 0.965697
r ≈ 0.966
ii. The coefficient of determination is:
2
r2 = (0.965697)
= 0.93257
So approximately 93.3% of the variation in pressure 3 pm can be explained by similar variation in pressure 9
am.

f. i. The assumption is that a linear rule is suitable to model the relationship between pressure 3 pm and
pressure 9 am.

ii. The residuals do not support this assumption as there is a clear curvature in the pattern of the residual
plot.

Question 9/ 231

[VCAA 2019 FM]

The total rainfall, in millimetres, for each of the four seasons in 2015 and 2016 is shown in Table 9 below.
Table 9

Total rainfall (mm)

Year Summer Autumn Winter Spring
2015 142 156 222 120
2016 135 153 216 96

a. The seasonal index for winter is shown in Table 10 below.

Use the values in Table 9 to find the seasonal indices for summer, autumn and spring.

Write your answers in Table 10, rounded to two decimal places.

Table 10

Summer Autumn Winter Spring

Seasonal index 1.41

[2 marks (0.9)]

b. The total rainfall for each of the four seasons in 2017 is shown in Table 11 below. Table 11

Table 11

Total rainfall (mm)

Year Summer Autumn Winter Spring
2017 141 156 262 120

Use the appropriate seasonal index from Table 10 to deseasonalise the total rainfall for winter in 2017. Round
your answer to the nearest whole number.

[1 mark (0.6)]

Solution

a. The seasonal average for 2015 is:

 142+156+222+120
Ave.(2015) = 4 = 160 mm
135+153+216+96
Ave.(2016) = 4 = 150 mm
The seasonal indices for each year are:

Year Summer Autumn Winter Spring

SI (2015) 142/160 = 0.8875 156/160 = 0.975 222/160 = 1.3875 120/160 = 0.75
SI (2016) 135//150 = 0.9 153/150 = 1.02 216/150 = 1.44 96/150 = 0.64

The average seasonal indices can be averaged from the 2015 and 2016 indices as follows:

Summer Autumn Winter Spring

SI (0.8875 + 0.9)/2 = 0.89 (0.975 + 1.02)/2 = 1.00 1.3875 + 1.44)/2 = 1.41 (0.75 + 0.64)/2 = 0.70

b. The seasonalised value for Winter 2017 can be found as follows:

Seasonal value
Deseas. value = SI(Winter)
262
= 1.41 = 185.816 …
≈ 186 mm

Question 10/ 231

[VCAA 2020 FM]

Body mass index (BMI), in kilograms per square metre, was recorded for a sample of 32 men and displayed in
the ordered stem plot below.
a. Describe the shape of the distribution.

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. Determine the median BM I for this group of men.

[1 mark (0.7)]

c. People with a BMI of 25 or over are considered to be overweight.

What percentage of these men would be considered to be overweight?

[1 mark (0.8)]

Solution

a. The stem plot shows that the distribution is more spread out over the upper values of BMI, so the shape is
positively skewed.

b. There are 32 values, so the median will be halfway between the 16th and 17th values. The 16th value is
24.5, and the 17th value is 24.6. So the median value of BM I is 24.55 kilograms per square metre.

c. Reading from the stem plot for BM I , there are 12 values that are 25 or over. The percentage of the 32
values that are 25 or over can be calculated as 12
32 × 100% = 37.5%.
Question 11/ 231

[VCAA 2020 FM]

The neck size, in centimetres, of 250 men was recorded and displayed in the dot plot below.

a. Write down the modal neck size, in centimetres, for these 250 men.

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. Assume that this sample of 250 men has been drawn at random from a population of men whose neck size
is normally distributed with a mean of 38 cm and a standard deviation of 2.3 cm.

i. How many of these 250 men are expected to have a neck size that is more than three standard deviations
above or below the mean?

Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

[1 mark (0.4)]

ii. How many of these 250 men actually have a neck size that is more than three standard deviations above or
below the mean?

[1 mark (0.4)]

c. The five-number summary for this sample of neck sizes, in centimetres, is given below.

Minimum First quartile (Q1 ) Median Third quartile (Q3 ) Maximum

31 36 38 39 44

Use the five-number summary to construct a boxplot, showing any outliers if appropriate, on the grid below.

[2 marks (1.1)]

Solution

a. The modal neck size has the highest frequency (tallest column of dots), which a neck size of 38 cm.

b. i. Applying the 68/95/99.7% rule, it is expected that 99.7% of the values will lie within 3 standard
deviations of the mean. It is expected that 0.3% of these 250 men will have neck size more than 3 standard
deviations above or below the mean. The number can be calculated as
0.3
0.3% × 250 = 100 × 250 = 0.75 men.
Rounded to the nearest whole number, this is 1 man.

b. ii. The actual number of men with a neck size more than 3 standard deviations can be calculated as follows.
ˉ + 3 × sx = 38 + 3 × 2.3 = 44.9 cm
x
ˉ − 3 × sx = 38 − 3 × 2.3 = 31.1 cm
x
Reading from the dot plot, there is only 1 value that is outside these limits.

c. Before plotting the box plot, check whether there are any outliers.

Lower fence = 36 − 1.5 × (39 − 36) = 31.5.

Upper fence = 39 + 1.5 × (39 − 36) = 43.5.

There are two outlier values of 31 cm and 44 cm. The second lowest value is 32 cm, and the second highest
value is 43 cm. The box plot can now be constructed.

Question 12/ 231

[VCAA 2020 FM]

In a study of the association between BM I and neck size, 250 men were grouped by neck size (below
average, average and above average) and their BM I recorded.

Five-number summaries describing the distribution of BM I for each group are displayed in the table below
along with the group size.

The associated boxplots are shown below the table.

BM I (kg/m2)
Neck size Group size Min. Q1 Median Q3 Max.

below average 50 18.l 20.6 21.6 23.2 26.8

average 124 19.8 23.4 24.6 26.0 33.9
above average 76 23.l 26.25 28.1 29.95 39.1

a. What percentage of these 250 men are classified as having a below average neck size?

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. What is the interquartile range (IQR) of BM I for the men with an average neck size?

[1 mark (0.9)]

c. People with a BM I of 30 or more are classified as being obese.

Using this criterion, how many of these 250 men would be classified as obese? Assume that the BM I
values were all rounded to one decimal place.

[1 mark (0.2)]

d. Do the boxplots support the contention that BM I is associated with neck size? Refer to the values of an
appropriate statistic in your response.

[2 marks (1.0)]

Solution

50
a. There are 50 men with a below average neck size, which corresponds to 250 × 100% = 20% of the
250 men.

b. Reading from the table, the IQR of BM I for men with an average neck size is:

IQR = Q3 − Q1
= 26 − 23.4
= 2.6 cm

c. Reading from the parallel box plots, there are 4 men with average neck size with BM I of at least 30.
For men with above average neck size, Q3= 30, so 25% of BM I values are at or above 30. This
corresponds to 25% of 76 = 19 men. In total there are 4 + 19 = 23 men with a BM I of 30 or more.

d. BM I does appear to be associated with neck size, as the median value of BM I increases as neck size
increases. That is, the median for men with below average neck size is 21.6 cm, the median for men with
average neck size is 24.6 cm, while the median for men with above average neck size is 28.1 cm.

Question 13/ 231

[VCAA 2020 FM]

The age, in years, body density, in kilograms per litre, and weight, in kilograms, of a sample of 12 men aged
23 to 25 years are shown in the table below.
 Age Body density Weight

(years) (kg/litre) (kg)

23 1.07 70.1
23 1.07 90.4
23 1.08 73.2
23 1.08 85.0
24 1.03 84.3
24 1.05 95.6
24 1.07 71.7
24 1.06 95.0
25 1.07 80.2
25 1.09 87.4
25 1.02 94.9
25 l.09 65.3

a. For these 12 men, determine

i. their median age, in years

[1 mark (1.0)]

ii. the mean of their body density, in kilograms per litre.

[1 mark (0.8)]

b. A least squares line is to be fitted to the data with the aim of predicting body density from weight.

i. Name the explanatory variable for this least squares line.

[1 mark (0.8)]

ii. Determine the slope of this least squares line.

Round your answer to three significant figures.

[1 mark (0.3)]

c. What percentage of the variation in body density can be explained by the variation in weight? Round your
answer to the nearest percentage.

[1 mark (0.5)]
Solution

a. i. There are 12 values, so reading from the sorted values for age, the median value is halfway between
the 6th and 7th values, or 24 years.

ii. From a calculator, the mean value of body density is 1.065 kg/litre.

b. i. As body density is to be predicted from weight, by definition the explanatory variable is weight.

ii. Using a calculator regression tool, the least squares line, correct to three significant figures, is

body density ≈ 1.15733 − 0.001116 × weight.

Correct to three significant figures, the slope is −0.00112.

c. The coefficient of determination is r 2 ≈ 0.289954.

So approximately 29% of the variation in body density can be explained by the variation in weight.

Question 14/ 231

[VCAA 2020 FM]

The scatterplot below shows body density, in kilograms per litre, plotted against waist measurement, in
centimetres, for 250 men.
When a least squares line is fitted to the scatterplot, the equation of this line is

body density = 1.195 − 0.001512 × waist measurement

a. Draw the graph of this least squares line on the scatterplot above.

[1 mark (0.4)]

b. Use the equation of this least squares line to predict the body density of a man whose waist measurement is
65 cm. Round your answer to two decimal places.

[1 mark (0.7)]

c. When using the equation of this least squares line to make the prediction in part b., are you extrapolating
or interpolating?

[1 mark (0.4)]

d. Interpret the slope of this least squares line in terms of a man’s body density and waist measurement.

[1 mark (0.4)]

e. In this study, the body density of the man with a waist measurement of 122 cm was 0.995 kg/litre.

Show that, when this least squares line is fitted to the scatterplot, the residual, rounded to two decimal places,
is −0.02.

[1 mark (0.5)]

f. The coefficient of determination for this data is 0.6783 Write down the value of the correlation coefficient
r. Round your answer to three decimal places.
[1 mark (0.3)]

g. The residual plot associated with fitting a least squares line to this data is shown below.
Does this residual plot support the assumption of linearity that was made when fitting this line to this data?
Briefly explain your answer.

[1 mark (0.6)]

Solution

a. Before drawing the least squares line, substitute two suitable values of waist measurement into the
equation:

body density = 1.195 − 0.001512 × (60) ≈ 1.10428

body density = 1.195 − 0.001512 × (130) ≈ 0.99844

Next plot the two resulting points at approximately (60,1.1) and (130, 1.0), and draw a straight line between
these two points (as follows).
b. The predicted value of body density for a waist measurement of 65 cm is calculated from the regression
equation:

body density = 1.195 − 0.001512 × 65

≈ 1.10428
≈ 1.10 kg/litre.
c. Since the value of 65 cm falls below the range of values already collected, this prediction is an example
of extrapolating.

d. On average, it is expected that the value of body density will decrease by 0.001512 kg/litre for every
increase of 1 cm in the waist measurement.

e. From the regression equation, the expected value of body density for a waist measurement of 122 cm is:

body density = 1.195 − 0.001512 × 122

≈ 1.01054
So the residual for this value is:

resid = ydata − ypred

≈ 0.995 − 1.01054
≈ −0.02 kg/litre

f. The coefficient of determination is: r 2 = 0.6783

r2 = 0.6783
r = ± 0.6783
≈ ±0.82359

Since the two variables are negatively correlated, r = −0.824, correct to three decimal places.
g. The residuals are randomly arranged around a value of zero, which does support the assumption of
linearity.
Question 15/ 231

[VCAA 2020 FM]

The table below shows the mean age, in years, and the mean height, in centimetres, of 648 women from
seven different age groups.

Age group
Twenties Thirties Forties Fifties Sixties Seventies Eighties
Mean age (years) 26.3 35.2 45.2 55.3 65.1 74.8 83.1
Mean height (cm) 167.1 164.9 164.8 163.4 161.2 158.4 156.7

Data: J Sorkin et al., ‘Longitudinal change in height of men and women: Implications for interpretation of the
body mass index’, American Journal of Epidemiology, vol. 150, no. 9, 1999, p. 971

a. What was the difference, in centimetres, between the mean height of the women in their twenties and the
mean height of the women in their eighties?

[1 mark (0.9)]

A scatterplot displaying this data shows an association between the mean height and the mean age of these
women. In an initial analysis of the data, a line is fitted to the data by eye, as shown.

b. Describe this association in terms of strength and direction.

[1 mark (0.5)]

c. The line on the scatterplot passes through the points (20, 168) and (85, 157).

Using these two points, determine the equation of this line.

Write the values of the intercept and the slope in the appropriate boxes below.

Round your answers to three significant figures.

[1 mark (0.2)]

d. In a further analysis of the data, a least squares line was fitted.

The associated residual plot that was generated is shown below.

The residual plot indicates that the association between the mean height and the mean age of women is non-
linear.

The data presented in the table at the start of this question is repeated below.

It can be linearised by applying an appropriate transformation to the variable mean age.

Mean age (years) 26.3 35.2 45.2 55.3 65.1 74.8 83.1
Mean height (cm) 167.1 164.9 164.8 163.4 161.2 158.4 156.7

Apply an appropriate transformation to the variable mean age to linearise the data.

Fit a least squares line to the transformed data and write its equation below.

Round the values of the intercept and the slope to four significant figures.

[2 marks (0.6)]
Solution

a. The difference between the mean height of women in their twenties and the mean height of women in
their eighties is

ˉ20s − x
x ˉ80s = 167.1 − 156.7
= 10.4 cm
b. In terms of strength and direction, the association is strong and negatively associated.

c. Let the two points given be (x1 , y1 ) = (20, 168) and (x2 , y2 ) = (85, 157).

To find the equation of the line in the form y = a + bx:

y2 −y1
b = x2 −x1
157−168
= 85−20
≈ −0.169231
a = y1 − bx1
≈ 168 − (−0.169231)
≈ 171.385
Rounded to three significant figures, this becomes

mean height = 171 − 0.169 × mean age.

d. Using a calculator to square the values of mean age, and then fitting a least squares line gives the
equation

mean height = 167.9 − 0.001621 × (mean age)2 .

Question 16/ 231

[VCAA 2021 FM]

In the sport of heptathlon, athletes compete in seven events. These events are the 100 m hurdles, high jump,
shot-put, javelin, 200 m run, 800 m run and long jump.

Fifteen female athletes competed to qualify for the heptathlon at the Olympic Games.
Their results for three of the heptathlon events – high jump, shot-put and javelin – are shown in Table 12.

Table 12

Athlete number High jump (metres) Shot-put (metres) Javelin (metres)

1 1.76 15.34 41.22
2 1.79 16.96 42.41
3 1.83 13.87 46.53
4 1.82 14.23 40.62
5 1.87 13.78 45.64
6 1.73 14.50 42.33
7 1.68 15.08 40.88
8 1.82 13.13 39.22
9 1.83 14.22 42.51
10 1.87 13.62 42.75
11 1.87 12.01 38.12
12 1.80 12.88 42.65
13 1.83 12.68 45.68
14 1.87 12.45 41.32
15 1.78 11.31 42.88

a. Write down the number of numerical variables in Table 12.

[1 mark (0.5)]

b. Complete Table 13 below by calculating the mean height jumped for the high jump, in metres, by the 15
athletes. Write your answer in the space provided in the table.

[1 mark (0.9)]

Table 13

Statistic High jump (metres) Shot-put (metres)

mean 13.74
standard deviation 0.06 1.43
c. In shot-put, athletes throw a heavy spherical ball (a shot) as far as they can.

Athlete number six, Jamilia, threw the shot 14.50 m.

Calculate Jamilia’s standardised score (z ).

Round your answer to one decimal place.

[1 mark (0.8)]

d. In the qualifying competition, the heights jumped in the high jump are expected to be approximately
normally distributed.

Chara’s jump in this competition would give her a standardised score of z = −1.0
Use the 68–95–99.7% rule to calculate the percentage of athletes who would be expected to jump higher than
Chara in the qualifying competition.

[1 mark (0.6)]

e. The boxplot below was constructed to show the distribution of high jump heights for all 15 athletes in the
qualifying competition.

Explain why the boxplot has no whisker at its upper end.

[1 mark 0.5)]

f. For the javelin qualifying competition (refer to Table 12), another boxplot is used to display the distribution
of athletes’ results.

An athlete whose result is displayed as an outlier at the upper end of the plot is considered to be a potential
medal winner in the event.

What is the minimum distance that an athlete needs to throw the javelin to be considered a potential medal
winner?

[2 marks (0.6)]
Solution

a. There are three numerical variables in Table 12 – all relate to lengths. While the variable Athlete number
contains numbers, it does not make sense to summarise or analyse that variable numerically. Athlete number
is an ordinal categorical variable.

b. Using the calculator statistical features, the mean of High jump is 1.81 metres.

c. The standardised score for Jamilia’s throw can be calculated as follows.

ˉ
z = x−x
sx
14.50−13.74
= 1.43
= 0.531469 …
≈ 0.5 metres

d. A standard score of z = −1 represents a score that is one standard deviation below the mean. For high
jump, this means a score that is 1.81 − 0.06 = 1.75 metres. Using the 68–95–99.7% rule, approximately
34% + 50% = 84% of athletes would be expected to jump higher than Chiara in the qualifying
competition.

e. The boxplot has no whisker at the upper end because the Q3 value is the same as the maximum value for
high jump heights for the 15 athletes. The four highest jumps were 1.87 metres.

f. The calculator statistical features can be used to show that for Javelin,

Q1 = 40.88 metres and Q3 = 42.88 metres. To be considered an outlier and a potential medal winner
the minimum javelin throw would need to be

Q3 + 1.5 × IQR
= 42.88 + 1.5 × (42.88 − 40.88)
= 42.88 + 1.5 × 2
= 45.88 metres

Question 17/ 231

[VCAA 2021 FM]

The two running events in the heptathlon are the 200 m run and the 800 m run. The times taken by the
athletes in these two events, time200 and time800, are linearly related.

When a least squares line is fitted to the data, the equation of this line is found to be
 time800 = 0.03931 + 5.2756 × time200
a. Round the values for the intercept and the slope to three significant figures. Write your answers in the
boxes provided.

[1 mark (0.5)]

b. The mean and the standard deviation for each variable, time200 and time800, are shown in the table below.

Statistic Time200 (seconds) Time800 (seconds)

Mean 24.6492 136.054
standard deviation 0.96956 8.2910

The equation of the least squares line is

time800 = 0.03931 + 5.2756 × time200

Use this information to calculate the coefficient of determination as a percentage. Round your answer to the
nearest percentage.

[2 marks (0.6)]

Solution

a. Correct to three significant figures, the intercept is 0.0393 and the slope is 5.28.

b. The parameters of the least squares regression line equation (y = a + bx) and the correlation
coefficient (r ) are linked in the following way.
s
b = r sxy and a = yˉ − bx
ˉ.

So using the values of the means and standard deviations for time200 (y ) and time800 (x) provided:
 s
b = r sxy
8.2910
5.2756 = r 0.96956
r ≈ 0.616935
r2 ≈ 0.380609

So r 2 is approximately 38%.

[Note: Although it does not affect the answer, the calculation for a = yˉ − bx
ˉ gives a different value to the
one given in the least squares line.]

Question 18/ 231

[VCAA 2021 FM]

The time series plot on the next page shows the winning time, in seconds, for the women’s 100 m freestyle
swim plotted against year, for each year that the Olympic Games were held during the period 1956 to 2016.
A least squares line has been fitted to the plot to model the decreasing trend in the winning time over this
period.

The equation of the least squares line is

winning time = 357.1 − 0.1515 × year

The coefficient of determination is 0.8794

a. Name the explanatory variable in this time series plot.

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. Determine the value of the correlation coefficient (r ).

Round your answer to three decimal places.

[1 mark (0.2)]

c. Write down the average decrease in winning time, in seconds per year, during the

period 1956 to 2016.

[1 mark (0.3)]

d. The predicted winning time for the women’s 100 m freestyle in 2000 was 54.10 seconds.

The actual winning time for the women’s 100 m freestyle in 2000 was 53.83 seconds.

Determine the residual value in seconds.

[1 mark (0.7)]

e. The following equation can be used to predict the winning time for the women’s 100 m freestyle in the
future.

winning time = 357.1 − 0.1515 × year

i. Show that the predicted winning time for the women’s 100 m freestyle in 2032 is 49.252 seconds.

[1 mark (0.9)]

ii. What assumption is being made when this equation is used to predict the winning time for the women’s
100 m freestyle in 2032?

[1 mark (0.2)]

Solution

a. The explanatory variable is year.

b. The value of the coefficient of determination (r 2 ) is 0.8794, so the value of the correlation coefficient (r
) is r= ± r2 = ± 0.8794 = ±0.937763 … Since winning time and year are negatively
associated (see scatter plot), the correlation coefficient is approximately r = −0.938.

c. Using the value of the slope from the equation of the least squares line, the average decrease in winning
time is 0.1515 seconds per year.
d. The residual is given by the difference between the actual y -value and the predicted y -value for a given
value of the explanatory variable (x-value). That is, residual = actual y -value - predicted y -value. So for the
year 2000, the residual value is 53.83 − 54.10 = −0.27 seconds.

e. i. For 2032, the predicted winning time for the women’s 100 freestyle is 357.1 −
0.1515(2032) = 49.252 seconds
ii. This prediction uses a value of the explanatory variable outside the data provided, which is
extrapolation. It assumes that a linear model will continue to be appropriate in 2032.

Question 19/ 231

[VCAA 2021 FM]

The time series plot below shows that the winning time for both men and women in the 100 m freestyle swim
in the Olympic Games has been decreasing during the period 1912 to 2016.

Least squares lines are used to model the trend for both men and women.

The least squares line for the men’s winning time has been drawn on the time series plot above.

The equation of the least squares line for men is

winning time men = 356.9 − 0.1544 × year

The equation of the least squares line for women is

winning time women = 538.9 − 0.2430 × year

a. Draw the least squares line for winning time women on the time series plot above.

[1 mark (0.5)]

b. The difference between the women’s predicted winning time and the men’s predicted winning time can be
calculated using the formula

diff erence = winning time women − winning time men

Use the equations of the least squares lines above and the formula above to calculate the difference predicted
for the 2024 Olympic Games.

Round your answer to one decimal place.

[2 marks (1.5)]

c. The Olympic Games are held every four years. The next Olympic Games will be held in 2024, then 2028,
2032 and so on.

In which Olympic year do the two least squares lines predict that the winning time for women will first be
faster than the winning time for men in the 100 m freestyle?

[2 marks (0.9)]

Solution

a. To draw the least squares line for winning time for women, first select two years and find the predicted
winning time for these two years (example shown).

For year = 1940:

winning time = 538.9 − 0.2430 × (1940) = 67.48 seconds.

For year = 2004:

winning time = 538.9 − 0.2430 × (2004) = 51.93 seconds.

Plot the points (1940, 67.48) and (2004, 51.93), and draw a line through these two points (as shown below).
b. In 2024:

predicted winning time (women)

= 538.9 − 0.2430(2024) = 47.068 seconds predicted winning time (men)

= 356.9 − 0.1544(2024) = 44.394 seconds.

So the difference is approximately 47.068 − 44.394 = 2.7 seconds.

c. The two equations from part b can be solved to help find in which Olympic year it is predicted that the
women’s winning time will first be faster than the men’s winning time. Let the year be x.

Solve the following equation for x.

538.9 − 0.2430x = 356.9 − 0.1544x

The calculator assisted answer is approximately x = 2054.18.

The next Olympic year after then will be the 2056 Olympics.

Question 20/ 231

[VCAA 2021 FM]

A method for predicting future time differences in the 100 m freestyle swim is to use the formula

diff erence = winning time women − winning time men

The resulting data and time series plot are shown below. The plot is clearly non-linear.
Year Difference (seconds)
1912 18.8
1920 12.2
1924 13.4
1928 12.4
1932 8.6
1936 8.3
1948 9.0
1952 9.4
1956 6.6
1960 6.0
1964 6.1
1968 7.8
1972 7.4
1976 5.7
1980 4.4
1984 6.1
1988 6.3
1992 5.6
1996 5.8
2000 5.5
 Year Difference (seconds)
2004 5.7
2008 5.9
2012 5.5
2016 5.1

Note: No Olympic Games were held in 1916, 1940 and 1944.

a. Apply a reciprocal transformation to the variable difference to linearise the data. Fit a least squares line to
the transformed data and write its equation below.

Round the values of the intercept and the slope to four significant figures.

[2 marks (0.5)]

b. Use the equation from part a. to predict, in seconds, the difference between the women’s and men’s
winning times in the year 2032.

Round your answer to one decimal place.

[1 mark (0.2)]

Solution

a. Using the calculator statistical features, define year as the explanatory variable, and diff as the response
variable. Then enter the data provided. Create a new variable for the reciprocal of difference (perhaps call it
recdiff). Then calculate a linear regression equation for recdiff vs. year.

The equation obtained was

1
diff = −2.234 + 0.001209 × year

b. For the year 2032,

1
diff = −2.234 + 0.001209(2032)
1
diff ≈ 0.222688
1
diff ≈ 0.222688
diff ≈ 4.5 seconds.
Question 21/ 231

[VCAA 2022 FM]

The back-to-back stem plot below displays the distribution of daily maximum wind speed, in kilometres per
hour, recorded at a weather station in April and November 2021.

a. For April 2021, determine

i. the median wind speed, in kilometres per hour

[1 mark (0.9)]

ii. the percentage of days for which the wind speed was less than 25 km/h.

[1 mark (0.8)]

b. The five-number summary for wind speed in November 2021 is given below.

Minimum First quartile (Q1 ) Median Third quartile (Q3 ) Maximum

15 22 28 35 70
The wind speeds for November are to be used to construct a boxplot.

Show that the wind speeds of 59 km/h and 70 km/h would appear as outliers in this boxplot.

[2 marks (1.5)]

c. On the grid below, use the data from the stem plot on page 134 to construct a histogram that displays the
distribution of wind speed for November 2021. Use class intervals of widths of five, starting at 15 km/h.

[2 marks (1.3)]

Solution

a. i. Reading from the left side of the back-to-back stem plot, there are 30 values, so the median is
halfway between the 15th and 16th values. Since both values are 20, the median wind speed for April 2021 is
20 km/h.

ii. Reading from the left side of the back-to-back stem plot, there are 18 values that are less than 25 km/h.
As a percentage of the 30 days, this is 18
30 × 100% = 60% of the days.

b. The upper fence for wind speed in November 2021 can be calculated as follows:

Upper fence = Q1 + 1.5 × IQR

= 35 + 1.5 × (35 − 22)
= 54.5
Since both 59 km/h and 70 km/h are greater than this upper fence value, both would appear as outliers.

c. The frequencies for each 5 km/h wind speed interval can be tallied from the back-to-back stem plot, and
then used to complete the histogram as follows.

Question 22/ 231

[VCAA 2022 FM]

The boxplots below show the distribution of relative humidity (%) at 9 am and 3 pm at a weather station for
the 30 days of November 2021.
a. i. Determine whether the relative humidity in November is more variable at 9 am or 3 pm.

[1 mark (0.6)]

ii. Write down the percentage of days in November for which the relative humidity at 3 pm was less than
80%.

[1 mark (0.7)]

iii. Complete the five-number summaries for the distributions of relative humidity at 9 am and 3 pm by
writing the missing values in the table below.

[1 mark (0.9)]

Time Minimum First quartile (Q1 ) Median Third quartile Q3 ) Maximum

9 am 65 75
3 pm 27 51 63

b. Do the boxplots support the contention that there is an association between relative humidity and time of
day? Refer to the values of an appropriate statistic in your answer.

[2 marks (1.1)]

Solution

a. i. For 9 am: IQR = 100 − 65 = 35 and for 3 pm, IQR = 80 − 51 = 29. So based on the IQR
statistic, the relative humidity is more variable at 9 am (i.e. it has a larger IQR value).
 ii. Observing the box plot for relative humidity at 3 pm, a relative humidity of 80% is located at the Q3
mark, so by definition 75% of the data values are less than a relative humidity of 80%.

iii. The missing values are as follows: At 9 am: Min = 40; Q3 = 100; Max = 100. At 3 pm: Q3 = 80; Max
= 100.

b. There is an association between relative humidity, as the median value of relative humidity decreases
from 75% (at 9 am) to 63% (at 3 pm).

Alternatively, there is a decrease in the IQR from 35 (at 9 am) to 29 (at 3 pm) – this also provides evidence of
an association between the two variables.

Question 23/ 231

[VCAA 2022 FM]

The table below displays data for seven weather-related variables for the first eight days of December 2021.

Minimum Maximum Maximum Direction of

Day Rainfall Temperature 9
temperature temperature wind speed maximum
number (mm) am (°C)
(°C) (°C) (km/h) wind speed
1 19.4 28.3 0 35 ENE 22.9
2 17.6 29.7 1.0 35 WSW 24.2
3 7.6 16.5 11.6 26 WSW 12.7
4 7.5 15.9 0 30 WSW 10.9
5 5.7 19.0 0.2 24 ESE 10.4
6 9.9 23.8 0 39 NE 17.8
7 11.0 11.9 0 22 SSW 11.7
8 6.5 14.2 0 28 ESE 9.5

Data: Commonwealth of Australia 2022, Bureau of Meteorology, www.bom.gov.au

a. Write down

i. the number of numerical variables in the table.

[1 mark (0.6)]
ii. the median rainfall, in millimetres, for the eight-day period.

[1 mark (0.7)]

b. A least squares line is used to model the association between daily maximum temperature and daily
minimum temperature.

With unrounded values for the intercept and slope, the equation of the least squares line is

maximum temperature = 9.235946 … + 1.002493 … × minimum temperature

Round the intercept and slope to four significant figures. Write your answers in the boxes provided.

[1 mark (0.6)]

c. Calculate the coefficient of determination for the association between the daily maximum temperature and
the daily minimum temperature. Write down its value as a percentage, rounded to one decimal place.

[1 mark (0.5)]

Solution

a. i. There are five numerical variables in Table 1:

• Minimum temperature

• Maximum temperature

• Rainfall

• Maximum wind speed

• Temperature 9 am

Although Day number contains numerical information, the numbers represent an ordered sequence of the
days, and no useful statistics can be obtained from this data. Therefore, it is an ordinal categorical variable.
Direction of maximum wind speed is also an ordinal categorical variable.

ii. Reading from the 8 values in the Rainfall column of Table 1, the median value will be halfway
between the 4th and 5th values (when sorted in ascending order). Since both these values are 0 mm, the
median value of Rainf all = 0 mm.
b. Converting to four significant figures:

intercept: 9.235946 … ≈ 9.236

slope : 1.002493. ≈ 1.002

c. To calculate the coefficient of determination, enter the data for maximum temperature and minimum
temperature into your calculator, then calculate the two-variable statistics, which gives the correlation
coefficient

r ≈ 0.781783, so

r2 ≈ (0.781783)2 ≈ 0.611184
So the coefficient of determination is approximately 61.1%.

Question 24/ 231

[VCAA 2022 FM]

The scatterplot below shows the relative humidity (%) at 9 am plotted against the temperature (°C) at 9 am
for the 30 days of November 2021.

A least squares line has been fitted to the scatterplot.

The equation of the least squares line is

 relative humidity = 120.1 − 3.417 × temperature
The coefficient of determination is 0.6073.

a. The equation of the least squares line can be used to predict relative humidity at 9 am from the temperature
at 9 am.

Name the explanatory variable.

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. Describe the association between relative humidity and temperature in terms of strength and direction.

[1 mark (0.3)]

c. Interpret the slope of the least squares line in terms of the variables relative humidity and temperature.

[1 mark (0.5)]

d. On the day when the temperature at 9 am was 16.3 °C, the relative humidity was 45.0%.

The following least squares line can be used to predict the relative humidity at 9 am on this day.

relative humidity = 120.1 − 3.417 × temperature

Calculate the residual value. Round your answer to one decimal place.

[2 marks (1.3)]

Solution

a. The explanatory variable is temperature, which is being used to predict the relative humidity (the
response variable).

b. The correlation coefficient can be calculated as follows.

r = ± r2 = ± (0.6073)2 ≈ ±0.7793

The two variables are negatively associated, so r ≈ −0.7793.

Since −1 ≤ r < −0.75, relative humidity and temperature have a strong, negative association.
c. For every increase of 1 °C in temperature, it is expected that the relative humidity will decrease by
approximately 3.417%.

d. Let (xdata , y data ) = (16.3, 45.0).

If xdata = 16.3,

ypredicted = 120.1 − 3.417 × (16.3)

= 64.4029

Residual = ydata − ypredicted

≈ 45.0 − 64.4029
≈ −19.4029
≈ −19.4

Question 25/ 231

[VCAA 2022 FM]

The time series plot below shows the monthly rainfall, in millimetres, recorded at a weather station over 36-
month period.

a. The time series plot contains irregular fluctuations.

Give two other descriptions of the pattern in this time series plot.

[1 mark (0.4)]

b. Write down the value of the five-median smoothed rainfall for month 20.

[1 mark (0.6)]
c. The data for months 1 to 12 of the time series plot is shown in the table below.

Month Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Month number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Rainfall (mm) 109.0 147.2 129.6 179.6 206.2 155.2 127.6 83.8 61.8 134.6 122.8 113.6

i. Calculate the nine-mean smoothed rainfall for month 7. Round your answer to one decimal place.

[1 mark (0.6)]

ii. What would be the number of points in the smoothed plot if nine-mean smoothing is applied for the full
36-month period?

[1 mark (0.4)]

Solution

a. There are peak values in the 5th, 17th and 29th month, each separated by 12 months. This indicates some
form of seasonal variation is present in the time series plot. Also there appears to be a decreasing trend over
the period of 36 months.

b. The five values surrounding month 20 are the rainfall values for months 18 to 22. In ascending order,
these rainfall values are 60 mm, 80 mm, 100 mm, 110 mm, 155 mm. So the five-median smoothed rainfall
value for month 20 is 100 mm.

c. i. The nine-mean smoothed value for month 7 can be obtained by finding the mean of the monthly rainfall
values from March to November.
129.6+179.6+…+122.8
9 ≈ 133.5 mm.
ii. The first point for a nine-mean smoothed plot will be centred on month 5 (so that rainfall values for 4
months above and below month 5 can also be used). Using similar logic, the final point will be centred on
month 32 (so that rainfall values for the 4 final months can be used). In summary, only the first and last 4
months of the 36-month period will not have points for the smoothed plot. This will mean that the total
number of points are:

36 − 4 − 4 = 28 points.
Question 1/ 249

[VCAA 2018 FM]

Julie deposits some money into a savings account that will pay compound interest every month. The balance
of Julie’s account, in dollars, after n months, Vn , can be modelled by the recurrence relation shown below.

V0 = 12000, Vn+1 = 1.0062 Vn

a. How many dollars does Julie initially invest?

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. Recursion can be used to calculate the balance of the account after one month.

i. Write down a calculation to show that the balance in the account after one month, V1 , is $12 074.40

[1 mark (0.9)]

ii. After how many months will the balance of Julie’s account first exceed $12 300?

[1 mark (0.8)]

c. A rule of the form Vn = a × bn can be used to determine the balance of Julie’s account after n months.

i. Complete this rule for Julie’s investment after n months by writing the appropriate numbers in the boxes
provided below.

[1 mark (0.8)]

ii. What would be the value of n if Julie wanted to determine the value of her investment after three years?

[1 mark (0.7)]

Solution

a. The initial investment is given by the value V0 = $12 000.

b. i. Using recursion feature of a calculator:

V0 = $12 000

V1 = 1.0062 × V0 = $12 074.40

ii. Using recursion feature of a calculator:

V0 = $12 000

V1 = 1.0062 × V0 = $12 074.40

V2 = 1.0062 × V1 = $12 149.26

V3 = 1.0062 × V2 = $12 224.59

V4 = 1.0062 × V3 = $12 300.38

So the balance will first exceed $12 300 after 4 months.

c. i. The direct rule for the balance after n months is of the form Vn = Rn × V0 .

Using the form provided (Vn = a × bn ), the rule is: balance = 12000 × (1.0062)n

ii. Three years represents 36 months, so n = 12.

Question 2/ 249

[VCAA 2018 FM]

After three years, Julie withdraws $14 000 from her account to purchase a car for her business. For tax
purposes, she plans to depreciate the value of her car using the reducing balance method. The value of Julie’s
car, in dollars, after n years, Cn , can be modelled by the recurrence relation shown below.

C0 = 14 000, Cn+1 = R × Cn

a. For each of the first three years of reducing balance depreciation, the value of R is 0.85. What is the
annual rate of depreciation in the value of the car during these three years?

[1 mark (0.6)]

b. For the next five years of reducing balance depreciation, the annual rate of depreciation in the value of the
car is changed to 8.6%.
What is the value of the car eight years after it was purchased?

Round your answer to the nearest cent.

[2 marks (0.8)]

Solution

a. The value of R = 0.85. Since this is using a reducing balance depreciation model:

R = 1 − 100
r

0.85 = 1 − 100
r
r
100 = 0.15
r = 15%
b. Using the direct rule for calculating the value of Julie’s car after 3 years:

C n = Rn × C 0
3
C 3 = (0.85) × 14 000
C 3 = 8597.75

After 3 years, the value of R changes to:

R = 1 − 100
r
8.6
R = 1 − 100 = 0.914

Using the direct rule for calculating the value of Julie’s car for the following 5 years (note that both R and
V0 have changed in this calculation):

Vn = Rn × V0
V5 = (0.914)5 × 8597.75 = 5484.23
So, after 8 years, the value of the car is $5484.23.

Question 3/ 249

[VCAA 2018 FM]

Julie has retired from work and has received a superannuation payment of $492 800.

She has two options for investing her money.

Option 1

Julie could invest the $492 800 in a perpetuity. She would then receive $887.04 each fortnight for the rest
of her life.

a. At what annual percentage rate is interest earned by this perpetuity?

[1 mark (0.4)]

Option 2

Julie could invest the $492 800 in an annuity, instead of a perpetuity.

The annuity earns interest at the rate of 4.32% per annum, compounding monthly.

The balance of Julie’s annuity at the end of the first year of investment would be $480 242.25

b. i. What monthly payment, in dollars, would Julie receive?

[1 mark (0.5)]

ii. How much interest would Julie’s annuity earn in the second year of investment? Round your answer to the
nearest cent.

[2 marks (0.3)]

Solution

a. This perpetuity requires that the fortnightly payment is equal to the interest earned in that time.

Payment = Interest earned

r/k
Payment = 100 × V 0
r/26
887.04 = 100 × 492 800

Solving this for r gives r = 4.68%.

b. i. The monthly payment Julie would receive can be found via a TVM solver, entering the following
values:
 N = 12
I = 4.32
P V = −492 800
PMT =?
F V = 480 242.25
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives PMT = 2800, so Julie’s monthly payment is $2800.

ii. The balance after each month can be found using the following recurrence relation:

Vn+1 = Vn + Interest − Payment

Using the TVM solver as per part b. i. on the previous page,

V12 = 480 242.25 and

V24 = 467 131.14

Using a formula similar to the one above, V24 = V12 + Int.(Yr 2) − Payments(Yr 2)

467131.14 = 480242.25 + Int. − (12 × 2800)

Solving this for Int. gives:

Interest (Year 2) = $20 488.89

Question 4/ 249

[VCAA 2019 FM]

Phil is a builder who has purchased a large set of tools.

The value of Phil’s tools is depreciated using the reducing balance method.

The value of the tools, in dollars, after n years, Vn , can be modelled by the recurrence relation shown below.

V0 =60 000, Vn+1 =0.9Vn

a. Use recursion to show that the value of the tools after two years, V2 , is $48 600.
[1 mark (0.8)]

b. What is the annual percentage rate of depreciation used by Phil?

[1 mark (0.7)]

c. Phil plans to replace these tools when their value first falls below $20 000.

After how many years will Phil replace these tools?

[1 mark (0.8)]

d. Phil has another option for depreciation. He depreciates the value of the tools by a flat rate of 8% of the
purchase price per annum.

Let Vn be the value of the tools after n years, in dollars.

Write down a recurrence relation, in terms of V0 , Vn+1 and Vn , that could be used to model the value of the
tools using this flat rate depreciation.

[1 mark (0.5)]

Solution

a. According to the recurrence relation:

V1 = 0.9V0 = 0.9 × 60 000 = 54 000

V2 = 0.9V1 = 0.9 × 54 000 = 48 600

The value of the tools after two years is $48 600.

b. The annual percentage rate of depreciation can found from the R value:

R = 1 − 100
r

0.9 = 1 − 100
r
⇔ r = 10
So the annual rate of depreciation is 10%.

c. The direct rule for Vn is:

Vn = Rn × V0

To solve for the n value when

 V n = Rn × V 0
Vn = Rn × V 0
20 000 = 0.9n × 60 000
n ≈ 10.4272
n ≈ 11

Phil will replace these tools after 11 years.

d. From the information provided, V0 = 60 000 and the annual flat depreciation (D) can be found:

D = r
100 ×V0
8
= 100 × 60 000
= 4800

So the recurrence relation is: V0 = 60 000, Vn+1 = Vn − 4800

Question 5/ 249

[VCAA 2019 FM]

Phil invests $200 000 in an annuity from which he receives a regular monthly payment.

The balance of the annuity, in dollars, after n months, An , can be modelled by the recurrence relation

A0 = 200 000, An+1 = 1.0035An − 3700

a. What monthly payment does Phil receive?

[1 mark (0.7)]

b. Show that the annual percentage compound interest rate for this annuity is 4.2%.

[1 mark (0.3)]

At some point in the future, the annuity will have a balance that is lower than the monthly payment amount.

c. What is the balance of the annuity when it first falls below the monthly payment amount?

Round your answer to the nearest cent.

[1 mark (0.4)]

d. If the payment received each month by Phil had been a different amount, the investment would act as a
simple perpetuity.

What monthly payment could Phil have received from this perpetuity?

[1 mark (0.4)]

Solution

a. The regularly monthly payment is represented in the recurrence relation as $3700, which is the amount
deducted from the balance each month after interest is added.

b. From the recurrence relation, R = 1.0035, and the investment is compounded monthly, so we can use
the following formula to find the annual interest rate:

rR = 1 + r/k
100
1.0035 = 1 + r/12
100

Solving this equation gives r = 4.2 So the annual percentage compound interest rate is 4.2%.
c. The monthly payment Phil would receive can be found via a TVM solver, entering the following values:

N =?
I = 4.2
P V = −200 000
PMT = 3700
F V = 3700
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives N = 59.0214 …, so Phil’s payment is still $3700 in the 59th month, but the balance will
slip below $3700 after the 60th payment.

To find the balance after the 60th payment, use the TVM solver, entering the following values:

N = 60
I = 4.2
P V = −200 000
PMT = 3700
F V =?
PpY = 12
CpY = 12
Solving gives F V = 92.15318 …, so the balance of the annuity is $92.15 after the 60th payment of
$3700 is made.
d. To act as a perpetuity, the values of PV and FV must be set so that the balance remains unchanged. To
find the value of PMT that would change this annuity to a perpetuity, use the TVM solver, entering the
following values:

N = 60
I = 4.2
P V = −200 000
PMT =?
F V = 200 000
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives PMT = 700. So a monthly payment of $700 would set up this investment as a perpetuity.
Alternative method:

If monthly payment is $M , since the balance stays the same, the equation is:

200 000 = 1.0035 × 200 000 − M

Solve for M:

M = 1.0035 × 200 000–200 000 = 700

Question 6/ 249

[VCAA 2019 FM]

Phil would like to purchase a block of land.

He will borrow $350 000 to make this purchase.

Interest on this loan will be charged at the rate of 4.9% per annum, compounding fortnightly.

After three years of equal fortnightly repayments, the balance of Phil’s loan will be $262 332.33

a. What is the value of each fortnightly repayment Phil will make?

Round your answer to the nearest cent.

[1 mark (0.3)]

b. What is the total interest Phil will have paid after three years?

Round your answer to the nearest cent.

[1 mark (0.2)]

c. Over the next four years of his loan, Phil will make monthly repayments of $3517.28 and will be charged
interest at the rate of 4.8% per annum, compounding monthly.

Let Bn be the balance of the loan n months after these changes apply.

Write down a recurrence relation, in terms of B0 , Bn+1 and Bn , that could be used to model the balance of
the loan over these four years.

[2 marks (0.7)]

Solution

a. The fortnightly repayment Phil would need to make can be found via a TVM solver, entering the
following values:

N = 3 × 26
I = 4.9
P V = 350 000
PMT =?
F V = −262 332.33
PpY = 26
CpY = 26

Solving gives PMT = −1704.030 …, so Phil’s fortnightly repayment is $1704.03.

b. The interest Phil has paid can be calculated as follows:

Total repayments = 3 × 26 × $1704.03

= $132 914.34

Principal paid = Bal0 − Bal78

= $350 000 − $262 332.33
= $87 667.67
Interest paid = Total paid − Principal paid
= $132 914.34 − $87 667.67
= $45 246.67
So the total interest paid after 3 years is $45 246.67.

c. For the next 4 years, a new annual interest rate of 4.2% applies, compounded monthly. So B0 =
$262 332.33, the balance of the account at the time this new rate applies.

The value of R can be calculated as follows:

R = 1 + r/k
100
4.8/12
= 1 + 100
= 1.004
So as the monthly payment of $3517.28 is given, the recurrence relation is:

B 0 = 262 332.33, B n+1 = 1.004B n − 3517.28

Question 7/ 249

[VCAA 2020 FM]

Samuel owns a printing machine.

The printing machine is depreciated in value by Samuel using flat rate depreciation.

The value of the machine, in dollars, after n years, Vn , can be modelled by the recurrence relation

V0 = 120 000, Vn+1 = Vn − 15 000

a. By what amount, in dollars, does the value of the machine decrease each year?

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. Showing recursive calculations, determine the value of the machine, in dollars, after two years.

[1 mark (0.7)]

c. What annual flat rate percentage of depreciation is used by Samuel?

[1 mark (0.7)]
d. The value of the machine, in dollars, after n years, Vn , could also be determined using a rule of the form
Vn = a + bn.

Write down this rule for Vn .

[1 mark (0.4)]

Solution

a. From the recurrence relation provided, the value of the machine decreases by $15 000 each year.

b. Applying the recursion rule:

V1 = V 0 − 15 000
= 120 000 − 15 000
= 105 000
V2 = V 1 − 15 000
= 105 000 − 15 000
= $90 000
c. The percentage depreciation used by Samuel is:
15 000
% Depreciation = × 100%
120 000
= 12.5%
d. The direct rule is

Vn = a + bn
= 120 000 − 15 000n

Question 8/ 249

[VCAA 2020 FM]

Samuel has a reducing balance loan.

The first five lines of the amortisation table for Samuel’s loan are shown below.
 Payment number Payment ($) Interest ($) Principal reduction ($) Balance ($)
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 320 000.00
1 1600.00 960.00 640.00 319 360.00
2 1600.00 958.08 641.92 318 718.08
3 1600.00 956.15 318 074.23
4 1600.00

Interest is calculated monthly and Samuel makes monthly payments of $1600.

Interest is charged on this loan at the rate of 3.6% per annum.

a. Using the values in the amortisation table

i. calculate the principal reduction associated with payment number 3.

[1 mark (0.8)

ii. calculate the balance of the loan after payment number 4 is made.

[1 mark (0.4)]

b. Let Sn be the balance of Samuel’s loan after n months.

Write down a recurrence relation, in terms of S0 , Sn+1 and Sn , that could be used to model the month-to-
month balance of the loan.

[1 mark (0.3)]

Solution

a. i. The principal reduction for payment number 3 can be found using:

Principal reduction = Payment − Interest

= $1600 − $956.15
= $643.85

ii. As the annual interest rate, the monthly interest rate is 3.6/12 = 0.3%. Let Sn be the balance after
n months.
 0.3
I4 = 100× S3
0.3
= 100 × 318 074.23
= $954.22

So S4 = S3 − I4 + I4
= $318 074.23 − $1600 + $954.22
= $317 428.45

b. The recurrence relation for the balance Sn be can be determined by describing the balance increase from
a 3% interest charge, and the deduction of the monthly payment as follows.

S0 = 320 000, Sn+1 = 1.003Sn − 1600

Question 9/ 249

[VCAA 2020 FM]

Samuel opens a savings account.

Let Bn be the balance of this savings account, in dollars, n months after it was opened.

The month-to-month value of Bn can be determined using the recurrence relation shown below.

B0 = 5000, Bn+1 = 1.003Bn

a. Write down the value of B4 , the balance of the savings account after four months. Round your answer to
the nearest cent.

[1 mark (0.6)]

b. Calculate the monthly interest rate percentage for Samuel’s savings account.

[1 mark (0.4)]

c. After one year, the balance of Samuel’s savings account, to the nearest dollar, is $5183.

If Samuel had deposited an additional $50 at the end of each month immediately after the interest was added,
how much extra money would be in the savings account after one year? Round your answer to the nearest
dollar.

[1 mark (0.3)]
Solution

a. From the recurrence relation provided, a direct rule for Bn is

Bn = 1.003n × B0
B4 = 1.0034 × 5000
= $5060.27

b. The monthly interest rate can be calculated as follows, where r is the monthly interest rate:

1.003 = 1 + 100
r

r = 0.3%
c. To find the balance of the modified savings strategy after the 12 payments, use a calculator finance
solver, entering the following values:

N = 12
I = 0.3 × 12
P V = −5000
PMT = −50
F V =?
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives F V = 5792.99957 …, or $5793 to the nearest dollar.

So the difference between this modified strategy and the original strategy is $5793 − $5183 = $610.

Question 10/ 249

[VCAA 2020 FM]

Samuel now invests $500 000 in an annuity from which he receives a regular monthly payment.

The balance of the annuity, in dollars, after n months, An , can be modelled by a recurrence relation of the
form
 A0 = 500 000, An+1 = kAn − 2000

a. Calculate the balance of this annuity after two months if k = 1.0024

[1 mark (0.6)]

b. Calculate the annual compound interest rate percentage for this annuity if k = 1.0024
[1 mark (0.5)]

c. For what value of k would this investment act as a simple perpetuity?

[1 mark (0.4)]

Solution

a. Using the recurrence relation and the value of k provided:

A1 = 1.0024 × 500 000 − 2000

= $499 200
A2 = 1.0024 × 499 200 − 2000
= $498 398.08

b. Let n be the number of compounding periods per year and let r % be the annual interest rate. Then

k = 1 + r/n
100
r/12
1.0024 = 1 + 100
r
1200 = 0.0024
r = 2.88
So the annual rate is 2.88%.

c. For a simple perpetuity, the amount of interest earned each month must equal the regular monthly
payment of $2000.

Let r % be the annual interest rate.

r/12
100 × 500 000 = 2000
r
12 = 2000 × 500100000
r = 4.8

Hence the value of k is

 4.8/12
k =1+ 100 = 1.004
(Alternatively, the balance of the annuity is constant each month. As the initial value is $500 000, each
balance remains at this value.

Thus An = An+1 = 500 000. But

An+1 = kAn − 2000, so substituting:

500 000 = 500 000k − 2000

502 000
k = 500 000
= 1.004)

Question 11/ 249

[VCAA 2020 FM]

Later, Samuel took out a new reducing balance loan.

The interest rate for this loan was 4.1% per annum, compounding monthly.

The balance of the loan after four years of monthly repayments was $329 587.25

The balance of the loan after seven years of monthly repayments was $280 875.15

Samuel will continue to make the same monthly repayment.

To ensure the loan is fully repaid, to the nearest cent, the required final repayment will be lower.

In the first seven years, Samuel made 84 monthly repayments.

From this point on, how many more monthly repayments will Samuel make to fully repay the loan?

[2 marks (0.4)]

Solution

The life of the loan can be broken into 3 periods:

Period 1: the first 4 years;

Period 2: the next 3 years;

Period 3: the final years.

At the end of Period 1, the loan balance was $329 587.25. The monthly repayments can be calculated by
examining Period 2 using a calculator finance solver, entering the following values:

N = 3 × 12
I = 4.1
P V = 329 587.25
PMT =?
F V = −280 875.15
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives PMT = −2400, so the monthly repayment is $2400.

The number of monthly repayments can be calculated by examining Period 3 using a calculator finance
solver, entering the following values:

N =?
I = 4.1
P V = 280 875.15
PMT = −2400
FV = 0
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives N = 149.695 …, so 150 more monthly repayments will be needed to fully repay the loan.

Question 12/ 249

[VCAA 2021 FM]

Sienna invests $420 000 in a perpetuity from which she will receive a regular monthly payment of $1890.

The perpetuity earns interest at the rate of 5.4% per annum.

a. Determine the total amount, in dollars, that Sienna will receive after one year of monthly payments.

[1 mark (0.6)]
b. Write down the value of the perpetuity after Sienna has received one year of monthly payments.

[1 mark (0.5)]

c. Let Sn be the value of Sienna’s perpetuity after n months.

Complete the recurrence relation, in terms of S0 , Sn+1 and Sn , that would model the value of this
perpetuity over time. Write your answers in the boxes provided.

[1 mark (0.4)]

Solution

a. In one year, Sienna will receive 12 × $1890 = $22 680.

b. As the investment is in a perpetuity, the value remains the same at $420 000.

c. The value of R can be found using

r/k 5.4/12
R=1+ 100 =1+ 100 = 1.0045
The recurrence relation can then be completed as:

S0 = 420 000, Sn+1 = 1.0045 × Sn − 1890.

Question 13/ 249

[VCAA 2021 FM]

Sienna owns a coffee shop. A coffee machine, purchased for $12 000, is depreciated in value using the unit
cost method.

The rate of depreciation is $0.05 per cup of coffee made.

The recurrence relation that models the year-to-year value, in dollars, of the coffee machine is
 M0 = 12 000, Mn+1 = Mn − 1440
a. Calculate the number of cups of coffee that the machine produces per year.

[1 mark (0.6)]

b. The recurrence relation above could also represent the value of the coffee machine depreciating at a flat
rate.

What annual flat rate percentage of depreciation is represented?

[1 mark (0.5)]

c. Complete the rule below that gives the value of the coffee machine, Mn , in dollars, after n cups have been
produced. Write your answers in the boxes provided.

[1 mark (0.2)]

Solution

a. From the recurrence relation, the annual drop in value is $1440. If the rate of depreciation is $0.05 per
$1440
cup, the annual number if cups of coffee produced is $0.05 per cup = 28 800 cups.

b. If a flat rate depreciation method is used, and the value decreases by $1440 per year, the annual rate of
1440
depreciation is constant at 12000 × 100% = 12% p.a

c. Using the unit cost method of depreciation, the value of the coffee machine after n cups is:

Mn = 12 000 + −0.05 × n

Question 14/ 249

[VCAA 2021 FM]

For renovations to the coffee shop, Sienna took out a reducing balance loan of $570 000 with interest
calculated fortnightly.

The balance of the loan, in dollars, after n fortnights, Sn , can be modelled by the recurrence relation

S0 = 570 000, Sn+1 = 1.001 Sn − 1193

a. Calculate the balance of this loan after the first fortnightly repayment is made.

[1 mark (0.7)]

b. Show that the compound interest rate for this loan is 2.6% per annum.

[1 mark (0.3)]

c. For the loan to be fully repaid, to the nearest cent, Sienna’s final repayment will be a larger amount.
Determine this final repayment amount.

Round your answer to the nearest cent.

[1 mark (0.2)]

Solution

a. From the recurrence relation provided,

S1 = 1.001 × S0 − 1193
= 1.001 × (570 000) − 1193
= $569 377
b. The annual interest rate can be calculated as follows:

R = 1 + r/k
100
1.001 = 1 + r/26
100
r/26
0.001 = 100
r/26 = 0.001 × 100
r = 2.6%
c. To find the value of the final payment, first use the finance solver to find the number of payments to
amortise the loan (gives N = 650.0046.). Then find the future value after 650 payments, using a finance
solver, entering the following values:
 N = 650
I = 2.6
P V = 570 000
PMT = −1193
F V =?
PpY = 26
CpY = 26

Solving gives F V = −5.59134 …, so

Sienna still owes $5.59 at the completion of 650 payments. The final payment can be re-calculated by
adding $5.59 to the final payment of $1193. Hence the final payment is now:

$1193 + $5.59 = $1198.59.

Question 15/ 249

[VCAA 2021 FM]

Sienna invests $152 431 into an annuity from which she will receive a regular monthly payment of $900
for 25 years. The interest rate for this annuity is 5.1% per annum, compounding monthly.

a. Let Vn be the balance of the annuity after n monthly payments. A recurrence relation written in terms of
V0 , Vn+1 and Vn can model the value of this annuity from month to month.
Showing recursive calculations, determine the value of the annuity after two months. Round your answer to
the nearest cent.

[2 marks (0.7)]

b. After two years, the interest rate for this annuity will fall to 4.6%. To ensure that she will still receive the
same number of $900 monthly payments, Sienna will add an extra one-off amount into the annuity at this
time. Determine the value of this extra amount that Sienna will add. Round your answer to the nearest cent.

[1 mark (0.1)]

Solution
a. The value of R can be calculated as follows:

r/k 5.1/12
R=1+ 100 =1+ 100 = 1.00425
The recurrence relation for annuity investment is:

Vn+1 = 1.00425 × Vn − 900, V0 = 152 431

Using the recursion features of the calculator gives:

V1 = 1.00425 × 152 431 − 900

= $152 178.83
V2 = 1.00425 × 152 178.83 − 900
= $151 925.59
So after two months, the value of the annuity is $151 925.59.

b. After the first two years, the future value of the annuity can be found using the finance solver as follows:

N = 24
I = 5.1
P V = −152 431
PMT = 900
F V =?
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives F V = 146 073.7405 …

If after 2 years, the interest rate drops to 4.6%, what must the balance (i.e. the P V ) of the annuity to ensure
regular monthly payments of $900 for 23 more years are still possible? Use the finance solver to determine
what this balance must be, as follows:

N = 23 × 12
I = 4.6
P V =?
PMT = 900
FV = 0
PpY = 12
CpY = 12

Solving gives P V = −153 112.93985 ….

Note that since there is only $146 073.74 left in the investment after 2 years, the needed extra one-off amount
to be added to the account is:
$153 112.94 − $146 073.74 = $7039.20.

Question 16/ 249

[VCAA 2022 FM]

Pina owns workplace equipment, which she depreciates in value using flat rate depreciation. The value of the
equipment, in dollars, after n years, Vn , can be determined using the rule

Vn = 200 000 − 12 500n

a. Determine V1 , the value of the equipment after one year.

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. After how many years will the equipment first have a value of zero?

[1 mark (1.0)]

c. The value of the equipment, in dollars, after n years, Vn , can also be modelled by a recurrence relation.
Write this recurrence relation in terms of V0 , Vn+1 and Vn .

[1 mark (0.6)]

d. Using Pina’s depreciation model, the value of the equipment decreases by a fixed percentage of its original
value each year.

Alternatively, the value of the equipment could have been depreciated by a fixed percentage of its current
value each year.

What name is given to this type of depreciation?

[1 mark (0.5)]

Solution

a. Using the direct rule for Vn :

V1 = 200 000 − 12 500(1) = $187 500

b. To find the number of years, solve the equation Vn = 0 for n.

0 = 200 000 − 12 500n

12 500n = 200 000
200 000
n = 12 500
n = 16 years

c. The initial value is $200 000 and depreciates by a constant annual amount of $12 500, so the
recurrence relation is: V0 = 200 000; Vn+1 = Vn − 12500
d. If the value is depreciated by a fixed percentage of its value from the previous year, this type of
depreciation is called reducing balance depreciation.

Question 17/ 249

[VCAA 2022 FM]

Pina invests $540 000 in an annuity paying 3% interest per annum, compounding monthly. Her annuity will
provide a monthly payment of $5214.28 for 10 years.

Four lines of the amortisation tale for Pina’s annuity are shown below.

The information for payment number 3 is missing.

Payment number Payment ($) Interest ($) Principal reduction ($) Balance ($)
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 540000.00
1 5214.28 1350.00 3864.28 536135.72
2 5214.28 1340.34 3873.94 532261.78
3

a. What is the value of payment number 3?

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. Calculate the interest associated with payment number 3. Round your answer to the nearest cent.

[1 mark (0.5)]
c. Let Pn be the balance, in dollars, of Pina’s annuity after n months.

I Write a recurrence relation, in terms of P0 , Pn+1 and Pn , that can model this balance from month to
month.

[1 mark (0.4)]

d. If Pina had invested the original $540 000 annuity as a simple perpetuity, what monthly payment would
she have drawn?

[1 mark (0.5)]

Solution

a. The monthly payment is kept constant at $5214.28 for 10 years, so this will be the value of payment
number 3.

b. To find the monthly interest rate, divide the annual rate by 12.
3%
12 months = 0.25% per month.
The interest associated with month 3 is calculated on the balance from the end on month 2 as follows:

Interest = 0.25% × $532 261.78

0.25
= 100 × $532 261.78
= $1330.65

c. The recurrence relation can be constructed by finding the value of the multiplier R:

r/k 3/12
R=1+ 100 =1+ 100 = 1.0025.
Since the regular payment is $5214.28, the recurrence relation is:

Pn+1 = 1.0025 × Pn − 5214.28, P0 = 540 000

d. For a perpetuity, the monthly payment must equal the value of the monthly interest.

Interest = 0.25% × $540 000

0.25
= 100 × $540 000
= $1350
So Pina would have drawn $1350 per month.
Question 18/ 249

[VCAA 2022 FM]

To purchase additional workplace equipment, Pina took out a reducing balance loan of $580 000 with interest
calculated monthly.

The balance of the loan, in dollars, after n months, Ln , can be modelled by the recurrence relation

L0 = 580 000, Ln+1 = 1.002Ln − 3045.26

a. Showing recursive calculations, determine the balance of the loan after two months. Round your answer to
the nearest cent.

[1 mark (0.5)]

b. Determine the annual compound interest rate for this loan.

[1 mark (0.5)]

c. The final repayment that is required to fully pay off the loan is smaller than all other repayments by an
amount less than one dollar. Determine this small amount in dollars, rounded to the nearest cent.

[1 mark (0.3)]

d. The original recurrence relation

L0 = 580 000, Ln+1 = 1.002Ln − 3045.26

models the loan being fully repaid in a certain number of years.

Using a different multiplication factor (other than 1.002) the loan would be fully repaid one year sooner.

Determine this multiplication factor. Round your answer to four decimal places.

[1 mark (0.2)]

Solution

a. Using recursive calculations.

 L0 = $580 000
L1 = 1.002 × L0 − 3045.26 = $578 114.74
L2 = 1.002 × L1 − 3045.26 = $576 225.71
b. The annual compound interest rate can be calculated as follows:

R = 1 + r/k
100
r/12
1.002 = 1 + 100
r = 2.4%( via CAS )
c. Use the finance solver to find the number of months required to fully pay off the loan.

N =?
I = 2.4
P V = 580 000
PMT = −3045.26
FV = 0
Ppy/Cpy = 12

Solving for N gives N ≈ 239.999 …, so a slightly smaller final payment is needed. Find the future value
after 239 payments, which is F V = −3039.0326 …

The value of the final payment can be found as follows.

N =1
I = 2.4
P V = 3039.0326 …
PMT =?
FV = 0
Ppy/Cpy = 12

Solving for PMT gives

PMT ≈ −3045.11067 …, so a smaller final payment of $3045.11 is needed. This is $0.15 lower
than the other payments.

d. The plan is to reduce the term of the loan by a year from 240 months to 228 months. The multiplication
factor is associated with the interest rate, so the finance solver can be used to find an interest rate that would
allow a year of payments to be saved.
 N = 228
I =?
P V = 580 000
PMT = −3045.26
FV = 0
Ppy/Cpy = 12

Solving for I gives I = 1.946600.

This means that the required multiplication factor is

R = 1 + r/k
100
≈ 1 + 1.9466/12
100
≈ 1.0016

Question 1/ 267

[VCAA 2018 FM]

A toll road is divided into three sections, E , F and G. The cost, in dollars, to drive one journey on each
section is shown in matrix C right.

3.58 E
C = 2.22 F
2.87 G

a. What is the cost of one journey on section G?

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. Write down the order of matrix C .

[1 mark (1.0)]

c. One day Kim travels once on section E and twice on section G. His total toll cost for this day can be
found by the matrix product M × C . Write down the matrix M .
[1 mark (0.7)]
Solution

a. Reading from the third row, the cost of one journey on section G is $2.87.

b. Matrix C is of order 3 by 1.

c. The aim is to find matrix M such that the matrix product M × C gives the total toll cost (i.e. M × C
is a 1 × 1 matrix). To achieve this, matrix M should have order 1 × 3, with elements reflecting the
required number of ‘drives’ of sections E (1), F (0) and G (2).

E F G
M = [1 0 2]

Question 2/ 267

[VCAA 2018 FM]

The Westhorn Council must prepare roads for expected population changes in each of three locations: main
town (M ), villages (V ) and rural areas (R).

The population of each of these locations in 2018 is shown in matrix P2018 right.

2100 M
P 2018 = 1800 V
1700 R
The expected annual change in population in each location is shown in the table below.

Location main town villages rural areas

Annual change increase by 4% decrease by 1 % decrease by 2%

a. Write down matrix P2019 , which shows the expected population in each location in 2019.

[1 mark (0.6)]

b. The expected population in each of the three locations in 2019 can be determined from the matrix product
P2019 = F × P2018 where F is a diagonal matrix. Write down matrix F .
[1 mark (0.4)]

Solution

a. Converting the percentages provided in the table to appropriate decimal ‘multipliers’, the expected
population of each location can be calculated.

1.04 × 2100 2184 M

P 2019 = 0.99 × 1800 = 1782 V
0.98 × 1700 1666 R
b. A suitable diagonal matrix using the above decimal multipliers would be:

ccc1.04 0 0
F = 0 0.99 0
0 0 0.98

Question 3/ 267

[VCAA 2018 FM]

The Hiroads company has a contract to maintain and improve 2700 km of highway.

Each year sections of highway must be graded (G), resurfaced (R) or sealed (S ).

The remaining highway will need no maintenance (N ) that year.

Let Sn be the state matrix that shows the highway maintenance schedule for the nth year after 2018.

The maintenance schedule for 2018 is shown in matrix S0 below.

700 G
400 R
S0 =
200 S
1400 N
The type of maintenance in sections of highway varies from year to year, as shown in the transition matrix, T
, below.

this year
G R S N
0.2 0.1 0.0 0.2 G
0.1 0.1 0.0 0.2 R
T = next year
0.2 0.1 0.2 0.1 S
0.5 0.7 0.8 0.5 N

a. Of the length of highway that was graded (G) in 2018, how many kilometres are expected to be resurfaced
(R) the following year?

[1 mark (0.5)]

b. Show that the length of highway that is to be graded (G) in 2019 is 460 km by writing the appropriate
numbers in the boxes below.

[1 mark (0.8)]

The state matrix describing the highway maintenance schedule for the nth year after 2018 is given by

Sn+1 = T Sn

c. Complete the state matrix, S1 , below for the highway maintenance schedule for 2019 (one year after
2018).

[1 mark (0.8)]

d. In 2020, 1536 km of highway is expected to require no maintenance (N ).

Of these kilometres, what percentage is expected to have had no maintenance (N ) in 2019? Round your
answer to one decimal place.

[1 mark (0.2)]

e. In the long term, what percentage of highway each year is expected to have no maintenance (N )? Round
your answer to one decimal place.
[1 mark (0.4)]

Solution

a. Reading from the transition matrix T , 10% (0.1) of the road sections graded in 2018 would be resurfaced
in 2019. Since the length of road graded in 2018 is 700 km, the length of road resurfaced in 2019 is given by:

0.1 × 700 = 70 km

b. The required values can be found by multiplying the values in the first row of T by values in the matrix
S0
Length of road to be graded

= 0.2 × 700 + 0.1 × 400

+0.0 × 200 + 0.2 × 1400
= 460

c. The missing values for S1 can be found by calculating as follows:

S n+1 = T Sn
S1 = T S0
0.2 0.1 0.0 0.2 700
0.1 0.1 0.0 0.2 400
S1 =
0.2 0.1 0.2 0.1 200
0.5 0.7 0.8 0.5 1400
460
390
S1 =
360
1490
So, the missing values are 390 and 360.

d. In 2020, 1536 km of highway is expected to require no maintenance. According to the transition matrix,
50% (0.5) of the roads requiring no maintenance in 2019 will again require no maintenance in 2020.

So, the length of road not requiring maintenance in 2019 and 2020 is: 0.5 × 1490 = 745 km
As a percentage of the 1536 km that require no maintenance in 2020, this is:
745
1536 × 100% ≈ 48.5%
e. The long-term values can be calculated as follows:
 100
0.2 0.1 0.0 0.2 700
0.1 0.1 0.0 0.2 400
S∞ ≈
0.2 0.1 0.2 0.1 200
0.5 0.7 0.8 0.5 1400
431.57
388.41
S∞ ≈
347.95
1532.07
As a percentage of the total 2700 km of road, this is:
1532.07
2700 × 100% ≈ 56.7%

Question 4/ 267

[VCAA 2018 FM]

Beginning in the year 2021, a new company will take over maintenance of the same 2700 km highway with a
new contract. Let Mn be the state matrix that shows the highway maintenance schedule of this company for
the nth year after 2020.

The maintenance schedule for 2020 is shown in matrix M0 below.

For these 2700 km of highway, the matrix recurrence relation shown below can be used to determine the
number of kilometres of this highway that will require each type of maintenance from year to year.

a. Write down the value of k in matrix B .

[1 mark (0.4)]
b. How many kilometres of highway are expected to be graded (G) in the year 2022?

[1 mark (0.3)]

Solution

a. Since the transition matrix T has column totals of exactly 1, the column total of each state matrix will
remain constant at 2700 – meaning that the number of kilometres of road remains constant at 2700 km. So, to
maintain that unchanged value, the column total of B must be zero (i.e. no net change in the total length of
road.) Thus:

k + 20 + 10 + −60 = 0
k = 30
b. The state matrices for 2021 and 2022 can be calculated as follows:

470 G
410 R
2021 : M 1 = T M 0 + B =
360 S
1460 N
457 G
400 R
2022 : M 2 = T M 1 + B =
363 S
1480 N
So, 457 km of the highway is expected to be graded in 2022.

Question 5/ 267

[VCAA 2019 FM]

The car park at a theme park has three areas, A, B and C . The number of empty (E ) and full (F ) parking
spaces in each of the three areas at 1 pm on Friday are shown in matrix Q below.
 E F
70 50 A
Q = 30 20 B area
40 40 C

a. What is the order of matrix Q?

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. Write down a calculation to show that 110 parking spaces are full at 1 pm.

Drivers must pay a parking fee for each hour of parking. Matrix P , below, shows the hourly fee, in dollars,
for a car parked in each of the three areas.

area
A B C
P = [1.30 3.50 1.80]
[1 mark (0.8)]

c. The total parking fee, in dollars, collected from these 110 parked cars if they were parked for one hour is
calculated as follows.

P × L = [207.00] where matrix L is a 3 × 1 matrix.

Write down matrix L.

[1 mark (0.7)]

The number of whole hours that each of the 110 cars had been parked was recorded at l pm. Matrix R, below,
shows the number of cars parked for one, two, three or four hours in each of the areas A, B and C .

area
A B C
3 1 1 1
6 10 3 2
P = hours
22 7 10 3
19 2 26 4

d. Matrix RT is the transpose of matrix R. Find the matrix RT below.

[1 mark (0.8)]

e. Explain what the element in row 3, column 2 of matrix RT represents.

[1 mark (0.6)]
Solution

a. Matrix Q is of order 3 by 2.

b. The sum of column 2 is: 50 + 20 + 40 = 110

c. Matrix P is a 1 by 3 row matrix, so if the product matrix P × L is a 1 by 1 matrix, matrix L must be a

3 by 1 matrix so that:

P × L = [ 207.00]
1×3 3×1 1×1

So matrix L is a 3 by 1 column matrix of the number of Full parking spaces in areas A, B , and C .

50 A
L = 20 B
40 C
The product matrix calculates the total parking fee collected from the 110 cars parked for an hour.

d. The transposed matrix RT is:

1 2 3 4
3 6 22 19 A
R = 1T
10 7 2 B
1 3 10 26 C
e. The element in row 3, column 2 of the transposed matrix represents the number of cars parked at 1 pm
for 2 hours in area C .

Question 6/ 267

[VCAA 2019 FM]

The theme park has four locations, Air World (A), Food World (F ), Ground World (G) and Water World (
W ).
The number of visitors at each of the four locations is counted every hour.
By 10 am on Saturday the park had reached its capacity of 2000 visitors and could take no more visitors.

The park stayed at capacity until the end of the day.

The state matrix, S0 , below, shows the number of visitors at each location at 10 am on Saturday.

600 A
600 F
S0 =
400 G
400 W

a. What percentage of the park’s visitors were at Water World (W ) at 10 am on Saturday?

[1 mark (0.9)]

Let Sn be the state matrix that shows the number of visitors expected at each location n hours after 10 am on
Saturday.

The number of visitors expected at each location n hours after 10 am on Saturday can be determined by the
matrix recurrence relation below.

b. Complete the state matrix, S1 , below to show the number of visitors expected at each location at 11 am on
Saturday.

[1 mark (0.9)]

c. Of the 300 visitors expected at Ground World (G) at 11 am, what percentage was at either Air World (A)
or Food World (F ) at 10 am?

[1 mark (0.3)]

d. The proportion of visitors moving from one location to another each hour on Sunday is different from
Saturday.

Matrix V , below, shows the proportion of visitors moving from one location to another each hour after 10 am
on Sunday.
 this hour
A F G W
0.3 0.4 0.6 0.3 A
0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 F
V = next hours
0.1 0.2 0.2 0.1 G
0.5 0.2 0.1 0.4 W

Matrix V is similar to matrix T but has the first two rows of matrix T interchanged.

The matrix product that will generate matrix V from matrix T is V = M × T where matrix M is a
binary matrix.

Write down matrix M .

[1 mark (0.2)]

Solution

a. From the matrix S0 , 400 visitors out of a total of 2000 visitors are at Water World (W ) at 10 am on
Saturday. The percentage that this represents can be calculated as follows:
400
%Visitors at W = 2000 × 100%
= 20%
b. The number of visitors at each location at 11 am on Saturday can be found using the following formula:

S n+1 = T × Sn
S1 = T × S0
0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 600
0.3 0.4 0.6 0.3 600
S1 =
0.1 0.2 0.2 0.1 400
0.5 0.2 0.1 0.4 400
300
780
S1 =
300
620

c. Reading from the transition matrix: 10% (0.1) of the 600 visitors at A at 10 am change to location G at
11 am. So the number that make this change is: 10% of 600 = 60.

As well as this, 20% (0.2) of the 600 visitors at F at 10 am change to location G at 11 am.
So the number that make this change is: 20% of 600 = 120.

This makes a total of 60 + 120 = 180 visitors out of the 300 expected at G at 11 am that had come from
either A or F at 10 am.

As a percentage, this is:

180
% Visitors from A or F = 300 × 100%
= 60%

d. The binary matrix M consists of 1’s and 0’s alone. If the matrix product V was to remain unchanged,
the binary matrix M would be the same as 4 by 4 the identity matrix:

1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0
I4 =
0 0 1 0
0 0 0 1

However, to swap the first and second rows of matrix T , the 1’s in rows 1 and 2 of I4 must be changed so
that:

0 1 0 0
1 0 0 0
M=
0 0 1 0
0 0 0 1

Question 7/ 267

[VCAA 2019 FM]

On Sunday, matrix V is used when calculating the expected number of visitors at each location every hour
after 10 am. It is assumed that the park will be at its capacity of 2000 visitors for all of Sunday.

Let L0 be the state matrix that shows the number of visitors at each location at 10 am on Sunday.

The number of visitors expected at each location at 11 am on Sunday can be determined by the matrix
product
a. Safety restrictions require that all four locations have a maximum of 600 visitors.

Which location is expected to have more than 600 visitors at 11 am on Sunday?

[1 mark (0.8)]

b. Whenever more than 600 visitors are expected to be at a location on Sunday, the first 600 visitors can stay
at that location and all others will be moved directly to Ground World (G).

State matrix Rn contains the number of visitors at each location n hours after 10 am on Sunday, after the
safety restrictions have been enforced.

Matrix R1 can be determined from the matrix recurrence relation

500 A
600 F
R0 = , R1 = V × R0 + B 1
500 G
400 W

where matrix B1 shows the required movement of visitors at 11 am.

i. Determine the matrix B1 .

[1 mark (0.3)]

ii. State matrix R2 can be determined from the new matrix rule

R2 = V R1 + B2

where matrix B2 shows the required movement of visitors at 12 noon.

Determine the state matrix R2 .

[1 mark (0.1)]

Solution
a. From the matrix product:

L1 = V × L0
0.3 0.4 0.6 0.3 500
0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 600
=
0.1 0.2 0.2 0.1 500
0.5 0.2 0.1 0.4 400
810 A
300 F
=
310 G
580 W

Only location A (Air World), with 810 visitors, has more than the safety restrictions permit.

b. i. To find B1 , we require that 210 be subtracted from the number of visitors who show up at A, and
move these to location G.

Now we can find B1 :

−210 A
0 F
B1 =
210 G
0 W

ii. To find R2 , first R1 must be found:

R1 = V × R0 + B 1
0.3 0.4 0.6 0.3 500 −210
0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 600 0
= +
0.1 0.2 0.2 0.1 500 210
0.5 0.2 0.1 0.4 400 0
600 A
300 F
=
520 G
580 W

Now that R1 is known, the product V × R1 can be found:

 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.3 600
0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 300
V × R1 =
0.1 0.2 0.2 0.1 520
0.5 0.2 0.1 0.4 580
786 A
288 F
=
282 G
644 W

There are 186 too many at A and 44 too many at W , so this means transferring 186 + 44 = 230 to G
giving 512 at G.

So now R2 can be calculated:

R2 = V × R1 + B 2
0.3 0.4 0.6 0.3 600 −186
0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 300 0
= +
0.1 0.2 0.2 0.1 520 230
0.5 0.2 0.1 0.4 580 −44
600 A
288 F
=
512 G
600 W

Question 8/ 267

[VCAA 2020 FM]

The three major shopping centres in a large city, Eastmall (E ), Grandmall (G) and Westmall (W ), are
owned by the same company.

The total number of shoppers at each of the centres at 1.00 pm on a typical day is shown in matrix V .

E G W
V = [2300 2700 2200]

a. Write down the order of matrix V .

[1 mark (1.0)]
Each of these centres has three major shopping areas: food (F ), clothing (C ) and merchandise (M ).

The proportion of shoppers in each of these three areas at 1.00 pm on a typical day is the same at all three
centres and is given in matrix P below.

0.48 F
P = 0.27 C
0.25 M
b. Grandmall’s management would like to see 700 shoppers in its merchandise area at 1.00 pm.

If this were to happen, how many shoppers, in total, would be at Grandmall at this time?

[1 mark (0.5)]

c. The matrix Q = P × V is shown below. Two of the elements of this matrix are missing.

i. Complete matrix Q above by filling in the missing elements.

(Answer on matrix Q above.)

[1 mark (0.9)]

ii. The element in row i and column j of matrix Q is qij .

What does the element q23 represent?

[1 mark (0.7)]

The average daily amount spent, in dollars. by each shopper in each of the three areas at Grandmall in 2019 is
shown in matrix A2019 below.

21.30 F
A2019 = 34.00 C
14.70 M
On one particular day, 135 shoppers spent the average daily amount on food, 143 shoppers spent the average
daily amount on clothing and 131 shoppers spent the average daily amount on merchandise.

d. Write a matrix calculation, using matrix A2019 , showing that the total amount spent by all these shoppers
is $9663.20.

[1 mark (0.6)]
e. In 2020, the average daily amount spent by each shopper was expected to change by the percentage shown
in the table below.

Area food clothing merchandise

Expected change increase by 5% decrease by 15% decrease by 1 %

The average daily amount, in dollars, expected to be spent in each area in 2020 can be determined by forming
the matrix product

A2020 = K × A2019

Write down matrix K .

[1 mark (0.2)]

Solution

a. Matrix V is of order 1 by 3 (one row and three columns).

b. Let the total number of shoppers at the Grandmall be x.

25% of x = 700
0.25x = 700
700
x = 0.25
= 2800
So there would be 2800 shoppers in total at Grandmall.

c. i. Matrix Q can be calculated as follows:

The missing elements have been shown in the matrix above.

ii. The element q23 is the element in row 2 and column 3 of matrix Q. This represents the number of
shoppers (594) in the clothing area at Westmall at 1 pm.

d. The appropriate calculation is:

F C M
[135 143 131] × A2019
21.30 F
= [135 143 131] × 34.00 C
14.70 M
= [9663.20]

e. A diagonal matrix K is required to calculate A2020 . From the table of expected change, this matrix is
given by:

1.05 0 0
K= 0 0.85 0
0 0 0.99

Question 9/ 267

[VCAA 2020 FM]

An offer to buy the Westmall shopping centre was made by a competitor.

One market research project suggested that if the Westmall shopping centre were sold, each of the three
centres (Westmall, Grandmall and Eastmall) would continue to have regular shoppers but would attract and
lose shoppers on a weekly basis.

Let Sn be the state matrix that shows the expected number of shoppers at each of the three centres n weeks
after Westmall is sold.

A matrix recurrence relation that generates values of Sn is

a. Calculate the state matrix, S1 , to show the expected number of shoppers at each of the three centres one
week after Westmall is sold.

[1 mark (0.8)]

Using values from the recurrence relation on page 160, the graph below shows the expected number of
shoppers at Westmall, Grandmall and Eastmall for each of the 10 weeks after Westmall is sold.
b. What is the difference in the expected weekly number of shoppers at Westmall from the time Westmall is
sold to 10 weeks after Westmall is sold?

Give your answer correct to the nearest thousand.

[1 mark (0.6)]

c. Grandmall is expected to achieve its maximum number of shoppers sometime between the fourth and the
tenth week after Westmall is sold.

Write down the week number in which this is expected to occur.

[1 mark (0.3)]

d. In the long term, what is the expected weekly number of shoppers at Westmall? Round your answer to the
nearest whole number.

[1 mark (0.4)]

Solution

a. Use the matrix equation S1 = T × S0 :

0.80 0.09 0.10 250 000

S1 = 0.12 0.79 0.10 × 230 000
0.08 0.12 0.80 200 000
240 700 W
= 231 700 G
207 600 E

b. Reading from the graph of Westmall for 0 weeks and 10 weeks gives a difference of 250 000 −
220 000 = 30 000. (A more accurate value may be possible by using the rule Sn = T n × S0 .)

c. The number of shoppers expected at Grandmall each week can be calculated by using Sn = T n × S0
and reading the element in the second row of the resulting state matrix. Using this method, the following
results are obtained:

Week 5: Grandmall shoppers = 233 660

Week 6: Grandmall shoppers = 233 708

Week 7: Grandmall shoppers = 233 710

Week 8: Grandmall shoppers = 233 688

So the maximum occurs in week 7.

d. The long term values can be found by applying a large number of transitions, for example 100 weeks:
100
0.80 0.09 0.10 250 000
S1 = 0.12 0.79 0.10 × 230 000
0.08 0.12 0.80 200 000
218 884.12 … W
= 233 476.39 … G
227 639.48 … E
In the long term, the number of expected shoppers at Westmall is approximately 218 884.

Question 10/ 267

[VCAA 2020 FM]

A second market research project also suggested that if the Westmall shopping centre were sold, each of the
three centres (Westmall, Grandmall and Eastmall) would continue to have regular shoppers but would attract
and lose shoppers on a weekly basis. Let Rn be the state matrix that shows the expected number of shoppers
at each of the three centres n weeks after Westmall is sold.

A matrix recurrence relation that generates values of Rn is Rn+1 = T Rn + B , where

The matrix R2 is the state matrix that shows the expected number of shoppers at each of the three centres in
the second week after Westmall is sold.

239 060 W
R2 = 250 840 G
192 900 E
a. Determine the expected number of shoppers at Westmall in the third week after it is sold.

[1 mark (0.5)]

b. Determine the expected number of shoppers at Westmall in the first week after it is sold.
[1 mark (0.2)]

Solution

a. Using the matrix recurrence relation provided:

R3 = T × R2 + B
0.78 0.13 0.10 239 060 −400
= 0.12 0.82 0.10 × 250 840 + 700
0.10 0.05 0.80 192 900 500
237 966 W
= 254 366 G
191 268 E
Approximately 237 966 shoppers are expected at Westmall in the third week after it is sold.

b. The number of shoppers expected at Westmall in the first week after it is sold can be found using the
following:

R2 = T × R1 + B
T × R1 = R2 − B
−1 −1
T × (T × R1 ) = T × ( R2 − B )
(T −1 × T ) × R1 = T −1 × (R2 − B )
R1 = T −1 × (R2 − B )

The value of R1 can now be calculated as follows:

239 060 −400

R2 − B = 250 840 − 700
192 900 500
239 460
= 250 140
192 400
R1 = T −1 × (R2 − B)
−1
0.78 0.13 0.10 239 460
= 0.12 0.82 0.10 × 250 140
0.10 0.05 0.80 192 400
241 000 W
= 246 000 G
195 000 E
Approximately 241 000 shoppers are expected at Westmall in the first week after it is sold.

Question 11/ 267

[VCAA 2021 FM]

Elena imports three brands of olive oil: Carmani (C ), Linelli (L) and Ghana (O ).

The number of 1 litre bottles of these oils sold in January 2021 is shown in matrix J below.

2800 C
J = 1700 L
2400 O

a. What is the order of matrix J ?

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. Elena expected that in February 2021 the sales of all three brands of olive oil would increase by 5%. She
multiplied matrix J by a scalar value, k , to determine the expected volume of sales for February. Write down
the value of the scalar k .

[1 mark (0.5)]

Solution

a. Matrix J is of order 3 by 1 (three rows and one column).

b. An increase of 5% means that the new sales will be 100% + 5% = 105% of the old sales. So k =
1.05.

Question 12/ 267

[VCAA 2021 FM]

The main computer system in Elena’s office has broken down.

The five staff members, Alex (A), Brie (B ), Chai (C ), Dex (D ) and Elena (E ), are having problems
sending information to each other.

Matrix M below shows the available communication links between the staff members.

In this matrix:

• the ‘1’ in row A, column B indicates that Alex can send information to Brie

• the ‘0’ in row D , column C indicates that Dex cannot information to Chai.

a. Which two staff members can send information directly to each other?

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. Elena needs to send documents to Chai.

What is the sequence of communication links that will successfully get the information from Elena to Chai?

[1 mark (0.9)]

c. Matrix M 2 below is the square of matrix M and shows the number of two-step communication links
between each pair of staff members.
Only one pair of individuals has two different two-step communication links. List each two-step
communication link for this pair.

[1 mark (0.2)]

Solution

a. Inspecting the communication matrix M , there is a ‘1’ in row B , column D and also a ‘1’ in row D ,
column B . So Brie and Dex are the only two staff members that can send information directly to each other.

b. For Elena to send documents to Chai, she must first send them to Dex, who can send them to Brie, who
can send them to Chai. In shorthand, this can be written as: E → D → B → C .

c. From the matrix M 2 , A has two different 2-step communication links with D . Observing matrix M ,
these are: A → B → D and A → E → D.

Question 13/ 267

[VCAA 2021 FM]

A market research study of shoppers showed that the buying preferences for the three olive oils, Carmani (C
), Linelli (L) and Ohana (O ), change from month to month according to the transition matrix T below.
The initial state matrix S0 below shows the number of shoppers who bought each brand of olive oil in July
2021.

3200 C
S 0 = 2000 L
2800 O

Let Sn represent the state matrix describing the number of shoppers buying each brand n months after July
2021.

a. How many of these 8000 shoppers bought a different brand of olive oil in August 2021 from the brand
bought in July 2021?

[1 mark (0.3)]

b. Using the rule Sn+1 = T × Sn , complete the matrix S1 below.

[1 mark (0.8)]

c. Consider the shoppers who were expected to buy Carmani olive oil in August 2021. What percentage of
these shoppers also bought Carmani olive oil in July 2021? Round your answer to the nearest percentage.

[1 mark (0.2)]

d. Write a calculation that shows that Ohana olive oil is the brand bought by 50% of these shoppers in the
long run.

[1 mark (0.2]

e. Further research suggests more shoppers will buy olive oil in the coming months. A rule to model this
situation is Rn+1 = T × Rn + B , where Rn represents the state matrix describing the number of
shoppers n months after July 2021.
k represents the extra number of shoppers expected to buy Ohana olive oil each month.

3333
If R2 = 2025 what is the value of k ?
3642
[1 mark (0.2)]

Solution

a. From the transition matrix T , we can determine how many shoppers bought the same brand of olive oil
in August 2021 to the brand they bought in July 2021.

• 85% of the 3200 shoppers who bought Carmani in July 2021 also bought it in August 2021.

• 80% of the 2000 shoppers who bought Linelli in July 2021 also bought it in August 2021.

• 90% of the 2800 shoppers who bought Ohana in July 2021 also bought it in August 2021.

So the total number of shoppers who bought the same oil in August 2021 is: 85% × 3200 + 80% ×
2000 + 90% × 2800

= 6840 shoppers.

Therefore the number of shoppers who bought a different brand in August 2021 is 8000 − 6840 = 1160
shoppers.

b. Using the calculator to assist,

3060 C
S 1 = T × S 0 = 1900 L
3040 O
c. From the transition matrix, we know that 85% of the shoppers who bought Carmani in July 2021 also
bought it in August 2021, so that means 85% × 3200 = 2720 shoppers.
As a percentage of the 3060 shoppers who bought Carmani in August 2021, that is 2720
3060 × 100% =
88.88 … ≈ 89%.

d. Choosing a large value of months (say n = 100), it can be shown that in the long run that the number
of the 8000 shoppers who buy Ohana olive oil each month converges to 4000.

2400 C
100
S 100 = T × S 0 ≈ 1600 L
4000 O

Checking S101 confirms that S100 ≈ S101 .

So in the long run, we expect that Ohana olive oil brand is bought by 4000
8000 × 100% = 50% of these
shoppers.

e. The value of k can be found as follows using the matrix calculation and recursion features of the
calculator.

Rn+1 = T × Rn + B , so

3260
R1 = T × R0 + B = 2000
k + 3040
0.05k + 3323
R2 = T × R1 + B = 0.05k + 2015
1.9k + 3262

3333
Since we are told that R2 = 2025 , this means we can state that
3642

0.05k + 3323 3333

0.05k + 2015 = 2025
1.9k + 3262 3642

0.05k + 3323 = 3333

0.05k = 10
k = 200
Question 14/ 267

[VCAA 2021 FM]

Five staff members in Elena’s office played a round-robin video game tournament, where each employee
played each of the other employees once. In each game there was a winner and a loser.

A table of their one-step and two-step dominances was prepared to summarise the results.

Staff member One-step dominance Two-step dominance

Ike (I ) 3 5

Joelene (J ) 3 4

Katie (K ) 1 1

Leslie (L) 1 2

Mikki (M ) 2 4

Consider the results matrix shown below.

A ‘1’ in this matrix shows that the player named in that row defeated the player named in that column.

A ‘0’ in this matrix shows that the player named in that row lost to the player named in that column.

Use all of the information provided to complete the results matrix.

[2 marks (0.4)]

Solution
The information in the results matrix provided can also be displayed in a directed graph, with the arrow
direction flowing from the winner to the loser of each game.

For instance, the ‘0’s and ‘1’s in the matrix can be displayed as:

I→K

J →K

M →K

K→L
In the following graph, the known results have been displayed as these directional arrows, and the unknown
results as undirected dashed line segments.

From the one-step and two-step dominance table, K only has a single two-step dominance, so one of the
following results is possible:

L→I

L→J

L→M
Considering each of these three in turn, a completed digraph can be constructed, considering the correct
number of one-step dominances required.

If L → I then :

I → J and I → M

J → L and J → M
M →L

This graph is correct for all one-step dominances, but it is not correct for all the two-step dominances, since
for example M has only 2 two-step dominances (it should have 4).

If L → J then :

J → I and J → M

I → L and I → M

M →L

This graph is correct for all one-step dominances, but it is not correct for all the two-step dominances, since
for example M has only 2 two-step dominances (it should have 4).

So both L → I and L → J can be disregarded as possibilities, and so we expect that L → M will be

correct.

If L → M then :
I→L

J →L
This creates two possible options:

Option 1: If L → M and M → J then: J → I and I → M

This graph is correct for all one-step dominances, but it is not correct for all the two-step dominances, since
for example I has only 4 two-step dominances (it should have 5).

Option 2: If L → M and J → M then: M → I and I → J

This graph is correct for all one-step and two-step dominances!

Finally, this graph can be converted into the correct results matrix.
 I J K L M
I 0 1 1 1 0
J 0 0 1 1 1
K 0 0 0 1 0
L 0 0 0 0 1
M 1 0 1 0 0

Alternatively, after it is shown that L must dominate M , list the two possible matrices and square them to
see which gives the correct two-step dominances.

Question 15/ 267

The following table represents a study of a particular population of marsupials, which has been divided into
four age groups. The table gives the birth rate, survival rate and the initial population for each age group.

Age group (years) Birth rate Survival rate Number of females (in 2022)
0 0 0.90 520
1 0.55 0.85 2130
2 0.50 0.50 960
3 0.45 0 70

a. Construct a Leslie matrix for the marsupial population.

b. Use the Leslie matrix to predict the marsupial population in 2030.

c. Estimate the long-term annual growth rate of the population, expressing your answer as a percentage
correct to 1 decimal place.

Solution

a. The relevant Leslie matrix places the values of the birth rate for each of the age groups in the top row,
and the survival rates of each of the age groups below the leading diagonal as shown below.
b. The year 2030 is 8 years on from 2022, therefore:

1565.57 …
1391.71 …
S 8 = L8 × S 0 =
1138.78 …
585.03 …
So the marsupial number in 2030 is predicted to be:

1565.57. + 1391.71. + 1138.78. + 585.03.

= 4681.11.

≈ 4681 marsupials.

Alternatively, the answer can be obtained by pre-multiplying S8 by a row matrix as follows:

[1 1 1 1] × S8 = [4681.11 …]
c. To find whether the annual increase in numbers of each age group stabilises, calculate successive state
matrices after a large number of years (for example in 20 and 21 years).

1945.86 …
1720.01 …
S 20 = L20 × S 0 =
1435.88 …
705.14 ……
1981.26 …
1751.28 …
S 21 = L21 × S 0 =
1462.01 …
717.94 ……
The ratio between corresponding numbers of marsupials of each age group in 20 years and 21 years can be
calculated.
1981.26… 1751.28…
1945.86… = 1720.01… = 1462.01…
1435.88… =
717.94…
705.14…
≈ 1.018
This suggests that the age-group proportions have stabilised by the 20th year, with an annual increase in
marsupial numbers of about 1.8%.

Question 16/ 267

[VCAA 2022 FM]

Matrix C shows the nightly cost, in dollars, of three types of family accommodation at a ski resort: hostel (
H ), motel (M ) and apartment (A).

H M A
C = [80 140 270]
The Dwyer family is planning to stay at the ski resort for five nights.

a. Complete the matrix equation below to show the cost of staying at each type of accommodation for five
nights.

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. The family has decided to stay at the motel for two nights and in an apartment for three nights.

Write down the column matrix A for which the product matrix CA gives the total accommodation cost for
the five nights.

[1 mark (0.6)]

Solution

a. The cost of staying in each type of accommodation for 5 nights is given by the matrix 5C which, in this
case, is the same as [5] × C since C is a row matrix.

[5] × [lll80 140 270] = [lll400 700 1350]

b. For two nights in a motel and three nights in an apartment the total accommodation cost is given by
140 × 2 + 270 × 3.
0
[80 140 270] 2 = [80 × 0 + 140 × 2 + 270 × 3]
3
0
CA = [80 140 270] × 2
3
0
A= 2
3

Question 17/ 267

[VCAA 2022 FM]

Students from a nearby school spend one school term skiing at the resort. One year, the school term begins on
16 July and ends on 22 September. The resort has three different types of ski runs, each of which is classified
as beginner (B ), intermediate (I) or advanced (A). Each day, the students use one of the three types of ski
runs.

Matrix T below contains the proportion of students who are expected to change their choice of ski run from
day to day.

Let Sn be the matrix that shows the number of students who choose each type of ski run n days after 16 July.

Matrix S0 below shows the number of skiers who chose each type of ski run on 16 July.

210 B
S 0 = 190 I
80 A
a. How many skiers are expected to choose the same ski run on 17 July?
[1 mark (0.6)]

b. Consider the skiers who are expected to choose the advanced ski run on 17 July.

What percentage of these skiers also chose the advanced ski run on 16 July?

Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

[1 mark (0.3)]

c. What is the maximum number of students expected to ski the intermediate ski run on any one day? Round
your answer to the nearest whole number.

[1 mark (0.2)]

Solution

a. Consider the leading diagonal in the transition matrix. The elements on this diagonal give the proportion
of skiers expected to choose the same run from one day to the next. From B to B this is 0.7, from I to I this
is 0.7 and from A to A this is 0.8.

On 16 July 210 skiers choose run B , 190 skiers choose run I and 80 skiers choose run A.

The number of skiers who are expected to choose the same run on 17 July is 0.7 × 210 + 0.7 × 190 +
0.8 × 80 = 344.
b.

S1 = T × S0
166 B
= 212 I
102 A
On 17 July 102 are expected to do the advanced run. The number of these skiers who did the advanced run on
16 July is 0.8 × 80 = 64.
64
As a percentage correct to the nearest whole number this is 102 × 100% = 63%.
c.
 166 B
S1 = T × S0 = 212 I
102 A
137 B
S2 = T 2 × S0 = 219 I
124 A
118 B
S3 = T 3 × S0 = 219 I
142 A
104 B
S4 = T 4 × S0 = 217 I
158 A
The expected number of skiers on the intermediate run increases from 212 to 219 then starts to decrease again
so the maximum number of skiers on this run is 219.

Question 18/ 267

[VCAA 2022 FM]

At the end of the school term, the students vote for who they want to captain the ski team for the next ski
season. Three students – Ali, Lee and Max – have been nominated for captain.

Seven days before the end of the school term, the students were asked who they planned to vote for.

The following table shows each candidate and the number of students who plan to vote for each candidate at
the start of the seven days.

Candidate Number of people who plan to vote for the candidate

Ali 160
Lee 140
Max 180

Each day all students are asked who they plan to vote for.

It is expected that students may change the candidate they plan to vote for each day over the seven days as
follows. Some percentages are missing.
• 40% of students who plan to vote for Ali one day will plan to vote for Ali the next day.

• 30% of students who plan to vote for Ali one day will plan to vote for Lee the next day.

• 50% of students who plan to vote for Lee one day will plan to vote for Lee the next day.

• 30% of students who plan to vote for Lee one day will plan to vote for Max the next day.

• 50% of students who plan to vote for Max one day will plan to vote for Max the next day.

• 20% of students who plan to vote for Max one day will plan to vote for Lee the next day.

a. How many students plan to vote for Ali after one day?

[1 mark (0.3)]

b. Max decides to withdraw his nomination after one day.

Matrix T below shows the proportion of students who change their preferred candidate from one day to the
next for the remaining six days after Max withdraws his nomination.

At the end of the seven days, who is expected to become captain of the ski team and how many votes will this
person receive?

Round your answer to the nearest whole number.

[2 marks (0.8)]

Solution

a. The information in the table gives the initial state matrix.

160 A
S 0 = 140 L
180 M
Now interpret the information given to for a transition matrix.

40% of students who plan to vote for Ali one day will plan to vote for Ali the next day. 30% of students who
plan to vote for Ali one day will plan to vote for Lee the next day which means that 30% of students who
plan to vote for Ali one day will plan to vote for Max the next day.

50% of students who plan to vote for Lee one day will plan to vote for Lee the next day. 30% of students who
plan to vote for Lee one day will plan to vote for Max the next day which means that 20% of students who
plan to vote for Lee one day will plan to vote for Ali the next day.

50% of students who plan to vote for Max one day will plan to vote for Max the next day. 20% of students
who plan to vote for Max one day will plan to vote for Lee the next day which means that 30% of students
who plan to vote for Max one day will plan to vote for Ali the next day.

S1 gives the number of students who plan to vote for each candidate after one day.

S1 = T × S0
146 A
= 154 L
180 M
146 candidates plan to vote for Ali after one day.
b. There are 6 transitions left for the remaining six days. Use the new transition matrix.

Ali is expected to become captain of the ski team with 280 votes.

Question 1/ 286

[VCAA 2018 FM]

The graph below shows the possible number of postal deliveries each day between the Central Mail Depot
and the Zenith Post Office.

The unmarked vertices represent other depots in the region.

The weighting of each edge represents the maximum number of deliveries that can be made each day.
a. Cut A, shown on the graph, has a capacity of 10.

Two other cuts are labelled as Cut B and Cut C.

i. Write down the capacity of Cut B.

[1 mark (0.9)]

ii. Write down the capacity of Cut C.

[1 mark (0.8)]

b. Determine the maximum number of deliveries that can be made each day from the Central Mail Depot to
the Zenith Post Office.

[1 mark (0.3)]

Solution

a. i. The capacity of Cut B is 3 + 2 + 4 = 9.

ii. The capacity of Cut C is 3 + 6 + 4 = 13. Note that we do not include the 1 in the capacity of this
cut as this directed edge crosses the cut from sink to source.

b. The maximum flow can be determined from the minimum cut. The minimum cut for this network is
shown on the diagram below.
The capacity of this cut is 3 + 2 + 2 = 7. It follows that the maximum number of deliveries that can be
made each day from the Central Mail Depot to the Zenith Post Office is 7.

Question 2/ 286

[VCAA 2018 FM]

In one area of the town of Zenith, a postal worker delivers mail to 10 houses labelled as vertices A to J on
the graph below.

a. Which one of the vertices on the graph has degree 4?

[1 mark (1.0)]

For this graph, an Eulerian trail does not currently exist.

b. For an Eulerian trail to exist, what is the minimum number of extra edges that the graph would require?
[1 mark (0.6)]

c. The postal worker has delivered the mail at F and will continue her deliveries by following a Hamiltonian
path from F . Draw in a possible Hamiltonian path for the postal worker on the diagram below.

[1 mark (0.6)]

Solution

a. There are 4 edges that connect vertex F to other vertices therefore vertex F has degree 4.

b. An Eulerian trail uses every edge in the graph exactly once starting and ending at different vertices. For
an Eulerian trail to exist the graph can only have two vertices of odd degree. The vertices with odd degree are
A, B , D, E , G and I .
Adding two edges that join two pairs of the vertices of odd degree will result in an Eulerian trail existing.

An example of this is given below where edges A-B and E-I are added.
By adding these two edges only vertices D and G have odd degree.

c. A Hamiltonian path passes through each vertex in the graph exactly once.

Two examples of Hamiltonian paths are given below.

Question 3/ 286

[VCAA 2018 FM]

At the Zenith Post Office all computer systems are to be upgraded.

This project involves 10 activities, A to J .

The directed network below shows these activities and their completion times, in hours.

a. Determine the earliest starting time, in hours, for activity I .

[1 mark (0.7)]

b. The minimum completion time for the project is 15 hours. Write down the critical path.

[1 mark (0.8)]

c. Two of the activities have a float time of two hours. Write down these two activities.

[1 mark (0.5)]

d. For the next upgrade, the same project will be repeated but one extra activity will be added.

This activity has a duration of one hour, an earliest starting time of five hours and a latest starting time of 12
hours.

Complete the following sentence by filling in the boxes provided.

[1 mark (0.3)]

The extra activity could be represented on the network above by a directed edge from the end of activity

to the start of activity

Solution

a. Activities A, B , C , D , E , F and G must all be completed before activity I can commence.

A-C-F : 3 + 4 + 1 = 8 hours

B-D-F : 2 + 6 + 1 = 9 hours

B-E-G : 2 + 3 + 5 = 10 hours

The EST for activity I is 10 hours.

b. Given that the minimum start time for activities H and I is 10 hours, and the project completion time is
15 hours, the critical path must be B -E -G-H -J .

c. The table below gives the EST and LST of each activity.

Activity EST LST

A 0 2

B 0 0

C 3 5

D 2 2

E 2 2

F 8 9

G 5 5

H 10 10

I 10 11

J 13 13

The activities with a float time of 2 hours are A and C since in each case the LST is 2 hours later than the
EST.

d. The extra activity could be represented on the network by a directed edge from the end of activity E to
the start of activity J . Any activity immediately following activity E will have an EST of 5 hours. Since this
activity has a duration of 1 hour and a latest start time of 12 hours it must occur immediately prior to activity
J which has an EST of 13 hours.

Question 4/ 286

[VCAA 2018 FM]

Parcel deliveries are made between five nearby towns, P to T .

The roads connecting these five towns are shown on the graph below. The distances, in kilometres, are also
shown.

A road inspector will leave from town P to check all the roads and return to town P when the inspection is
complete. He will travel the minimum distance possible.

a. How many roads will the inspector have to travel on more than once?

[1 mark (0.3)]

b. Determine the minimum distance, in kilometres, that the inspector will travel.

[1 mark (0.2)]

Solution
a. To travel on all roads exactly once starting and ending at vertex P requires the inspector to complete an
Eulerian circuit. For an Eulerian circuit to exist, all vertices must have even degree. Vertices P , Q, T and S
have odd degree. He will need to travel between two of P and Q, P and S , Q and T or S and T twice and
therefore he will have to travel on two roads more than once.

b. To travel the minimum possible distance he will travel twice along P -Q and twice along S -T as these
are the two shorter roads.

The minimum distance in kilometres is

2 × 10 + 20 + 2 × 12 + 8 + 7 + 6 + 9 + 14 = 108.

Question 5/ 286

[VCAA 2019 FM]

Fencedale High School has six buildings. The network below shows these buildings represented by vertices.
The edges of the network represent the paths between the buildings.

a. Which building in the school can be reached directly from all other buildings?

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. A school tour is to start and finish at the office, visiting each building only once.

i. What is the mathematical term for this route?

[1 mark (0.7)]
ii. Draw in a possible route for this school tour on the diagram below.

[1 mark (1.0)]

Solution

a. The office has an edge connecting it directly to every other vertex in the network so the office can be
reached directly from all other buildings.

b. i. A Hamiltonian circuit visits every vertex in the graph exactly once starting and ending at the same
vertex. A school tour that starts and ends at the office visiting each building (vertex) only once is a
Hamiltonian circuit.

ii. A possible route for the school tour is drawn on the diagram below (o-sl-mc-l-cr-g-o or the reverse).

Note that the given solution is not the only one possible.
Question 6/ 286

[VCAA 2019 FM]

Fencedale High School offers students a choice of four sports, football, tennis, athletics and basketball.

The bipartite graph below illustrates the sports that each student can play.

Each student will be allocated to only one sport.

a. Complete the table below by allocating the appropriate sport to each student.

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. The school medley relay team consists of four students, Anita, Imani, Jordan and Lola.
Student Sport
Blake
Charli
Huan
Marco

b. The school medley relay team consists of four students, Anita, Imani, Jordan and Lola.

The medley relay race is a combination of four different sprinting distances: 100 m, 200 m, 300 m and 400
m, run in that order.

The following table shows the best time, in seconds, for each student for each sprinting distance.

Best time for each sprinting distance (seconds)

Student 100 m 200 m 300 m 400 m
Anita 13.3 29.6 61.8 87.1
Imani 14.5 29.6 63.5 88.9
Jordan 13.3 29.3 63.6 89.1
Lola 15.2 29.2 61.6 87.9

The school will allocate each student to one sprinting distance in order to minimise the total time taken to
complete the race. To which distance should each student be allocated?

Write your answers in the table below.

[2 marks (1.3)]

Student Sprinting distance (m)

Anita
lmani
Jordan
Lola

Solution
a. Marco must be allocated athletics which means Huan must be allocated basketball, then Blake has to be
allocated tennis leaving Charli allocated with football.

Student Sport
Blake tennis
Charli football
Huan basketball
Marco athletics

b. To determine the distance each student should be allocated in order to minimise the total time taken to
complete the race follow these steps.

13.3 29.6 61.8 87.1

14.5 29.6 63.5 88.9
13.3 29.3 63.6 89.1
15.2 29.2 61.6 87.9

Subtract the minimum entry from each row from every entry in that row.

An allocation is not possible at this stage since the zeros can be covered with 1 line. Continue with column
reduction.

Find the minimum for each column that does not already contain a 0. Subtract the minimum entry from each
column from every entry in that column.
It now takes 2 lines to cover the zeros so it is not possible to make an allocation. 1.1 is the smallest uncovered
value. Add this to the values covered by 2 lines and subtract this from any uncovered value.

Now 4 lines are required to cover all zeros so it is possible to make an allocation.

Jordan is allocated the 100 m, this means that Imani must be allocated the 200m and Anita the 400 m leaving
Lola allocated the 300 m.

Student Sprinting distance (m)

Anita 400 m
Imani 200 m
Jordan 100 m
Lola 300 m

Question 7/ 286

[VCAA 2019 FM]

Fencedale High School is planning to renovate its gymnasium.

This project involves 12 activities, A to L.

The directed network below shows these activities and their completion times, in weeks.
The minimum completion time for the project is 35 weeks.

a. How many activities are on the critical path?

[1 mark (0.6)]

b. Determine the latest start time of activity E .

[1 mark (0.5)]

c. Which activity has the longest float time?

[1 mark (0.5)]

It is possible to reduce the completion time for activities C , D , G, H and K by employing more workers.

d. The completion time for each of these five activities can be reduced by a maximum of two weeks.

What is the minimum time, in weeks, that the renovation project could take?

[1 mark (0.3)]

e. The reduction in completion time for each of these five activities will incur an additional cost to the school.

The table below shows the five activities that can have their completion times reduced and the associated
weekly cost, in dollars.

Activity Weekly cost ($)

C 3000

D 2000

G 2500

H 1000

K 4000

The completion time for each of these five activities can be reduced by a maximum of two weeks.

Fencedale High School requires the overall completion time for the renovation project to be reduced by four
weeks at minimum cost.
Complete the table below, showing the reductions in individual activity completion times that would achieve
this.

Activity Reduction in completion time (0, 1 or 2 weeks)

C
D
G
H
K

[2 marks (0.2)]

Solution

a. The minimum completion time for this project is 35 weeks. Therefore, the critical path must be

A-B-D-F -G-I-K-L. There are 8 activities on the critical path.

b. The LST for activity E is found by subtracting 3 from the LST of activity F . Since F is on the critical
path, it has EST = LST so the LST for activity F is 15. For activity E, LST = 15 − 3 = 12.
c. Only activities which are not on the critical path will have float times. The ESTs and LSTs and float
times for the activities not on the critical path are listed below.

Activity EST LST Float time (weeks)

C 6 7 1

E 11 12 1

H 16 17 1

J 20 25 5

The activity with the longest float time is activity J .

d. The following reductions can be made to reduce the overall completion time by the maximum number of
weeks.

Activity D − 2 weeks

Activity C − 1 week

Activity G − 2 weeks

Activity H − 1 week

Activity K − 2 weeks
This results in an overall reduction in the minimum completion time of 6 weeks so the minimum time, in
weeks, that the renovation project could take is 35 − 6 = 29 weeks.

e. The completion time activity D can be reduced by 1 week without needing to reduce the completion
time for activity C . This reduces the minimum completion time by 1 week. (Reducing both of these activities
by a further hour to reduce the overall completion time by 1 more hour would cost $5000 which is more
costly than reducing activity K by 1 hour). Similarly, the completion time activity G can be reduced by 1
week without needing to reduce the completion time for activity H . This reduces the minimum completion
time by another 1 week. Activity K can then be reduced by 2 weeks and this will reduce the overall
completion time of the project by 4 weeks.

Activity Reduction in completion time (0, 1 or 2 weeks)

C 0

D 1

G 1

H 0

K 2

Whilst this involves the least number of reductions it is important to consider the cost. The total cost for this
would be $12 500.

However, reducing activity G by 1 hour and activity H by 1 hour is less costly than reducing activity K by
1 hour so the overall completion time could be reduced by 4 hours for less cost by doing the following.

Activity Reduction in completion time (0, 1 or 2 weeks)

C 0
Activity Reduction in completion time (0, 1 or 2 weeks)

D 1

G 2

H 1

K 1

The total cost for this would be $12 000 which is a lower cost than the previous option.

Question 8/ 286

[VCAA 2020 FM]

The Sunny Coast Cricket Club has five new players join its team: Alex, Bo, Cameron, Dale and Emerson.

The graph below shows the players who have played cricket together before joining the team.

For example, the edge between Alex and Bo shows that they have previously played cricket together.

a. How many of these players had Emerson played cricket with before joining the team?

[1 mark (0.9)]
b. Who had played cricket with both Alex and Bo before joining the team?

[1 mark (0.6)]

c. During the season, another new player, Finn, joined the team. Finn had not played cricket with any of these
players before. Represent this information on the graph above. (Answer on the graph above.)

[1 mark (0.9)]

Solution

a. There is one edge from Emerson to Alex and no other edges connecting Emerson to any other player, so
Emerson had played cricket with one player before joining the team.

b. There are edges connecting Alex to Dale and Cameron and there are edges connecting Bo to Dale and
Cameron, so Dale and Cameron had played cricket with both Alex and Bo before joining the team.

c. Finn had not played cricket with any of these players before. This is represented by an isolated vertex on
the graph.

Question 9/ 286

[VCAA 2020 FM]

A cricket team has 11 players who are each assigned to a batting position.
Three of the new players, Alex, Bo and Cameron, can bat in position 1, 2 or 3.

The table below shows the average scores, in runs, for each player for the batting positions 1, 2 and 3.

Batting position
1 2 3
Alex 22 24 24
Player Bo 25 25 21
Cameron 24 25 19

Each player will be assigned to one batting position.

To which position should each player be assigned to maximise the team’s score? Write your answer in the
table below.

Player Batting position

Alex
Bo
Cameron

[1 mark (0.6)]

Solution

Assign batting positions in order to maximise the team’s score. In this instance the allocation can be done by
inspection.

1 2 3
A 22 24 24
B 25 25 21
C 24 25 19
Assign Alex 2 or 3, Bo 1 or 2 and Cameron 2.

The players can therefore be assigned as follows to maximise the team’s score.

Player Batting position

Alex 3
Bo 1
Cameron 2

Question 10/ 286

[VCAA 2020 FM]

A local fitness park has 10 exercise stations: M to V .

The edges on the graph below represent the tracks between the exercise stations.

The number on each edge represents the length, in kilometres, of each track.

The Sunny Coast cricket coach designs three different training programs, all starting at exercise station S .

Training program number Training details

 Training program number Training details

1 The team must run to exercise station O .

2 The team must run along all tracks just once.

3 The team must visit each exercise station and return to exercise station S .

a. What is the shortest distance, in kilometres, covered in training program 1?

[1 mark (0.6)]

b. i. What mathematical term is used to describe training program 2?

[1 mark (0.7)]

ii. At which exercise station would training program 2 finish?

[1 mark (0.6)]

c. To complete training program 3 in the minimum distance, one track will need to be repeated. Complete the
following sentence by filling in the boxes provided.

This track is between exercise station and exercise station

[1 mark (0.2)]

Solution

a. Using trial and error, the shortest distance for training program 1 involves running from S to T to U to
V to O. This distance is 0.6 + 1.2 + 0.6 + 0.8 = 3.2 km.
b. i. The mathematical term for a path that involves traversing every edge of the graph exactly once is and
Eulerian trail.

ii. An Eulerian trail starts and ends at a vertex of odd degree. Training program 2 starts at vertex S which
has odd degree and ends at vertex P , which is the other vertex of odd degree.

c. Training program 3 involves visiting each vertex in the graph, starting and ending at the same vertex.
This is a Hamiltonian circuit that starts and finishes at S . To do this covering the minimum total distance, the
circuit must be S-M -O-N -U -V -P -Q-R-S-T -S or the reverse. Note that S to T is repeated, so the
sentence is: ‘This track is between exercise station S and exercise station T ’.
Question 11/ 286

[VCAA 2020 FM]

Training program 1 has the cricket team starting from exercise station S and running to exercise station O .

For safety reasons, the cricket coach has placed a restriction on the maximum number of people who can use
the tracks in the fitness park.

The directed graph below shows the capacity of the tracks, in number of people per minute.

a. How many different routes from S to O are possible?

[1 mark (0.3)]

When considering the possible flow of people through this network, many different cuts can be made.

b. Determine the capacity of Cut 1, shown above.

[1 mark (0.7)]

c. What is the maximum flow from S to O , in number of people per minute?

[1 mark (0.3)]
Solution

a. There are 10 different routes from S to O . You are not required to list them, but for completeness, they
are:

S→M →O

S→T →U →N →O

S→T →U →V →O

S→T →U →V →P →O

S→R→Q→V →U →N →O

S→R→Q→V →U →O

S→R→Q→V →U →P →O

S→R→Q→V →O

S → R → Q → V → P → OS → R → Q → P → O

b. Cut capacity = 20 + 12 + 20 = 52.

c. The minimum cut gives the maximum flow through the network.

In the diagram above, a minimum cut is shown. It has capacity 20 + 10 + 20 = 50. So the maximum
flow from S to O is 50 people per minute.

Question 12/ 286

[VCAA 2020 FM]

The Sunny Coast cricket clubroom is undergoing a major works project. This project involves nine activities:
A to I . The table below shows the earliest start time (EST) and duration, in months, for each activity. The
immediate predecessor(s) is also shown. The duration for activity C is missing.

Activity EST Duration Immediate predecessor(s)

A 0 2 –

B 0 5 –

C 5 A, B
D 7 7 C
E 7 9 C
F 5 3 B
G 14 4 D
H 8 9 F
I 18 2 E, G, H

The information in the table above can be used to complete a directed network.

This network will require a dummy activity.

a. Complete the following sentence by filling in the boxes provided.

[1 mark (0.3)]

This dummy activity could be drawn as a directed edge from the end of activity to the start of

activity
b. What is the duration, in months, of activity C ?

[1 mark (0.5)]

c. Name the four activities that have a float time.

[1 mark (0.2)]

d. The project is to be crashed by reducing the completion time of one activity only. What is the minimum
time, in months, that the project can be completed in?

[l mark (0.1)]

Solution

a. Activities A and B are both immediate predecessors to activity C . Since activity B is also an
immediate predecessor to activity F , the dummy activity could be drawn as a directed edge from the end of
activity B to the start of activity C .

b. Activity C has an EST of 5 months. It is the only immediate predecessor of both activities D and E
which each have an EST of 7 months, so the duration of activity C is 7 − 5 = 2 months.
c. The ESTs and LSTs of each activity are given in the table below.

Activity EST LST

A 0 3

B 0 0

C 5 5

D 7 7

E 7 9

F 5 6

G 14 14

H 8 9

I 18 18
The four activities that have a float time are those where the LST is greater than the EST, so they are A, E ,
F and H .

d. The critical path is B-C-D-G-I with a project completion time of 20 months. Look to reduce the
completion of an activity on this path without creating a different critical path.

Reducing the completion of activity B by 3 months will reduce the overall completion time for the project by
3 months. The minimum time in which the project can be completed is 17 months.

(A way to check this is to list all the paths through the network that do not contain B and give their lengths.
There are just two:

A-C-D-G-I 17 months

A-C-E-I 15 months

Now it is easy to see that reducing B by 3 months is possible giving a project time of 17 months; then
A-C-D-G-I , with a path length of 17 months, will become a second critical path, so no further reduction is
possible.)

Question 13/ 286

[VCAA 2021 FM]

Maggie’s house has five rooms, A, B , C , D and E , and eight doors.

The floor plan of these rooms and doors is shown below. The outside area, F , is shown shaded on the floor
plan.
The floor plan is represented by the graph below.

On this graph, vertices represent the rooms and the outside area. Edges represent direct access to the rooms
through the doors.

One edge is missing from the graph.

a. On the graph above, draw the missing edge.

[1 mark (1.0)]

b. What is the degree of vertex E ?

[1 mark (0.9)]

c. Maggie hires a cleaner to clean the house.

It is possible for the cleaner to enter the house from the outside area, F , and walk through each room only
once, cleaning each room as he goes and finishing in the outside area, F .
i. Complete the following to show one possible route that the cleaner could take.

[1 mark (0.9)]

ii. What is the mathematical term for such a journey?

[1 mark (0.6)]

Solution

a. The missing edge is from room A to room B .

b. Vertex E has degree 2.

c. i. One possible route that the cleaner= could take that passes through each room= exactly once both
starting and finishing in= the outside area, F , is F -A-B-E-D-C-F .= It is also correct if this route is
taken in=the reverse order being F -C-D-E-B-A-F .

ii. In the graph, the rooms are represented by the vertices. This route requires the passing through every
vertex exactly once, starting and finishing at vertex F . The mathematical term for such a journey is a
Hamiltonian Cycle.
Question 14/ 286

[VCAA 2021 FM]

George lives in Town G and Maggie lives in Town M .

The diagram below shows the network of main roads between Town G and Town M .

The vertices G, H , I , J , K , L, M , N and O represent towns.

The edges represent the main roads. The numbers on the edges indicate the distances, in kilometres, between
adjacent towns.

a. What is the shortest distance, in kilometres, between Town G and Town M ?

[1 mark (0.9)]

b. George plans to travel to Maggie’s house. He will pass through all the towns shown above.

George plans to take the shortest route possible.

Which town will George pass through twice?

[1 mark (0.7)]

Solution
a. The shortest distance between Town G and Town M would involve taking the route G-O-N -M .
28 + 42 + 16 = 86 km.

b. George needs to travel from G to M passing through all the towns and taking the shortest possible
route. The route is G-H-I-K-L-K-J-O-N -M and is shown below.

George will pass through town K twice.

Question 15/ 286

[VCAA 2021 FM]

The network diagram below shows the local road network of Town M .

The numbers on the edges indicate the maximum number of vehicles per hour that can travel along each road
in this network.

The arrows represent the permitted direction of travel.

The vertices A, B , C , D , E and F represent the intersections of the roads.

a. Determine the maximum number of vehicles that can travel from the entrance to the exit per hour.

[1 mark (0.3)]

b. The local council plans to increase the number of vehicles per hour that can travel from the entrance to the
exit by increasing the capacity of only one road.

i. Complete the following sentence by filling in the boxes provided. The road that should have its capacity
increased is the road from vertex to vertex .

[1 mark (0.4)]

ii. What should be the minimum capacity of this road to maximise the flow of vehicles from the entrance to
the exit?

[1 mark (0.1)]

Solution

a.
The minimum cut gives the maximum flow through the network. This cut is shown in the diagram above.

The capacity of this cut is 680 + 650 = 1330.

Note that the edges with capacities 710 and 600 are not included in the capacity of this cut since they cross
the cut from sink to source.

The maximum number of vehicles per hour that can travel from the entrance to the exit per hour is 1330.

b. i. The road that should have its capacity increased is the road from vertex A to vertex D . You can get
a greater increase in flow, perhaps up to an extra 130 cars per hour, from this capacity change, whereas
increasing capacity on BC can give you at most an extra 20 cars per hour (due to the maximum capacity of
700 on AB ).

ii. The minimum capacity of AD should be 780 cars per hour to maximise the flow of vehicles from the
entrance to the exit. The cut through CF and EF has capacity 620 + 840 = 1460 so it is possible to
increase the flow from entrance to exit by 1460 − 1330 = 130 vehicles per hour by increasing the
capacity of the road from vertex A to vertex D .
Increasing the capacity of the road AD by 130 increases the capacity of the cut through BC and AD to
1460 which is the same capacity as the cut through CF and EF . The diagram below shows how increasing
the capacity of AD to 780 will result in 620 cars per hour to be able to travel from C to F and 840 cars per
hour to travel from E to F .

The minimum capacity of the road AD to maximise the flow of vehicles from entrance to exit is 780
vehicles per hour.

Question 16/ 286

[VCAA 2021 FM]

Roadworks planned by the local council require 13 activities to be completed. The network below shows
these 13 activities and their completion times in weeks.

a. What is the earliest start time, in weeks, of activity K ?

[1 mark (0.5)]

b. How many of these activities have zero float time?

[1 mark (0.2)]

c. It is possible to reduce the completion time for activities A, E , F , L and K .

The reduction in completion time for each of these five activities will incur an additional cost.

The table below shows the five activities that can have their completion time reduced and the associated
weekly cost, in dollars.

Activity Weekly cost ($)

A 140 000

E 100 000

F 100 000

L 120 000

K 80 000

The completion time for each of these five activities can be reduced by a maximum of two weeks.

The overall completion time for the roadworks can be reduced to 16 weeks.

What is the minimum cost, in dollars, of this change in completion time?

[1 mark (0.1)]

Solution

a. The ESTs and LSTs of each activity are given in the table below.

Activity EST LST

A 0 0

B 0 1

C 3 4
 Activity EST LST

D 6 6

E 6 6

F 3 11

G 9 9

H 11 11

I 11 16

J 11 13

K 14 16

L 13 13

M 18 18

The earliest start time of activity K is 14 weeks.

b. The activities which have zero float time are those for which EST = LST. These are activities, A, D , E ,
G, H , L and M which is a total of 7 activities.
c. The completion time for the project is 19 weeks which can be reduced to 16 weeks.

There are two critical paths A-D-G-L-M and A-E-H-L-M .

Reduce the completion times of activities on both critical paths.

Reducing the completion time of activity L by 2 weeks does not create a new critical path. This reduces the
project completion time by 2 weeks.

In addition, reducing the completion time of Activity A will result in two additional critical paths
(B-C-D-G-L-M and B-C-E-H-L-M ) but all will result in a project completion time of 16 weeks
for the project. The minimum cost for change in completion time is

2 × 12 000 + 140 000 = $380 000.

Question 17/ 286

[VCAA 2022 FM]

Joe owns a holiday park with seven cabins.

The diagram below shows a network of roads in the holiday park.

Joe’s office is labelled as a vertex on the network. The other vertices −A, B , C , D , E , F and G –
represent the cabins.

In the morning, Joe leaves his office and visits each cabin once only before returning to the office.

a. Write down a route that Joe could follow.

[1 mark (0.8)]

b. Later in the day, Joe will leave his office and travel along each road once only to check the road
conditions.

i. Which vertex will Joe finish on?

[1 mark (0.8)]

ii. What is the mathematical term for this route?

[1 mark (0.7)]

Solution

a. If Joe leaves his office, visits each cabin exactly once and then returns to his office, the route he could
follow is O-A-B-C-D-E-F -G-O or the reverse.
b. i.
If Joe travels along each road exactly once the routes he could take include but are not limited to
O-F -G-O-A-B-E-F -B-C-D-E, O-A-B-F -O-G-F -E-B-C-D-E or
O-A-B-C-D-E-B-F -O-B-F -E . Joe will finish at vertex E .
ii. A mathematical term for a trail that uses each edge exactly once and starts and ends at different vertices
is an Eulerian trail.

Question 18/ 286

[VCAA 2022 FM]

Joe plans to add a new cabin to the holiday park.

This project requires 10 activities to be completed.

The network below shows these 10 activities and their completion times in weeks.

a. How many of these activities have two immediate predecessors?

[1 mark (0.5)]

b. What is the minimum completion time, in weeks, for this project?

[1 mark (0.6)]

c. It is possible to reduce the completion time of two activities.

One activity can have its completion time decreased by two weeks and another activity can have its
completion time decreased by one week.

These two changes result in the minimum completion time being reduced by three weeks.

Complete the table below, showing the two activities that could have their completion times reduced and the
reduction in individual activity completion time that would achieve the three-week reduction.
 Reduction in completion time
Activity
(1 week or 2 weeks)

d. The holiday park has had some changes to its roads to accommodate the new cabin.

The adjacency matrix below shows road connections between the office and each cabin. The new cabin, H ,
is included in the matrix.

On the diagram below, add the new cabin, H , and any additional roads to the network.

[2 marks (1.8)]

Solution
a. There are three activities in the network that have two immediate predecessors.

Activity Immediate Predecessors

H D, F
I D, F
J G, H

b. Use forward scanning to determine the ESTs for each activity in the network and the minimum
completion time for the project.

The minimum completion time for this project is 30 weeks.

c. First use backward scanning to find the critical path.

The activities with EST = LST are on the critical path. The critical path is A-D-I .

To reduce the overall completion time of the project, reduce the completion times of activities on the critical
path without creating a new critical path.

Since Activity A is the starting activity this completion time can be reduced by 2 days without creating a new
critical path. Activity I can have its completion time reduced by one day and this will result in the overall
completion time for the project to be reduced by 3 days. Note that reducing the completion time for Activity
D to 9 hours would create a new critical path A-C-F -I and would not reduce the overall completion time
for the project.

An alternative solution involves considering all paths through the network.

Path Completion time (weeks)

A-B-E-G-J 10 + 3 + 7 + 2 + 4 = 26
A-C-F -H-J 10 + 7 + 5 + 3 + 4 = 29
A-C-F -I 10 + 7 + 5 + 8 = 30
A-D-I 10 + 12 + 8 = 30

The overall completion time for the project is 30 weeks.

Activity A is common to all paths. Reducing the completion time for Activity A by 2 weeks reduces the
overall project completion time to 28 weeks.

Path Completion time (weeks)

A-B-E-G-J 8 + 3 + 7 + 2 + 4 = 24
A-C-F -H-J 8 + 7 + 5 + 3 + 4 = 27
 Path Completion time (weeks)

A-C-F -I 8 + 7 + 5 + 8 = 28
A-D-I 8 + 12 + 8 = 28

Activity I is common to the two paths with the longest completion time. Reducing the completion time for
Activity I by one hour will reduce the overall completion time for the project to 27 weeks.

Path Completion time (weeks)

A-B-E-G-J 8 + 3 + 7 + 2 + 4 = 24
A-C-F -H-J 8 + 7 + 5 + 3 + 4 = 27
A-C-F -I 8 + 7 + 5 + 7 = 27
A-D-I 8 + 12 + 8 = 27

d. Refer to either the H column or H row of the adjacency matrix. A ‘1’ indicates a road connecting cabin
H and another cabin. There is a road connecting H with D, H with E and H with H .

Question 19/ 286

[VCAA 2022 FM]

A series of pipelines is installed to allow for the flow of stormwater from the holiday park. The capacity of
these pipes, in litres per minute, is shown in the directed network below.
When considering the possible flow of stormwater through this network, many different cuts can be made.

a. Determine the capacity of Cut 1, shown above.

[1 mark (0.6)]

b. What is the maximum flow of stormwater, in litres per minute, from the source to the sink?

[1 mark (0.4)]

Joe would like to increase the maximum flow through this network.

The maximum flow through this network may be increased either by reversing the direction of flow through
one pipe or by increasing the capacity of one pipe.

c. The direction of flow is reversed through one pipe.

Complete the following sentence by filling in the boxes provided.

The pipe that should have its flow reversed to cause the largest increase in flow from source to sink is the
pipe that runs from vertex to vertex .

[1 mark (0.5)]

d. The capacity of one pipe is increased.

Complete the following sentences by filling in the boxes provided.

The pipe that should have its capacity increased to cause the largest increase in flow from source to sink is
the pipe that runs from vertex to vertex .

Its new capacity, in litres per minute, should be at least .

[1 mark (0.02)]
Solution

a.

The capacity of this cut is 19 + 11 + 14 + 15 + 15 = 74 litres per minute. Note that the edge M -L
with capacity 5 is not included in the capacity of this cut since it crosses the cut from sink to source.

b.

The minimum cut gives the maximum flow through the network. This cut is shown in the diagram above.

The capacity of this cut is 19 + 10 + 15 = 44.

Note that the edge Q-P with capacity 12 is not included in the capacity of this cut since it crosses the cut
from sink to source. The maximum number of storm water per minute is 44 litres.

c. To increase the flow from source to sink, reversing the flow in a pipe on the minimum cut is required.
The edge Q-P with capacity 12 is not included in the capacity of this cut since it crosses the cut from sink to
source. Reversing the direction of flow through this pipe will increase the maximum flow through this
network.

The sentence is completed as follows:

The pipe that should have its flow reversed to cause the largest increase in flow from source to sink is a pipe
that runs from vertex to vertex .

d. To increase the flow from source to sink, increasing the capacity of one pipe on the minimum cut is
required. By inspection, the capacity of J-L is 18 and M -L is 5. These pipes then flow into L-R which
has a capacity of 15. Increasing the capacity of the edge L-R to 23 or more would cause the largest increase
in flow from source to sink. The maximum flow from source to sink would increase from 44 litres per minute
to 52 litres per minute.

The sentence is completed as follows:

The pipe that should have its capacity increased to cause the largest increase in flow from source to sink is

the pipe that runs from vertex to vertex . Its new capacity, in litres per minute, should be at least .

2023 VCAA Examination 1

Question 2/ 16

The median time, in seconds, of these runners is

A. 135.5

B. 136

C. 136.5

D. 137

E. 137.5

Solution

There are 40 data values, so the median will be the mean of the 20th and 21st values. Reading from the dot
plot, both the 20th and 21st data values are equal to 136 seconds. So the median is 136 seconds.
Question 3/ 16

The shape of this distribution is best described as

A. positively skewed with one or more possible outliers.

B. positively skewed with no outliers.

C. approximately symmetric with one or more possible outliers.

D. approximately symmetric with no outliers.

E. negatively skewed with one or more possible outliers.

Solution

The data values are more spread out towards the upper (right) end of the dot plot, so the shape is positively
skewed. There are possible outliers at the upper end (for example at 146 seconds).

[Note: Q1 = 135, Q3 = 138, IQR = 3, Q3 + 1.5 × IQR = 142.4, so indeed the value 146 is an
outlier.]

Question 4/ 16

Gemma’s favourite online word puzzle allows her 12 attempts to guess a mystery word.

Her number of attempts for the last five days is displayed in the table below.

Day Number of attempts

1 8
2 11
3 5
4 6
5 9
On day six, how many attempts can she make so that the mean number of attempts for these six days is
exactly eight?

A. 5

B. 6

C. 7

D. 8

E. 9

Solution

If the mean number if attempts per day must be exactly 8, then the total attempts over 6 days must be 6 ×
8 = 48 attempts. Tallying the number of attempts over 5 days gives 39 attempts, so there would need to
be 48 − 39 = 9 attempts on the sixth day.

Question 5/ 16

The time spent by visitors in a museum is approximately normally distributed with a mean of 82 minutes and
a standard deviation of 11 minutes.

2380 visitors are expected to visit the museum today.

Using the 68–95–99.7% rule, the number of these visitors who are expected to spend between 60 and 104
minutes in the museum is

A. 1128

B. 1618

C. 2256

D. 2261

E. 2373
Solution

If the time spent at the museum was 60 minutes, this can be represented as the standard score:
ˉ 60−82
z= x−x
sx = 11 = −2.

If the time spent at the museum was 104 minutes, this can be represented as the standard score:
ˉ 104−82
z= x−x
sx = 11 = −2.

Using the 68–95–99.7 rule, we expect approximately 95% if the time spent by each visitor to be within 2
standard deviations of the mean (i.e. between z = −2 and z = 2). Hence the number of these visitors who
expected to spend between 60 and 104 minutes in the museum is approximately 95% × 2380 ≈ 2261
visitors.

Question 6/ 16

The heights of a group of Year 8 students have a mean of 163.56 cm and a standard deviation of 8.14 cm.
One student’s height has a standardised z -score of −0.85.

This student’s height, in centimetres, is closest to

A. 155.4

B. 156.6

C. 162.7

D. 170.5

E. 171.7

Solution
A height with a standardised z –score of z = −0.85 can be expressed as:
ˉ 163−56
z= x−x
sx = 8.14 = −085.

Solve for x to find the height of the student.

x−163.56
8.14 = −0.85
x ≈ 156.641 cm

Question 7/ 16

The histogram below displays the distribution of prices, in dollars, of the cars for sale in a used-car yard. The
histogram has a logarithm (base 10) scale.

Six of the cars in the yard have the following prices:

• $2450

• $3175

• $4999

• $8925

• $10250

• $105 600

How many of the six car prices listed above are in the modal class interval?
A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4

E. 6

Solution

The modal class interval is between 3.5 and 4.0 for log10 (price).

As 103.5 ≈ 3162 and 104 = 10 000, only 3 of the listed cars have prices in the range $3162 and
$10 000.

Question 9/ 16

The equation of the least squares line is closest to

A. test 2 mark = −6.83 + 1.55 × test 1 mark

B. test 2 mark = 15.05 + 0.645 × test 1 mark

C. test 2 mark = −6.78 + 0.645 × test 1 mark

D. test 2 mark = 1.36 + 1.55 × test 1 mark

E. test 2 mark = 6.83 + 1.55 × test 1 mark

Solution
Select two points that are on the line, say (x1 , y 1 ) = (16, 18) and (x2 , y2 ) = (36, 49).

The slope (b) of the least squares line with equation y = a + bx is given
y 2− y 1 49−18 31
b= x2 −x1 = 36−16 = 20 = 1.55

The y – intercept (a) can be found by:

y 1 = a + bx1
a = y 1 − bx1 = 18 − 1.55 × 16 = −6.8
So the equation of the least squares line is approximately:

test 2 mark = −6.8 + 1.55 × test 1 mark.

Question 10/ 16

The least squares line shows the predicted test 2 mark for each student based on their test 1 mark.

The number of students whose actual test 2 mark was within two marks of that predicted by the line is

A. 3

B. 4

C. 5

D. 6

E. 7

Solution

This question is asking about the residual values, and identifying the number of points that are vertically less
than 2 units above or below the least squares line. Observing the plot, there are 5 such points where the
vertical distance is less than 2 (one grid space).

Note that the residual associated with the data value at (21, 23) seems to be close to 2 units, but can be
checked as follows:
y predicted = −6.8 + 1.55 × (21) ≈ 25.75
Residual = y data − y predicted
≈ 23 − 25.75
≈ −2.75

As this residual value is ‘more negative’ than −2, this point can be disregarded.

Question 11/ 16

A least squares line can be used to model the birth rate (children per 1000 population) in a country from the
average daily food energy intake (megajoules) in that country.

When a least squares line is fitted to data from a selection of countries it is found that:

• for a country with an average daily food energy intake of 8.53 megajoules, the birth rate will be 32.2
children per 1000 population

• for a country with an average daily food energy intake of 14.9 megajoules, the birth rate will be 9.9
children per 1000 population.

The slope of this least squares line is closest to

A. −4.7

B. −3.5

C. −0.29

D. 2.7

E. 25

Solution

The explanatory variable (x) is energy intake, and the response variable (y ) is birth rate. From the
information provided, two points on the least squares line are:

(x1 , y1 ) = (8.53, 32.2) and (x2 , y2 ) = (14.9, 9.9)

The slope of the least squares line y = ax + b can be calculated as:
y 2 −y 1 32.2−9.9
b = x2 −x1 = 8.53−14.9
≈ −3.5

Question 12/ 16

A study of Year 10 students shows that there is a negative association between the scores of topic tests and
the time spent on social media. The coefficient of determination is 0.72

From this information it can be concluded that

A. a decreased time spent on social media is associated with an increased topic test score.

B. less time spent on social media causes an increase in topic test performance.

C. an increased time spent on social media is associated with an increased topic test score.

D. too much time spent on social media causes a reduction in topic test performance.

E. a decreased time spent on social media is associated with a decreased topic test score.

Solution

The association between the two variables is negative, so as one variable decreases, the other variable tends
to increase (and vice-versa).

r2 = 0.72 so r = − 0.72 ≈ −0.85

Options B and D can be eliminated, as any association is not ‘causal’.

Options C and E can be eliminated as they are statements consistent with a positive association.

Option A correctly states a conclusion associated with the negative association.

Question 14/ 16

A reciprocal transformation applied to the variable age can be used to linearise the scatterplot.
1
With age as the explanatory variable, the equation of the least squares line fitted to the linearised data is
closest to
1
A. height = −13.04 + 40.22 × age

1
B. height = −10.74 + 8.30 × age

1
C. height = 2.14 + 0.63 × age

1
D. height = 13.04 − 40.22 × age

1
E. height = 16.56 − 22.47 × age

Solution

This question can be answered by entering the data values provided for age and height. Then construct a
formula to calculate the reciprocal of the age values (for example rec_age = 1/age). Then create a
scatter plot height (response variable) vs 1/age (explanatory variable). Then fit a least squares regression
curve to that plot, which gives option D as the correct equation.
Question 15/ 16

The scatterplot can also be linearised using a logarithm (base 10) transformation applied to the variable age.

The equation of the least squares line is

height = −3.8 + 12.6 × log10 (age)

Using this equation, the age, in years, of a tree with a height of 8.52 m is closest to

A. 7.9

B. 8.9

C. 9.1

D. 9.5

E. 9.9

Solution

Using the given equation of the least squares line, the age that would predict a height of 8.52 metres can be
calculated as follows:

height = −3.8 + 12.6 × log10 (age)

8.52 = −3.8 + 12.6 × log10 (age)

Solving this equation on your calculator for age give the answer approximately age = 9.5 years.

Question 17/ 16

The time series is smoothed using seven-median smoothing.

The smoothed value for the winning time in 2006, in seconds, is closest to

A. 116.0

B. 116.4
C. 116.8

D. 117.2

E. 117.6

Solution

For the smoothed seven-median value centred on the year 2006, select the 7 values for winning time (from
2003 to 2009 inclusive). To find the median winning time of these 7 values on the scatter plot, place a ruler
on the horizontal axis, then slide it up, counting to the 4th value for winning time, which is 116.8 seconds
(occurs in 2005).

Question 18/ 16

The median winning time, in seconds, for all the calendar years from 2000 to 2022 is closest to

A. 116.8

B. 117.2

C. 117.6

D. 118.0

E. 118.3

Solution

There are 23 data values for winning time, so the median will be the 12th fastest value. To find the median
winning time of these 23 values on the scatter plot, place a ruler on the horizontal axis, then slide it up,
counting to the 12th value for winning time, which is 117.2 seconds (occurs in 2006).
Question 19/ 16

The number of visitors to a public library each day for 10 consecutive days was recorded.

These results are shown in the table below.

Day number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Number of visitors 337 317 313 335 322 335 322 338 302 349

The eight-mean smoothed number of visitors with centring for day number 6 is

A. 323

B. 324

C. 325

D. 326

E. 327

Solution

The centred eight-mean smoothed value for day number 6 can be calculated as follows:

Find the mean daily sales for the eight days from day number 2 to day number 9 (inclusive).
317+313+…+302
8 = 323 vistors
This is centred on “Day 5.5”.

Next find the mean daily sales for the eight days from day number 3 to day number 10 (inclusive).
313+335+…+349
8 = 327 vistors
This is centred on “Day 6.5”.

The centred value for day number 6 is the mean of these two values.
323+327
2 = 325 visitors.
Question 20/ 16

The number of visitors each month to a zoo is seasonal.

To correct the number of visitors in January for seasonality, the actual number of visitors, to the nearest
percent, is increased by 35%.

The seasonal index for that month is closest to

A. 0.61

B. 0.65

C. 0.69

D. 0.74

E. 0.771

Solution

Let D be the de-seasonalised value, A be the actual value, and S be the seasonal index. The formula linking
D, S and A is

D= A
S ... (1)

Also, if D is 35% greater than A, then

D = 1.35A ... (2).

Combining (1) and (2) gives

Question 1/ 32

A sequence of numbers is generated by the recurrence relation shown below.

T 0 = 5, T n+1 = −T n

The value of T2 is

A. −10

B. −5

C. 0

D. 5

E. 10

Solution

Using the recurrence rule given:

T0 = 5
T 1 = −T 0 = −5
T 2 = −T 1 = 5
Question 3/ 32

A rule for Gn , the value of the machine after n years is

A. Gn = 15 000 − 0.04n

B. Gn = 15 000 + 0.04n

C. Gn = 15 000 − 1314n

D. Gn = 1314 − 0.04n

E. Gn = 1314 + 0.04n

Solution

The recurrence relation given for the year-to-year value indicates that the coffee machine loses $1314 in
value each year. So the value of the machine after n years is (i.e. the year-to-year value):

Gn = G0 − (loss per year × number of years)

Gn = 15000 − (1314 × n)

Question 4/ 32

The number of cups made by the machine per year is

A. 1314

B. 13686

C. 15 000

D. 31536

E. 32850
Solution

$1314 per year

The number of cups made by the machine is: $0.04 per cup = 32850 cups/year

Question 5/ 32

If Audrey uses flat rate depreciation, the depreciation rate, per annum is

A. 10%

B. 15%

C. 20%

D. 25%

E. 33%

Solution

The computer depreciates from $3000 to $600 in 4 years, or:

($3000−$600) $2400
4 years = 4 years = $600/year.

As a flat rate depreciation rate, this is:

$600
∗20l, l, lAnnual depreciation rate = × 100%
$3000
= 20%
Question 6/ 32

If Audrey uses reducing balance depreciation, the depreciation rate, per annum is closest to

A. 10%

B. 15%

C. 20%

D. 25%

E. 33%

Solution

The computer depreciates from V 0 = $3000 to V4 = $600 in 4 years.

Using reducing balance depreciation, this means that V4 is:

n
V n = V 0 × (1 − 100
r
)
r 4
V 4 = V 0 × (1 − 100 )
r 4
600 = 3000 × (1 − 100 )

Using the calculator to solve this equation gives two answers: r ≈ 33% and r ≈ 167%, but only r ≈
33% seems reasonable and present as an answer in options A to E.

Question 7/ 32

Timmy took out a reducing balance loan of $500 000, with interest calculated monthly.

The balance of the loan, in dollars, after n months, Tn , can be modelled by the recurrence relation

T 0 = 500 000, T n+1 = 1.00325T n − 2611.65

A final repayment that will fully repay the loan to the nearest cent is

A. $2605.65

B. $2609.18

C. $2611.65

D. $2614.12

E. $2615.81

Solution

The annual interest rate can be found as follows.

r/12
R=1+ r+k
100 ⇔ 1.00325 = 1 + 100

Solving this equation for r gives r = 3.9%. The time required to fully repay the loan can be found using
the finance solver

N =?
I = 3.9
P V = 500 000
PMT = −2611.65
FV = 0
Ppy/Cpy = 12

Solve for N gives N ≈ 300.00..., which means that the loan can be fully paid over 25 years of monthly
payments, provided that the final payment is slightly more than $2611.65. The future value after the 299th
payment can be found using the finance solver.

N = 299
I = 3.9
P V = 500 000
PMT = −2611.65
F V =?
Ppy/Cpy = 12

Solve for F V gives F V = $ − 2605.64736...

The final payment will include one more month of interest, so the final payment is:
Final payment = 1.00325 × 2605.64736 …
≈ 2614.12

Question 8/ 32

Tavi took out a loan of $20 000, with interest compounding quarterly. She makes quarterly repayments of
$653.65.
The graph below represents the balance in dollars of Tavi’s loan at the end of each quarter of the first year of
the loan.

The effective interest rate for the first year of Tavi’s loan is closest to

A. 3.62%

B. 3.65%

C. 3.66%

D. 3.67%

E. 3.68%
Solution

The annual (or nominal) interest rate can be found using the finance solver and the known values of P V =
V0 and F V = V1 .

N =1
I =?
P V = 20 000
PMT = −653.65
F V = −19527.56
Ppy/Cpy = 4

Solve for I gives I ≈ 3.6242...

The effective interest rate based on 4 compounding periods per year can be found using
eff(3.6242 … , 4) = 3.67375 …

Question 9/ 32

The following recurrence relation models the value, Pn , of a perpetuity after n time periods.

P 0 = a, P n+1 = RP n − d

The value of R can be found by calculating

A. a + d

B. a+d
a

C. a+d
d

D. 1 + a+d
a

E. 1 + a+d
d

Solution
For a perpetuity, the balance remains the same after each time period, so Pn+1 = Pn , or using the fact that
P0 = a:

P 0 = P 1 = P 2 = … = P n = P n+1 = a.

So the recurrence relation can be rewritten to help solve for R as follows:

P n+1 = RP n − d
a = Ra − d
Ra = a+d
R = a+d
a

Question 10/ 32

The daily maximum temperature at a regional town for two weeks is displayed in the table below.

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday

Week 1 20 °C 17 °C 23 °C 20 °C 18 °C 19 °C 30 °C
Week 2 29 °C 27 °C 28 °C 21 °C 20 °C 20 °C 22 °C

This information can also be represented by matrix M , shown below.

20 17 23 20 18 19 30
M =[ ]
29 27 28 21 20 20 22

Element m21 indicates that

A. the temperature was 29 °C on Monday in week 2.

B. the temperature was 17 °C on Tuesday in week 1.

C. the lowest temperature for these two weeks was 17 °C.

D. the highest temperature for these two weeks was 29 °C.

E. week 2 had a higher average maximum temperature than week 1.

Solution

m21 is the entry in row 2 and column 1 which is 29. This gives the temperature in week 2 on Monday.

m21 indicates the temperature was 29° C on Monday in week 2.

Question 11/ 32

Matrix P is a permutation matrix and matrix Q is a column matrix.

1 0 0 0 0 t
0 0 1 0 0 e
P = 0 0 0 1 0 Q= a
0 1 0 0 0 m
0 0 0 0 1 s

When Q is multiplied by P , which three letters change position?

A. t, e, a

B. e, a, m

C. a, m, s

D. m, s, t

E. e, a, s

Solution

In the permutation matrix, P , a 1 on the leading diagonal indicates that the letter in the corresponding row in
Q does not change position.

There is a 1 on the leading diagonal of P in row 1, so t will not change position and in row 5, so s will not
change position.

The letters that will change position are e, a and m.

Alternatively, the matrix product PQ can be calculated. It can be observed that e, a and m do change
position while t and s do not.

t
a
PQ = m
e
s

Question 12/ 32

The following transition matrix, T , models the movement of a species of bird around three different
locations, M , N and O from one day to the next.

Which one of the following statements best represents what will occur in the long term?

A. No birds will remain at location M.

B. No birds will remain at location N.

C. All of the birds will end up at location M.

D. All of the birds will end up at location O.

E. An equal number of birds will be at all three locations.

Solution

Which indicates that in the long term all birds will end up at location N with no birds remaining at locations
M and O.

The statement that best represents what will occur in the long term is: No birds will remain at location M .

Question 13/ 32

Four table tennis teams played in a round-robin tournament.

Each team played each other team once and there were no draws.

The overall ranking of each team at the end of the tournament, based on number of wins, is shown in the
table below.

First Unicorns (U )

Second Vampires (F )
 Third Scorpions (S )

Fourth Titans (T )

A dominance matrix can display the results of each game, where a ‘1 ‘in the matrix shows that the team
named in that row defeated the team named in that column.

The dominance matrix for this tournament could be

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.
Solution

First check if any dominance matrices can be easily eliminated.

In A. row V has zero elements which tells us that in this scenario the Vampires do not defeat any other team
so they could not finish second.

The matrix in B. is not a valid dominance matrix as we are told that each team played each other team once.
It is not possible, for example, for S to defeat U and for U to also defeat S as indicated by elements d13
and d31 .

E. is not a valid dominance matrix as all entries on the leading diagonal must be zero as no team plays itself.

For remaining dominance matrices in C. and D., calculate the total of each row, as the overall ranking is
based on number of wins.

Row Total

S T U V
C. 1 1 2 2
D. 1 0 3 2

The dominance matrix for this tournament could be D. as this gives the required placings U , V , S, T .

Question 14/ 32

Matrix K is a 3 × 2 matrix.
2
The elements of K are determined by the rule k ij = (i − j) .

Matrix K is

0 1 −2
A. [ ]
1 0 −1

0 1 4
B. [ ]
1 0 1
 0 −1
C. 1 0
4 1

0 1
D. 1 0
2 1

0 1
E. 1 0
4 1

Solution

Matrix K is a 3 × 2 matrix so A. and B. can be eliminated as these are both 2 × 3 matrices.

Comparing the matrices in C. D. and E. the elements we only need to calculate k12 and k31 as the other four
elements are the same in each of these matrices.
2
k ij = (i − j)
2
k 12 = (1 − 2) = 1
2
k 31 = (3 − 1) = 4
0 1
So K = 1 0
4 1

Question 15/ 32

How many of the following statements are true?

• All square matrices have an inverse.

• The inverse of a matrix could be the same as the transpose of that matrix.

• If the determinant of a matrix is equal to zero, then the inverse does not exist.
• It is possible to take the inverse of an identity matrix.

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. 3

E. 4

Solution

‘All square matrices’ have inverses is not a true statement. If the determinant of a square matrix is zero, then
the matrix does not have an inverse. Since it is not possible to divide by zero.

‘This inverse of a matrix could be the same as the transpose of a matrix’ is a true statement. Consider the
1 0
2 × 2 identity [ ] matrix. This matrix is its own inverse and its own transpose.
0 1
‘If the determinant of a matrix is equal to zero, then the inverse does not exist’ is a true statement.

‘It is possible to take the inverse of an identity matrix’ is a true statement as any identity matrix is its own
inverse.

Three of the statements are true.

Question 16/ 32

A species of bird has a life span of three years.

The females in this species do not reproduce in their first year but produce an average of four female
offspring in their second year, and three in their third year.

The Leslie matrix, L, below is used to model the female population distribution of this species of bird.
 0 4 3
L = 0.2 0 0
0 0.4 0
The element in the second row, first column states that on average 20% of this population will

A. be female.

B. never reproduce.

C. survive into their second year.

D. produce offspring in their first year.

E. live for the entire lifespan of three years.

Solution

The first row of the Leslie matrix tells us how many offspring each bird will produce, on average, in their
second year and third year.

The second row of the Leslie matrix tells us the proportion of the population born in the first year that is
expected to survive into their second year.

L21 = 0.2. This tells us that, on average, 20% of this population will survive into their second year.

Question 17/ 32

For one particular week in a school year, students at Phyllis Island Primary School can spend their lunch
break at the playground (P ), basketball courts (B ), oval (O ) or the library (L).
Students stay at the same location for the entire lunch break.

The transition diagram below shows the proportion of students who change location from one day to the next.

The transition diagram is incomplete.

On the Monday, 150 students spent their lunch break at the playground, 50 students spent it at the basketball
courts, 220 students spent it at the oval, and 40 students spent it in the library.

Of the students expected to spend their lunch break on the oval on the Wednesday, the percentage of these
students who also spent their lunch break on the oval on Tuesday is closest to

A. 27%

B. 30%

C. 33%

D. 47%

E. 52%

Solution

A transition diagram can be constructed from the transition diagram,

The elements in each column of a transition matrix add to 1 so the missing elements can be determined.

From the information given, an initial state matrix can be constructed with S0 containing the number of
students spending their lunch break in each area on Monday.

150 P
50 B
S0 =
220 O
40 L
The numbers of students expected to spend their lunch break in each area on Tuesday is represented in the
matrix S1 .

S1 = T × S0
132 P
134 B
=
140 O
54 L
The numbers of students expected to spend their lunch break in each area on Wednesday is represented in the
matrix S2 .
S2 = T 2 × S0
143.6 P
132.6 B
=
127 O
56.8 L

Of the 140 students spending their lunch break on the oval on Tuesday, 0.4 × 140 = 42 are expected to
spend their lunch break on the oval on Wednesday.

So of the 127 students expected to spend their lunch break on the oval on Wednesday, 42 also spent their
lunch break on the oval on Tuesday.
42
As a percentage this is 127 × 100 ≈ 33%.

Question 1/ 40

Consider the following graph.

How many of the following five statements are true?

• The graph is a tree.

• The graph is connected.

• The graph contains a path.

• The graph contains a cycle.

• The sum of the degrees of the vertices is eight.

A. 1

B. 2
C. 3

D. 4

E. 5

Solution

The graph is a connected graph with no circuits, so the graph is a tree.

Every vertex has a connection to another vertex, so the graph is connected.

An example of a walk from one vertex to another vertex with no repeated vertices is from the vertex at one
end to the one at the other end. Therefore, the graph contains a path.

The graph does not contain a cycle.

The sum of the degrees of the vertices = 8. 1 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 1 =8

Four of the statements are true.

Question 2/ 40

A bipartite graph is typically used to display which one of the following?

A. the allocation of tasks on a construction site

B. the path used to visit five different construction sites

C. the total distance travelled between two construction sites

D. the critical path of activities to be completed in a construction project

E. the minimum length of cable required to connect six construction sites

Solution
A bipartite graph is typically used in allocation problems. For example, where tasks belong to one set of
vertices and people in another set of vertices.

A bipartite graph would be typically used to display the allocation of tasks on a construction site.

Question 3/ 40

Consider the weighted graph shown below.

The weight of the minimum spanning tree is

A. 30

B. 32

C. 40

D. 42

E. 52

Solution

Use Prim’s algorithm to find the minimum spanning tree.

Start with the edge of weight 6. Then add the edge of weight 7, followed by the edges of weights 8, 9 and 10.

Now every vertex is included, and the minimum spanning tree is shown below.
The weight of the minimum spanning tree is found by adding the weights of the edges included in this tree.

6 + 7 + 8 + 9 + 10 = 40.

Question 4/ 40

Four employees, Anthea, Bob, Cho and Dario, are each assigned a different duty by their manager.

The time taken for each employee to complete duties 1, 2, 3 and 4, in minutes, is shown in the table below.

Duty 1 Duty 2 Duty 3 Duty 4

Anthea 8 7 7 8
Bob 10 8 10 9
Cho 8 9 7 10
Dario 7 7 8 9

The manager allocates the duties so as to minimise the total time taken to complete the four duties.

The minimum total time taken to complete the four duties, in minutes, is

A. 29

B. 30

C. 31

D. 32

E. 33
Solution

Duty 1 Duty 2 Duty 3 Duty 4

Anthea 8 7 7 8
Bob 10 8 10 9
Cho 8 9 7 10
Dario 7 7 8 9

To determine the allocation of duties so as to minimise the total time taken to complete the four duties, first
subtract the smallest value in each row from every value in that row.

The minimum number of lines required to cover all the zeroes is less than the number of rows so continue to
column reduction.

The Duty 4 column does not contain a zero so subtract the smallest element in that column from every
element in that column.
The minimum number of lines required to cover the zeroes is equal to the number of rows, so an allocation is
possible.

Cho is allocated Duty 3.

Dario is allocated Duty 1.

Anthea could be allocated Duty 2 or Duty 4.

Similarly, Bob could be allocated Duty 2 or Duty 4.

Anthea Duty 2 7
Bob Duty 4 9
Cho Duty 3 7
Dario Duty 1 7
Total time 30

Or alternatively,

Anthea Duty 4 8
Bob Duty 2 8
Cho Duty 3 7
Dario Duty 1 7
Total time 30

Question 5/ 40
The adjacency matrix below represents a planar graph with five vertices.

The number of faces on the planar graph is

A. 5

B. 7

C. 9

D. 15

E. 17

Solution

Since the graph is planar, Euler’s rule: v + f − e = 2.

From the adjacency matrix the number of vertices is 5 (J, K, L, M , N ).

Given that all entries on the leading diagonal are zeroes, The number of edges is equal to the sum of the
elements either above or below the leading diagonal.

1 + 1 + 1 + 2 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 10
5 + f − 10 = 2
f =7
Alternatively, draw the network from the adjacency matrix, and check the number of faces (including the
outside) is 7.
Question 6/ 40

A particular building project has ten activities that must be completed.

These activities and their immediate predecessor(s) are shown in the table below.

Activity Immediate predecessor(s)

A –

B –

C A
D A
E B
F D, E
G C, F
H F
I D, E
J H, I

A directed graph that could represent this project is

A.

B.

C.
D.

E.

Solution

Options A., B., C. and E. can be eliminated since activity C is not an immediate predecessor of activity H .

The dummy activity is required from the end of activity H to the start of activity G as both activities C and
F are immediate predecessors of activity G but activity C is not an immediate predecessor of activity H .

Question 8/ 40

Cuts on this network are used to consider the possible flow of children through the maze.

The capacity of the minimum cut would be

A. 20

B. 23

C. 24

D. 29

E. 30

Solution

The minimum cut is shown. To calculate the capacity of this cut the capacities of edges CF and FG are not
included in the cut since they cross the cut from exit to entrance.

The capacity of this cut is 12 + 4 + 7 = 23.

Question 9/ 40

One path in the maze is to be changed.

Which one of these five changes would lead to the largest increase in flow from entrance to exit?

A. increasing the capacity of flow along the edge CE to 12

B. increasing the capacity of flow along the edge F H to 14

C. increasing the capacity of flow along the edge GH to 16

D. reversing the direction of flow along the edge CF

E. reversing the direction of flow along the edge GF

Solution

Consider each option in turn. The maximum flow through the original network is 23.

Option A. Increasing the capacity of flow along the edge CE to 12 will increase the maximum flow by 1
since a new minimum cut is created with a capacity of 24 as shown in the diagram below.

Option B. Increasing the capacity of flow along the edge F H to 14 will not increase the maximum flow as
the edge F H is not on the minimum cut found in Question 39.

Option C. Increasing the capacity of flow along the edge GH to 16 will increase the maximum flow by 4
since the original minimum cut will continue to be the minimum cut but with a new capacity of 27.
Option D. Reversing the direction of flow along the edge CF will increase the maximum flow by 6 since the
original minimum cut will continue to be the minimum cut but with a new capacity of 29.

Option E. Reversing the direction of flow along the edge GF will increase the maximum flow by 7 since a
new minimum cut is created with a capacity of 30 as shown in the diagram below.

This change would lead to the largest increase in flow from entrance to exit.

2022 VCAA Examination 2

Question 1/ 4
(9 marks)

Data was collected to investigate the use of electronic images to automate the sizing of oysters for sale.

The variables in this study were:

• ID: identity number of the oyster

• weight: weight of the oyster in grams (g)

• volume: volume of the oyster in cubic centimetres (cm3)

• image size: oyster size determined from its electronic image (in megapixels)
• size: oyster size when offered for sale: small, medium or large

The data collected for a sample of 15 oysters is displayed in Table 1.

Table 1

ID Weight (g) Volume (cm3) Image size (megapixels) Size

1 12.9 13.0 5.1 large

2 11.4 11.7 4.8 medium
3 17.4 17.4 6.5 large
4 6.8 7.2 2.9 small
5 9.6 10.1 3.7 medium
6 15.5 15.6 5.7 large
7 9.7 9.9 4.0 small
8 7.0 7.5 2.7 small
9 12.6 12.7 5.5 medium
10 12.5 12.7 5.0 medium
11 10.1 10.5 3.9 medium
12 10.6 10.8 4.1 medium
13 13.0 13.1 5.3 large
14 8.1 8.5 3.5 small
15 14.1 14.2 5.3 large
Data: http://jse.amstat.org/jse_data_archive.htm

a. Write down the number of categorical variables in Table 1. 1 mark

b. Determine, in grams:

i. the mean weight of all the oysters in this sample 1 mark

ii. the median weight of the large oysters in this sample. 1 mark

c. When a least squares line is used to model the association between oyster weight and volume, the equation
is:

volume = 0.780 + 0.953 × weight

i. Name the response variable in this equation. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

ii. Complete the following sentence by filling in the box provided.

This equation predicts that, on average, each 10 g increase in the weight of an oyster is associated

with a cm3 increase in its volume.

d. A least squares line can also be used to model the association between an oyster’s volume, in cm3, and its
electronic image size, in megapixels. In this model, image size is the explanatory variable.

Using data from Table 1, determine the equation of this least squares line. Use the template below to write
your answer. Round the values of the intercept and slope to four significant figures. 2 marks

e. The number of megapixels needed to construct an accurate electronic image of an oyster is approximately
normally distributed.

Measurements made on recently harvested oysters showed that:

• 97.5% of the electronic images contain less than 4.6 megapixels

• 84% of the electronic images contain more than 4.3 megapixels.

Use the 68–95–99.7% rule to determine, in megapixels, the mean and standard deviation of this normal
distribution. 2 marks

Solution

a. There are two categorical variables – ID (ordinal) and Size (nominal).

b. i. The mean weight for oysters in this smple is

12.9+11.4+…+14.1
ˉ=
x 15 = 11.42 g
ii. The median weight for oysters in this sample can be found by sorting all the values of the variable
weight, and selecting the middle value. Since n = 15 so select the 8th value which is 11.4 g.

c. i. The response variable in the least squares regression equation is volume.

ii. Since the slope of the least squares line is 0.953, the equation predicts that, on average:

• each 1 g increase in weight is associated with a 0.953 cm3 increase in volume, and

• each 10 g increase in weight is associated with a 9.53 cm3 increase in volume.

d. Enter the data values for volume (y ) and image size (x) into the calculator, and then calculate the least
squares regression equation. This yields the following equation (correct to 4 significant figures):

volume ≈ 0.002857 + 2.5714 × image size

e. Using the 68–95–99.7%, if 97.5% of electronic images contain less than 4.6 megapixels, then an
electronic image of 4.6 megapixels represents a standard score of z = 2.

Similarly, an electronic image of 4.3 megapixels represents a standard score of z = −1.

Convert the measurements given to standardised scores:

z = 4.6−x ˉ
sx = 2
z = 4.3−xˉ
sx = −1

The calculator can be used to solve the following two equations for the mean and standard deviation.
4.6−xˉ 4.3−xˉ
sx = 2 and sx = −1

ˉ = 4.4 megapixels and sx = 0.1 megapixels.

x

Question 2/ 4

(5 marks)

a. The following data shows the sizes of a sample of 20 oysters rated as small, medium or large.

small small large medium medium

medium large small medium medium

small medium small small medium

medium medium medium small large

i. Use the data above to complete the following frequency table. 1 mark

Table 2

Frequency
Size Number Percentage (%)
small 35
medium 50
large 15
Total 100
ii. Use the percentages in Table 2 to construct a percentage segmented bar chart below. A key has been
provided. 1 mark

An oyster farmer has two farms, A and B.

She takes a random sample of oysters from each of the farms and has the oysters classified as small, medium
or large.

The number of oysters of each size is displayed in the two-way table below.

Table 3

Oyster size Farm A Farm B

small 42 114
medium 124 160
large 44 46
Total 210 320

b. i. Calculate the percentage of the total number of oysters graded as ‘large’ in this investigation. Round the
percentage to the nearest whole number. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

ii. The farmer believes that farm A has a greater capacity to grow larger oysters than farm B.

Does the information in Table 3 support the farmer’s belief? Explain your conclusion by comparing the
values of two appropriate percentages.
Round these percentages to the nearest whole number. 2 marks

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Solution

a.i. Counting the frequency of each size of oyster, there are 7 small oysters, 10 medium size oysters and 3
large oysters. A quick check confirms that this represents a total of 20 oysters as stated.

ii. The missing segments of the percentage segmented bar chart have been added in the diagram below.

b. i. Reading from the table, the total number of oysters graded as large is: 4 + 46 = 90 oysters.

The total number of oysters is: 210 + 320 = 530 oysters.

So the percentage of the total number of oysters graded as large is:
90
530 × 100% = 16.98 … % ≈ 17%
ii. The percentage of oysters graded as large on each farm is as follows.

Farm A:
44
210 × 100% = 20.952 … % ≈ 21%
Fram B:
46
320 × 100% = 14.375% ≈ 14%
The difference in these percentages does support the farmer’s belief that farm A has a greater capacity to
grow large oysters.

Question 3/ 4

(6 marks)

The scatterplot below plots the average monthly ice cream consumption, in litres/person, against average
monthy temperature, in °C. The data for the graph was recorded in the Northern Hemisphere.

When a least squares line is fitted to the scatterplot, the equation is found to be:

consumption = 0.1404 + 0.0024 × temperature

The coefficient of determination is 0.7212

a. Draw the least squares line on the scatterplot graph above. 1 mark

b. Determine the value of the correlation coefficient r .

Round your answer to three decimal places. 1 mark

c. Describe the association between average monthly ice cream consumption and average monthly
temperature in terms of strength, direction and form. 1 mark

strength
direction
form

d. Referring to the equation of the least squares line, interpret the value of the intercept in terms of the
variables consumption and temperature. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

e. Use the equation of the least squares line to predict the average monthly ice cream consumption, in litres
per person, when the monthly average temperature is −6∘ C. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

f. Write down whether this prediction is an interpolation or an extrapolation. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Solution

a. To draw an accurate least squares line, select two values for temperature and substitute them into the
given equation.

If temperature = 0 degrees,

consumption = 0.1404 + 0.0024 × (0)

= 0.1404
So plot a first point at (0,0.1404).

If temperature = 20 degrees,
consumption = 0.1404 + 0.0024 × (20)
= 0.1884
So plot a second point at (0,0.1884).

Now draw a line through these two points.

b. Since there is a positive association between the two variables, the correlation coefficient is the positive
square root of the given coefficient of determination, or: r = r 2 = 0.7212 ≈ 0.849.

c. The association is strong (r > 0.75), positive and non-linear (slight curvature in plot at the upper end).
d. If the average monthly temperature is 0°C, the least squares regression equation predicts that
consumption will be 0.1404 litres per person.

e. If the average temperature is −6∘ C, the predicted average monthly ice cream consumption will be:

consumption = 0.1404 + 0.0024 × (−6)

= 0.126 L/person
f. This prediction is an extrapolation, since the prediction is being made for an average temperature below
the values in the data set provided.

Question 4/ 4

(4 marks)

The time series plot below shows the average monthly ice cream consumption recorded over three years,
from January 2010 to December 2012.

The data for the graph was recorded in the Northern Hemisphere.

In this graph, month number 1 is January 2010, month number 2 is February 2010 and so on.
a. Identify a feature of this plot that is consistent with this time series having a seasonal component. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

b. The long-term seasonal index for April is 1.05.

Determine the deseasonalised value for average monthly ice cream consumption in April 2010 (month 4).

Round your answer to two decimal places. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

c. Table 4 below shows the average monthly ice cream consumption for 2011.

Table 4

Consumption (litres/person)
Year Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
2011 0.156 0.150 0.158 0.180 0.200 0.210 0.183 0.172 0.162 0.145 0.134 0.154

Show that, when rounded to two decimal places, the seasonal index for July 2011 estimated from this data is
1.10. 2 marks

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________

Solution

a. Evidence of a seasonal component is provided by observing that the time series has peaks for month
numbers 6, 18 and 30 months, which are separated by 12 months.

b. In April 2010 (month 4), the consumption is 0.18 L/person. The deseasonalised consumption value for
April 2010 can be obtained by dividing the actual consumption by the provided seasonal index for April, or:
0.18/1.05 = 0.17 L/person (correct to two decimal places).
c. The average monthly consumption is:
0.156+0.150+…+0.154
12 ≈ 0.167 L/person
0.183
So the seasonal index for July 2011 is: SI(July 2011) = 0.167 ≈ 1.10

Question 1/ 7

(3 marks)

Arthur borrowed $30 000 to buy a new motorcycle.

Interest on this loan is charged at the rate of 6.4% per annum, compounding quarterly.

Arthur will repay the loan in full with quarterly repayments over six years.

a. How many repayments, in total, will Arthur make? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

The balance of the loan, in dollars, after n quarters, An , can be modelled by the recurrence relation

A0 = 30000, An+l = 1.016An − 1515.18

b. Showing recursive calculations, determine the balance of the loan after two quarters.

Round your answer to the nearest cent. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

c. The final repayment required will differ slightly from all the earlier repayments of $1515.18

Determine the value of the final repayment.

Round your answer to the nearest cent. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Solution

a. Over six years, there will be 6 × 4 = 24 quarterly payments.

b. Using the recurrence relation:

A1 = 1.016 × A0 − 1515.18 = $28 964.82

A1 = 1.016 × A1 − 1515.18
= 1.016 × (28 964.82) − 1515.18
= $27 913.08
c. The amount owing after 23 months can be found using the finance solver as follows:

N = 23
I = 6.4
P V = 30 000
PMT = −1515.18
F V =?
Ppy/Cpy = 4

Solving for P V gives

P V = −1491.182758 …
The final payment can be found as:

Final payment = R × 1491.182758 …

= 1.016 × 1491.182758 …
≈ $1515.04
This answer can also be found using the finance solver with N = 1 and

F V = 1491.182758 …

Question 2/ 7

(4 marks)

Arthur invests $600 000 in an annuity that provides him with a monthly payment of $3973.00 Interest is
calculated monthly.

Three lines of the amortisation table for this annuity are shown below.

Payment number Payment ($) Interest ($) Principal reduction ($) Balance ($)
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 600 000.00
1 3973.00 2520.00 1453.00 598 547.00
2 3973.00 2513.90 1459.10 597 087.90

a. The interest rate for the annuity is 0.42% per month.

Determine the interest rate per annum. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

b. Using the values in the table, complete the next line of the amortisation table.

Write your answers in the spaces provided in the table below.

Round all values to the nearest cent. 1 mark

Payment number Payment ($) Interest ($) Principal reduction ($) Balance ($)
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 600 000.00
1 3973.00 2520.00 1453.00 598 547.00
2 3973.00 2513.90 1459.10 597 087.90
3
c. Let Vn be the balance of Arthur’s annuity, in dollars, after n months.

Write a recurrence relation in terms of V0 , Vn+1 and Vn that can model the value of the annuity from month
to month. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

d. The amortisation tables on page 11 show that the balance of the annuity reduces each month.

If the balance of an annuity remained constant from month to month, what name would be given to this type
of annuity? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Solution

a. If the monthly interest rate for the annuity is 0.42%/month, then the interest rate per annum is 12 ×
0.42% = 5.04%.
b. The values for payment 3 are:

Payment = $3973.00

Interest = 0.42% × 597 087.90 = $2507.77

Principal reduction = Payment − Interest
= $3973 − $2507.77
= $1465.23

Bal. = Previous bal. − Princ. reduction

= $597 087.90 − $1465.23
= $595 622.67

c. The recurrence relation can be constructed by finding the value of the multiplier R:

5.04/12
R=1+ 100 = 1.0042.
Since the regular payment is $3973, the recurrence relation is:
V n+1 = 1.0042 × V n − 3973, V 0 = 600 000
d. If the monthly payment equals the value of the monthly interest earned, then the annuity balance will
remain the same value. This type of annuity is called a perpetuity.

Question 3/ 7

(5 marks)

Arthur takes out a new loan of $60 000 to pay for an overseas holiday.

Interest on this loan compounds weekly.

The balance of the loan, in dollars, after n weeks, Vn , can be determined using a recurrence relation of the
form

V0 = 60 000, Vn+1 = 1.0015Vn − d

a. Show that the interest rate for this loan is 7.8% per annum. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

b. Determine the value of d in the recurrence relation if

i. Arthur makes interest-only repayments 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

ii. Arthur fully repays the loan in five years.

Round your answer to the nearest cent. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

c. Arthur decides that the value of d will be 300 for the first year of repayments.

If Arthur fully repays the loan with exactly three more years of repayments, what new value of d will apply
for these three years?
Round your answer to the nearest cent. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

d. For what value of d does the recurrence relation generate a geometric sequence? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Solution

a. Using the recurrence relation, the multiplication factor R = 1.0015 so:

r/k
∗20r, l, lR = 1+
100
r/52
1.0015 =
100
r = 7.8%(via CAS)

b. i. If interest only payments, then V n+1 = V n (balance unchanged), so:

60 000 = 1.0015 × (60 000) − d

d = 90(via CAS)
ii. Use the finance solver to find the weekly payment required to fully pay off the loan.

N = 5 × 52
I = 7.8
P V = 60 000
PMT =?
FV = 0
Ppy/Cpy = 52
Solving for PMT gives

PMT = −278.8577 …, so the weekly payment (d) is $278.86.

c. Use the finance solver to find the future value after the first year (52 weeks).
 N = 52
I = 7.8
P V = 60 000
PMT = −300
F V =?
Ppy/Cpy = 52

Solving for F V gives

F V = −48 651.673 …,

To fully repay the loan in a further 3 years, use the finance solver to calculate the new value of d.

N = 3 × 52
I = 7.8
P V = 48 651.673 …
PMT =?
FV = 0
Ppy/Cpy = 52
Solving for PMT gives

PMT = −350.012998 …, so the new value of d = $350.01.

d. The loan balance will grow exponentially (geometrically) if no payment is made (i.e. if d = 0).

Question 1/ 11

(3 marks)

A circus sells three different types of tickets: family (F ), adult (A) and child (C ).

The cost of admission, in dollars, for each ticket type is presented in matrix N below.

36 F
N = 15 A
8 C

The element in row i and column j of matrix N is nij .

a. Which element shows the cost for one child ticket? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

b. A family ticket will allow admission for two adults and two children.

Complete the matrix equation below to show that purchasing a family ticket could give families a saving of
$10. 1 mark

c. On the opening night, the circus sold 204 family tickets, 162 adult tickets and 176 child tickets. The
owners of the circus want a 3 × 1 product matrix that displays the revenue for each ticket type: family, adult
and child.

This product matrix can be achieved by completing the following matrix multiplication.

7344
K × N = 2430
1408

Write down matrix K in the space below. 1 mark

K=

Solution

a.

The element that shows the cost for one child ticket is in row 3 of N and is therefore element n31 .

b. The cost of admission for 2 adults and 2 children is 2 × 15 + 2 × 8 = $46.

This result is given by the matrix product [0 2 2] × N .

The cost of one family ticket is $36.
The cost of purchasing one family ticket is given by the matrix product [0 2 2] × N .

The matrix equation that shows that purchasing a family ticket could give families a saving of $10 is
[0 2 2] × N − [1 0 0] × N = [10]

c. Matrix N is a 3 × 1 matrix gives that displays the cost per admission ticket for each type of ticket.

To obtain a 3 × 1 matrix that displays the revenue for each ticket type matrix K must be a 3 × 3 matrix
204 × 36
that when multiplied by N gives the result 162 × 15 .
176 × 8

204 0 0
It follows that K = 0 162 0 .
0 0 176

Question 2/ 11

(4 marks)

The circus is held at five different locations, E, F , G, H and I .

The table below shows the total revenue for the ticket sales, rounded to the nearest hundred dollars, for the
last 20 performances held at each of the five locations.

Location E F G H I
Ticket sales $960 000 $990 500 $940 100 $920 800 $901 300

The ticket sales information is presented in matrix R below.

R = [960 000 990 500 940 100 920 800 901 300]
a. Complete the matrix equation below that calculates the average ticket sales per performance at each of the
five locations. 1 mark

The circus would like to increase its total revenue from the ticket sales from all five locations.
The circus will use the following matrix calculation to target the next 20 performances.

1
1
[t] × R × 1
1
1

b. Determine the value of t if the circus would like to increase its revenue from ticket sales by 25%. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

The circus moves from one location to the next each month. It rotates through each of the five locations,
before starting the cycle again.

The following matrix displays the movement between the five locations.

this month
E F G H I
0 0 0 1 0 E
0 0 1 0 0 F
1 0 0 0 0 G next month
0 0 0 0 1 H
0 1 0 0 0 I

c. The circus started in town I .

What is the order in which the circus will visit the five towns? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

The circus plans to add a sixth location, J .

The only change to the cycle is that the circus will be held at location J after location E and before location
G.
d. Complete the three columns in the following matrix, showing the new movement between the six
locations, E, F , G, H, I and J . 1 mark
Solution

1
a. There are 20 performances at each location so every element in matrix R needs to be multiplied by 20 or
0.05.

The completed matrix equation is:

[0.05] × R
= [48000 49525 47005 46040 45065]
28
b. To increase the ticket sales from all 5 locations by 25%, R needs to be multiplied by 1 + 100 = 1.25.

It follows that t = 1.25.

c. Start at the top of column I . In this column there is a 1 in row H . Now go to the top of column H .
There is a 1 in row E . Next go to the top of column E , there is a 1 in row G. Next go to the top of row G.
There is a 1 in row F .

The circus will visit the 5 towns in the order, I-H-E-G-F .

d. The new order of in which the circus will visit the six locations, starting and ending at I , is
I-H-E-J-G-F -I .
To display this information, the completed matrix is:
[Note: On the exam paper, there is an erroneous ‘1’ in column H row I which is deleted in the solution here.]

Question 3/ 11

(3 marks)

Within the circus, there are different types of employees: directors (D ), managers (M ), performers (P ) and
sales staff (S ). Customers (C ) attend the circus.

Communication between the five groups depends on whether they are customers or employees, and on what
type of employee they are.

Matrix G below shows the communication links between the five groups.

In this matrix:

• The ‘1’ in row D , column M indicates that the directors can communicate directly with the managers.

• The ‘0’ in row P , column D indicates that the performers cannot communicate directly with the directors.

a. A customer wants to make a complaint to a director.

What is the shortest communication sequence that will successfully get this complaint to a director? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

b. Matrix H below shows the number of two-step communication links between each group. Sixteen
elements in this matrix are missing.

i. Complete matrix H above by filling in the missing elements. 1 mark

ii. What information do elements g2l and h21 provide about the communication between the circus
employees? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Solution

a. A customer, C , wants to make a complaint to a director, D . Start at row C , there is a 1 in column S ,

now go to row S , there are 1s in both columns M and C so the complaint will go to M from S not back to
C . Next go to row M , there is a 1 in the D column of this row so the complaint can be communicated to the
director from a Manager.

The shortest communication sequence that will successfully get this complaint to a director is C-S-M -D .

b. i.
ii. g21 is the element in row 2 (M ), column 1 (D ) of matrix G. g21 = 1. This tells us that managers can
communicate directly with directors.

So h21 is the element in row 2 (M ), column 1 (D ) of matrix H . h21 = 0.

This tells us that there is no way for managers to communicate with directors via performers (P ) or sales
staff (S )

Together this information tells us that the only way that performers (P ) or sales staff (S ) can communicate
with directors (D ) is through managers (M ).

Question 4/ 11

(2 marks)

The circus requires 180 workers to put on each show.

From one show to the next, workers can either continue working (W ) or they can leave the circus (L).

Once workers leave the circus, they do not return.

It is known that 95% of the workers continue working at the circus.

This situation can be modelled by the matrix recurrence relation

180
S0 = [ ], S n+1 = T S n + B
0

a. Write down matrix T , the transition matrix, for this recurrence relation. 1 mark
b. Write down matrix B for this recurrence relation to ensure that the circus always has 180 workers. 1 mark

Solution

a. Once a circus leaves the circus they do not return so L to L is 1.

95% of workers continue working at the circus to W to W is 0.95.

The elements in each column of a transition matrix add to 1.

b.

180
S0 = []
0
S1 = T S0
0.95 0 180
= [ ][ ]
0.05 1 0
171
= [ ]
9
This tells us that after each transition, 9 workers leave and 171 remain.

9
To consistently have 180 workers, 9 new workers need to be added after each transition so B = [ ].
0

Question 1/ 14

(4 marks)

A country has five states, A, B, C, D and E .

A graph can be drawn with vertices to represent each of the states.

Edges represent a border shared between two states.

a. What is the sum of the degrees of the vertices of the graph above? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

b. Euler’s formula, v + f = e + 2, holds for this graph.

i. Complete the formula by writing the appropriate numbers in the boxes provided below. 1 mark

ii. Complete the sentence by writing the appropriate word in the box provided below. 1 mark
Euler’s formula holds for this graph because the graph is connected and .

c. The diagram below shows the position of state A on a map of this country.

The four other states are indicated on the diagram as 1, 2, 3 and 4.

Use the information in the graph on page 20 to complete the table below. Match the state (B, C, D and E )
with the corresponding state number (1, 2, 3 and 4) given in the map above. 1 mark

State State number

B
C
D
E

Solution

a.

Vertex Degree

A 2

B 3
 Vertex Degree

C 4

D 3

E 2

Degree sum = 2 + 3 + 4 + 3 + 2 = 14
b. i. The graph has 5 vertices, 7 edges and 4 faces.

5 + 4 = 7 + 2
v f e

ii. Euler’s formula holds for this graph because the graph is connected and .

c. In the graph, there is an edge from A to B and one from A to C states B and C must be adjacent to A.
Vertex C has degree 4 and is therefore adjacent to 4 states so C must be state 2 and B state 3. B is also
adjacent to D as indicated by the edge joining B and D so D is state 4 leaving E as state 1.

State State number

B 3

C 2

D 4

E 1

Question 2/ 14

(3 marks)

The state A has nine landmarks, G, H, I, J, K, L, M , N and O .

The edges on the graph represent the roads between the landmarks.

The numbers on each edge represent the length, in kilometres, along each road.
Three friends, Eden, Reynold and Shyla, meet at landmark G.

a. Eden would like to visit landmark M .

What is the minimum distance Eden could travel from G to M ? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

b. Reynold would like to visit all the landmarks and return to G.

Write down a route that Reynold could follow to minimise the total distance travelled. 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

c. Shyla would like to travel along all the roads.

To complete this journey in the minimum distance, she will travel along two roads twice.

Shyla will leave from landmark G but end at a different landmark.

Complete the following by filling in the boxes provided.

The two roads that will be travelled along twice are the roads between:

• vertex and vertex

• vertex and vertex

Solution

a. The minimum distance Eden could travel from G to M involves taking the path G-K-I-M with a
total distance of 1.5 + 1.2 + 3.2 = 5.9 km.

b. A route that Reynold could take that starts and ends at G and allows him to see all the landmarks and
minimise the total distance travelled is G-N -L-O-M -J-I-K-H-G or the reverse.

c. For Shyla to travel along all roads leaving landmark G but ending at a different landmark a route she
could take is G-N -O-L-N -L-K-G-H-K-I-M -O-J-M -J-I-H . This route requires her to travel
along the road between vertex N and vertex L and the road between vertex M and vertex J twice. Note
that the required roads can be found by looking for adjacent vertices with odd degrees.

Question 3/ 14

(5 marks)

One of the landmarks in state A requires a renovation project.

This project involves 12 activities, A to L. The directed network below shows these activities and their
completion times, in days.

The table below shows the 12 activities that need to be completed for the renovation project.

It also shows the earliest start time (EST), the duration, and the immediate predecessors for the activities.
The immediate predecessor(s) for activity I and the EST for activity J are missing.

Activity EST Duration Immediate predecessor(s)

A 0 6 –

B 0 4 –

C 6 7 A
D 4 5 B
E 4 10 B
F 13 4 C
G 9 3 D
H 9 7 D
I 13 6

J 6 E, H
K 19 4 F,I
L 23 1 J, K

a. Write down the immediate predecessor(s) for activity I . 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

b. What is the earliest start time, in days, for activity J ? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

c. How many activities have a float time of zero? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

The managers of the project are able to reduce the time, in days, of six activities.

These reductions will result in an increase in the cost of completing the activity.

The maximum decrease in time of any of activity is two days.

Activity A B F H I K
Daily cost ($) 1500 2000 2500 1000 1500 3000
d. If activities A and B have their completion time reduced by two days each, the overall completion time of
the project will be reduced.

What will be the maximum reduction time, in days? 1 mark

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

e. The managers of the project have a maximum budget of $15 000 to reduce the time for several activities to
produce the maximum reduction in the project’s overall completion time.

Complete the table below, showing the reductions in individual activity completion times that would achieve
the earliest completion time within the $15000 budget.

Activity Reduction in completion time (0,1 or 2 days)

A
B
F
H
I
K

Solution

a. Referring to the network, the immediate predecessors to activity I are G and C . The dummy activity
connects the end of activity C to the start of activity I .

b. The earliest start time for activity J is 4 + 5 + 7 = 16 days.

c. The ESTs and LSTs for each activity are shown on the network below.
Activities A, C , I , K and L have a float time of zero since for these activities EST = LST. There are 5
activities that have a float time of zero.

d. If activities A and B each have their completion reduced by 2 days then the ESTs for each activity
change as shown in table below.

Activity EST

A 0

B 0

C 4

D 2

E 2

F 11

G 7

H 7

I 11

J 14

K 17

L 21

The overall completion time for the project will be 21 + 1 = 22 days.

The original completion time for the project was 24 days so there is a reduction time of 2 days which is the
maximum reduction time.

e. Consider each of the paths through the network and the times for each activity on each path.
 Completion Time

A C F K L
6 7 4 4 1 22

A C I K L
6 7 6 4 1 24

B D G I K L
4 5 3 6 4 1 23

B D H J L
4 5 7 6 1 23

B E J L
4 10 6 1 21

The critical path for this project is ACIKL. Reducing the completion time for activity A by 1 day reduces
the project completion time by 1 day and creates additional critical paths BDGIKL and BDHJL. The
cost for this reduction in project completion time is $1500.

Completion Time

A C F K L
5 7 4 4 1 21

A C I K L
5 7 6 4 1 23

B D G I K L
4 5 3 6 4 1 23

B D H J L
4 5 7 6 1 23

B E J L
4 10 6 1 21
Reducing activities on the critical paths will reduce the project completion time. Reduce activity A by
another day and activity B by one day reduces the project completion time by one more day.

The cost for the reductions in the times for these activities is $1500 + $2000 = $3500 increasing the
total cost to $5000.

Completion Time

A C F K L
4 7 4 4 1 19

A C I K L
4 7 6 4 1 22

B D G I K L
3 5 3 6 4 1 22

B D H J L
3 5 7 6 1 22

B E J L
3 10 6 1 20

Now Activity A has been reduced by two days, so no further reduction is possible for this activity.

Reducing each of activities H and I by two days will further reduce the project completion time.

Completion Time

A C F K L
4 7 4 4 1 19

A C I K L
4 7 4 4 1 20

B D G I K L
3 5 3 4 4 1 20

B D H J L
3 5 5 6 1 20
B E J L
3 10 6 1 20

The additional cost of these time reductions is:

2 × $1000 + 2 × $1500 = $5000

increasing the total cost to $10 000. Finally, reduce Activity B by one day and Activity K by one day.

Completion Time

A C F K L
4 7 4 3 1 18

A C I K L
4 7 4 3 1 19

B D G I K L
2 5 3 4 3 1 18

B D H J L
2 5 5 6 1 19

B E J L
2 10 6 1 19

The project completion time is reduced to 19 days and the total cost for this time reduction is:

$10 000 + $2000 + $3000 = $15 000 which is on budget.

Activity Reduction in completion time (0, 1 or 2 days)

A 2

B 2

F 0

H 2

I 2
Activity Reduction in completion time (0, 1 or 2 days)

K 1

Alternate method:

Note that reducing F is pointless since it makes no change to the completion time. So only the remaining
five activities need to be checked. It is reasonable to assume that A and B from part d. should both be
reduced by 2 days, and then check out activities F , H and K .

Try 2 days for each (goes over budget by $3000) and conclude that K can only be reduced by 1 day. Note
that critical paths would also need to be checked.